/o?35 3 1924 063 328 268 Cornell University Library The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924063328268 €hxtnban '§xmB Sm^s NOTES ON GENESIS SPURRELL HENRY FROWDE Oxford University Press Warehouse Amen Corner, E.G. NOTES ON THE HEBREW TEXT OF THE BOOK OF GENESIS WITH TWO APPENDICES G. J. SPURRELL, M. A. LATE SCHOLAR OF BALLIOL COLLEGE, OXFORD ©;i;fot;i AT THE CLARENDON PRESS M DCCC LXXXVII \_All rights reserved} PREFACE. The present volume of notes was undertaken at the sug- gestion of Prof. Driver, and is mainly intended for students beginning the Hebrew language. The notes are taken chiefly from the best German commentaries, and do not aim at originality. The Versions have also been used, and references are given to various grammars, the writer's object being to adapt the book to the wants of students using different grammars. The Commentaries used are those by Tuch^ Delitzsch'^, and Dillmann", to whom the writer is chiefly indebted; reference is also made to Mr. Wright's* Notes on Genesis, and (occasionally) to the commentary by the late Dr. Kalisch '*. The Versions are quoted partly from the London Polyglot, and partly from separate editions. ' The 2nd edition, by Arnold and Merx, Halle, 1871. ' The 4th edition, Leipzig, 1872. ' The references to Dillmann are to the 4th edition of his Genesis, in the Kurzgefasstes Exeg. Handbuch zum alien Test, Leipzig, 1882. A 5th edition appeared in 1886, but as some of the sheets had already been printed off, the references to the 4th edition have been kept, and any changes in the 5th edition noted on the margin. * The Book of Genesis in Hebrew, by C. H. H.Wright, London, 1859. ' Historical and Critical Commentary on the Old Test., Genesis, London, 1858. a 3 vi PREFACE. For the LXX, Lagarde's text has been used', reference being occasionally made to the text contained in the London Polyglot, and to Tischendorfs edition. The Targum of Onqelos, or Babylonian Targum, has been taken from the edition by Dr. Berliner ^ the text in the London Polyglot being compared, while the Targum of Pseudo-Jonathan and the Jerusalem Targum are quoted from the London Polyglot ^ For the Peshitta (Syriac) version the Polyglot and the edition by Lee *, which is based on the text in the London Polyglot, have been used, while the Vulgate has been taken from a Paris edition ° and the Polyglot. The other Greek versions (Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion) are usually cited second-hand, reference being also made to Field's edition of Origen's Hexapla *. The Arabic version of Saadiah has been quoted from the Polyglot: the Hebrew- Samaritan text and the Samaritan version are also cited from the same source ''. The Grammars to which reference has been made are those of Gesenius, Davidson, Stade, 1 Genesis Graece, edidit P. A. de Lagarde, Leipzig, 1868. ' In two parts, Berlin, 1884. The first part containing the text after the 'editio Sabioneta' of 1557, and the second part, the notes, introduc- tion, and indices. ^ The Targum of Pseudo- Jonathan and the Jerusalem Targum (which only exists in a fragmentary form) are really two recensions of one and the same Targum, the Jerusalem Targum ; see Bleek's Einleitung, ed. Wellhausen, p. 606 f.; Eng. trans., ed.Venables, vol. ii. p. 439 f. " London, 1823. '•' Published by Gamier Brothers, without date. » Oxford, 1875. ' The reader should consult the various 'Introductions' to the Old Testament on these versions (especially that of Wellhausen-Bleek, 1878 or 1886), or read the articles in Smith's Dictionary of the Bible. PREFACE. vii Ewald, Olshausen, Bottcher (occasionally), Miiller (for the Syntax only), and the treatise on the Tenses by Prof. Driver ^- The text of Genesis that has been followed in compiling the notes is that of Baer (with a preface by Delitzsch), and the same text has been used in quoting passages from other books, the edition of Theile^ being only cited in those portions of the Old Testament that have not yet been edited by Baer ". Two appendices have been added to the book: one on the structure of Genesis, as it was deemed necessary that the student should have some information about the modern views as to the criticism of the Pentateuch ; and the other on the names of God, which could not be adequately discussed within the limits of a note. The writer has to acknowledge the great obligations he is under to Prof. Driver for the valuable help he has rendered ' Gesenins' Grammar, translated by Davies, and edited by Mitchell, London, 1880 (since reprinted). Davidson's Grammar, Edinburgh, 8th edition, 1887. Stade, Lehrbuch der hebrdischen Grammatik, Leipzig, 1879. Ewald, Lehrbuch der hebrdischen Sprache, 8te Ansgabe, Got- tingen, 1870: the Syntax (the third part of the Lehrbuch) has been translated by Kennedy, Edinburgh, 1879. Olshausen, Lehrbuch der hebrdisch. Sprache, Braunschweig, 1 861. Bottcher, Lehrbuch der he- brdisch. Sprache, Leipzig, 1868. Aug. Miiller, Outlines of Hebrew Syntax, translated by Robertson (being a translation of the third part of Mailer's Hebrdische Schulgrammatik, Halle, 1878), ist edition, 1882; 2nd edition, 1887. Driver, Hebrew Tenses, 2nd edition, Oxford, 1881. ' 3rd edition, Leipzig, 1867. ^ The following portions of the Bible have been published by Baer : Genesis, Leipzig, 1869 ; Isaiah, ib., 1872 ; Job, ib., 1875 ; Minor Pro- phets,'^., \'&'j%; The Psalms, ih., 1880; Proverbs, ih., 1880; Daniel, Ezra, Nehemiah, ib., 1882; Ezekiel, ib., 1884; and Canticles, Ruth, Lamentations, Ecclesiastes, Esther, ib., 1886. Vlll PREFACE. him in preparing these notes, and for kindly revising the proof-sheets. His thanks are also due to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press for their assistance in publishing the book, and to Mr. Pembrey, their Oriental reader, for the care which he has taken in passing the sheets through the press. G. J. SPURRELL. OxroKD, July, 1887. CONTENTS. PAGE Notes on Genesis . i Appendix I ....... . 363 Appendix II . . . . . . -31^ Corrigenda ........ 379 ABBREVIATIONS USED\ A. V. = The Authorized Version of 1611. A. V. R. = The Authorized Version Revised, 1885. Aq. = Aqmla's Greek Version. Aram. = Aramaic. B. and D. = Baer and Delitzsch. B. Jubil. = The Book of Jubilees (Ethiopia), ed. Dillmaun, Kiel, 1859. Baumg. = Bamngarten. Ber. Rabb. = Bereshith Rabba. Berl. Ak. M.B.= Monatsberichte der Konig. Preuss. Akad. der Wissen- schaften zu Berlin. Bernst. = Bernstein. Bib. Sam. = Bibliotheca Samaritana, ed. Heidenheim, Heft i, Leipzig, 1884. Boch. = Bochart. Boh. = von Bohlen. Bbtt. = B6ttcher. Bottcher, Neue Aehr. = Neue He- brdische Aehrenlese (in 3 vols.), by Bottcher, Leipzig, 1849-65. Burck. = Burckhardt. Chald. = Chaldee^. Dav. = Davidson. Del. = Delitzsch. Del., /"an =Wo lag das Parodies ? by Friedrich Delitzsch, Leipzig, 1881. Di. = Dillmann. Ecclus. = Ecclesiasticus. Eich. = Eichhom. Einl. — Einleitung. Ewald,/. B. = Jahrbiicher der bib- lischen Wissenschaft, Gbttingen, 1 848 and following years. Ewald, Komf. der Gen. = Die Koni- position der Genesis, by G. H. A. Ewald, Brunswick, 1823. Frankel, Vorsiudien = Vorstudien zu der Septuaginta, Leipzig, 1841. Frankel, Einjluss or Einjl. = Uber den Einjlttss der paldstin. Exegese aufdieAlexand.Hermeneutik, by Z. Frankel, Leipzig, 1851. Ges. = Gesenius' Hebrew Grammar (vide Preface). Ges., Th. or Tkes. = Gesenius' The- saurus, Leipzig, 1829-58. Gesch. = Geschichte. Gr.Ven. = Versio F'«««to(seeBleek's Introduction (Eng. trans.), vol. ii. p. 430). H. W. B. = Gesenius' Handworter- buch iiber das alte Test., ed. Miihlau and Volck, 9th ed., Leip- zig, 1883; lothed., ib., i886^ Hier. or Hieron. = Hieronymus (Jerome). Hieron., Quaest. = Hieronymus' ' Most of the commoner abbreviations , with which the student will be familiar, are not given here. " It should be pointed out that the languages usually called Chaldee, Syriac, and Samaritan are really three dialects of the Aramaic, and should be embraced under the term Aramaic. s The loth edition of the ff. W. B. is in the main a reprint of the 9th, but is augmented by the addition of much illustrative matter derived from Inscriptions, and contributed by Prof. D. H. Miiller. Xll ABBREVIATIONS. Quaestiones Hebraicae in libra Ceneseos, at the end of Lagarde's Genesis Graece, Leipzig, 1868. Jos. = Josephus. Kal. = Kalisch. Ke. = Keil. Kn. = Knobel. Lag. = Lagarde. Lenor. = Lenormant. Levy, Chald. IV. B. = Levy, Chal- ddisches Worterbuch (2 vols, in one, Leipzig, 1881). Luth. = Luther. Luzz. = Luzzatto. M. R. = Outlines of Hebrew Syntax^ by Aug. Miiller, translated by Robertson (vide Preface). M. and V. = Miihlau and Volck. Mid. Bern. = Midrash Bemidbar, i.e. Midrash on the book of Numbers. N61d. = Nbldeke. Nold., Unters.or Untersuch. = Unter- suchungen zur Kritik des alten Test., by Th. Nbldeke, Kiel, 1869. Oehl. = Oehler. 01s. = Olshausen. Onom. or Onomas. = Onomasticon. Onq. = Onqelos. Pesh. = Peshitta Version, also quoted as Syriac. Proleg. or Prol. Crit. = Prolegomena Critica in Vet. Test. Hebr.,\>y H. L. Strack, Leipzig, 1873. Rawl. = Rawlinson. Riehm, H. W. B. = Riehm's Band- wbrterbueh des Biblischen Alter- ^/^«OTj, Bielefeld and Leipzig, 1875 and follov?ing years. Rob., Pal. = Robinson's Palestine (ist ed.), London, 1841. I Roed. = Roediger. s. p. = small print. Saad. = Saadiah's Arabic Version. Sam. = The Samaritan Version, and the Hebrew Text in Samaritan characters when both agree; the former is also cited as Sam.Ver., and the latter as Heb.-Sam. Sch. or Schr. = Schrader. Schrader, K. G. F. = Keilinschriften und Geschichtsforschung. Schrader, K. A. T? = Die Keilin- schriften und das alte Testament , 2nd ed., Giessen, 1883. (The first volume of an English trans- lation, with the pages of the original on the margin, has been published by the Rev. O. White- house, London, 1885 : Williams and Norgate. The references in the notes are to the German edition.) Symm. = Symmachus' Greek Version. Targ. = Targum. Targ. Jer. = Jerusalem Targum. Targ. Ps.-Jon. or Jon. = The Targum of Pseudo- Jonathan. Targg. = Targums. Th. or Theod. = theodotion's Greek Version. Tisch. = Tischendorf. Vss. = Versions. Vulg. = Vulgate. Wei. or Well. = Wellhausen. Winer, R. W. B. = Biblisch. Real- Worterbuch, Leipzig, 1847-48, 3rd ed. Z.D.M. G. = Zeitschrift der Deut- schen Morgenldndischen Gesell- schaft. "^r\=•\•aSl\ i.e. et caetera. NOTES ON GENESIS. 1. I. n^U5N'^2. '■In the beginning,' as iv dpxfj, in John i, i; not eV TTJ apxfj. n''tI'N13 is without the article, like "1*111X3 ^ Prov. 29, ii; 1*3, Is. 28, 2 ; '^i^, Lev. 26, 27. The Vss. and most commentators render, ' In the beginning God created' etc. : the same rendering is perhaps indicated by the accents, IT'B'Nna being marked off by Tifcha from what follows ^ If this rendering be adopted, IT'CrNll must not be taken relatively, i. e. ^ first of all', in opposition to a second or third, which might follow; for this is against the sense, as heaven and earth include all; and we should rather expect nyB'NIS; but it must be taken absolutely, ' at first' {' uran- /anglich') : hence the choice of the expression fT'K'N'ia, which does not occur elsewhere. n'^CJt^'^. = the beginning of a series, always relative to a genitive either expressed or (as here. Is. 46, 10. Deut. 33, 21) understood. As JT'E'XT everywhere else (except in these two passages) is followed by a genitive, Ewald, Bunsen, and others follow Rashi and Ibn Ezra, and render, 'At first, when God created, etc. . . . (ver. 3) then God said. Let there be light.' A similar construction to Ex. 6, 28 nini lai Di^a, where 1 In 3, i" and 6^ Deut. 28, 47" (:')ij ann). ei" (nMnrj iDpa). Ex. 9, 24'' (■.•'S-x'-i rin'rj t«p), we find Tifcha, the word so accented being closely connected in sense with the next following word. From these and similar passages it seems that the argument from the accents ought not to be pressed in this verse. ■& GENESIS, D1'' in the construct state is followed by a sentence as its genitive; so in Gen. 39, 20^ Num. 3, i. Deut. 4, 15. Hos. I, 2. Ps. 90, i^\ etc.; see Ewald, § 332 d. ndN''!, in ver. 3, would then be the imperfect with waw conv. in answer to nwia; cf 19, 15 (1»a precedes). 27,34 pVS'l ., . IB'J) 3?b'f3; Is. 6, I nxnsi . . . -l^sn nto riJB'a; and see Ewald, § 344 a; Driver, § 127 ^. (Boettcher (iV^Kf ^if/5r. i. 2-9) and others prefer to read '^'iS as in 5, i, which would be the more common construction; but this is not necessary.) According to this interpretation verse 2 becomes a parenthesis, which is unnatural, as a long and heavy sentence at the beginning of the book would hardly be expected ; cf. also Ryssel, De Elohistae Pentateuchi sermone (Lipsiae, 1878), p. 76. On the reading of the LXX, cf Geiger, Urschrift, etc., pp. 344, 439, 444, who, following the tradition that this was one of the thirteen places that were altered for Ptolemy, considers that Rashi's con- struction was the traditional one, that of the LXX being an innovation. t^"H 'created,' the common word in P (see Appendix I) in this connection, is restricted to the divine workmanship, and always implies the production of something new (in matter or form, as ver. 21), being used literally and meta- phorically (e.g. Ps. 51, 12). It is never followed by an accusative of the material used, and thus implies the unconditioned operation (absolute causality) 'of the agent. Its original meaning is generally given as 'to cut' (cf the Pi'el in Josh. 17, 15. 18, and Ges.in Thes. sub voce), then 'to shape', 'form' and so ' create^ but it does not in itself express the idea of creation out of nothing; cf the Arabic ^^JLi., prop. 'to smooth^ 'polish,' then 'to create^ the word used by Saadiah here. In the Pi'el it is used of man, 'to cut with effort:' contrast the intensive stem with Qal, the simple stem, used of CHAP. I, VER. a. the free-creating of God without any effort; cf. Ew., § 126 a. The Samaritan renders Nn3 by '^ilSZV, which Del. explains as equivalent to idciJie\ia>a-e ; see Heidenheim, £i5. Sam., Heft i. p. 70, who mentions other explanations that have been suggested. QTl^i;?, plural of i!!v>?. The derivation of ni^JN is dis- puted ; see Appendix II. CriPN pluralis excellentiae, with a singular verb; see Ges., § 108. 2b; M. R., § 64. So we find Cpya and £3''?"'^, used in a similar way, of human superiors; and Is. (19, 4) says nt^p Q''J1X, singular and plural as here. DTli'N is only joined with a plural verb in special cases ; cf. the note on 20, 13, and Ewald, § 318 a. CtiUJn n^^. riN or "nx, the sign of the ace. when defined (Ges., § 117. 2 ; M. R., § 32). It corresponds to the Phoenician n^X^ which was probably the original form of nx (a noun substantive from niN; cf. Schroder, /"-^o^ra. Gram., § 123); cf. the Arabic 151, Chaldee H^, Syriac ^J (found twelve times in the Syriac O. T.). It is usually explained as meaning ' essence^ or ' existence,' but according to usage has so little emphasis, that it is merely inserted to mark the definite object; cf. further, Ges., Thes., p. 169 a, where its etymology is discussed. D"'?2iy, found only in the plural (unless we regard the form as a dual) in Hebrew. 2. in3,1 Inn . ^^^ = * wasteness,' or ' bareness' Some- times the word is used metaphorically, e. g. of idols, as vain, unrewarding, i Sam. 12, 21. Is. 44, 9. In Hebrew the root nnn is not found. '^T\^=' emptiness,' ' desolation! This word is always found in immediate or parallel connection with 'inh ; it only occurs twice again, viz. Jer. 4, 23. Is. 34, n (possibly borrowed from B 2 GENESIS, this passage). A root nnn is not found in Hebrew. In Arabic we find /^^j = ' vacua et inanis fuit ' domus. ^inn^in;? and W3=in3, like ^IP from f"]!^, are both segholates, from verbs n"^, properly V'b. On the segholates (so called from the helping vowel seghol, which replaces the shewa under the second consonant), see Ges., § 93 ; on inn and ina in particular, § 85, V; Stade, § 198 a; also Dav., §§ 29 and 45. The 1 before inD has a pretonic qame9, joining together the two nouns, which are closely connected, so 2, 9. 8, 22 rh''b) 01''; see Ges., § 104. 2, N. B. e; Dav., § 15 d; cf. especially Rem. with Ges., § 104. 2, N. B. e. □"'n'ri^ nil. ' T/ie Spirit of God; the life-giving and life-preserving power (Ps. 104, 29), not a ' wind sent by God' as apparently Onqelos, ^!' D"]!^. JJ? Kn'ill, and others (e.g. Ephrem and Saadiah), for nSHID does not suit this render- ing, and the dividing of the waters in ver. 7, which separated the earth from the water, forbids us to think of a wind sent by God to dry up the earth. nOmO. The usual fem. form with the participle, cf Ges., § 94. 2. Observe that this fem. form is accented, like the segholates, on the penult. The word occurs again in Deut. 32, II, of an eagle brooding over its young. The original meaning of the root is ' to he loose ' or ' slack^ and so ' to hover with loose wing^ the figure here being that of a bird hovering over its young. The root is more widely used in Syriac, the Pa'el ^» being equivalent to the Heb. root in Deut. 1. c, which the Pesh. renders as here with ^-«o ; cf Bernstein, Syr. Chrest., p. 173. 4, and Lex., p. 480, the Syriac word having also the notion of fructifying and fertilizing. The Talmud, Tract. Chag., c. 2, fol. 15, refers thus to this CHAP. I, VERS. 3, 4. passage, njJJIi Hi^NI n''^ iiV nssmo nJVa ' aj a dove hovering over its young without touching them;' cf. also Matt. 3, 16, and the paraphrase of Milton, Par. Lost, Bk. 7, 235 : — ' His brooding wings the Spirit of God outspread. And vital virtue infused, and vital warmth Throughout the fluid mass' 3. '^n'^, imperf. apoc. from H^ni, for ^n^ weakened from JiT (like ''"iSi from J"iB, weakened from |'")S, Ges., § 24, ib; so ^25?? thinned from '^^'P'^i see Ges., § 27. 3. Rem. 3), cf. Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 e and § 93. Rem. 6 ; Dav., § 45. On the thinning of .^ into ), see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. § 90. Rem. ad fin. '''7?il' T^^s grave Metheg before the half-open syllable (see Dav., foot-note, p. 16) only with NT"! and TT'I 'when they stand before Metheg [? MaqqepK\ or with the accent Pashta,' Ges., § 16. 2 ; Stade, § 54 c. 4. t^'^lll. Imperf. with waw conv. On the apocopated form ^l! out of i^?"]', see Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 c; Dav., § 45. The so-called waw conversive or consecutive is confined to the language of the ancient Hebrews and their neighbours the Moabites, whose language, as we now know, was so closely allied to their own. Besides the O. T. it occurs on the Siloam inscription, first deciphered by Prof. Sayce, and is frequent on the inscription of Mesha, commonly called the Moabite stone: it is also found in later Hebrew writings composed in imitation of Biblical Hebrew. If we remember that the tenses in Hebrew do not indicate the date, but the state of an action, i. e. whether it be complete or incomplete, the explanation of this peculiar Hebrew construction will not be far to seek. The imperf. denotes an action as entering on completion. When we have a series of events, each single event need not necessarily be regarded as completed GENESIS, and independent, but each may be regarded as related to the preceding one, one event stepping into its place after the other, the date at which each successive event comes in being determined by the 1, which connects the new event with a point previously marked in the narrative. Thus here X13,-ver. i, is the starting-point in the narrative, to which "IDX''! first and then \Ti1 are related: and the narrative developes itself, each fresh event stepping into the place prepared for it by its predecessor. This construction begins to fall into disuse in later Hebrew. It should be remembered that an imperf. with waw conv. never refers to the future unless its preceding perfect to which it is related is the so- called prophetic perfect, which describes future events which are certain to take place as already accomplished, and so regarded as past, e.g. Is. 9, g. See further, Prof. Driver, Heh. Tenses, c. vi, 2nd ed.; also Ges., §§ 49, 129; M. R., § 16 f.; Dav., § 23. Ewald aptly terms this construction the relatively-progressive imperfect. mta ""i . . . i«}"\lT. Hebrew says, 'And He saw the light, that it was good:' English more tersely, 'He saw that the light was good;' so 6, 2. 12, r4. 49, 15. See Ewald, § 336 a, 2. ]"'?'•• ]"'?> in ver. 6 5) . . , pa : the former scheme (pa . . , pa) is by far the most common, the latter (i? . . , pi) only occurs twice again in the Pentateuch, viz. Lev. 27, 33, 20, 25, being rare, and generally confined to late writers ; cf. however 2 Sam. 19, 36 yib 3lt2 p2. 5- n^"i7 t^lp, the tone is here thrown back to avoid the concurrence of two tone syllables; so 3, 19 Dnb' i^axri 4, 17 '^''V ^P, and often; see Ges., § 29. 3 b, and the note on 4, 17. CHAP. I, VERS. 5-7. "jnN DT^. ' One day; so A. V. R., not as the A. V., ' the first day! nriN has not, strictly speaking, a corresponding ordinal, though it is possible to use |1B'X"I as such. Here iriN may stand, as at the head of a series the ordinal is not needed; seeEwald, § 269 a. So 2, 11. 4, 19. 2 Sam. 4, 2. 6. Tl"''! for '"n^l, by Ges., § 24. i a: on the pointing of waw, cf. § 104. 2 a; Dav., § 15 d. Rem. 7''i;iTD '^n"'T. When any special stress is laid upon the continuance of the action, the participle with riTi is used by the best writers, but is more frequently affected by later writers (e. g, 2 Kings 1 7 it occurs nine times), and is ex- ceedingly common in the Mishna. So in 4, 17 rU3 \T'1, 37, 2 nj?T iTTi; cf. Ges., § 134. 2 c; M. R., § 14. 2 a; Driver, § 135. 5. Ryssel, De Elohistae Pentateuchi sermone, p. 58. For the Mishna usage, see Lehrh. der Neuhebrdisch. Sprache, § 96 b, by Strack and Siegfried. U^'Ch D"'Q ]"'2. h with pretonic qame? ; so naB*?, nn?, ^iJ.a, Vulg. ' firmamentum.' 7. toVT. The form is (i) f^l'J^,''., then (2) by apocopation 'W! like a segholate, e. g. "IW , theji {3) with a helping vowel (here pathach on account of the guttural J?) '^"$1 (like "i^J), the V preserving the original pathach with the prefix !, as in the Arabic; cf. jilj (the regular form = the Heb. i'iopl), see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 62; cf. further, Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 d; Dav., § 45; Driver, § 46, foot-note 2. 71". At the end of ver. 6 the LXX read koI iyivero ovfas instead of at the end of ver. 7, which suits ver. 6b better than ver. 7^; as elsewhere, e.g. vers. 9. 11. 15. 24. 30, 8 GENESIS, p M'l immediately follows what God says. Possibly it has been misplaced in the Mass. text, and the LXX preserve it in the original position. 8a. D^Oty. After this word the LXX have in their text (cai eldev 6 Geos oTi KaXov, which is Wanting in the Mass. text, but would be expected here (as in vers. 3. 10) at the end of the second day's work. In the account of the third day's work it occurs twice, in LXX and Mass. text, ver. lo and ver. 12. Possibly the addition in the LXX text is, as Frankel, Einfluss, p. 60, points out, due to a reviser who wished to make 8''' parallel with 3. 10. 12. The Mass. text may have again omitted the formula of divine approval here, as the complete division of the waters was not made until the third day. 9. nt^'inl, jussive, although the shortened form is not used; cf 41, 34. Ruth i, 8 Ktb. Job 3, 9. In the regular verb, with the exception of the Hifil stem, the ordinary imperfect must serve as jussive, there being only one form for both tenses; see Ges., § 48, especially 2 and 4; Dav., § 23. On the syntax of the jussive, see Driver, c. iv, and M. R., § 8. II. \^'&\=' grass' or 'grasslike plants; the first verdure that covered the earth young and fresh, appearing after rain, 2 Sam. 23, 4. Job 38, 27, or after the old grass had gone, Prov. 27, 25. Itoy. A wider term including herbs useful for men, Ps. 104, 14. Gen. 3, 18. ^?©in, a Hifil denominative from NB''] = '/(? make or produce' NeJt; so I!?? 'rain; l^iaion 'to make rain; ^p ' a root; Ki^-if n ' to send out roots.' Hifil the causative stem, expressing with denominatives the idea of producing or CHAP. I, VERS. 8-1 1. putting forth that of -which the original noun is the name, Ges., § 53. 2. Rem. 2. So jnt V^ITD. The construction of a verb with a cognate accusative is common in Hebrew, so in 27, 34 npVX PV^''1, Zech. i, 14 nwp . , . TlNJp, and often; see Ges., § 138. Rem. i; M. R., § 36; the same construction occurs again in ver. 20. Render, ' Let the earth bring /or th young grass, herbs yield- ing seed,' with the accents, IK'V being in apposition to NB'T ; see Ges., § 113; M. R., § 71. 2; not as the LXX, Poravriv XopTov (also Aq. and Th.), Vulg. ' herbam virentem' connect- ing NB'1 in the cstr. state with n'B'y. But Nt^T is never used thus in the O. T., it may be preceded by V^X 'greenness! 'viror,' 2 Kings 19, 26. Ps. 37, 2. Is. 37, 27, but cannot be followed by ncy as genitive. ^1D yy ^ fruit trees,' yt) being used collectively, lit. ' trees of fruit' The use of words in the singular to denote collective ideas is especially frequent in Hebrew; cf. DHN, coll. '»z««- kind' (without a plural), y'StH^'' enemies', B'SJ ^living beings.' Often the fem. ending is employed to express a collective idea, so njJV ' clouds,' nniN ' caravan,' TOM ' captives' The same principle is implied in the use of 73 before a following genitive singular, e. g. fi'"-'3 , in Eng. ' every tree,' lit. 'the whole of trees;' see Ges., § 108. i c; M. R., § 61. ''ID '^V ■ On the cstr. state with a following gen., where in English we find an adj., cf Ges., § 106. i; M. R., § 79. 3. li'^ob 'after its kind.' Emphasis is laid on the fact that each was adapted for continuance ; the ab'V flowered and so produced its seed ; the f*y bore fruit containing seed or stones necessary for reproduction. pD is a common word in P (see Appendix I). In 11>'1T "nUJ^^ 'in which is its seed,' i.e. for propa- gation (Di.). lO GENESIS, 12. b^iJim. Hif'il, imperf. apoc. with waw conv. from NS\ a verb *"a, properly l"a. The form is X'Si'=N*Xi:, cf 'P't?\>l. ItlD'^P^ for 'iJ''!?^. The suffix IH— for "i— except in words that are derived from verbs n"?, such as n'lB', i^'^SP, fl^.i?*?, etc. — outside this word (where it is found fourteen times), only occurs in WniN for ^1^«, Job 25, 3 ; li"'?'^^''? for S^ib'S, Judg. 19, 24; inpiD for to'iD, Nah. i, 13; see Ges., § 91. I, note b; Ewald, § 247 d; Stade, § 345 c, who remarks that the h of these forms is to be explained as an extension of a short e, — which has arisen out of short a (cf § 84. 4), — which is still preserved before the suffix of the second pars, masc. sing, in pause, e. g. '^^P, 'I^?^ . 14. miNQ TT'. On the construction here, see Ges., §i47a,d; M. R., § 133. "n^^Q. Nouns formed by prefixing D denote often instru- ments or places, e. g. nri30 ' a key,' ib\0 • a fork; njJlO ' a pasture^ 3"iNI0 'a lurking-place ;' see further, Ges., § 84. 14; Ewald, § 160 b ; and Stade, § 268 ff. Render, ' luminaries: Vm. The perf with waw conv. in continuation of the jussive \T, so in 28, 3 n''''ni . . . ^nK y\1\ 31, 44 nmD: n'm . . . nm, Ex. 5, 7 ; cf Ges., § 126. 6 ; M. R., § 24. i a ; Driver, § 113. 2 a. 1^1 nim5>^7 may be rendered in three different ways : I. As a hi 8ia hvdiv, 'for signs of seasons, and for days and for years;' see Ges., § 155. 1 a, and cf 3, 16. II. 'For signs and for set times, and for days and for years! III. •' For signs as well for times, as also for days and years'. Against III. Del. remarks that the correlatives 'as well,' 'as also' are not sufficiently clearly expressed by 1 ... 1, as, for example, in Ps. 76, 7 ; nor is this rendering suitable to the simplicity CHAP, I, VERS. ia-l6. II of the narrative. On I. it may be remarked that though the hendiadys may be possible in 3, 16, it is by no means necessary there, and Job 10, 17. 2 Chron. 16, 14 (cited by Ges. 1. c.) are not parallel. II. is the simplest and best rendering, and is adopted by the Vss., Del., Di., Kn., and others. m^'^^<. 'The luminaries were to be niniN, i.e. signs, partly in an ordinary way as marks of the different regions of heaven, of the weather, and partly in an extraordinary way, e. g. through eclipses of the sun and moon, the appearances of comets, etc., which were regarded by the ancients as foreshadowing extraordinary events (Joel 3, 3 f. Jer. 10, 2. Matt. 24, 29).' Knobel in Di. D''15?1Q. lyiD from ny' (njC)), 'to fix; denotes any ' stated place,' as in the phrase 1J)1D ?nN ' tent of meeting^ or as here, ^ any fixed, stated time;' cf. 17, 21. The DHJClD here mean set times or seasons, in particular, stated annual feasts, also periods in animal (cf. Jer. 8, 7, of the stork) and vegetable life, and the seasons suitable to the various occupations and employments of man. lD"'3ffi1 D''a"^'?1. On the pointing ^i, cf. Ges., § 104. 2 c; Dav., § 15. i c. 'For days and for year si i. e. for dis- tinguishing and counting the days, some being short, others long, according to the season of the year: the years also being long and short, according as they are reckoned by the sun or moon. The nniXD had a threefold aim: (r) to divide the day and night; (2) to fix the calendar; (3) to give light on the earth. 16. The lights more exactly defined ij:^. On the various ways in which the numerals may be connected with substan- tives, see Ges., § 120. i; M. R., § 96. i b. On the article with D'i'nJ, see Ges., § in. 2 ; M. R., § 85. I a GENESIS, hyiXn n\S?2n n^4. On this method of expressing the comparative, cf. Gas., § 119. i; M. R., § 86. D*'33i2rr . . . "^^^^or^ n^ii. 'And the usser Ught with the stars to govern the night.' D'aawn HNI is closely attached to \XipX\ IINOn nx; see 2, 9. 12, 17. 34, 29. 1 8. ^''linbl, the h is pointed with ^^ by Ges., § 10. 2. Rem.; see also Stade, § 105. 20. rCn tZJDJ 'living beings' an explanatory apposition to n?; so the Syriac: not as the LXX, Vulg., etc., as a genitive after fl?'; see on ver. 11 nt^JJ Nti'l. P.^ and n?* are frequently found in P. ^DIJ,'"'. Pilel from ;)>ij?, a denom. from ej^j?; on this form of the intensive stem, cf. Ges., §§ 72. 7 and 55. 2 ; Dav., § 40. 6. Pilel, because a great number of birds is meant ; at the same time expressing the idea of 'up and down,' ' to and fro ; ' cf. Di. in loc. y^p"1 '^3D 7y 'in front of,' on the side turned towards the earth, i. e. in the air, for which Hebrew has no special expression (Del., Di.). 21. D^J''3n. LXX, K^,-,,; Syr. jLIlJl; Vulg. •«/«.' From [JD 'to stretch out,' and used Ex. 7, 9. Deut. 32, 33, for a serpent, but more frequently for the crocodile, see Is. 27, i. 51, 9j and also for other marine animals. Job 7, 12. Ps. 148, 7. Render, 'sea monsters! rrrin U?DJ 73. n''n is an adj., not a substantive (its use as a substantive is only poetical, being then equivalent to the prose Di''n)._ trsi is practically limited and determined by ?3, hence the adj. has the article, though it is absent with the noun: so again in 9, 10. This usage is rare, but is met with occasionally at all periods of the language ; see Ges., § III. 2 a; M. R., § 85. Rem. c; Ewald, § 293 a; and CHAP. I, VERS. i8-a6. 13 Journal of Phil., xi. 229 (where nearly all the examples are collected). D''?3n "iiJIty ItlJN ' wherewith the waters swarm' "IB'N is the ace. after pt?. Verbs of abounding in, and wanting, govern the ace. ; see Ges., § 138. 3 ; M. R., § 35 ; and 9, 2. Dn3'^Q7 scriptio defediva, for On-rp^ ; cf. 4, 4 ina^Jn. f)!!li ^V 'birds (coll.) of wing' On the construction of a subs., where in English an adj. is used, see Ges., § io6. i ; M. R., § 79. ■in]''Q7. See on ver. 12. 22. '^I^^l. On the position of the tone, cf. the note on ver. 7. 24. iTTTTl. iriTl with the old, so-called case ending =1. Probably the ending i was that of the nominative ; compare the Arabic nominative ending u, but in Hebrew its distinctive use as a mark of the nom. was lost. These terminations ^ or ^, also the ending \, have no meaning in Hebrew, and are retained as mere binding vowels in particular phrases (\ especially in participles before a preposition) as archaisms, or in imitation of archaisms ; see Ges., § 90. 3 b ; Dav., §17; Stade, § 344; and cf.lV^ iJ3 in Num. 24, 3. 15, and D;d i3;VD in Ps. 114, 8. yiNn nTl is one of the characteristic expressions of P. 26. ntoj^J 'let us make' The voluntative is hardly ever found with n cohortative in verbs n"? and n"?; cf. Ges., §§ 75. 6 and 128; M. R., § 8 ; and Driver, c. iv, esp. § 47. We have the plural again in 11,7 and Is. 6, 8, and it has been explained in various ways. I. The Fathers here see a reference to the Trinity, and many moderns have followed them ; but as Del. (Comm., 4th ed., p. loi) and Oehl. {Theol. of 0. T., § 36) remark, the J 4 GENESIS, mysterium Trinitatis is not sufficiently manifest in the O. T. to warrant this interpretation. 11. Tuch and others account for the plural on the ground that in a case of reflection or self-consultation, the subject stands as the object, in anti- thesis to itself, the speaker conceiving himself as addressing himself; cf Del. on Is. 6, 8; Tuch, Comm., 2nd ed., p. 23. But as Del. and Di. point out, there is no proof of the existence of such a plural. III. Kn. and others explain the plural from the custom which monarchs have of using the first person plural in decrees, etc.; but though this occurs con- tinually in the Qoran, and is found in the Bible, Ezr. 4, 18. I Mace. 10, 19. II, 31. 15, 9 (of Persian and Greek rulers), it was never used in this way by the Hebrews. IV. Di., Comm., p. 29, proposes a new explanation ; his words are, 'We should rather remember that the Hebrew who speaks of God as QTli'N in the plural, regarded Him as the living, personal conception of a fullness of power and might ; God could thus, differently from men, speak of Himself in the plural.' A plausible explanation, but perhaps hardly so natural as the one Del. adopts. V. Del. and others seem to be right when they refer the plural, as in Is. 6, 8, to the angels. God announces to them His resolve to create man, without however allowing them to participate in His creation : cf Del. here, and for the idea i Kings 22, 19-22. Dan. 4, 14. 7, 10. Job I. Luke 2, 9. This is an old interpretation, and is the one adopted by Philo (StaXfyerat o twv okav n-anjp rais eauToC hvvafiiaiv, quoted by Del., p. loi), Targ. Jon., which has "131 ^iDip rK^SB^pi NON^dIj J; IDKI {^Y. spake to His angels who minister before Him,' etc.), Rashi, Ibn Ezra. Is. 40, 13. 14 and 44, 24 are cited against this view, but are not conclusive : for as Del. on this passage remarks, ' A co-ordinate sharing in the act of creation He does not grant them, any more than CHAP. I, VER. 27. 15 in Is. 6, 8 in the act of sending: but He invites their par- ticipation or interest in what He is doing, as the creating of a being, who although of the earth, yet stands in a close relation to them and to Him, is the point now in question.' Dli^ ' mankind' collective, as the pi. HT' shows. Qlhi, so called, according to one view, as belonging to the earth (HDIN)^ ■ the earth-born' yrjyevrjs, yf]ivos. Another derivation is from Ql^? ' lo he red;' cf. Joseph., Ant., i. i. 2 (^'ASafios (Trjfiaivei nvppos iireiBrinep ajro Tfjs nvppat yris (fivpadfiatjs f'yeyovfi); SO many moderns, e.g. Ges., Tuch. Another derivation is from the meaning of the root preserved in Arabic, 'to attach oneself to' so ti'\^=-^ animal sociabile! All these are uncertain. ' It is obvious that the derivation from nmx cannot be philologically defended, but any certain etymology for DIN has not as yet been found, any more than one for the Latin homo;' cf. Di., p. 52 ; Del., p. 117. 131 130721. th^— 'figure' 'image,' ehav. niDI is more abstracts '/z'/^^^^^w,' ofioiaa-is, 'The Greek and Latin Fathers make a distinction between OPS and niDT, referring DPV to the physical or inborn, DIDT to the ethical or receptive side of the Divine image (Ebenbild),' Di. But the absence of 1 between the two words (only the LXX have Kai), and a com- parison of ver. 27, where only the one, with 5, i, where only the other occurs, do not favour this view. The two words are almost synonymous, the second being added to empha- size the first (Di.). D21, collective, 'fishes' = Q''!-\ in, 9, 2. Ps. 8, 9. 27. int^ ^^"^3 'made He him', i.e. mankind. D^X con- ceived as collective, mankind in general being spoken of. On^^ b^ll nUpjl "l^t ■ maU and female made He them,' the two sexes are mentioned, hence the plural DHX. l6 GENESIS, 28. 1111 1"ID. ma joined with nni is characteristic of P. ntoO'^n. The art. supplies the place of the relative in English; see Ges., § 109. R.; M. R., § 92. Rem. a; Ewald, §335 a. 29. "'nn^ for ''Piani; see Ges., § 66. 2. Rem. 3. ' I give,' the prophetic perf., ' the event being regarded as so certain, it is already conceived of as actually come to pass ;' cf. Ges., § 126. 4; M. R. 3. I a; more fully, Driver, §§ 13, 14. See 9, 13. 15, 18. 17, 20. 23, II. 13. 41, 41. "13, "IttJt"? , lit. ' which is in it,' i. e. ' wherein,' see Ges., § 123- I- 30. 131 py^ 73 n^^ . The verb ''nnJ here seems to have dropped out. To make the ace. dependent on the Tinj in ver. 29 is difficult, as n^T' d37 intervenes. The Vulg. para- phrases '«/ habeant ad vescendum.' The Arab, adds » v|'~ ' T have appointed it ' or ' set it' 2toy pT* 73=' a// verdure of herbs ;' cf. Ex. 10, 15 xh I^V-^^ herb' in its widest sense, the green of it being emphasized as that which animals commonly live on. 31. ""tyiyn dl"'. Common words like Dl' are sometimes treated as definite in themselves, and may then dispense with the article; cf. 2, 3 ijJUB'n DV(also Ex. 20, 10). i Kings 7, 12 rhuyn nvn, also ver. 8 mnxn nxn, Ez. 40, 28. 31. 2 Chron. 23, 20 [V^yn lyB', Neh. 3, 6 ^3E'^-| lyB', also Journ. Phil., %\. 229 f. On the relation in which the Cos- mogony of Genesis stands to modern science, comp. Prof. Driver in the Expositor, Jan. 1886, pp. 23-45. 2. I. Df>^2!J, applied zeugmatically to pNni n''DB'n. The phrase ' host of heaven ' is common in the O. T., e. g. i Kings CHAP. I, VER. 28 — CHAP. 3, VER. 3. 1 7 22, 19 (j=.^ the angel hosts'). Josh. 5, 14 f. i^^' army or host 0/ God'). Ps. 103, 21 (of the elements). The phrase 'host of the earth' here due to the n''DE'n X3X, is not common elsewhere, we find instead psn N^D, Is. 34, i. 2. b^'^l. 'And God ended', not as a pluperfect as some render. It is very doubtful whether an imperf. with waw conv. can stand for a pluperfect, if no perfect in a pluperfect sense precedes, and is scarcely consistent with the meaning of the idiom; cf. on i, 4. When a writer wishes to mark that a pluperfect sense is necessary, he usually separates the 1 from the verb, which then naturally passes over into the perfect (nij^ DNH^Xl). For a full discussion of the question and an examination of the instances in which waw conv. with the imperfect has been supposed to be equivalent to a pluperfect, see Driver, § 76. Obs. nSs^here ' to bring to an end' 'to leave off;' cf Ex. 34, 33. I Sam. 10, 13. Ez. 43, 23 (where rh'2 occurs with fO). This 'leaving off ox resting' fills up the seventh day, just as the work of creation the six preceding days. ' God did not create anything on the seventh day,' Kn. The Sam., LXX, Syr., Ber. Rab. read lE'B' for ''JClti'; an intentional alteration to avoid the idea that God created anything on the seventh day. 'inp^'^P from 'IDK^rp, which has arisen out of n3N^p, the weak letter N surrendering its vowel to the preceding vowelless consonant, and the pathach under the prefix 13 disappearing and its place being taken by shewa vocal ; cf., Stade, § no c and § 112 b; Ges., § 23. 2 and § 95. iii. In the form with the suffix S, the pathach under the is is due to the syllable being short and unaccented. 3. '7")1"''1 . If the penult, is an open syllable waw conv. frequently dr^ws back the tone on to it, leaving the last c 1 8 GENESIS, syllable a short unaccented syllable; see Dav., § 23. 3b; Driver, § 69; Ges., § 49. 2 b. Cf. i, n. 22, and often. "^yf^lXDn 01"" r>N. Cf. on I, 31. ir\tvh aTl^N sin lUrS. Two renderings are pos- sible, (I) 'which God created in respect of making' quae crtaverat Deus faciendo. The inf. cstr. being used to define a preceding verb, as in Judg. 9, 56 jnn? .... ^t^*y "it^X; 2 Kings 19, 1 1 Qonnni' . . . . Vcy ; Ps. 103, 20 vdij'E' vian *e'V ; of. Ges., § 45. 2 ; Ewald, § 280 d; M. R., § 113 ad fin. But as N13 in this construction would be followed by lE'N ( = n3Ni'D), which is against the usage of the language, and for which nas'PD HE'V would stand, Di. (II) prefers rendering with Ewald, § 285 a, '■in making which he created^ i. e. 'which he made creating,' IB'K being ace. after niB'J?^, and the latter word being defined by N"i3 ; cf. Tm/)J7 ^HJn, "WTjrh ixh?in, 7?3nn7 n'Dr\n. The LXX have hv TJp^aTo 6 6eos noirja-m, a para- phrase. The Syriac >a\^\ ]o^i'' ]lsj, as the Hebrew, so Onq. 1?V^? 1] ^";?1. Vulg. 'quod creavit Deus ut/aceret.' 4. rmT'in n^N. ' These are the generations 0/ the heavens and the earth when they were created.' nn^in, — which only occurs in the pi. cstr. state, — when it stands before a proper name signifies 'generations,' not as a nom. act., but in the sense 'those who are brought forth,' %o= family, 'the details about those who spring from any one;' hence in the title of a book or chapter, 'the history of the families springing from any one' LXX, yeWau ; in this passage /3i')3Xor y^feVfws. Here 11117^= the 'creatures; i.e. 'the things brought into existence when heaven and earth were created! Elsewhere nnijin always refers to what follows, e.g. 5, i. 6, 9. 10, i, but in this chap, no history of the heavens and the earth follows, so Schrader and others suppose that this half verse properly CHAP, a, VER. 4. 19 ought to precede i, i, its present position being perhaps due to the compiler of the book, who inserted it here in order to form a triinsition to 2, 4 b, ff. The rha (as it stands now) points backwards, and may be rendered, ' Suck then are the generations:' so Job 18, 21. Ps. 73, 12. Gen. 10, 21. 31, 32. Cf. further, Del., Comm., p. iii; Di., p. 37; Tuch, p. 49. The heading Twh^n rh^ is peculiar to P : so 5, i. 6, 9. 10, I, etc. QTlbN mn'' , the combined name 'Yahweh Elohim,' is only found once again in the Pent. (viz. Ex. 9, 30) outside Genesis, but occurs in Joshua. On the Tetragrammaton, rwr\\ cf. Appendix II. P uses Qin^N till Ex. 6, 3. Q''r2ffiT Y~lt^. Only once again, in Ps. 148, 13. □b^~12ni . Inf. Nif . with 2. prefixed, and the suff. of the third pars. pi. masc, from Nia. The n is written smaller than the other letters, and is marked by the Massoretes iT^VX "'^, i. e. He small. Tuch remarks on this : ' The n minusc. in DNiana (cf. 5, 2) has a critical significance, and points to a variant reading, Qal (viz. D?"!??), not Hof'., as Rosenmiiller thinks. Similarly Lev. i, i.' Cf. Di., p. 38, who apparently endorses this view. Other instances of letters written smaller or larger than the other letters will be found in Strack, Pro- legomena critica, p. 92, e.g. litterae majusculae in Lev. 11, 42, Jinj, with waw larger than the other three letters ; in Num. 14! 17, •> in i^'nr.; in Deut. 34, 12, ^ in hT'^\; and litterae minusculaem Deut. 32, 18, ' in '^^ ; Esth. 9, 9, B' in xnfO]? : see also Bleek {Introduction, § 357 f) [Eng. transl], or Keil (Introduction, § 205) [Eng. transl.]. A list of the Hitterae majusculae et minusculae ' will be found in Ochla we OcJila (ed. Frensdorff),Nos. 82-84; Buxtorf, Tz'feria^ (i665ed.). They are not expressly mentioned in the Talmud, and probably in c % 30 GENESIS, the course of time became more numerous. Buxtorf, 1. c, enumerates thirty-one instances of the lit. majusc, and thirty- two of the lit. minusc. The Jews give fanciful explanations. The two following — viz. on this passage, and 23, 2 — are cited from the Tiberias, p. 147 ff. ' "T\ in voce DSinni "quando creata fuerant ilia" nempe, coelum et terra, Gen. 2, 4. Ad indican- dum, fore ut omnia creata minuantur et intereant : et ut littera n constat ex lineis dissolutis et ab invicem separatis, sic creata cuncta dissolventur, sicut scriptum est: " Coeli velut fumus evanescent, et terra ut pannus veterascet, et hahitatores ejus similiter morientur," Is. 51, 6. Hebraei litterarum mysteria sectantes, notant innui transpositionem hujus litterae, ut ex DNiann fiat Dmnsi " propter Abraham," i.e. propter fideles creatum esse mundum : illi enim soli Deum propter admi- randa creationis opera laudant.' And on the small 3 in 23, 2 (p. 152): 'ad indicandum, planctum et luctum propter mortuos, viris minuendum esse, ne modum excedat, quod et Abrahamum fecisse, externo litterae signo indicatum fuit.' See another Jewish explanation of Gen. 2, 4, from the Tal- mud, Tract. Menachoth, fol. 29, col. 2, in Hershon, The Pentateuch according to the Talmud, p. 92 (Eng. transl.). Render,' When they were created; lit. 'in their being created;' a common use of the inf. cstr., like the Greek construction iv r«, with the inf.; see Ges., § 132. i, 2, 3; M. R., § in b. 4b. The narrative begins here. 'In the day of Gods making,' i. e. ' when God made,' etc. On the construction, see Ges., § 133. 2, 3 ; M. R., § III a, § 118. Q'^'^^!=lit.'z« the day 0/,' is freely used for 'at the time of;' so 3, 5 oabx niu; Is. II, 16 inib W1; Jer. 11, 7 DV3 'Til'jm. nltyj^Nha in p. The apodosis to 4I', T\\m DVa, may be either ver. 7 or ver. 5. CHAP. 3, VERS. 4, 5. ai If we take ver. 7 as the apodosis, then vers. 5, 6 will be a paren- thesis descriptive of the earth's condition before God created mankind, and we should have to render it as follows: — ' When Fahweh Elohim made earth and heaven {now no shrub of the field was yet on the earth, and no herb of the field had yet sprung up ; for Yahweh Elohim had not sent rain upon the earth, and there was no man to till the ground ; and a mist used to go up and water all the surface of the ground), then Yahweh Elohim formed^ etc. So Di. If we make ver. 5 the apodosis, then the rendering would be, ' When Yahweh Elohim made earth and heaven, then there was no shrub of the field' etc. So Tuch. Against the first rendering it may be urged that the con- struction is too involved, and seems to identify a period (ver. 6), with a point (ver. 7) of time. To make n^tJ' ?31 the apodosis to 4^ is against the division of the verses and the syntax (Del.); cf., however, on the latter point, Driver, §§123 and 124, who cites Ex. 25, 9. Josh. 3, 3, and other instances of the imperf. separated from 1, after a time determination, and treats this passage similarly. The argument, too, from the division of the verses is hardly conclusive. Del. takes apparently 4'' and 4*, after the analogy of 5, i, as belonging together, and regards vers. 5 and 6 as independent sentences introductory to ver. 7, which beginning with nvi (^ so he formed') expresses the main point, viz. the creation of man. 5. On the imperf. after Q-iO, cf. Ges., § 127. 4a; M. R., § 6. i; Ewald, § 337 c; Driver, § 27 b. Ewald, 1. c, remarks that Dn!3 for the most part stands in circumstantial clauses, preceded by the subject. TiD indefinite, and with the negative ='«c»^,' Germ. kein:. cf. Ges., § 152. I ; M. R., § 142 ; Ewald, § 323 b. On pN, see Ges., § 152. I ; Ewald, § 321 a; M. R., § 140. 22 GENESIS, On the position of ^H in the sentence, cf. Num. 20, 5 PN Cl'DI, M. R., § 79. 6 b. Rem. a. 6. n^l^'^ . The imperf. used in a frequentative sense, and followed by a perfect with waw conv. nptyni. The companion construction to the imperf. with waw conv. is that of the perfect with waw conv. According to Ewald, § 234 a, b, this construction was originally due to the opposite con- struction of the perfect, followed by an imperfect with waw conv. ; just as the two tenses are in many aspects opposite one to the other, so the peculiar idiomatic use of the one, generated a corresponding idiomatic use of the other as its counterpart. Ols., cited by Professor Driver, Tenses, p. 141, remarks that this use of the perfect rests originally on a ' play of the imagination,' in virtue of which an action when brought into relation with a preceding occurrence as its con- sequence, from the character of inevitability it then assumes, is contemplated as actually completed. In this construction ' the nascent action (i. e. the action of the imperf) is con- ceived of as advancing to completion (the action of the perfect with waw conv.), as no longer remaining in sus- pension, but as being (so to say) precipitated.' Driver, Tenses, p. 141. Compare c. viii, where a full discussion of this idiom will be found, and the rules concerning the shift- ing of the tone one place forward with the waw conv. are noted. When the waw and the verb are separated, the imperf. reappears. Cf. also Ewald, § 136 b and § 342 b, i ; M. R., §§ 23 and 25 ; Ges., § 126. 6 d. Other instances of the imperf. as a frequentative, followed by a perf. with waw conv., are 6, 4. 29, 2. 3 ipmi . . . )9?i) . . . 1DDX31 , . . ^p^ n''E'ni ; I Kings 14, 28 U)3'^n\ , . . QINtJ"; 2 Kings 3, 25 n'\t6K>^ . . . )y'?^, etc. CHAP, a, VERS. 6, 7. 33 1t< only occurs in this passage and Job 36, 27. The LXX render here by nriyr), and in Job, 1. c, by vecjieXri, which is also Onqelos' rendering here (^J^J?). Syr. and Vulg. have respectively )..^Q2k& and '■fans'. Saadiah agrees with the ordinary rendering ' mist^ ' vapour', Jls-". . The word *1N appears to be confined to Hebrew. Ges. in the Thesaurus, p. 35 (as Professor Driver has pointed out to me), is in error when he says that the word T?? is used in the Targ., Job 3, 5. Prov. 23, 33. He has accidentally written ' Targum' for ' the Commentary of Rabbi Levi ben Gerson ' (of Provence, died 1370), cited by Buxtorf, Lexicon. Chald. Talm. et Rabb., p. 69. The mistake is repeated in the 9th ed. of the H. W. B. of Gesenius, p. 10 b. 7. "12"'''1 . On the form of this '"s verb, see Ges., § 70. i ; Dav., § 39. 2. DlNH . On the derivation of mN, compare the note on I, 26. The author connects DIN with riDIX, as though he would imply that man bore in his name a mark of his earthly origin. On the article with DIN, cf Ges., § 109. 2 ; Ewald, 277 c; M. R., § 66. Rem. a. ■^□J? is a second accusative, specifying or defining the material used in the operation; see Ewald, § 284 a. i; M.R., § 45. 5 ; Driver, § 195. i (Tertiary predicate). Cf.Ex. 20, 25. D"'^n . The masc. plural used to form an abstract noun. ' The plural may serve to collect together the scattered items into a higher idea, so as to form the signification of an ab- stract,' Ewald, § 179, who gives as other instances DmJ 'flittings,' Job 7, 4; D''j;iy ' perverseness ;' D''"n3D 'blindness;' cf. also Stade, § 324b, who remarks 'that D"n is the only word of this sort in general use, the other instances that occur being archaisms, and belonging to the conventional 24 GENESIS, language of the Law, or of Poets or Prophets.' See also Ges., § io8. 2 a. ttJQJ? . . . TT'l. In the sense oi' become,' b n*n, cf. 17, 4. 18, 18, etc., is more frequent than iTin, followed by the simple subst., as in 4, 20. 21. 19, 26. CJS5 i'^ Heb. = the breath of life that is in every indi- vidual being. Man derives this breath of life from God immediately (Job 27, 3. Is. 42, 5), animals from the earth (i, 20. 24), and so only mediately from God, yet partici- pating in God's spirit (Job 34, 14 f. Ps. 104, 30). In this direct inspiration lies man's pre-eminence over the animal world, stress being laid on the manner in which man 'be- came a living soul.' He comes into existence as a personal being in a personal relation with God. Cf. Oehl., § 70. Onq. renders nin tySJ by fijs, SO 3, 24, andVulg. 'Paradisum voluptatisl Syr. has .Zio \AJ{-^, Saadiah |ji£ j ULL^. Schr., K.A.T., 2nd ed., p. 2 6f., says 'Eden,' Heb. HV, has originally nothing to do with H.?^, pi. CJ"!]? 'loveliness', but is a word that came over to the Hebrews from the Babylonians, meaning properly 'field; 'plain;' in Assyrian i-di-nu. m, pointed with -^^ . to distinguish it perhaps from HV with ^^ , is a pr. n., the name of a district in' Mesopotamia, or Assyria, which, according to 2 Kings 19, 12. Is. 37, 12, came under the rule of Assyria. H?? has not yet been identified; cf. further, Di., p. 51; Del., p. 120. QlpD is local, not temporal (for j;t3ii is against this),= 'eastwards; 'on the east of (a further definition of the position CHAP, a, VERS. 8-11. 25 of Eden; cf. 3, 24. 11, 2. 13, 11), i.e. from the standpoint of the narrator in Palestine. 9. njDS'^'l . The shortened form of the Hif '. imperf ; see Ges., § 65. 1 c. Rem.; Dav., § 37. i, 2. Vy^ ^l!fl nyin yj^l — ' and the tree of knowledge of (lit. of the knowing) good and evil; ' i. e. the tree, the partaking of the fruit of which would cause persons to know good and evil. J^IT 2ltO cannot be genitive after nyi, as a word defined by being in the construct state does not take the article, but must be regarded as the accusative; cf Jer. 22, 16 N^^ H^n Tin nj)*in ' was not that the knowing me?' see Ewald, § 236 a; M. R., § no. Rem. ; Ges., § 133. i. The article prefixed td an inf cstr. is very rare. VTl mtO. On the pointing of 1 with ^ , see on i, 2. 10. 'And a river was going out of Eden, to water the garden; and from thence it separated itself, and became four branches'. \XT^ . The part, denoting continuous, unintermittent action; see Driver, § 21; M. R., § 14. 2 a. TID^ . On the imperf. as a freq. in past time, see Driver, § 30 a; M. R., § 6. 2 a. rrrn ; cf on npE'ni, ver. 6. 11. 'jiUJ''S=, according to Gesenius, 'streaming^ or "stream' from a root E'lS 'to burst forthl It is not found again in the Canonical books of the Old Testament, but is mentioned in Ecclesiasticus 24, 25, together with the Tigris. The Arabic of Saadiah has j-JjT ' the Nile'. The other versions follow the Heb. text. Its position is more closely defined by the mention of the land (ni'''in) round which it flows. Joseph. [Ant., i. i. 3),' the Fathers (Euseb., Aug., Hier.), 26 GENESIS, and others identify it with the Ganges; f elan J and others consider it is the Phasis ; Del. and the moderns, the Indus, nb^inn occurs only here with the art. ; in lo, 7. 29, it is men- tioned partly among the Cushites, and partly among the sons of Joqtan, together with Ophir. It also occurs in the phrase (25, 18) •\W nj) nSnD; cf. i Sam. 15, 7. Havila in 25, 18 and i Sam. 15, 7 seems to have been the eastern frontier of the Ishmaelites and Amalekites on the Persian gulf. The moderns identify the Havila of this verse with India ; according to their view pE'^D is the Indus. That one of the rivers here mentioned was an Indian one, was the view prevalent among the ancients ; and the identification of n^'in with India, and Jlsy'S with the Indus, is strengthened by the fact that the products of the land of npilH, viz. nP13, 3nr, CriB', are mentioned by ancient writers as being found in India ; the gold of the Indus district being celebrated among classical writers, as that of Ophir was among biblical: cf. Her.,iii.io6; Diod. Sic, ii. 36; Curt.,viii. 9. 18. Cf.iKingsio, II. Ps. 45, 10. Job 22, 24: see further, Del, p. 123; Di., p. 59^. ni'''in has the article by Ewald, §2770; cf. ver. 7. It seems to indicate, as Di. remarks, that the Hebrews had not then forgotten the original meaning of the word, ' ihe sand land' par excellence. The np^in mentioned in 10, 7 (cf. i Chron. i, 9) among the sons of Cush seems to denote a place distinct from those intended here, and in 25, 18. i Sam. 15,7, which is perhaps to be identified with the modern Zeila on theAbyssinian coast, south of Bab-el-Mandeb. Cf. the note on 10, 7. n^Dn t^in = ' that is the one encompassing the whole land of Havila! The article with the predicate by Ges., § no. 4, ' The name may possibly = ' Sandland! or 'Land of golden sand,' con- nected with 'jin 'sand! CHAP, a, VER. 12. 37 note; Driver, § 135. 7. H^b without the article would = ' IS encompassing! The word 330 does not of necessity imply a complete surrounding; of. Num. 21, 4. Judg. ir, i8. Ps. 26, 6. On the relative construction dty "IK'N, of. Ges., § 123. i; M. R., §i56d. 12. intl. The 1 is pointed 1 by Ges., § 104. 2 c. On the __ under the t, to emphasize the sibilant, see Ges., § 10. 2. Rem. b; Stade, § 105. Cf. 3, 17 (i^???.Nn). 25, 22. 27, 26. 29, 3. 8 (v!^5). =1 is marked with metheg, as in Judg. 5, 12, nn^l : see Ges., § 16. 2, i a; Stade, § 52 d. t^Tn in the Pent., with the exception of eleven places, is of common gender. The punctuators, however, by pointing it f (reading n for l), which apparently can be used of pearls or crystals. Saad. and others render pearls (so also Ges. in Th.), which meaning would be suitable here — between 3nf and hTW — but hardly in Num. II, 7 (Del.), and according to Tuch was first derived from this passage in order that some object of equal value with ant and DiiB' might be mentioned; but cf i Kings 10, 2. 10. The etymology is dotibtful. QrittJn . The art. as in antn, according to Ges., § 109. 3. Rem. lb; M. R., § 68. The LXX here give 6 \ldos 6 irpa- a-ivos, perhaps meaning the beryl, Vulg. ' lapt's onychinus^ Syr. )Io»3, Onq. ^Pl^^. Elsewhere variously rendered, onyx, sar- donyx, sardius, which all belong to the same species (chalce- dony), or beryl (more correctly chrysopras) : cf. H. W.B., 9th ed., Di. in loco. The et3TnoIogy is doubtful. 13. lilT'il. A similar formation to pO''^. From n''? Hohurst forth'. This river flowed round the land of t^a, and is quite distinct from the jllT'J mentioned in 2 Chron. 32, 30. i Kings I, 33. 38. 45. 2 Chron. 33, 14. The LXX have here Vtav, Vulg. ' Gehon,' so the other Vss. The LXX in Jer. 2,18 trans- late the Heb. "iin''B', Nile, by T€S>v; cf. Ecclesiasticus 24, 27. Josephus and the Fathers also consider the Nile the river here meant, so many moderns. W3 is Ethiopia. Thus if prTiJ is the Nile, we have a river, taking its source in Asia, flowing round the African B'U ! Others consider CJ^U as representing 3° GENESIS, only the Asiatic Cushites, and identify pn^J with either the Ganges or Oxus. Reland identifies it with the Araxes. Del. and Di. decide for the Nile, explaining the anomaly above noted, as having arisen through the ignorance of the ancients of geography ; see their commentaries in loco. 14. 7p"Tn, = ' //^e Tigris' occurs again Dan. 10, 4. The Heb. name agrees with the Sumerian Idigna, and the Bab.- Assyr. Idiglat (Schr., K.A.T., 2nd ed., 32 f. ; Del., Par., 1 70). In Aramaic the name is n_^2'''l (so Onq. here); the Pesh. has fc».^lo», Arab. Sil.^. 'The Aryan name (Old Persian Tigra, Pahlawi niJT, Greek Ti'ypT/r, Ti'ypis), according to the express tradition of the ancients (Strabo, xi. 14, 8; Pliny, vi. 31; Curt., iv. 9), designates the river as " Ihe arrow- swift" Old Baktrian tighra^" pointed," tighri^" arrow!" Dillmann. TV2np. Render, 'in front of Assyria' i. e. from the standpoint of the narrator; so LXX KmivavTi, Pesh. %^ci!^. Others (the Targg., Aq., Tuch) render ' east of thus includ- ing Mesopotamia in the term nirx ; but then the narrator could not have spoken of the Tigris as being east of Assyria, for he must have known that Assyria extended far east of the Tigris. Mesopotamia, too, is called nnru dIK in 24, 10; for this meaning of nfDIp, cf. 4, 16. niD . ' The EupJiraies', not further defined, as being familiar to every Hebrew reader. It is often mentioned in O. T. as 'the great river' or ' the river' kot' i^ox^v. Together with the Heb.-Aramiiic name, we have now the Old Persian 'Ufratu,' and the Babylonian-Assyrian 'Buratluv,' ' Purdtu.' A Semitic etymology is still unknown; see Di. in loc, and M. and V. in H. W. B., 9th ed., p. 692 b. 15. 'inro"'T. The Hif. imperf. with waw conv. from CHAP, a, VERS. 14-17. 31 ni3 : see Ges., § 72. Rem. 9 ; Dav., § 40, esp. Rem. c. N. B. iyi\f='/o cause to rest,' n_*3n Uo place,' ^set,' 'lay down.' ni^tyVl n-Ql'*? . The inf. cstr. with suffixes follows the analogy of the segholate nouns : see Ges., § 61. i ; Dav., §3i-4- 16. 7V 'l^'^l 'laid a command on him.' More usually nilf,= 'to command,' is followed by an ace, or the prep. P, or ?K (cf. 28, 6), the words of the command being introduced by v2t^n 7^^5 . 'Thou mayest indeed eat! The inf abs. being prefixed to the verb. ' The inf. abs. expresses the idea of the verb simply, without conditions of person, mood, etc. ; hence, when it precedes the finite verb, there is first the idea bare, and then the idea modified ; and the effect of the whole is to express with some variety of emphasis the fact (not the quality^ of the action as now predicated in the finite verb.' Dav., § 27, rule at end. See also Ewald, § 312 a; Ges., §131- aa- On the potential use of the imperf., see Driver, § 38 a; Ges., §127. 3d; M.R., §7. 2b. 73X is one of the five verbs that form their imperf. with holem in the first syllable: see Ges., § 68. i; Dav., § 35. 17. ' But from the tree of knowledge of good and evil, thou shall not eat of it'. On the preposition with the suffix, repeating the substantive (a use allied to that of the casus pendens), see Driver, § 197. 6. Obs. i; Ewald, § 309 a, ad fin. ^773^ is an instance of an inf. cstr. with the suffix de- parting from the analogy of segholate nouns : cf. ver. 15, and see Ges., § 61. i. Rem. 2. 32 GENESIS, 1 8. nVn nitO n'?. The inf. cstr. as the subject to a sentence: cf. Gas., § 132. i a; M. R., §§ 112 b and 115. 17 ntoS^b^-. The b of )b has a dag. forte conjunctivum or euphonicum : see Ges., § 20. 2 ; Dav., § 7. 4, foot-note ; cf. ver. 28. The LXX and Vulg. here have read the plural, to bring the text into conformity with i, 26. nj^D "llj^, lit. 'a help as before him' i. e. ^a help corre- sponding to him', ' meet for him' A.V. LXX have here nor aiiTOf, in ver. 20 Sfi-uios avrm ; SO the Syr. and Vulg. In Rab- binic, 1ii2 = ' corresponding to:' see Ges., Thes., p. 847. nty is used concretely, as in Ps. 70, 6 : cf. Nah. 3, 9. 19. "l!J"''1 is written defectively for nv''''1, which occurs in . ver. 7. The verb must not be rendered as a pluperfect. It appears that the narrator conceived the formation of animals as posterior to that of man. For the question of the use of the imperf. with waw conv. as a pluperfect, cf the note on ver. 2. mtrn riTi 7D, P pxn nin i^a (i, 25. 30; cf 2, 10). riQ . On the punctuation of n», see Ges., § 37. i ; Dav., § 13. ' The punctuation is quite like that of the article.' t^^p"' no ' what he would call them ;' cf. Driver, § 39 b. ^ilp'' "^ffib^ hy\ . The imperf according to Driver, § 38 a.^ 'all whatever he called them! rrn eJO: appears to be added very abnormally, in ex- planation of 1^. Possibly these words are a gloss, as they read very harshly. Such a redundancy as we find in the text here is common in Aramaic, which would say NHl'D ^^^h ^ • and there are genuine examples of it in the O. T., e.g. Ex. 2 6. I Sam. 21, 14 (see Ges., § 121. 6. Rem. 3; M. R., § 72. Rem. a), but none so harsh as this (note especially the masc. •h). In late Hebrew this redundancy might be an Aramaism, CHAP. 2, VERS. 18-23. 3S but that can hardly be the case in this passage. n^Pl 5^33 = ^living creatures! tyUJ being collective. nTl is a fern. adj. (n''n = '/z/e' is only poetical; see on i, 21). As the text stands we have 1? masc. followed by n^n SJ'SJ fem., which is difficult. Del. supposes that n''n 1^23 (cf. :^sa in 46, 27. Num. 31, 28) was construed ad sensum as a masc; but these pas- sages are scarcely parallel. 20. mNvT , so pointed by 01s. The word is not used as a proper name until 4, 25. In these three chapters (1-3) it is, with the exception of this verse and 3, 17. 21, always pointed with the article. Cf., however, M. R., § 66. Rem. a. N55Q b?S. I. Impersonally, ' One did not find /or man- kind.' II. 'For himself {V^^='\m•h) he {man) did not find.' III. 'For mankind {God) did not find.' III. is not probable, as we have DINH already as subj. at the beginning of the verse. If I. be adopted, NVD would be impers. by Ges., § 137. 2 ; M. R., § 123. 2, and ni^ could stand without the art., as in I, 26. Tuch adopts II. Del. and Di. propose a render- ing that differs slightly from any of these: 'He {man) did not find for man,' i.e. 'for a human being, like himself' etc. ; almost the same as II, though they do not take DIN^ as directly equivalent to ItJ'SJP. 2X. n^nnri '«*« Hs place;' the suffix is a verbal one, cf. Ges., § 103. I. Rem. 3; Stade, § 347 c. 3 : with the nominal suffix it would be n^FiriPl. 23. 'This now is . . . this shall be called ivovian' The con- nection of nt^N with ^''^ is preserved by the Vulg., which renders them by ' virago ' and ' virl respectively, probably fol- lowing Symm., who has dj-Spis and avi]p ; so Luther, Mdnnin. r\T\\h. The form is made more distinct by the fuller shewa ; see Ges., § 10. 2, and § 52. r, s. p. The dag. in the p D 34 GENESIS, has fallen away in accordance with the rule, that any doubled letter pointed with shewa, if it be not one of the aspirates (nSJin), may drop its doubling; see Dav., § 7. 4, foot-note a^, Ges., § 20. 3 b, where the letters that commonly admit of this loss of the dag. are mentioned. Hence the Raphe. 24. 'Therefore doth a man leave his father and his mother and cleave unto his wife, and they become one flesh! The imperf. as freq. followed by the perf. with waw conv., in present time, as before (ver. 6) in past time; so Ps. 17, 14. 49, 11. 73, lo-ii; Driver, § 113. 4 a. These words are the narrator's comment, as in 26, 33. 32, 33, as they would be unnatural if assigned to the man, who had no knowledge of a father or mother. The LXX, Pesh., Vulg., and Sam. insert Dp''i!^ ' and they two become;' and the text is quoted thus in the N. T., Matt. 19, 5. Mark 10, 7; cf i Cor. 6, 16. Eph. 5, 31. It may have fallen out of the Heb. text through the DiT'JE' of ver. 25. 25. D'^Q^IJ^ marked by the Massoretes, B'jnn 'o 'mem with dagesh.' On the apparent anomaly of a long vowel in a toneless syllable, see Dav., p. 8 ; Stade, § 327 a. This word occurs again, with the same points, in Job 22, 6. 1 Wnrr^ . Hithpolel of Bha ; see Ges., §72.7; Dav., § 2 6. 3 c. Render, ' were not ashamed' i. e. ' not in the habit of being ashamed! The imperf. according to Driver, § 30 a ; Ewald, § 136 c. 3. I. fT^n 72Q ai"iy rr^rr ttJninV 'Now the serpent was more cunning than all the beasts of the field,' etc. On the use of 10 in expressing the comparative, see Ges., §119.1; M. R., § 49- 2- CHAP. 3, VER. 24 — CHAP. 3, VER. 3. 35 ''S PjN , lit. = ' and that . . . t ' is placed first in the sentence to denote astonishment, ■which may be expressed by a note of interrogation. Render, '.4 « and l"j?. Qal, as a light form, has it more frequently than the heavier reflexive forms. It occurs more commonly in the 3rd pers. than the 2nd pers. pl.^, D 2 36 GENESIS, as this form is far more frequent, but is by no means uncommon in the 2nd pers. pi. in certain verbs, e. g. "fll, JJDB', ntS'J?, "lON, -im. It is found in- the oldest prose,- e. g. in Gen. (twelve times), Ex. (twenty-eight times). Num. (seven times). Josh, (nine times), Judg. (eight times), i Sam. (eight times); being especially frequent in Exodus, which contains many old pieces; also in old poetry, e.g. Ex. 15. 2 Sam. 22 (once), and some Psalms and old prophets, e. g. Is., Mic, Joel, Hos., Amos. In Job, Deut., Is. 24-27, 40 ff., Ps. 58, 89, 104, etc., it is more artificial (a revived archaism). In the gnomic poetry (Prov.) it is rare, and does not occur in the erotic and purely elegiac (Song of Songs, Lam.). Leviticus has it very rarely, Ezekiel never. More modern prose writings (Ruth, Kings) have it only in colloquial passages. The books of Chronicles have preserved it in some passages from more ancient sources, while it rejects it in others. In Ezra, Neh., Esther, Dan. (Heb.), Eccles. there are no ex- amples of p.' See further, Bottcher, Lehrhuch, ii. § 930 (from whom the above paragraph slightly abbreviated is borrowed), where a full list of the passages, where the ending |1 occurs, is given; and cf Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 63; Ges., § 72. 7. Rem. 4 and § 47. 3. Rem. 4 ; Dav., § 21. Rem. a. It may be observed that some of Bottcher's distinctions seem doubtful and arbitrary. 4. pniTDn mo \s^ . The negative should stand between the inf and the verb; see Ges., § 131. 3. Rem. i; Ewald, § 312 b. I ; who cite Amos 9, 8. Ps. 49', 8 as parallel to this" passage. Its unusual position here is probably due to a desire to keep the formula ni»n DID from 2, 17 unchanged. Render, ' Ye shall by no means die.' 5. W. The participle as a true present, so 19, 13 *3 i:mN dWnC'D; 18, i7,''JK noSDn (the subject does not CHAP. 3, VERS. 4-7. 37 precede, as a slight emphasis is laid on the verb; cf. Driver, § 135. 4), Driver, § 135. 2 and Obs.^ cf. Ges., § 134- 2 a. inpDJI . • • QDvDb^ DVi- '/« the day ye eat . . .your eyes shall he opened' The perf. with waw conv. after a time determination ; see Driver, § 1 23 ^; M. R., § 132 b ; cf § 26. Waw in this usage is to be noticed. It assumes a stronger demonstrative force than it has in the ordinary cases of the perf with waw conv. (cf Driver, § 119), when used to intro- duce the predicate or the apodosis; so in Ex. 16, 6 21JJ OnyT'l 'at evening, {then) ye shall know.' i Kings 13, 31 TIN Cmapl TIlDa 'when I die, {then) ye shall bury me! Ez. 24, 24b Qnjn''1 (1X33 'when it comes, {then) ye shall know.' □Tl^i^^ 'as gods! Targ. Onq. P^l^ia 'as princes,' perhaps intentionally to avoid an anthropomorphic idea. Targ. Jon. fMH'^I p?!?! ;r?^/^? ' as mighty princes who know,' connecting ''JflT' with QTlPN, which is grammatically possible. The Samaritan has 3f/Tri! ff-Z^ii ' Hke angels! 6. h'^^t^rh. The LXX, Syr., Vulg,, and some moderns render, 'to look at,' or 'regard,' a meaning which P'atJTl never has. Render, ' to become wise.,' lit. ' to gain insight,' Del. ' um einsichtig zu werden! Rashi's note here is nONB' IDS 5J"i1 31D "jnV ib ' compare his saying to her, " knowing good and evil." ' ^i^?"!- Pausal form of i'JN''; cf Ges., § 29. 4c, note, with § 68. I. The LXX and Sam. read l^N''! (plural), the waw might have arisen out of the following waw in njnpani. The plural is not necessary. 7. on □Ql1''i* '^2. The pronoun stands here by Ges., § 121. i; M. R., § 125; cf ver. 11. 38 GENESIS, n:)Nn n'^y , lit. 'Uafofa fig; i.e. 'fig-leaf; here collec- tive, '■fig-leaves^ Uxh Itoyi 'and they made themselves: The personal pronoun is used for the reflexive, as often with this verb ; cf. Ges., § 124. lb; M. R., § 89a. 8. bip, not '■the voice; but 'the sound; as in 2 Sam. 5, 24. I Kings 19, 12. □ITT rrn'? • ' Almt the cool of the day; so 8, 1 1 my T^^ ' about eventide;' 17, 21 HTH IjriDij 'a3oa/ this date;' also Is. 7, 15 inviij ' about {the time of) his knowing;' cf. Ges., § 154. 3«; M. R., § 51. 2. In the East, towards evening a cool breeze springs up (cf. Song of Songs 2, 17. 4, 6) and the Oriental goes out ; so 24, 63 mjjn nWEj!?. The LXX render well to SftXiTOw. In 18, I the noontide is called DVn DPI ' the heat of the day ' (LXX, excellently, nearifi^pias); Abraham being described as sitting in the door of his tent. 9. nS^N. The sufBx (as it is pointed) is a verbal one; cf Ges., § 100. 5 ; M. R., § 39 ; na^K standing for n33>X ; cf Prov. 2, II nmyan, and with the nun, Jer. 22, 24 ^^P.'?? ; see Ges., § 58. 4 ; Dav., § 31. 5. Stade, § 355 b. 3, remarks that ' It is due to false analogy if the Pausal suffix ^-^ is transferred from the verb to a noun,' and cites with this passage, Prov. 25, 16 ^J.l, and other instances. It is possible, however, that the vowel points in these cases are not to be trusted as they stand in our texts. The n at the end of ni^N is merely a scriptio plena (found both in obj. and subj. suffixes), — as Prov. 2, 11 nmxsn; cf ver. 12 nnnJ. Ex. 15, II natDi (twice). I Sam. i, 26 riDDj), — and in no way affects the sense. 10. "'33^^. The Mass. note here is i'yi'D, i.e. the word is, contrary to rule, accented on the penult.; cf Ges., § 29. 4 c; CHAP. 3, VERS. 8-13. 39 Dav., § 10. 5 b. As a rule the vowel in pause is lengthened, this cannot take place here as the vowel is already long. The accents 5-;-, -^, and (sometimes) -^ usually effect this lengthening, when it is possible, in pause. Here the minor distinctive accent -^ {TifcAa) exercises a pausal influence, there being a sufiicient break in the sense for the voice naturally to rest; cf. Driver, § 103, and 15, 14 'n^VH (the tone drawn back and the vowel lengthened), which the Massoretes have not noticed. nriN and nnjJ, like '33N, transfer the accent to the penult, in pause. 11. r\r\i^ nV^ ""a is really the object to Tijn iD, see M. R., § 161 b, where it is designated 'an object sentence;' cf. I, 4. 13T "Tli'i? . "TlPn is used regularly to negative the inf. cstr. after b; cf. Ges., § 152. i; M. R., § 140. Rem. a. VQIl. On the pointing of n interrog., see Gas., § 100. 4, s. p.; Dav., § 49. 2. Here n introduces a simple interrogative sentence (cf Ges., § 153. 2 ; M. R., § 143), the answer being uncertain (affirmative or negative). N?n= Latin nonne, the answer expected being in the afiSrmative. 12. ''^DJ? . . . ntlJSn, a casus pendens. ' The woman which etc she gave me] NID is resumptive and is inserted for emphasis; see Driver, § 123. Obs.; cf 15, 4 Ny nE'N DN '•3 leni'' xin Tveo; 24, 7 rhvt Nin riNtn . . . nin\ The casus pendens is often used to relieve a long and unwieldy sentence. bllNI. The pausal form of the ist person. In ver. 6 we have f'^xm and i'^N''! as the pausal forms of the 3rd pers. fem. sing, and 3rd pers. masc. sing, respectively; see Ges., § 68. I. 13. n''toy n«T HD: cf 12, iS. M. R., § 93. Rem. c, renders, 'What, this, hast thou done?=what hast thou done 40 GENESIS, there?' taking DNT in opposition to n». The A. V. and Syr. render it as a relative sentence, ' what is this thou hast done?' Del. adopts the former rendering, remarking that the corres- ponding question in Arabic, whether the demonstrative belongs to the interrogative, or whether it should be rendered as our Eng. Ver. does, was a subject of dispute among the Arabic grammarians. He points out that the Massoretic punctuation favours the first rendering. LXX render slightly differently, Ti TovTo enoLr]a-as ; SO Vulg. guar.e hoc fecisti? On the dag. in the f of nsr, see on 2, 18. 14. 13T 73?2 ^n^^ ^"nN. LXX, fmKaT-dpaToy oxi a^o TraK- T occurs again Job 9, 17. Ps. 139, n. The only meaning which can be philologically defended is 'crush! CHAP. 3, VERS. 14, 15. 41 This meaning suits Job 9, 17, but not Ps. 139, 11. The alternative rendering is, ' lie in wail for ^ a kindred form with flNty '/o pant after;'' it suits Ps. 139, 11 (cf. Del. in loc.) better than 'crush,' but a word='(rw^r' is required: hence some read there ''JS'IB'), so Ew., Ges. in Th. f)1E'=' to crush ' is justified by the Aramaic usage of tj'itJ' and <^ or ■^, e.g. in Onq., Deut. 9, 2i oaio {=:Heb. inD''1) 'fl«(/ crushed (better scraped) it with a file.' [It should be repiarked that in Syriac the roots ^oa. and .°i"i«. are confounded one with the other, as Bernstein points out 1. c] Cf. Levy, Chald. Worterh.; Bernst., Lex. Syr. sub voc. Di. admits that the meaning ' crush ' suits the first part of the clause, i. e. the man's crushing the serpent's head, but denies its application to the serpent, and adopts the rendering ' lie in wait for ^ which he attempts to justify by appealing to P1N2' ; but this meaning is not so certain as the meaning ' crush,' and the double ace. after the rendering ' lie in wait for ' is difficult. fi'iE' is applied to the serpent in the second half of the verse by a kind of zeugma, the same verb being used to express the mutual nature of the enmity (Kal.); com- pare Del., and Tuch, 2nd % wwqJLvI fco'io -i.» j».ow CO), using dif- ferent words in the two parts of the clause, but giving v\w a similar sense in each half Onq. paraphrases i. Not a hendiadys, 'the pain of thy con- ception', Ges., § 155. I a, but 'thy pain and (especially) thy conception:' waw attaching the particular ^Jlin to the general 1J3XV; ef. Ps. 18, I. Is. 2, I. )nn is an abnormal formation, which occurs nowhere else in the O. T. The abs. state is |Vnn (Hos. 9, 11. Ruth 4, 13), cstr. li'^iH; with suffix ^3'inn and shortened 'n-!i''D ; see Stade, § 297. ■^nplttJn . The LXX here, and 4, 1 7, render with cmo- '\. The perfect with waw conv. after the imperfect with IS; so 19, 19 ifiDi . . . i:p3in [s; Ex. i, 10 n''ni nmi |a. Three times (Ps. 2, 12. Jer. 51, 46. Prov. 31, 5) we find the imperfect repeated after |a, instead of a perf. with waw conv.; see Driver, § 115 end, and § 116. "'HI . Perf with waw conv. pointed with pretonic qame9 ; so 19, 19 WJ (notice the tone; cf. the note there); 44, 22 ™3 : see on i, 2. TJ is perf. from ''!n: see Ges., § 67; Dav., § 42. 24. Cnian n^ 'the cherubim: These appear in the Old Testament always in connection with God's manifesting himself to the world. In the tabernacle they hovered over the ark (Ex. 25, 18 ff.). In Solomon's temple they are repre- sented as stationed on the floor of the Holy of Holies, spread- ing out their wings from one side to the other (1 Kings 6, 23. CHAP. 3, VER. 24. 45 I Chron. 28, 18). In Ez; i and 10 they form God's living chariot, in which he appears to the prophet; and in Ps. 18, II. 2 Sam. 22, II God is represented as riding on a cherub to judgment: of. Ps. 80, 2. i Sam. 4, 4. 2 Sam. 6, 2, where God is described as "2n Ityi' . From i Kings, 1. g., we find that the cherub had an upright form, partly human, with one face (Ex. 25, 20), two wings (i Kings 6, 24), and possibly hands. In Ez. I and 10 a somewhat fuller and diiferent description of the cherubim is given : * with the similitude of a man, four wings' (Ez. I, II. 23), two of which served to cover their bodies, and with two of which they flew ; and under their wings human hands (Ez. i, 8. 10, 7. 8, 21), with four faces (Ez. I, 10. 10, 14), one human, one that of a lion, one that of an ox, and one that of an eagle, and the soles of their feet like those of a calf (Ez. i, 7). Lastly (Ez. i, 18. 10, 12 ; cf. Rev. 4, 6), their whole body was studded with eyes. It is uncertain whence the Hebrews derived their idea of the cheru- bim; possibly the winged forms on the Assyrio-Babylonian and Egyptian monuments exercised some inflaence on their con- ception of the cherub, but it is doubtful whether they borrowed the idea from either the Egyptians or Assyrians (cf the author- ities cited below). The etymology of the word is uncertain, (i) Some con- nect it with the Aramaic o^a, ^2^ aravit; so 'Sr\'Z = araior, bos: cf Ez. 10, 14 with i, 10. (ii) Another view is that ana is transposed for 3«n=V;5am/,' i.e. '//^^-| hlL-n ■'n'^r ppi is placed before the verb to which it belongs in order to slightly emphasize the con- trast between the occupations of Kain and Abel. M. R., § 131. I b. Rem. c, compares jxtv . . . hi in Greek. i>3n has been explained as meaning 'a breath,' 'nothing,' possibly with reference to his short life ; but it is doubtful if the name can be brought into connection with this meaning. In Assyrian 'Hahal' is a common word for son. nyh is a participle in the cstr. state, 'a shepherd of;' W^ would be the abs. state, and jN'V would then be in the ace. case. Both constructions are possible, cf 22,12 DNi^N N7^ with Ex. 9, 20 nin^ larriN Nnjrt; see other examples in Ges., §135.1; M. R., §121. CHAP. 4, VERS. 3-7. 49 3. '^1012. The prep. |l? must be taken here in a partitive sense, ' some o/l cf. 8, 20 non^n-ijao npi ; 27, 28 Q^^i3^« ^^ irT-l ^t2D; Ex. 12, 7. Ges., §iS4. 3 c; M. R., § 94a. nn]D. I. 'a gifV, 2. 'an offering (to God),' but not to be taken in this passage in its more restricted sense ' the meal offering,' as opposed to n3T, "the meat offering' The LXX render it here by dva-iav. 4. 'And Alel too brought' DJ with the pronoun repeated is emphatic; cf. ver. 26 Nin DJ T\vh\. 'jniT'niDI, scriptio defediva, for in''n^nB1. The sing, would be tna^n. Other instances of .fcrz^/z'o defediva are, i, 21 nnro^. Job 42, 10 wy-i for >in^5>?.. Ex. 33, 13 ^T^ for Tpi; see Ges., § 91. 2. Rem. i. 'The singular would be per- missible here (Lev. 8, 16. 25), but would not express the plurality of animals so distinctly ' (Di.). The plural here, as in Lev. 6, ^,^:^' fat pieces'. In the Levitical service the offering of the first-born of the flock and their fat portions is enjoined ; cf. Num. 18, 17. y®';'1. Impf. Qal from r\-<^^, apocopated from njJB'':, W.^W.; cf. Ges., § 75. Rem. i. 3 a, b, c ; so "in^ from nnm in ver. 5. The verb nvc' is rare in prose. 5. '^'^ "lIT'l. So 18, 30. 32. 31, 36, and often. I. Either 51K may be understood, ' it {anger) was hot for Kain' or IL mn may be taken impersonally, ' it was hot to Kain! On this impersonal use of the 3rd perf. sing., cf. Ges., § 137. 2'; M. R.,§i24. 7. Render, 'Is there not, if thou doest well, lifting up? and if thou doest not well, at the door sin croucheth; and towards thee is its desire, hut thou oughtest to rule over it'. HNE' (for nKb* inf. cstr, of NB'J, cf. Ges., § 76. 2 a) must be explained from the phrase D''3S ^Vl—' to lift up {one's own) face,' the E 50 GENESIS, opposite of D''JS IPS] in verse 6 ; so Tuch, Ke., Del., and Di. : compare also the usage of language in Job lo, 15. 11, 15. 22,26. Lifting \ip o^ the face =' cheer/ieiness, joy;' falling of the face, ' sadness or moroseness.' The Vss. render variously. LXX has oiiK iav 6pdS)S 7rpoa-evcyKr}t, opdas 8e ^17 dieXrjs, ^fiapres fjirixao-ov, possibly connecting HNB' with nxbD 43, 34, and taking nns in the sense of dividing, and perhaps reading }*3"1 riNDn ; cf. their rendering of flT in Job 11, 19. Frankel, Einf., p. 67, considers that this translation refers to some proverb current at the time the translation was made. Pesh. has, ^=r )4|.- U»r^i iii^rJi Jo ]^=^ ta*l\r)» ' Behold if thou doest well ihou receivest; and if thou doest not well, at the door sin croucheth,' taking riNB' in the sense of receiving ; so Vulg. ' Nonne si bene egeris recipies, sin auiem. male, statim in forihus peccatum aderit' but this is not in keeping with the context. Onq. has, P''?nB'; ^'l^'ij? a'D'in-DN vh\\. NpQn''Nj5 -TT}-^ nit?: nxtpn n^t di''^ -jnaij? 3''pin n^ dni ij^, i> pnw; 3inri-DX1 ainn-t<)-DN llfO 'if thou doest thy work well thou wilt be pardoned; but if thou doest not thy work well, for the day of judgment thy sin is laid up, ready to take ven- gence upon thee, if thou dost not repent; but if thou repentest thou shall be forgiven; paraphrasing, but taking DNb' in the sense "forgive:' this rendering of Onqelos' is also out of harmony with the context. yai riNtan. ■ sin is at the door (cf Prov. 9, 14) a lurker! Sin is compared to a ravenous beast lying in wait for its prey ; perhaps a lion is here intended (cf. the Arabic name for the lion ^jAJi\ 'the Her in wait'); cf i Pet. 5, 8. Sin being personified is viewed as masc, so we have p"i, and the masc. suffixes in inplK'n and U; cf. Ges., § 147. Rem. 2 ; M. R., § 135- 4a; Ewald, § 318 a. See also Kalisch, Heb. Gram., I- §77- 13- CHAP. 4, VERS. 8-IO. 51 8. "i:n \y -|D«''r LXX, Itala, Pesh., Vulg., Sam, Targ. Jer. have given in their translations mbTI n3^J, which does not stand in the Mass. text. Frankel, Einfl., p. 55, objects to n373 on the ground that a Hebrew would say ^^}. , not i^y??. , and regards the addition in the LXX as a gloss ; but though this is the more usual phrase, yet we have 27, 5 mb'n Vtyy i?'') ; Ruth 2, 2 mb'n NJ n^^N. Some MSS. note a lacuna here [NpDS] ; two expressly note no lacuna (N^3 XpDS, Wright) ; and according to Del. it is ddubtful whether the NpDS is found in the best authorities. Some (Bott., Kn.), unwilling to accept a lacuna, readnDE'''1, cf. 2 Sam. 11, 16 ' Ae laid in wait for'. Tuch, comparing Ex. 19, 25, where he takes DrripX 1DN''1 (as ION is always followed by what is said) in the sense ' Moses spake to the people what God had said to him,' ver. 2 7 (cf. Ewald, § 303 b, 2), renders, ' And Kain said it,' viz. what God had said to him. This is, according to Di., ' something psychologically quite improbable.' 131 DniTli, lit. 'In their being in the field,' i.e. 'when they were in the field! LXX, h t-w tXvai airoiis k.t.X., cf. 2, 4 DNinna and the note there. 10. n^toj^ riQ. no pointed with -^ before the guttural with -^, according to Ges., § 37. i; Dav., § 13, 'DD assumes a pointing quite like the article.' ^J3T 71p. I- 'Hark, thy brother's blood crying!' Pip] is used as an interjection, as in Jer. 10, 22. Is. 13, 4; cf Ges., § 148. I : D''pj;2f being in apposition to D^DI, Ewald, § 317 c. II. M. R., § 135. 3 c, takes it apparently as an instance of the predicate agreeing with the genitive instead of the cstr. state, as is always the case, for example, with P3 ; M. R. renders, 'The voice of thy brother's blood-drops cry! The Sam. reads pyx. D''»T= blood violently shed. E 2 53 GENESIS, II. nm^n p nn^5 "nn^. Cf.3, 14. I- ' Cursed ari thou away from the ground,' or II. ' Cursed art thou from' etc., i.e. the curse shall strike thee from the ground, cf. ver. 12. I. is adopted by Tuch and Del., II. by Ibn Ezra, Keil, Kn. The rendering ' Cursed art thou by ' is untenable, as curses are represented in the Old Testament as coming from God or man, never from the ground. The rendering 'More cursed art thou than' — though 3, 17. 8,21 may be cited in its favour — does not suit the context here; cf. ver. 14, vi^hich favours I, more stress being laid in the narrative on Kain's banishment than on the unfruitfulness of the soil, or on the difference in the curses laid on Kain and the ground. rr-Q n« nn^iD liyi^. Cf. is. 5, 14 ntra: ^\f!o na^mn p^ pn ■h'h rT'S myai. 12. T\T\ f)Dn \?0. The jussive with \h is rare, cf. 24, 8. Joel 2, 2. Ez. 48, 14. Ewald, § 320 a. i; Driver, § 50. Obs. riTO. Cf. Job 31, 39 in^N nna nx. "IJ*1 VI . The LXX paraphrased to reproduce the paro- nomasia, (TTivav Kcii Tpijiav; Hier., ' vagus et profugus! 13. Nto3Q ■'Diy hT\^, Mi.' Greater is my punishment than bearing,' i.e. 'my punishment is too great to bear! fO before the inf cstr., as in Ps. 40, 6 nsDD IDSJT. i Kings 8, 64 pop pir= '«■«,' including its consequence, punishment, which is represented as a burden heavy to bear ; cf Is. 24, 20. Ps. 38, 5. i^itoi, inf cstr. with the 3 retained, Ges., § 76. 2 a ; cf Num. 20, 21 |ri3 and Gen. 38, 9 "ini, by the side of the more usual form nri. The Vss. mostly render, 'My transgression is greater than forgiving; i.e. 'too great to be forgiven', which is gram- matically possible, but not so suitable here, as in ver. 14, Kain speaks of his punishment, not with a view to its removal CHAP. 4, VERS. 1 1 -1 5. ^^ through the forgiveness of his offence, but with a desire that it should be mitigated. 14. ^t^JJQ ^'2 = '- every one that findeth me^, YA..' my finder! The participle may either govern its case like the verb, or may stand as a substantive in the cstr. state followed (as here) by a suffix or a genitive; cf. Ges., § 135. i; M. R., § 121; cf also § 80. 2 a and Gen. 32, 12 ^nx N"i^ Uimens eum,' 23, 10. 18 1-1"^ lytJ' ''X3; Ex. I, 4 apy ipfi >KV\ Comp. note on 4, 2. 15. 'j^p 3"in 75, casus absolutus, 'Every one that slayeth Kain, he (Kairi) shall be avenged'' (cf. ver. 24); or 'vengeance shall be taken,' so Kn. ; and this is perhaps preferable, the change of subject involved in the first way being a little harsh, though perhaps supported by ver. 24. \'\> jnn b^ = ' every one, or any one, that killeth,' is virtually a hypothetical sentence, ' i/ any one kills Kain;' cf Ges., § 145. 2. Rem.; Ewald, § 357 c (Prov. 23, 24. I Sam. 2, 13, cited by Gesenius, are some- what different, the apodosis being introduced by 1. Job 41, 18 is a better parallel). □''Pi^H2J='j«Z'^«/o/rf;'so DTiyanN, 2 ^sm. 12, 6, 'four/old;' see Ges., § 97. Rem. i. It may be interpreted, with Tuch, as meaning, Kain's murder shall be avenged with a vengeance seven times greater than the vengeance taken on Abel's; sevenfold meaning, as in Prov. 24, 16, ' manifold,' ' many times! Dp'^ does not mean 'shall be punished, shall suffer punish- ment^ so perhaps LXX, i'ma eKBiKov/Mva jrapaKva-ei, but 'shall be avenged;' cf Ex. 21, 21. mN ipV miT' DiZJ"'!. The niN was given to Kain for his protection, and not as a token of the truth of what God had said, for Kain did not express any doubt as to the truth of what he had been told, and stress is rather laid in the 54 GENESIS, narrative on Kain's immunity from death in the event of any one attacking him. rp7 Ciy^V ' And gave him a sign! \'<\h=^' /or Kain's pro- lection,' rather than 'on Kain,' which would require 75? or 2, cf Ex. 10, 2. Is. 66, 19. What this niN was, cannot be determined ; some have conjectured that Kain had a mark set on his forehead, perhaps a horn; others (Haitsma quoted by Di., p. 95) an inscription set somewhere on his person, commencing with ^3, and ending with Dp'; but there is nothing in the narrative to throw any Hght on the nature of the niX given to Kain. The LXX have (dero Kipws 6 Gcds (rr]fi.€iou ra KaiV; Pesh. ^jtOa )l( n^ ; Onq. ]\Pj " ''^E'1 "131 Nnx. in^ nl3n ''n717, not iman >Th:h, because that might mean 'thai he might not smite;' cf Ges., § 121. 4. Rem. The usual order is here departed from, and the object coming after the infinitive precedes the subject; cf. Ges., § 133- 3 ; Ewald, § 307 b: see also Is. 20, i pjno WN rbm. Prov. 25, 8 •[vn inx d''bn3. h^,,, •. Two tone-syllables usually do not come together, either the first word is accented on the penult., or deprived of all accent by being connected with the second by Maqqef ; cf. Ges., § 29. 3 b ; Driver, § 100 : so i, 5 ni5''i''K-ip. 3, igcin^'bxn. 21, silsi^m. 39, 14 i:£ pn^^. 18. "TT'J7 . , . "I7W The passive verb is followed by the ace. case, as in 17, 5. 21, 5. 27, 42. 40, 20, and often; cf Ges., § 143- I a; Ewald, § 295 b; M. R., § 47. The meanings of some of the nomina propria which follow are very obscure. Tl^y may mean ' he who flees,' or ' the one who flees,' from injj, Arab. ijs. ' to flee' LXX give it by Tmbah, which is inter- ^6 GENESIS, esting as throwing light on their pronunciation of the Heb. J) ; cf. miDS;, To'/ioppa; nry, rafa; ni^ny, ro^oXia ; bif)]l-\,'Payovfj\; bii'':r\V,To6ovirj\; n»y"i, 'Pcy/ia ; see Frankel, Vorstudien, p. 112. 7t1. npi is generally used of the mother, and the Hif . Ti^n of the father; cf. 10, 8 ff. 22, 23. ■^^Sb cannot be explained from the Hebrew. In Arabic ffiU-lj = ' a strong young man;' possibly ^D^ is to be connected with this. CHAP. 4, VERS. 19-21. 57 1 9. Lamech was the first to introduce polygamy, in opposi- tion to the divine injunction in 2, 24. The names of the wives are given here because it is necessary for the understanding of the song. TXXi=' adornment;' n?y 'shade:' but these two meanings are not quite certain. ^rifij constr. of D^riB'. According to Ges., § 97. i. Rem. i, the dag. lene after a vocal shewa is due to the fact that the full form of word was QlCf^J. According to Stade, p. 216, ' DiriB* is formed after the analogy of ^Wf from tJ^OE'.' 20. The names in this verse are very obscure; cf. Di. for explanations that have been attempted. nipDI 'rn^^ IffilV Jabal was the father of those who dwelt (the sing, taken collectively) in tents, and had cattle, i. e. the first to introduce nomad life, yw is connected by zeugma with njpo; cf. Hos. 2, 20. Is. 42, 5. Josh. 4, 10. 3E''' with the ace. or gen. of the place that is dwelt in, so Ps. 22, 4 ^NIE" ni^nn aty1^• cf. Is. 33, 14, where IIV is construed with an ace. of the place dwelt in. n«pO 'possession,' then 'possession 0/ catlle,' a wider idea than fNX; it comprehends also (e.g. 26, 14. 47, 17) larger cattle^ sometimes camels and asses; cf Ex. 9, 3. Job i, 3. 21. "i;n -lIDi toCn h':) ■'is. ' The father of all those who handle harp and pipe! LXX somewhat freely, 6 KaraSfi'lat ■^aKTrjpiov Koi KiBapav. 1123, according to Ewald {Lehrbuch, § 79 d, § ii8a), who seeks to connect it with Ki6dpa, is abbreviated from 1^:3 or "i^?. According to H.W.B., 9th ed., it is from "i|3; cf. nn33, Arab. sJlIC Aramaic N"J53, N";i33, jUa; from n:3 an assumed onomatopoetic root. Josephus, Arch.,y\\. 12. 3, describes it as being ten-stringed, and says that it was touched with the plectrum, but cf. i Sam. 58 GENESIS, i6, 23. 18, 10. 19, 9. where David is said to touch it with his hand. ^y\V occurs only four times in the Old Testament ; here, Job 21, 12. 30, 31 (see Baer in loco, p. 50). Ps. 150, 4; and is taken by the LXX {Kidapav) and Pesh. Quo) as a string- instrument ; it is better to take it with Targ. Jer,, LXX in Ps. 150, and Rabb. as ='/>z)5«,' perhaps 'a shepherd^ s pipe.' In the Hebrew translation of the Aramaic parts of Daniel it is used in 3, 5. 10, 15 for iTJIBDID. 22. ty^n 73 tyt07. 'A sharpener of every kind of instru- ment of brass and iron! The A. V. takes B'Di' in a meta- phorical sense ' a sharpener^ i. e. ' instructor of every worker in brass! etc.; A. V. R. 'forger ;' Marg.'ara instructor! E'in= ' an instrument ' does not occur again in the O. T. ; the passage (i Kings 7, 14) cited in If. W.B., 9th ed., being an instance of its ordinary meaning, ' workman.' The rendering above given is that of Tuch, Del., and most moderns. Dillmann, however, in his note on the passage remarks : ' This explanation, which since Tuch is the one usually adopted, is hardly the meaning of the Massoretes, who — judging from the accent on B'Di' and the pronun- ciation K'ln (where one would rather expect ^X\) — perhaps supplied (cf Targ.?) '^X from ver. 21, 'a hammerer, {father) of every brass and iron smith.' The falling out of i^X must have been very old, as the Vss. do not give it. The LXX have acfivpoKOTros x,a\Kevs xa^Kov kw. (riSijpou, taking B'nn as a masculine, so Vulg. ' malleator etfaber in cuncta opera aeris etferri,' sup- porting to some extent Dillmann's view. Onq. paraphrases N^na^i mn: nyyv "J^ir^a^ pniil, but apparently did not view {ynn as= ' =^ 'on account of;' cf M. R., § 51. 4 ; Ges., § 154. 3 e ; see Num. 16, 34 xh\^. The perfects may best be taken, with the Vss., as real per- fects, and not as perfects of certainty. Lamech has killed men and will not, should necessity occasion it, hesitate to kill others. Jewish fancy narrates that Lamech killed Kain (tJ'''N) and Tubal Kain (1/.)). But only one act is intended, the repetition being due to the parallelism common in Hebrew poetry. 6o GENESIS, The song is probably a triumphal song on the invention of war weapons. Lamech boasts that if Kain would be avenged sevenfold, surely he, with his instruments, would be able to take a far greater vengeance (seventy-sevenfold). For a mere wound inflicted on him, he has punished the inflicter with death ; and in the possession of his weapons he feels himself superior to his ancestors, and able to dispense with divine protection. The poetical words ptxn and mox and the parallelism which is observed throughout the three verses are noticeable. 25. rW=Sa/z, Setzling, and then Ersatz, 'substitute.' '^7"n>2J ''Id. Qameg remains, notwithstanding the Maqqef, and is on this account marked with Metheg; see Ges., § 16. 2b; cf § 9, p. 44. I d. pp ijnn 13 ; cf. on 3, 19. 26. Kin D3 n®7l. The pronoun is repeated separately, to emphasize the noun; cf Ges., § 121. 3; Ewald, § 311 a; M. R., § 72. I. Rem. a; so 10, 21 Nin M li''' DE'^1. UJ12N = 'OTa«,' from B':x 'to be weak;' or from E':K=the Arabic ^j^\ 'to attach oneself to,' so animal sociabile. ^Xy^T\ Tt^. The indeterminate 3rd pers. sing.; see Ges., § 137- 3d; M. R., § 124: cf Lam. 5, 5 \h mm nV. The LXX have oItos ^ma-ev, perhaps reading bnn and HT; cf Frankel, Einfluss, p. 41, on their reading. Onq. has P^a rT NCB^a HN^V^D NB-JX r\'h'^ in\>. 5. "i:n nn^ ^iy^ h'2. The predicate always, in the case of b3, agrees with the genitive, and not with the noun in the construct state: cf. Ges., § 148. i, note; M.R., § 135. 3a. n3ty n-th^ ri]© r\m jrUJn . The noun n^c:; repeated with the ten; cf Ges., § 120. 3 ; M. R., § 97. Rem. c. ^n is perf from I'n, as in 3, 22. . 6. n:C? n«Q1 D^ity taan. The noun repeated with CHAP. 5, VERS. 1-24. 6^ the lesser number (from 3-9 inclusive) in the pi., and with the greater in the singular; Ges., § 120. 3; M. R., § 97. Rem. c. 22. riN "Jlin '^Vnn^l ; so Noah, 6, 9, walked with God; cf. a similar use of the Qal in Mic. 6, 8. Mai. 2, 6. nx ^pnn^ is used of confidential intercourse with God, a closer relation- ship to God than is implied in 'walking before God' (17, i), or, 'walking after God' (Deut. 13. 5); cf. i Sam. 25, 15 of the intercourse between David's followers and Nabal's servants. The LXX have here Evripia-Trja-e 8e "Evax T<» eeS, perhaps to avoid an anthropomorphic idea; cf.Ecclus. 44, 16. 49, 14, and Heb. II, 5 nicTTei 'Evmx. Onq. paraphrases tu QeSiv, on which Hieron., Quaes/, ed. Lagarde, p. 11, says, ' Deos intelligens sandos sive angelos;' Symm., 01 vloi t5>v Bwaa-TevovTcov (agreeing with the old Jewish view) ; Itala (from LXX), ' angeli Dei;' Vulgate, 'filii Dei.' 3. Trn I'lT' «7 . ''nn is rather the breath of life which Yahweh Elohim (2, 7) breathed into man's nostrils when he created Jiim (' the principle of physical and spiritual life,' Di.), than the Holy Spirit (as the Targg. of Ps.-Jon., Jer. ; Symm., etc.) working in man, and judging him; for the determination on Yahweh's part to deprive man of His spirit, as the latter half of the verse shows, really means depriving him of life. ^'il^ is not jussive, but (as in ^5^3; from ^3, and takes it as inf. cstr. from JJE'=n3t5', with the affix of the third perg. m. pi. (cf. Ges., § 6y, note 3 ; Ewald, § 238 b), and renders, ' On account of their error or transgression he {mankind) is flesh.' Against this it may be urged (a) that Nin is masc. sing., while DJty has the third pi. m. affix; cf, however, Ewald, § 319a, where other instances of a similar Enallage numeri are to be found : (3) that J3E' is scarcely the word that would be expected in this connection, and it is here hardly general enough : (if) that the reading with qame9 is not so well attested as that with pathach; cf. Del., p. 195. The text is probably corrupt: but the emendations that have been proposed are not satis- factory : e. g. D3 nB'Nn, or Dtysn, M ^"h. The Vss. give— LXX, fiia TO iivai avToiit crapKas j Pesh. 001 );"»->' '^ ct k «o • Onq. N"!^? pytj'l ^na ; Vulg. ' guia caro est' all .expressing the sense ' For that.' "n:n HKD T'Q"' Vnl. 'So Ms days shall be; or 'w let his days be,' etc., i.e. he shall have a respite of a hundred and twenty years. This seems better than the other explanation, that human life should be limited to a hundred and twenty years ; for many post-diluvian Patriarchs reached a far higher age, e.g. Abraham, 2,5, 7; and it cannot be regarded as a general statement to which there might be exceptions, as the exceptions are too numerous (all the post-diluvian Fathers, from Shem to Terach, reach a higher age than the limit here assigned; cf 11, 10 et seq.). 4- Q'^S'^Din. According to the ancients (LXX, Pesh., CHAP. 6, VER. 4. 69 Onq., Sam., Saad.), a name for giants; cf. Num. 13, 33 D55'1 pi]} 1^3 Q^i'''£33n 13''^{^. No clear etymology can be found in Hebrew ; perhaps the word was derived from a Canaanitish dialect. It has been connected with the root JJEIJ '■to fall:' thus many of the Fathers consider these D''?' "It^N. ' TAe men of repute;' cf. Num. i6, 2 DB' ''E'JN. A word in the construct state cannot take the article, so it is defined by the article being attached to the following genitive, Ges., § in. i ; M. R., § 76. N. B. Whether such a combination as OtJ'n ''B'JN means I. ' The men of repute', or II. 'Men of the repute^ or III. ' The men of the repute' can only be decided by the context. Hebrew has only one way of defining the first, or the second, or both parts of a construct state, and following genitive combination. 5. rFST is accented mth-a, and so is an adj., and not the perfect fem., from 3D"), which would be mil' el. ■a^ nlntynO -IJJ"' h'2. 'Every form of the thoughts of his heart,' "Vt, I. 'form, shape,' physically; II. tropically applied to what is fashioned in the mind, imagination ; cf. 8, 21. Is. 26, 3. The LXX paraphrase nas tw biavoeirai iv Tj KapSla, on which cf. Frankel, Einfluss, p. 10. yi pi ' only evil', i. e. ' utterly, hopelessly, nothing hut evil :' cf a similar use of pn in Deut. 28, 33 pxil p)m p•^^, Is. 28, 19 njjir p-i n^ni. 6. 137 7K 32Jj;n''1. 'And was pained in his heart: LXX, Km 8i(mri6Ti. Onq. n'n^iv^s tinspn nan'-af) [ri-ip''»3] -ioni 'And spake hy his Word, to break their strength according to his will: Ps.-Jon. nn.D'OS pn^^l? prrNI < And disputed with his Word concerning them;' so Sam. and Targ. Jer. All inten- tional, in order to avoid an anthropomorphic idea. 7. n!0n3= usually ' tame^ 'domestic animals ;' here used of 'tame and wild animals', as in ver. 20; 7, 23. 8, 17. 9. n-i-rVin rh)A. cf. on 2, 4. D^an p^l2J I2j^« nj. Render, «iVoa>4 k;^^ a« upright CHAP. 6, VERS. 5-14. 7 1 man, perfect among his contemporaries ;'' according to the accents and the order of the words. 10. Q''wl ntiJT'tl?. Masc. nouns take the numeral in the fem. form, and vice versa; see Ges., § 97; Dav., § 48. The number 2 agrees in gender .with the vford which it enumerates, and is an exception to lliis rule. The numerals from 2-10 are substantive, inx, fem. nriN, one is an adj. 11. D^n yit^n Kbom. Verbs of abounding and wanting take in Hebrew the accusative, Ges., § 138. 3b; M. R., § 36 ; cf. ver. 13 DDH ptin, a secondary formation of niN ' to be hollow'), and Dietrich, Abhandl. zur Semit. Wortforschung, p. 33 (who regards the word as Semitic, and as standing ' in lebendigem zusammen- 73 GENESIS, hange' (in actual connection) with nnx -a reed;' comparing the derivation of nnn from n3N with those of ??n, ^^>s,|l, from bax; Qin, from DSn; in all of which the N is sup- pressed), are untenable. The LXX here have kiBcotov; in Exodus dtptv; the Vulg. has ^ arcani' here, and in Exodus 'fiscellam;' Targg. tOjia-n, Syr. R'sls^o, which is the Greek "ID3 ^2J^ only occurs here. h'''^^=' ivood' when cut down, 'logs,' as opposed to y)), 'trees' growing; so H^n, and D'lsn, sing.^ wheat' growing, and ^\.' wheat' when cut down, 'grain;' fjOD 'silver' in general, D''Qp3 'pieces of silver,' Ges., § io8. 4. Rem. i ; Stade, § 311 c. "IDS, connected with n''iQJ sulphur and nS3 ///c^, is a resinous coniferous tree (Nadelbaum), perhaps the old name for the cypress, which was used by the Phoenicians for ship- building, and is elsewhere called t^nn. "ISJ only occurs here. The LXX, Itala, and Vulg. did not understand the meaning of the word, and resorted to conjecture. The LXX have ^liKaiv TeTpayavav ; the Itala, ' ligna quadrata;' the Vulg. 'ligna laevigata'. Onq. and Ps.-Jon. render 'cedar trees;' the Syriac has )>a^? \ai^, which Walton renders ' de ligno viminis;' but this is doubtful. Possibly it should be rendered 'juniper wood;' see Low, Aram. PJlanzennamen, s. v. □"^ip. 'In cells shall thou make the ark;' D''Jp being ace. of manner, after a verb of making; cf. Ex. 38, 3 V^Ja b'2 n^^'^3 n't^J? ' all its vessels he made brass' i. e. so that they consisted of brass; Deut. 27, 6 nntD riN njnn niD^'B' DiJ^N mn^• cf.Ewald, §284. lb; Ges., § 139. 2 end; M.R., §45. 5b. n"1D31 . . . ntyy. The perf. with waw conv. in con- tinuation of an imperative ; cf Driver, § 1 12 (i) ; M. R., § 24. I a; cf. 8, 17. Lev. 24, 14 UDD1 . . . b^'pD.T riN N^iin. 2 Sam. CHAP. 6, VERS. 15, 16. 73 II, 15 nnae'i . , . ni-iix nx nn. maai has the tone thrown forward on to the last syllable, after the waw con v.; cf. Driver, §§ 106 and no; Dav., § 23. 3b; M. R., § 23. 1D3 is a de- nominative from "iSiD. See Ges., § 52. 2; Dav., § 26. 3. Rem. a. "1231. The article is used here with a material which was well known; cf. Ges., § 109. Rem. i b; M. R., § 68. 15- ntoi>n lUJ^* ntl, lit. 'au /s what thou shalt make it;' i. e. ' this is how thou shalt make it.' 16. "iniJ, prop. = 'light,' and then '■ an inlet for light,' so ' window.' So all Vss. except the LXX, and most modems, nnx is regarded as a feminine, so p?n, Ez. 41, 16. 26; cf. Ges., § 107. 4 a or c; Ewald, § 174 d (7), who classes nnv, as fem., among the nouns denoting places in which man is wont to move, or things which man uses, comparing nsn ' a court,' Ez. 10, 4. 5 ; nsriD ' camp,' in Gen. 32, 9 ; 3im ' a street,' Dan. 9, 25. It is not necessary to render ~\rfi collectively 'windows;' cf. 8, 6; nnx as opposed to |l?n is merely an opening for light, |1?n being a lattice-work window, which could be opened or shut at will. rhv^V:t r^h-Zn nn« b.«1, either l.' up to a cubit (not further) shalt thou complete it from above .- ' so Kn., Del. ; or II. ^ Up to a cubit above (upwards) shalt thou complete it' Di.; both being grammatically possible, as xh'Sxh'O may either mean ' above', or 'from above.' According to I. the window in the side of the ark would have the space of a cubit between it and the roof. Dillmann considers the opening to have been a cubit high, and to have run round the four sides of the ark, being interrupted merely by the beanjs supporting the roof; so that there was really a continuous row of nnX; and claims ni'3 as suiting this meaning. Delitzsch's view is 74 GENESIS, open to the objection that it leaves the size of the "inv undefined, and one window in one side would scarcely suffice for the lighting of the whole ark. Dillmann's view is possibly less objectionable, but it is questionable whether the Hebrew text can bear the meaning he puts upon it. The text seems merely to say that a window or opening was to be made in the ark, its place being left undefined, and this opening was to be continued until it reached a distance of a cubit from the roof (jOVo^'O from above), or to the height of a cubit (n?5?0PD above, upwards). The opening may have been in the roof, for the absence of a notice about the covering of such a light-hole may be explained on the ground that the narrative says very little about the construction of the window. Tuch's explanation that the window was intended for Noah's cell, while the animals were in darkness, cannot be derived from the text as it stands, nor his view that the window was a cubit square. 17. i^"'!!llD ^JDn ^3NV The participle as future {futurum instans), which it represents as already ' beginning;' frequently with run precedingit; cf. Ges., § 134. 2 b. c£ Rem. i; M.R., § 14. Rem. a; Driver, § 135. 3. □''TD 7in?2n nb*. '^oX'theJloodofwaterslliViXva.-i.Y^.'the flood [even] waters^ So Ps. 60, 5 rhvnU pi, lit. ' wine, reeling.' W^12. On the subst. in apposition, cf. Ges., § 1 18. 3 ; M. R., § 76. Rem. b; Ewald, § 287h; Driver, §. 188. The emen- dation 0*9 is unnecessary and unsuitable. yij in the Pent, and Josh, is peculiar to P. 18. in^ipni. n^-in Dipn and nna \r\:, 9, 12 are marks of P. 19. '^nri; cf on ver. 4. mpil ")3t, characteristic of P. CHAP. 6, VER. 17— CHAP. 7, VER. 4. 75 20. ini''D7'. See on i, 20. E'OT and K'DT belong to the language of P. 21. nDDt^l . . . ^hj^p ; cf. on ver. 14. rh^ti is another characteristic of P. 22. nUJJ^ ]3 is rare outside P. 7. 1. 'in^^ yy\- Cf. the fuller description of Noah's family in P, 6, 18. 7, 7. 13. 8, 16. 18. 2. ny^tU njOC?. 'Seven hy seven,' i.e. 'i5)/ sevens;' see Ges., §§ 108. 4, 120. 5 ; M. R., § 72. 2 ; Ewald, § 313 a; cf Zech. 4, 2. Num. 3, 47. 17, 17 riDD nt3D 'roi^, /'orf/ 'a rcif each;' 2 Kings 17, 29 MJ ''1J 'nation, nation' i.e. 'every single nation:' cf. also Mark 6, 39 av^ivouia a\i\m6_J^ 'to he fresh, new', prop. ^ to be freshly plucked'. 'That the olive tree is found in Armenia, Strabo shows, xi. 14. 4 : and that it also thrives under water is attested by Theophr., Hist.pl. iv. 8 ; Plin., N.H., xiii. 50.' Tuch in Di. 12. bn'i'^l is impf NiP. from bnv In Ez. 19, 5 (the only other example of a Nifal form of this verb) we have n^rtj. Ges., § 69. Rem. 5, explains it as an instance of the Nifal of a verb i"a, written with 1 instead of 1; cf nn*;, Ex. 19, 13. CHAP. 8, VERS. 8-ai. 8[ I Sam. 13, 8 isn"! Ktb.; so Ewald, § 140 b. Stade possibly is right in emending to PH^M; see §§115 note, and 504 a. 13. ptUNIi. See on ver. 5 (inN3); cf. Ges., § 120. 4 and the note on 7, i r. 16. Render, 'Go thou forth from the ark with thy wife', etc. Notice the difference between the English and Hebrew idiom. English says, ' Go forth with' Heb. ' Go forth, thou and thy wife^ 17. fjlj^l. Cf. the note on 7, 21. ^'T\yD\ , . . b<2in. Cf. the note on 6, 14. The Ktb. ^5Vin is the regular imper. Hif. from *5X'', ''Xin arising out of f'-fin ; see Ges., § 24. 2 b; Dav., § 9. Rem. b. One fails to see why the Massoretes should prefer the irregular Kri NX^n to the regular Ktb. Other instances of the Hif il of verbs ''"s retaining their '' as a consonant when we should expect i_-_ or i, are Hos. 7, 12 DT?!^; Prov. 4, 25 ^"IK'J!; i Chr. 12, 2 D''J''O^D; cf. Ges., § 70, 2. Stade, § 120, considers all the instances cited (except i Chr. 12, 2) suspicious. Cf. Ps. 5, 9 where, as here, for the Ktb. "ityin the Kri "i^'^n is substituted. 21. nnijn nn m^ "^"^ m''V n^i is impf. Hif. from rti, shortened from nn^^ after the waw conv. ; cf. Ges., § 72. Rem. 7 ; Stade, § 499 f. nn'']nn'^"1. ^ The odour of satisfaction'. nfTiJ is a similar formation to K^^*^, the only other instance of this formation of nouns; Stade, § 233. Ewald, § 156 b, forms TWfl from the verbal stem nnij, and cites as a third instance of the same formation liT'3, Job 15, 24, which Stade has apparently over- looked (see § 216, however). The niT'J nn is the pleasant odour which rose up from the sacrifice. In the technical language of the sacrifice (Opfersprache) it is the common expression used for the favourable acceptance of an offering, G 8a GENESIS, or rather of the sentiments and wishes to which the sacrifice gives expression (Di.). 117 7t^='/o himself^ thus a paraphrase for the reflexive pronoun: for other methods of supplying the reflexive pr. in Heb., see Ges., §124.1; M. R., § 89 b. The LXX para- phrase here with diavorjOeis, Symm. has erne Kipios npos iavTov, Onq. has nnn'-pa l\ ^10^!1, 'F. spake by his Word; so Ps.-Jon. The Pesh. follows the Heb. text with o»^^. The same idiom recurs 24, 45. 27, 41. 22. The composite subject when /bllowed hy its predicate, takes the latter in the plural ; when the predicate precedes, it may stand in the sing.; of. the note on 7, 7. I^^pl J?"1t are ' ike seed time and harvest^ dividing the year into two halves, which are described as ' seed time and harvest; also ' cold and heat; which roughly correspond to the j;"it and "I'Sp respectively. ' The summer and winter ' again correspond to the on and "ip. The season or half-year, which is called jTit, fl"in, and ~\p, began possibly with the fifteehth of Tisri, and ended on the fifteenth of Nisan ; while the other half of the year, called T'Sp, pp, and Dn, extended from the fifteenth of Nisan to the fifteenth of Tisri. The Jewish expositors, following Rashi, consider the seasons mentioned here as six, each of two months' duration. The punctuation is notice- able : Onj -ip, fiinj )'''p, rhh) QV, in pairs, the second member of each pair being connected by 1 with pretonic qame9. 9. 2. DSnm D5b^"11D"l. Render, ' And the fear of you, and the dread of you' The suffixes are objective. The genitive in Heb. may be either subjective or objective, the latter embracing CHAP. 8, VER. 23— CHAP. 9, VER. 4. 83 many difFerent shades of meaning, often being represented in English by a preposition, e.g. 3, 24 d"nn fJJ "Jll, see the note there, and cf. Ges., § 121. 5; M. R., § 78; Ewald, § 286 b; 16, 5. 27, 13. 50, 4. Previous to the flood, the beasts lived at peace with man, and without fear, now they must fear and dread him (Di.). "wi nt^N h':i1=^with all where- with the ground swarms, and with all the fishes of the sea, into your hand they are given'. The 1 of ' concomitance,' as in Ex. 10, 9. 15, 19. i Kings 10, 2. Jer. 11, 19, and often. "ItiJf^ (ace, see on 6, 11), as in Lev. 20, 25 E'Din nB'N ^331 HDlxn. DDT'l. D?!^ out of 031: (cf. Vnx for Vns, from D^HN), Stade, § 81 b; Ges., § 27. Rem. 2 a. 'Into your power they are given,' a power even over their lives; cf. Lev. 26, 25. Deut. I, 27, etc. [misquoted r, 57, Kn. in Di,]. 3. Tl ^^in "^ffiN, YH, 'which, it is alive.' NID does not take the place of the copula ' is,' but resumes the relative nB^N. Compare ver. 18 i3N ^51^ DH; 2, 14. 19. Cf. Driver, § 199 end, with Ges., § 121.2; M.R., §156 a, where IB'N is described as the link connecting the two sentences, ' every creeping thing ' and 'it is alive;' so Num. 9, 13. 14, 8. 27. 35, 31. i Sam. 10, 19. n73t<7. ni'3N always occurs in this particular phrase, and always with another dative (except Jer. 12, 9). n73K (as distinguished from ^'2% ^3X0, and ni'i3N)=bN^ generalized; a thing that is given on a particular occasion ?3.S?, is given for a continuance '1,^3X^; see Prof. Driver, /(7ar«. of Phil., No. 22, p. 217. 4. IJDT 1t2JD]l. y='with; as in 32, 11 '^p^l 'with my staff;' Ps. 42, II TIIOVW nsil 'with crushing in my hones: IDT is an explanatory app. to ItTSJ, defining it more closely, G 2 84 GENESIS, M. R., § ^i. 2 a. The LXX with their ttXjjv Kpea^ iv alfian ^jfvxijs seem to have transposed the words, and read K'SJ D"!?. Frankel, Einfluss, p. 53 note, explains it by the Halacha, which refers the command forbidding the ' Blutgenuss ' chiefly to the blood that flows out and causes death {Kerithoth, 20 b 11 HNXV K'QjntJ' D1 'the blood wherein the life goes out'). The blood is not actually the life itself, but through the blood the life becomes apparent to the senses, and is conceived as existing; cf. Lev. 17, 11. 14. Deut. 12, 23. 5. WntySD':' QDm nt^. 'But the Hood o/ your lives (i. e. belonging to) will I require; from the hand of every living creature will I require it : and from the hand of man, from the hand of each one's brother will I require the life of man' Tuch and others render, 'your blood for your lives,' i.e. 'for their protection ;' ta^TlB'Sji' htmg dat. commodi ; so Deut. 4, ig WntyBJ^ 1t<» hrr\my\, and josh. 23, 1 1; see Ewald, § 2i7d,a; but this is not suitable to the context : in 4 the Ql and B'SJ are practically identical. Better n3''nB'Dji3=' belonging to your souls;' so the LXX, to i/ieTepov at/M tSiv yj/vxa" vjimv, Vulg. ' sanguinem enim animarum vestrarum' Pesh. .oa-asj fiso yCLafcCi^j; cf Ges., § 115. 2. Other renderings, which are not so good, are Del.'s, 'according to your souls,' as ver. 10, defining distributively the whole to which the part belongs ; or ' whoever' s soul it is, to whom it belongs; ' or 'your blood as your souls,' i. e. ' so far as your souls are contained in it,' according to vers. 4. 5b ^ as in Job 39, 16 {as though not her own); Ewald, § 217 d. D^OI. is thinned from 030% Ges., § 93. 2. Rem. 3. IT'n 7^ "T''0. 'From the hand of every beast.' According to Ex. 21, 28f., the ox that gored any one, so that he or she died, was to be stoned to death (i)pD* ijIpD). CHAP. 9, VERS. 5-IO. 85 ITl^^ ©"^^5 1''12='/rom the hand of each one's brother! Inverted for the more usual ITlN TiD B'''N, as Zech. ^,10 VriN ty^N njni ; cf. )jp in Aramaic, and dWrjXav in Greek, and contrast Zech. 11, 7 where the usual order is observed (inj)"i "f^ B'''N); cf. Ewald, § 301b; Ges., § 124. 2. Rem. i. 4; M. R., § 94. Rem. a; 15, 10. 42, 25. 35. Pesh., Vulg., Sam. apparently corrected the text with VnKl B'iN. E'lN TiD Vns is co-ordinate with blK TiD. 6. C^b^i. The LXX dvA rod m/iaTos avTov, either reading □13 or confusing in sound Q1N3 and D12 ; compare their rendering of pb as though it were = p i6, viz. 4, 15. 30, 15. mt^3 . The 3 must be regarded as 2 of instrument ; cf. Hos. I, 7. I Sam. 28, 6. Ps. 18, 3, but this is not usual; passives in Heb. are generally construed with JD of the agent, as in ver. 11 iDD . . . m3\ or b, as in 14, 19 ]vbl) i'^i' Tn3; cf. Ges., § 143. 2 ; M. R., § 49. 4 and §51.3. Rem. a. □Tl^t^ CD7i? is an expression characteristic of P. 9. □"'pD '^J3n ■'ib^T. When the pronoun precedes run, yx is the form used ; when it follows, OJN is preferred ; see Journ. Phil., No. 22, p. 226. r\^"11 D''pn. nnn, when used with Qipn, always has a suffix; the phrase nni Dipn denotes the perpetuation of a covenant already, at least in idea, existing, rather than the formation of one altogether new, which is expressed by nna ma; %ee.Journ. Phil., I.e. DDi>"lt n^il D3nt^ ' withyou andwiihyour seed; a phrase characteristic of P. 10. rrrin tiJO:: ^3 nt^. The adj. alone defined, the noun being regarded as sufficiently definite through the pre- ceding i)D; cf on I, 21. 86 GENESIS, '^i^IJT' /DQ ^ all whalever ;' p denoting the gmus ex quo, the general to which the particular partitively belongs, as in 6, 2. 7, 22; Ewald, § 278c. h, as in 23, 10 ''Na h^b = 'wilh respecl to,' etc.; of. Lev. 16, 21. 11, 42 ; Ewald, § 310 a (7 with a generalizing and particularizing force). 13. '^innj. ' I set,' as in i, 29 Tini fUn ; cf. Driver, § 14 a; Ewald, § 135 c. 14- X^V ""ilVn. Inf. Pi'el with the prep. 3, and suffix of the I St pers. sing. 3 is pointed with -^, as the doubling of the letter has fallen away; cf. Ges., § 10. 2. Rem.; the more regular form of the inf Pi'el would be ''J35J3. j_33^ is a denom. of [JV- Render, ' when I cloud my clouds;' the apodosis begins withver. 15, nn^nJI being a continuation of the inf; see Ges., § 132. 3. Rem. 2 ; Driver, § 118. 18. □"'t^IJ^n. Here the participle must be rendered as past, ' those who went out; equivalent to IKS'" nE'N, but neater ; cf Ges., § 134. 2 c; Driver, § 135. i; so 13, 7 atyi IK; 19, i ■y^ 'sat; or 'was sitting;' 37, 7. 41, 1-3. 42, 23. 19. Y~lNn 73 n:JD3 n'r^^ttl. 'And out 0/ these was the whole earth overspread: nvs: is a lightened form of the 3rd pers. fem. perf, Nif. sing, of }'^a=}"ia; cf i Sam. 13,11. Is- 33) 3 (1^23); Ewald, § 193 c (who compares n3D3 from 33D; nDp3 from DUp; ni?3: from ^■^:i); Ges., § 67, note 11. 20. Vr2''T . . . n] hiVr\. 'R.tnder,' And Noah the husband- man iegan and planiedl So most moderns; cf Ges., § 142. 4 with 3 a. Some, however (Tuch, Kn.), appealing to Ewald, § 298 b (cf. M. R., § 43 a) and i Sam. 3, 2 nina lijnn— which is scarcely parallel— render, '^7Z(/iVoa/5 began to be a husband- man, and planted;' but this would require riDlX B'''N instead of nmxn ty^N; cf 25, 27 tH^ tpiN (for M. R.'s explanation, § 76 b. Rem. a, is hardly satisfactory), and what is noticeable CHAP. 9, VERS. 13-26. 87 in the narrative is, not that Noah began to be a husbandman, but that he began the cultivation of the vine. 21. riffi"'1. The imperf. apoc. Qal of nntJ' without a help- ing vowel ; see Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 c and §28.4; Stade, §§ 70 a. 2. 2, loi c, 489 b. riTTlt^ is the older form for i''j?fj. The n is preserved in Arabic, and on the Moabite stone, e.g. 1. 5 nV"iX31 n3= insiii 13; 1.7nn''ani na=in''331 la; other examples in lines 9. 10. 19. 25. niriN always has a Kri, Ipns; cf. Ges., § 91. i. Rem. 2. ri" for r occurs, however, elsewhere in the O. T., and is by no means confined to the oldest books. 22. on may be called the father of Canaan here with reference to ver. 25. li!^"], sc. '?■/;' see Ges., § 121. 6. Rem. 2; cf. 38, 17. 23. n70ton. ' The upper garment^ also used (e.g. by the poor) as a covering by night; cf. Ex. 22, 26. Deut. 24, 13. 24. 13''''T2 'from Ms wine,' i.e. his intoxication which the wine had caused, as in i Sam. i, 14. 25, 37. ]tOpn 132, i.e. ^ his younger son,' not ' his youngest,' as Japhet was the youngest of the three; cf. 5, 32. 10, i. 2. 6. 21. |t3pn grammatically can be either comparative or super- lative; cf. 1, 16 and the note there. 25. Cl^l^ ''\'2.V=' servant 0/ servants' i.e. 'meanest ser- vant;' cf. Dnityn T'tJ' ' song ofsongsl ' choicest song;' see Ges., § 119. 2. Rem.; M. R., § 81 a. Canaan is made Shem and Japhet's servant. As Noah's son Ham sinned against him, so shall he (Ham) be punished through his own son Canaan, by the curse laid upon him by Noah. The setdements of Canaan on the islands and coasts of Asia Minor were at an early date overcome by the Japhetic races (Di.). 26. 'V:h is poetical for DH^, as often; cf. Stade, § 345 c, GENESIS, note I ; Ges., § 103. 2, foot-note 2. Shem is not blessed directly, but the God of Shem (Deut. 33, 20), i.e. Shem is blessed through his God, the highest possible form of blessing. If God is to be blessed for His goodness, which is implied in blessing Him, how great must be the happiness of those who are under His protection and enjoy His favour. 27. 'May God spread out Japhet far, and may he dwell in the tents of Shem! Onq. and others (Baumg., etc.) take God as the subject to ptJ'' ; but the change of subject is awkward, and we should in this case rather expect pB''' Nini. Some again (Ges., Schr.) take DK' as meaning ' repute;' cf. 6, 4 DB? lE'JX ; but this is not suitable to the context, and Japhet could not at that date have had any opportunity of acquiring fame. Dwelling in the tents of Shem does not mean con- quest, but points to the friendly relations that should exist between the Semitic and Japhetic races; the latter participating in the honour paid the former, and sharing the religious privi- leges enjoyed by them. 10. In chapter 5 we had a list of the descendants of Adam, containing ten generations, and ending with Noah. In chapter 10 we have a continuation of the list found in chapter 5, viz. a genealogical table of the sons of Noah, and the various peoples that sprang from them. In the first verse we find the sons of Noah given in the same order as in 5, 32 ; but in verse 2 — in accordance with the custom observed in the book of Genesis, to first notice the side branches of the family tree, in order to prepare the way for mentioning the chief line — we have the order, Japhet, Ham, Shem; Ham standing next to Shem, being, through Canaan, Mizraim, and Cush, more closely allied to him than Japhet was. It should CHAP. 9, VER. 37 — CHAP. lO, VER. I. 89 be observed in these nilijin that the list of nations is by no means complete. We find no mention made of nations of a more modern origin, such as Moabites, Edomites, Ishmaelites, Keturaeans, nor of some nations, such as the Rephaim and Amalekites, who were of very ancient descent ; also we find no allusion to the Chinese and the other Mongolian races of Eastern Asia, to the Indians or Eranians, probably because they were entirely unknown in Palestine at the time of the narrator. ' In general the notice embraces the peoples who were grouped round the basin of the Mediterranean and its vicinity, the peoples of the so-called Caucasian race ' (Di.). The nations mentioned in this table are regarded as the individuals of a large family, as sons, grandsons, and great-grandsons, of a common father, e.g. just as Shem, Ham, and Japhet are Noah's sons, so the Chittim and Dodanim in ver. 4 are the grandsons of Japhet ; cf. ver. 6, Mizraim as the son of Ham ; ver. 13, Ludim as the son of Mizraim ; and (ver. 16) the similar use of the patronymics (the Amorite and Jebusite being spoken of as the children of Canaan; compare vers. 17. 18). The table falls into three chief divisions, viz. I. 2-5. The Descendants of Japhet, the Northern Races. II. 6-20. The Descendants of Ham, the Southern Races. III. 21-31. The Descendants of Shem, the Central Races. The list is repeated with some variations in i Chr. i, 4-23. For a list of works bearing on this chapter, see Dillmann's Commentary, p. 161. In the following notes — which are not intended to form a complete commentary on the chapter — Dillmann has been chiefly followed, and for fuller information his notes and the works there cited should be consulted. I. n'llT'ir). Cf. the note on 2, 4. nCI. 1 with pretonic qameg, see on i, 2. 90 GENESIS, 2-5. The Descendants of Japhet. 2. "yo^. LXX, Fa/iep, mentioned again in Ez. 38, 6 (LXX, Vo/iep), as an ally of Gog of Magog. 'Usually, since the time of Calmet, supposed to be the Cimmerii {Kipixepiot, Horn. Od., xi. 14), who inhabited the Tauric Chersonese, were driven out in the seventh century by the Scythians, and overran the Lydian kingdom in Asia Minor; finally they disappeared, but traces of their existence are still extant in names of places.' Others (Kiepert, Lagarde) consider that IDJ is Cappadocia, called by the Armenians Gamir (PI.). Josephus, Ant., i. 6. i, considers that nD3 = the raXaVai, who were formerly called VopapCi^, in Northern Phrygia. Bochart also decides for Phrygia. Saadiah explains "IDJ by iiiJ^l ' the Turks! The name is found in the Assyrian inscriptions, 'Gimirrai=those who belong to the people (Ass. land)of Gimir ;' see 'S>q}sit.,K.A.T}, p. 80. i13Q. 'The second son of Japhet must be sought for between Gomer and Media. In Ez. 38, 2. 6. 15. 39, 2 Magog appears as a remote and warlike people in the far North, having Tubal and Meschek under them, and to whom Gomer and the House of Togarma have attached themselves.' Josephus 1. c. and Hieron., Quaest. ed. Lagarde, p. 14, explain J1JD as 'the Scythians,' the people of lake Maeotis and the Caucasus, and this view is the one commonly adopted since the time of Bochart. ''ID. ' The Medes,' elsewhere mentioned in the O. T., viz. 2 Kings 17, 6. 18, II. Jer. 25, 25. 51, 11. 28. Is. 13, 17 f. 21, 2. The name is found on the Assyrian inscriptions, 'Madai' {' Ma-da-ai'); see Schrader, K.A.T?, p. 80. ]V. ' The lonians ' ('laover, 'idFoves), in the whole of the CHAP. 10, VER. 2. 91 East, up to India, the name for the Greeks ; also found on the Assyrian inscriptions of Sargon II and Sanherib ' Javnai' {' fa-av-naai'), Schv., K.A.T!^, p. 81. They are frequently mentioned in the O. T., e.g. Joel 4, 6. Ez. 27, 13. Is. 66, 19. Dan. 8, 21. 10, 20. 11, 2. "jtyDT b^in. ' Always (except Is. 66, 19, Mass. text, and Ps. 120, 5) joined together. In Ez. 32, 26 they are mentioned as having suffered severe reverses, in Ez. 27, 13 (together with Javan, possibly from Gen. 10, 2) as connected by trade with the Tyrians, whom they supplied with slaves and vessels of brass. In Ez. 38, 2 f. 39, i they are spoken of as forming the flower of the army of the Scythian king Gog, in Is. 66, 19, LXX, as distant peoples. They are usually identified with the Tibareni and Moschi, who inhabited the hill country on the south-east of the Black Sea, the Moschi between the sources of the Phasis and Cyrus, the Tibareni east of the Thermodon, in Pontus. In the Assyrian inscriptions (see Schrader, K, A. T}, p. 82 fif.) their territory extended further south, the "Tabali" {"Tibareni") up to Cilicia and the "Muski" {"Moschi") north-eastwards of the Tabali. Josephus, Ant. I.e., explains i^ain as the Iberians in the Caucasus land, and ^E>D as Mafaxa in Cappadocia (being deceived by the similarity in sound).' DTTl is mentioned nowhere else, but must, according to its position, be looked for either east of ^B>IO, or in the west, and more towards the south than yVQ. Since Josephus DITl has been usually identified with the Thracians, but Di. questions the suitability of this identification, as DT'n=the Thracians would be already included in the Gomer group. Other conjectures are Tvpj/r, Ti5/)ar, i. e. the Dniester with the people dwelling on it, the ivfiTai (Her. iv. 51); the Tvpin\voi (Tuch, Nold., Di.), who belonged to thePelasgi, and who made 93 GENESIS, themselves by their acts of piracy a terror to the islands and coasts of the Aegean Sea between Greece and Asia Minor (Her. i. 57. 94; Thuc. iv. 109); see Tuch, p. 171. 3. The sons of Gomer. WittJN, 'the first son of Gomer, is mentioned in Jer. 51, 27 together with Ararat and Minni, i.e. with North-eastern and South-eastern Armenia.' Josephus explains by 'Priyiva, who are otherwise unknown. The Ber. Rabba gives Asia; and the Jews of the Middle Ages, Germany. ' As the ending az in (phryg.) Armenian forms patronymics, and as Askanians, according to several authorities, settled in Mysia, Bithynia, and Phrygia, whose name at a later date still attached to a lake, river, and village [//. ii. 862 ff., xiii. 793, etc.], this old Askanian people must be understood,' Di. In Jeremiah the Western Armenians are intended, i.e. the Askanians, who had emigrated from Phrygia into Western Armenia, and Tuch, Ges., and Schr. consider this to be the case in the present passage. nS^'l, in I Chr. i, 6 na''T. Josephus explains by Ripheans, i.e. Paphlagonians, which Bochart seeks to support by com- paring Rhebas, a river of Bithynia, which falls into the Black Sea near Paphlagonia ; so Lag., Di. Kn., however, prefers the view that n3''T=the fabulous opT\ 'Fnraia, which were regarded by the ancients as the boundary of the northern side of the earth.' Del. regards the name "as not yet deciphered with certainty.' Saadiah and the modern Jews apply nD''T fanci- fully to France. The LXX have 'Pi(j)d6 here and in i Chr. I.e. HTDIJin, mentioned in Ez. 38, 6 together with Gomer, in the army of Gog; and in Ez. 27, 14 after Javan, Tubal, and Meshek, as supplying horses and mules for the Tyrian traders: both times called in Ez. iiDljn nu. Josephus CHAP. lO, VERS. 3. 4. 93 understood HDlsn to mean the Phrygians. But as the Phrygians are already included in M^B'N, the view that "n = the Armenians, is to be preferred; 'according to the oldest sense of the •word, Western Armenia,' Di. With this identifi- cation, Phrygia, Paphlagonia, and Western Armenia naturally follow one another in the direction from west to east. The LXX have the name slightly altered, Qopyafia; Codex A, eepyofia; cf. Lagarde, Gen. Graece, p. 34. 4. The sons of Javan. n©'^7i^, mentioned in Ez. 27, *],' ihe coastlanis o/Elishah,' whence purple was obtained. Josephus thinks that nt^vN means the Aeolians. The Targ. of Jonathan here takes it to = Hellas. Others, Elis (Boch.). But Di. objects, firstly, that nC' — for the Greek nom. ending s — is inconceivable, and secondly, that Greece and the Greeks are already included in Javan. He suggests Italy and Sicily, citing the Targ. to Ez. l.c. Nj^t5''N nyiD. If we take Javan as the Ionian Greeks (esp. in Asia Minor), Elishah might well denote some branch of Dorian or Achaean Greeks. Upon this view, however, what the name corresponds to, remains to be explained. tljitljljn is frequently mentioned in the O. T. Josephus thinks Tarsus in Cilicia is intended, but the more generally accepted view is that Tartessus in Spain is meant, which was celebrated in the east for its abundance of silver, and carried on an extensive trade with Tyre (cf. Herod, i. 163, iv. 152 ; Is. 23). 'Not the town as a Phoenician colony (Stade), but the land and people is intended,' Di. Tartessus embraced the coastland from Gibraltar to the mouth of the Baetis or Guadalquiver. The Tarshish navy, mentioned in the book of Kings (i Kings 10, 22. 22, 49), was not a navy that was intended to traffic with Tarshish, but is a term for large 94 GENESIS, vessels, just as we speak of East or West-Indiamen ; cf. Ges., Thes., p. 1 3 15. D^riD. Cyprus and its inhabitants, where was an old town Klttiov, the modern Larnaka (Schrader), which Josephus mentions in his explanation of the name. The Assyrian name of the island was 'Jatndna' or ' Atndna ;' see Schr., K.A. T?, p. 85 f. The name seems at a later date to have included other islands and coastlands; cf. Jer. 2, 10. Ez. 27, 6 Qiro i''N. Dan. 11, 30. □"'DTI. So the Targ., Pesh., and Vulg.; but the LXX and Sam. give CiJIi, as i Chr. i, 7. The reading D^JIl is generally accepted as the correct one, as Cl^JTI cannot be suitably explained. Conjectural explanations that have been offered are Dodona, the seat of the famous oracle in Epirus, which would be unsuitable here; or 01:11 = the AapSavot; Targ. Jon. N'pl'l, Jer. Targ. N^pil, i.e. the Trojans. With the other reading CJIT Bochart explains the word as meaning the Rhone, and the people dwelling near it : more probable, however, is the explanation by which D^JTI = Rhodes, or in a more general sense the Rhodian Islands, i.e. the islands of the Aegean Sea. In Ez. 27, 15 the LXX give for DiJTi, 'Pd8(oi. 5. 'In ver. 20 and ver. 31 we find at the conclusion of the list dn ■'Jn nS'N and DtJ' 1:3 ni^X respectively; and we should expect here HQ'' ijn H^N. As n^ND cannot refer to nsi iJ3 in ver. 2, but to p'' ''33 ver. 4 (since Magog, Media, etc. cannot be spoken of as populating the sea coasts), and as, moreover, anxiNH does not agree with Diljn 11N, these three words (ns'' ''J3 rh^ must be inserted before DnX"\N3, without its being, on account of this, necessary to strike out . , , xhvCQ D''ljn as a gloss,' Di. This emendation, proposed by Ilgen, is adopted also by Ewald, and apparently accepted by Del. CHAP. lO, VERS. 5. 6. 95 Render, '■From these have the sea-lands of the peoples separated themselves. (These are the sons of Japhei) in their lands, each according to his language, according to their families, by their peoples.' QiiN denotes regularly 'the islands and coastlands ' of the Mediterranean. On 3 = '3y, according to,' see on 7, 21 ; and cf. ver. 20 and ver. 31 of this chapter. 6-20. The Descendants of Ham. 6. tttl3, ' called by the ancient Egyptians " Kas, Kis, Kes, Kesi," and used as the name of a people of a reddish-brown colour, between Egypt and Abyssinia, viz. in the East between the Nile and the sea.' In the O. T. Cush seems to have had a wider and narrower signification. In 2, 13 and here it has a wider meaning, and is used to denote the southern limit of the known world, including the inhabitants of the coastland of Southern Arabia. From Isaiah's time and onwards it was used with a more limited signification, as the special name of the state situated at the foot of mount Barkal, viz. Ethiopia. Bhi is found on the Assyrian inscriptions i^Kwsi') as the name of Ethiopia; see Schr., X.A.T?, p. 86. 'It is uncertain whether the " Kassi" of the inscriptions, the Kocro-aioi in Susiania, and to the north of Susiania, the Klo■o■^cD^' x<»P'!) represent the same name of a people as Kus, Kes, and thus bear testimony to an extension and emigration on the part of the Cushites,' Di. D'''^:?^. Egypt. Assyr. ' Mumr, Musru, Misir' Schr., K.A.T?, p. 89. The dual form of the word in Hebrew probably is used with reference to the two parts of Egypt, upper and lower, which are always mentioned on the oldest Egyptian monuments when the whole of Egypt is spoken of. 96 GENESIS, It is, however, used in Hebrew where Lower Egypt is meant, Upper Egypt being expressly excluded, e.g. Is. ii, ii. Jer. 44, I. 15. Various etymologies have been suggested for the name. Bochart thinks that nSD = ' walling in,' and Egypt would then = the land that is shut off or walled in ; but this opinion of Bochart's rests on the use of the name in Is. 37, 35. 19, 6. Another derivation (Ges. in the Thes., p. 815) is from 1VD which occurs in Aram., Assyr., and Arab. = ' a limit, province,' so D''"iSD='/^« two lands' tOID. This name occurs frequently in the O. T. In Nah. 3, 9 DID is mentioned with Cush, Mizraim, and Lubim; in Jer. 46, 9 in the Egyptian army, together with Cush and Ludim; cf. Ez. 30, 5. In Ez. 27, 10 the soldiers of DIS are found among the Tyrian soldiers, together with those of Persia and Lud; and again in Ez. 38, 5 D13 occurs with Persia and Cush in Gog's army. In the LXX, Is. 66, 19 (Mass. text PIQ), it is spoken of as a distant nation of the west. The LXX in Jer. and Ez. translate it by Ai'/3vfs-, so Jose- phus: and this is the view generally adopted. Knobel {Volkertafel, p. 296) points out that the Coptic name for Libya was Phaiat. Ptol. iv. i. 3, Pliny v. i mention a river '^6ov6 or Fut in Libya. ]W5 (from V3i 'to be low, depressed ')=' the low land; as opposed to the high lands of Aramea. This, however, Di. disputes, and regards (V^i as the original name of the low land by the sea and the Jordan, which was afterwards extended to all the country west of the Jordan. Canaan embraced all this district, exclusive of Philistia, but inclusive of Phoenicia. It is remarkable that [Jfja — thouo-h the language of the land was Semitic— should be found among the sons of Ham. Perhaps this was due to a sense of their CHAP. lO, VER. 7. 97 different origin ; it being more or less certain that they were emigrants from the south, from the neighbourhood of the Persian Gulf (see Di., p. 170, and the authorities he cites in favour of the view of the southern origin of the Canaanites, viz. Her. i. i, vii. 89; Justin, xviii. 3; Strabo i. 2. 35, xvi. 3. 4; Dion. per. 906; compare The Book of Jubilees, c. 10; see also Schroder, Phoen. Gram., p. 4). The Assyrians do not seem to have been acquainted with the name Canaan, their name for the land being usually ^mai Almrri,' 'the Westland;' see Schrader, K.A.T?, p. 90 ff. 7. The sons of Cush. t^3D is mentioned in Ps. 72, 10 together with N3B', as a distant land in the south. In Is. 43, 3. 45, 14 it is spoken of together with Egypt and Cush; and in 45, 14 the D''N3D are described as being very tall. Since Josephus [Ant., ii. 10. 2), N2D has usually been identified with Meroe ; and possibly this identification is supported by a comparison of Is. 45, 14 with 18, 2. 7 (Her. iii. 20. 114). Di., however, prefers to identify X3D with a branch of the Cushites, dwelling on the Arabian sea, on the east of Napata ; and he supposes that remains of this proper name are to be found in Asta-soha and Soba, the capital of the Christian kingdom of Senaar in the Middle Ages. His reason for objecting to the identification given by Josephus is that the kingdom of Cush, which reached to the southern island of Meroe, was neither known to the Egyptians, nor called in the O. T. N3D. nV'^in. Cf on 2, II. Di. supposes that a trace of this people is to be found in the name KdX?i-os AvaXlrris or 'A^aXiVi)?, and the people 'AfiaXlrai, on the African coast near the Straits of Bab-el-Mandeb. This would suit the order of the enume- ration. In ver. 29 rb^m is mentioned among the sons of H 98 GENESIS, Joqtan on the Persian Gulf; and we must either suppose that there was more than one npiin, or that a great Cushite people were scattered over the east and south coast of Arabia, who also had penetrated to the west coast of north- eastern Africa, and there left traces of their name. Possibly, as Tuch suggests, the difference is due to two different accounts. nriDDl. Josephus, Ant., i. 6. 2, explains by 'Aardfiapoi, i. e. the inhabitants of Astahoras, now Athara, in Abyssinia, which Gesenius in the Thes. approves. More general is the view held by Tuch and Del., and accepted by Di., that Xn3D is to be connected with the old Arabian town 2a;3- jSa^a or Saioia, the capital of the Chatramotiiae, which had sixty temples, and was a great emporium of the frankincense trade. nOJ^I, LXX, 'Pey/ia, cf. on 4, 18, is mentioned in Ez. 27, 2 2 in connection with xntJ', as a trading people, who sup- plied the Tyrians with spices, precious stones, and gold. Tuch and others identify HDJ)"! with 'P^y^ia or 'Pe'yf a, mentioned by Ptolemy and Steph. Byz., a town with a harbour on the Arabian side of the Persian Gulf. Di. prefers to identify it with the n»3)T of the Sabean inscriptions, in the neighbour- hood of tJJD Me'in, north of Marib. S3J^1D^ is unknown. Those who consider that nDJ?T is situated on the Persian Gulf compare Sa/iuSdK?;, a seaport town and river in Carmania ; so Bochart. The Targ. of Jon. here, and the Targ. to Chron., give ''N|i:3r, i.e. Zingis, on the east coast of Africa. The sons of Ra'ma. i^lty. 'The Sabeans,' often mentioned in the O. T. as a distant land and people, whose great wealth in gold, precious stones, frankincense, and cassia, was brought, partly by them- CHAP. lO, VER. 8. 99 selves, and partly by others, to the north. They dwelt in southern Arabia, the capital of their empire being Mariaba or Saha. tTI, mentioned in 25, 3 among the descendants of Ke- turah. Possibly there were two different accounts of their origin, both of which have been employed by the narrator. In Ez. 38, 13 pT is mentioned together with NIEJ', as a most important trading nation, and in Ez. 27, 20 as supplying Tyre with costly carpets. In Is. 21, 13 the caravans of Dedan are mentioned, and in Jer. 25, 23. 49, 8 it is spoken of together with the Edomites and other desert tribes of Arabia. In Ez. 25, 13 pi is the tribe on the frontier of Edom. ' Since Bochart, the Cushite pT has usually been placed on the Persian Gulf, and a trace of the name is sup- posed to have been found in Daden (^):i1j, Syr. ^Cv, see Ges., Thes.), one of the Bahrein Islands, and the Keturaean Dedanites are distinguished from those of Cush; traces of the former being perhaps extant in the ruins of Daiddn, west of T6ma, south-east of Aila, in northern Higaz,' Di. pi occurs in Halevy's Sah. Inscriptions, and Di. remarks that the original Dedan must be sought for further south than on the Persian Gulf. After the exile the Dedanites disappeared, their place being taken by the Gerrheans (on the west of the Persian Gulf). On this word and X3E5' in the Assyr. inscrip., see Schrader, K.A. T?, pp. 92, 145 ff. 8. 77^. P would use '\h'\T\; so in 6, 10. TlQJ. LXX, N6/3p, Sam. t!<^rh ; na, Syr. lw=» ; pi, Syr. ^^i. ' The name here is to be understood of the Libyans on the borders of Egypt,' Di. QTinDi. LXX (Tisch. and Lag.) omit, but Walton's text has Vie^OoKelji. Pesh. yaL.o*fc.^, - for i. Bochart identifies DTiriaJ with NiipBvs, in Plut. de Isid., p. 96, the most northern portion of Egypt on the sea-shore. More probable is the identification proposed by Ebers, ' na-pfah,' = ol xoC ^6a, i. e. ihose belonging to Ptah or Hephaestus, the Memphitic Egyptians. 14. Q"'DinD, derived from DlflS, which (see Is. 11, 11. Jer. 44, I. 15. Ez. 29, 14. 30, 14) signifies Upper Egypt (Thebais). D^n7D3. LXX, Xao-z/mi'ift/i ; cf. Lag., (?^«. (rra^«, p. 36. Since Bochart's time, usually identified with the Colchians on the Black Sea, because these (according to Herodotus, Strabo, and others) were descendants of the Egyptians. Knobel thinks that the dry and salty strip of land stretching from the eastern mouth of the Nile along the sea up to the southern frontier of Palestine, with lake Sirbonis and mount Casius, is intended. But this identification is doubtftil; see Di. here. □Tlffi^D DCJQ 1N2J'' "1ffi«. If n^niJOa are the Colchians, this notice is senseless, and then we must assume that here and in i Chron. i, 12 the words are out of place, and should come after Dnnsa. Del. keeps the present order of the text, and distinguishes between Philistines who came from the □TIPDa, and Philistines who came from inSO ; but in Deut. 2, 23. Amos 9, 7. Jer. 47, 4, the Philistines are spoken of as coming from •iinSJ,' and no mention is made of any such CHAP. lO, VERS. 14. 15. 105 double origin. Di. prefers to assume that the immigration of the Philistines was not made directly from Crete, but came by the way of the Egyptian sea coast ; see on DTli'Da. The versions follow the order of the Mass. text. D^nB'?S= probably ^emigrants' or ^strangers,' from vi/^, YjCa.falasa, 'to wander^ nB'?S, Philistia, is called naXaioTifj; by Josephus, and this name afterwards was used as the name of the whole land of Canaan. In Assyrian it is ^ Palaitav' or '■PilUta;' see Schrader, K.A. T?, p. 102 f. CiriD^. Not the Cappadocians, as LXX in Deut. 2, 23. Amos 9, 7 ; Vulg. (everywhere else, but here ' Caphtorim. '), Targg. Onq., Ps.-Jon., and Jer., and Pesh. ; but more probably Crete ; not only because such an important island would scarcely be omitted in this table of nations, but also because Kaftor in Jer. 47, 4 is expressly mentioned as an ''N, and the Philistines in i Sam. 30, 14. Zeph. 2, 5. Ez. 25, 16, etc. are called DTlia : cf. Tac, Hist. v. 2, who indirectly testifies to the origin of the Philistines from Crete ; see Del., p. 248 f. 15. The descendants of Canaan. pl^!?, the first-born, prop. ' the fisher -town' (from n)S), the oldest settlement of the Canaanites, and the only one of all the Phoenician towns known to Homer. In Josh. 11, 8. 19, 28 it is called nan JIT'S. Even when Tyre had gained a reputation, the Phoenicians were still called Sidonians ; Josh. 13, 6. I Kings 11, 5. 16, 31. The absence of any mention of Tyre in the table is noticeable. nn. ' The form nn (without ■•__, although DTin elsewhere is common) points to the name of a people of wide range,' Di. nn = the ' Cheta ' of the Egyptian monuments and 'Hatti' of the Assyrian inscriptions, the chief people in Syria Io6 GENESIS, between the middle Euphrates and Orontes, who were gradually forced back by the Arameans or absorbed by them. Their chief city was Kadesh on the Orontes. In i Kings 10, 29. 2 Kings 7, 6 Hittite kings are mentioned in Syria; see further, Di. ; Sayce in the Trans, of the Soc. of Bib. Arch., vii. 2. 248 ff.; Cheyne, Enc. Brit. s.v. ; Wright, Empire of the Hittites. 16. *'D'13,''n. ' The febusites^ who dwelt in and around Jebus, afterwards called Jerusalem. ''IT^b^n . ' The Amorites,' who dwelt in the hill country of Ephraim and Judah, and spread out far into the south ; the most powerful and warlike of all the Canaanitish tribes. The Canaanites in general are sometimes called Amorites. Deut. 3, 9 is cited by Di. as ' eine Probe ihrer Sprache,' ' a sample of their language.' The name may possibly = ' those who dwell on high ground,' from lbN=:TiDK, Is. ly, 9, •top' 'height! ^ty^'lj. ' The Girgashites,' their position is uncertain, possibly they must be sought for in the west Jordan land ; of. Josh. 24, II. They are mentioned again in 15, 21. 17. ''inn. ' The Hivites.' '•in possibly = ' /,^m^ who live in town-communities {Stadtgemeinden), fl^n,' Di. ; cf. 34, 2. Josh. 9. Later they are found in the Lebanon and Hermon district, perhaps driven thither by the Israelites; Josh. 11, 3. Judg. 3, 3. 2 Sam. 24, 7. The ips, i.e. 'Perizzites,' ' those who dwell in open villages,' nins, who are mentioned in 13, 7. 15, 20, are not found in this table ; see Di., p. 1 80. "•pli^n are the Phoenicians of "Apxi; (Talm. pjnH DipnN, Del.), at the foot of mount Lebanon, about five hours north of Tripolis, the birth-place of the emperor Alexander Severus. CHAP. lO, VERS. 16-30. 107 'ApKrj has been rediscovered in the modern Tell Arqa and village ^r^o:. LXX, 'Apou/caTor. In Assyrian 'Ar-kd;' see Schrader, K.A.T.% p. 104. ''i^Dn. ' TAe Phoenicians of Sin' Hieron., Quaest. ed. Lag., p. 17, mentions a town Sin, not far from Arqa. Breydenbach (see Di., p. 181) in 1483 found a village Syn, half a mile from the river Arqa. 18. "^"TTlt^rr. LXX, 'ApdSioi. ' 7%« ^ra^/zaw,' mentioned in Ez. 27, 8. II as the sailors and warriors of the Tyrians, are the inhabitants of '^paSor, a Phoenician city built on a rocky island north of Tripolis, according to Strabo, by exiles from Sidon. Arvad is frequently found on the Assyrian inscriptions 'Ar-va-da;' see Schrader, K.A. T.^, p. 104 f. ''"iTSiJn. ' The Phoenicians of Simyra,' south of Aradus, north of Tripolis, mentioned by Strabo. In Assyrian "■ Si-mir-ra ;' see Schrader, K.A.T?, p. 105. ■^riDnn. ' The inhabitants of Hamath^ later name '■ Epi- phanial on the Orontes, often mentioned in the O. T., and Assyrian inscriptions up to Sargon's time, ' mat Hamatti ;' see Schrader, K.A.T?, p. 105 f. 1!!JDJ is Nif . of flS ; there is no necessity to take it with Ewald from fVB. ''jyDDn, used here and ver. 19 in its narrower sense, excluding the Phoenicians and Syrians. 20. nib^l scriptio plena, for '^^<3; n3N3 here, ver. 30, 13, 10. 25, 18, is to be taken as an adv. ace. for the fuller 1X3 15?, 19, 22, lit. 'as thou comest ;' of. on 13, 10. m"l3. ' Gerar,' in Philistia, it was more towards the south than Gaza. On the n of motion towards, see Ges,, §90. 2; Dav., § 17. 3. HTJ^. ' Gaza,' the southernmost frontier stronghold in lo8 GENESIS, Philistia. In Assyrian (zr) Ha-zi-ti ; Schr., K.A.T.'^, p. 107. On the V =g, see 4, 18. D'lnSI T\^1VC\ moyi nmD, the four cities of the plain, mentioned with Bela in 14, 2. They probably occupied the ground now covered by the southern portion of the Dead Sea ; see Di., p. 222. S^ttJT. Hieron. and Targ. Jer. identify it with Callirrhoe, on the east side of the Dead Sea, in the Wady Zerqa Ma'in, celebrated afterwards for its hot springs. But Di. objects to this identification, as Callirrhoe lies too far north; and points out, that according to the analogy of the preceding verse, a town on this side of the Dead Sea or of the Ghor is required. 21-31. The Descendants of Shem. 21. K'ln Di , . . DaJ71 ; see the note on 4, 26. "^SJ^ ; see the note on 14, 13. h'T\T\ nC TIN. Render, 'The elder brother of Japhet: The rendering 'Brother of Japhet, the elder; adopted by the LXX, Symm., Massoretes, Rashi, and others, is refuted by the fact that the limitation of ^IIJ to the age would only then be sufficiently indicated if the text ran hun ra \1 (9, 24. 27, I. 15. 42). ?njn without p or HN cannot='«a/K majors On SlJn, as comparative (or superlative), see on 9, 24. Shem was the eldest son, Ham the second (cf. vers. i. 6. 21), and Japhet the youngest; cf. 9, 24. 22. XyT''5X (Lagarde, mh\ so Tisch.'s text), according to Arab tradition, was the old name of the capital of Yemen, called, since the Ethiopic occupation in the fifth century a. d., Sarid (■'l.; .,■). n7p"T is unknown! Ytx\a:^^=' a palm-hearing district' (Arab. Jil 'a palm tree'). Bochart identified it with the Minaei of Pliny and Strabo. 28. 7115;, I Chron. i, 22 b^V, so Heb.-Sam., Vulg. 'Ebai; LXX, TejSdX and EiaX, is unknown. 7^^J3'^3b5 is unknown. l^^U), see ver. 7. 'The Sabeans,' here as the descendants CHAP. I O, VERS. 27-30. 113 of Joqtan, among the Arabs ; in 25, 3, among the descendants of Abraham, as the son of It^p\ ' In this verse the people and land of this name in south-western Arabia are intended, with the capital Mariaha or Saha,' Schrader, K.A.T}, p. 118. 29. '^S'1^^ is mentioned, from Solomon's time onwards, as the land whence the fleet of Hiram and Solomon, after a three years' voyage, brought gold, precious stones, sandal- wood, silver, ivory, apes, and peacocks (i Kings 9, 28. 10, n. 22. 2 Chron. 8, 18. 9, 10), and whose gold became proverbial as fine gold (Ps. 45, 10. Job 22, 24. 28, 16. Is. 13, 12. I Chron. 29, 4). Its position has been disputed, but as it is mentioned among the sons of Joqtan it must be sought for in Arabia. Thus the identifications with Siipara on the coast of Malabar, Sofdla on the east coast of Africa, opposite Madagascar, and AhMra on the coast east of the Indus Delta, are untenable. On the Arabian coast, however, no suitable place with which Ophir can be identified is at present known; see Di., p. 187. rT7"*ln. Cf. ver. 7. 'It seems probable from 25, 18. I Sam. 15, 7, cf. Gen. 2, 11, that there was a n^iin in north- west Arabia, on the Persian Gulf. The XavXoi-aiot of Strabo would suit this, and a Ruwaila in Bahrein on the coast is mentioned by Niebuhr, Arab., p. 342,' Di. niV is unknown. Bochart compares the 'la^aplrai of Ptol. vi. 7. 24 (which he emends to 'la^ajSlTm) on the coast of the Indian , Ocean. 30. i^CJD is uncertain. Bochart, MoCfa, a seaport town within the Bab-el-Mandeb ; Knobel, Btsc/ia, in northern Ye- men ; Tuch and others, Mesene, a district at the head of the Persian Gulf. I 114 GENESIS, □Ipn "^n niDD. Render, ' Towards Sephar, towards the mountain of the east.' ttlpn ^^ cannot be predicate of the sentence on account of its position, nor in apposition to niBD, because nothing is known of a mountain bearing this name. ISD ' is usually taken for Sdircpapa, Saphar, capital of the king of the Sabaites and Homerites, in the south-western corner of Arabia, which is well known to Arabic writers as an old and important town (.UJi); to be distinguished from Saphar (,UJi), a town of the same name, — also of great age and importance, — situated in eastern Hadramaut on the sea coast,' Di. Dipn in is the Arabian hill country {Ne^d), which ex- tends from the foregoing limit far towards the east. Accord- ing to Knobel, the mountain range between Hadramaut and Mahra. 11. I. TT'l. The imperf. with wa.w conv. commencing the narrative, the chapter being loosely connected with the pre- ceding one; cf Ges., § 129. i. liT (IDto '^"IJ^n 73. ' The whole earth was one tongue.^ The predicate in Hebrew, as in Arabic, is often a substan- tive, where in our idiom an adj. is used, or some such phrase as 'consists of,' 'contains.' This construction is commonly used in designating the material out of which an object is made, and in specifying weights or measures, etc.; but an extension of this usage is also often found in Hebrew, 'when terms other than material attributes are treated similarly;' Driver, § 189 ; Ewald, § 296 b; Ges., § 106. i. Rem. 2; cf. 2 Sam. 17, 3 qi^eJ nw Dyn b; Job 3, 4 im \T' xinn nvn; Is. 19, r I, and often. not!) = lit. 'lip,' then 'language;' so in Is. 19, 18 )5?33 nsb'; CHAP. II, VERS. 1-3. 115 33, 19 nSB' "ipKJy; cf. Ez. 3, 5. P uses jlE'i' in this sense, 10, 5. 20. 31 ; cf. Deut. 28, 49. tD'^nnt^ □'^"1^T= lit. 'single words,' i.e. * Ike same' or ' similar words' The use of Qiinx in the phrase annx D^D' 27, 44. 29, 20. Dan. n, 20, meaning 'single,' i.e. '■ a few days' is different from its use here. 2, yD3 does not only mean '/# 3«a^ z^/ the camp,' but ' /(? strike the tents and move onward on the journey! DIpD. Not 'from the east,' but as 13, 11 'eastwards* (cf M. R., § 49. Rem. d. 12, 8), i. e. ' from the standpoint of the author, who was in Palestine, and to whom the Mesopota- mians were D'Tp ''3D ' (29, i), Di. 'rWp'2, prop. ' a split' or ' cleft,' but according to the usage of the language, ' a plain lying in a broad valley,' ' a valley plain;' cf. the Syriac )fci:iA3 ' campus patens! The distinc- tion between geographical synonyms should be noted; see Stanley, Sinai and Palestine, App., § 5, where the niVp3 mentioned in the Old Testament are enumerated. -|y:]\2? Y"l«n. Cf. on 10, 10. 3. lni>"l h\^ ttj''^^. ' One to the other! On this mode of expressing the reciprocal relation, see Ges., § 124. 2. Rem. 4 ; M. R., §72.3. Rem. a ; cf § 94 c. Rem. a. nnn is properly imper. with n cohort. (Ges., § 48. 5 ; Stade, § 592 c) from the root 2T\'> ' to give,' which, though common in Aramaic and Arabic (i-^jsj), is confined in Heb. to the imper. sing, and plural. T\in sing, sometimes has the force of an interjection, so here, 'up' 'come on;' A.V. 'go to! so vers. 4. 7. Ex. i, 10. For the form, cf Ges., § 69. 2. Rem. 2. Other verbal forms used as interjections are nxn 'seet' ns? 'comet' cf. Stade, § 380. n32^3. 'Let us bake;' the imperf. with n cohort., to I 2 Il6 GENESIS, express the intention with greater energy; cf. Gas., §§ 48. 3, 128. i; Dav., § 23. I, 2; M. R., § 9; Driver, § 49 (3. The verb p? is a denominative from nJ3p. CD^.^ ' bricks,' perhaps so called as being baked white by the heat of the sun. The word occurs in Assyr. under the form lihittu, cstr. state libnat, Schrader, K. A. T?, p. 121. nD"lto7. Dat. of the' product; cf 2, 22. Amos 5, 8, lit. ^ into what is burnt ^ i.e. ^bricks' Render, ^ And let us burn them into bricks'. The bricks here mentioned were different from those made of a mixture of straw and clay, Ex. i, 14. 5.7- 4. D'atya lID^i'TI. Render, ' With its top in the heavens.' The clause is a simple circumstantial one; cf Driver, § 159 ; Ewald, § 341 a; so Is. 6, 6 nsxn ITi^l ; Zech. 2, 5 ^nn noi ma. In Deut. I, 28 we have the word Dny qualified by D''13E'3 nniS3 'fortified in the heavens^ i. e. ' with high and lofty fortifications ;' cf. Dan. 4, 8. 17. Otlj 137 ntoVw, lit. Het us make us a name' i.e. 'let us gain an honourable name;' so Is. 63, 12. Jer. 32, 20. flS3 fS refers to both halves of the first part of the verse. They had a double object in view, to found a city, and gain for them- selves an honourable name ; the city being a common place of assembly for all, and so a means of keeping them to- gether and preventing their being scattered over the earth. Others connect psj [a closely with DB', and take that word in the sense of ' monument' =Kxzb. l^^, as in 2 Sam. 8, 13. This however is doubtful, and here unsuitable. yiD3 )p. LXX, 77/30 Tov biatrnaprjvai fjfias, SO Vulg. ' ante- guam dividamur' apparendy taking ;a as though it were i:b^.' Frankel, Einf, p. 47, sees here a reference to the Haggada,' which narrates that the descendants of Noah frequently dis- CHAP. II, VERS. 4-8. 117 regarded the ■warning given them to send out colonies; cf. Josephus, Ant., i. c. 4, §§ 1-3. 6. ^Behold one people {are they), and one language have they all' The A. V. ' The people is one' is scarcely correct, as that would be rather Dyn nriN. The A.V. R. renders, ^Behold they are one people,' etc. D7nn is inf. cstr. Hif'il of 77n, with the n pointed with pathach instead of a composite sheva, on account of the following guttural n ; cf Stade, § 80. 2 b ; Ges., § 67. Rem. 6 ; Ewald, § 199 a. So Esth. 6, 13 ni^nn ; Is. 9, 13 nhnn. 1^*1 7nn 11^1= lit. ' and this is their beginning to do' i. e. ' merely the commencement of their plan' "1!}II^=lit. ^ will he cut off' i.e. ^ they will not he debarred from it;' so once besides, Job 42, 2 HDTD pD 1V3'' N^. ^Qt'' is a lightened form of ^SP from DDT; so '"'^^J, ver. 7, for i^?33; of. 9, 19, and Ges., § 67. Rem. 11; Stade,§ 521a, ^, who explains the form in question as formed after the analogy of the third pers. pi. perf , instead of IBf^ or ^iDV ; of. Ewald, § 193 c. 7. nb^J. See note on ver. 6; and on the first pers. pi., see on i, 26. The word was probably chosen with reference to the name P^?. "Ittjt^, expressing the result rather than the aim,=' jo thai' not 'that;' cf Ex. 20, 26. Deut. 4, 10. 40 ; contrast Gen. 3, 22, where we have )£ introducing the negative final clause; see M. R., § 164 b ; Ewald, § 337 b. 2. ini>"l nato ttj''l^. Cf on ver. 3. yOE'=not merely 'to hear,' but 'to understand,' as in Is. 33, 19. Deut. 28, 49. 8. njlb IT'irT'l • After verbs of ' ceasing,' ' hastening,' Il8 GENESIS, etc., two constructions are usually possible; either the inf. cstr. with 7 as here, or the inf. cstr. alone ; cf. Ges., § 142. 2; Ewald, § 285. I. With i'ln, ]D may be used, see Ex. 23, 5. 1 Kings 15, 21. 9. t^lp p 7J^. ' Therefore they called Us name Babel' i. e. 'they, people called.' On the impersonal use of the third pers. perf. masc. sing. (=lit. 'one called'), cf. Ges., § 137. 3 a; M. R., § 123. 2. / 1I1|1, according to the etymology given in the text, is from hbl. i'33 must then be regarded as contracted from P2?3 ; cf ii^p;i? from \h\hp_; h]m for bf^l2; see Ewald, § 158 c; Stade, § 124 a ; cf also the Syriac JLai ' confusion of speech;' Arab. J.!!/. This is the Hebrew explanation of the name. For the Babylonian it had another meaning, which is probably the correct one. Some (Eich., Winer) derive it from Bab Bel, Jj t_>b ^gate^ i.e. ' courl of Bel;' following the ancients, see Steph. of Byzant. ; compare the Aramaic and Talmudic Jfcoii, N33='^a/«,' also the names of the Talmud Tracts NDp N33 'the front gate;' Nina N33 Uhe back gate;' N33 NV'SD 'the middle gate;' others, from ^33=^3 nu, so Tuch, comparing for the contraction mntS'W, Josh. 21, 27=n''3 mriB'j; 'Temple of Ashtoreth,' and the Phoen. "in5J3=*iny n3 'Temple of'Ather;' Inscr. Melitensis, 5, 1. 4 ; ^ohxo^., Phoen. Gramm.,Y>- 2^5; cf p. 108; and the Syriac .oj?)lz>=:.ojj ft— >s; see further, Tuch, p. 221. The name as given on the Assyrian inscriptions is Bdb-Il—' Gate of God,' which is certainly the most probable meaning ; cf Schr., K.A. T?, p. 127 ff. ; Del., Par., p. 2 1 2 flf. ; so most moderns. In the following verses, 10-32, we have a genealogical table carrying on the history of the patriarchs from Shem to Abram — the founder of the house of Israel — and his CHAP. 1 1, VER. 9. 119 two brothers, Nahor and Haran. This table is in many- respects very similar to the one found in chap. 5. In both ten generations are given, Abram closing the list here, and Noah in chap. 5. In both lists the ages of the persons mentioned are considerably higher than those usually reached. Here, as well as chap. 5, we find the length of each person's life reckoned, both from his own birth to the birth of his first son, and from that event to his death. The LXX and the Samaritan deviate in their methods of reckoning the years here, as well as in the earlier chapter, as may be seen from the following table taken from Dillmann, p. 196. Hebeew Text. LXX Text. Samakitan Text. hi it .Sfe 1. H 600 hj ess e5 " li III £ .,12 1. Shem 100 500 100 500 600 100 500 600 (4.^0) (56s) Arpaohshad Kainan . . . 35 403 43S 135 130 400 535 135 303 43« ... 330 460 Shelaoh ... 30 403 4 33 130 330 (37°) 460 (,5°4) 130 303 433 Eber 34 430 464 239 134 270 404 134 130 270 404 Peleg ... 3° 209 130 209 339 109 239 Keu 32 207 239 132 207 339 132 107 239 Serug 30 200 230 130 (79) 200 fl29) 330 (208) 130 100 230 Nahor 29 119 148 (205) 179 125 304 79 09 148 (145) Terach ... 70 (135) 70 (135) (205) 70 (75) I20 GENESIS, In both chapters the Hebrew text has most probafcly preserved the more correct lists, though the Samaritan is perhaps the most consistent of the three tables. The Sa- maritan list never allows the son to be older than the father ; so the numbers, e. g. in the cases of Terach and Eber, have to be lowered in order to carry out this rule. With the single exception of Terach, the Sam. text increases the number of years before the birth of the first son, and in all cases, except that of Shem, decreases the number of years which each person lived after the birth of the first son. The Sam. text in the third column agrees with the Hebrew, with the exception of the cases of Eber and Terach. The LXX text, having a large number of variants, is more or less uncertain. Like the Sam. text, seventy years seem to have been the limit before which no children were begotten, and with the exception of Shem, — where all three texts are the same, and Nahor, where one hundred and fifty years are added, with a variant, seventy-nine, — the LXX add one hundred years to the number each person lived before the birth of the first son. In the second column the readings are un- certain, but sometimes the numbers are lower than the cor- responding numbers in the Heb. text. In the third column, the LXX have always higher numbers than the Hebrew, except in the cases of Eber (reading doubtful, variant 504) and Terach; the LXX in the latter case agreeing with the Heb. text. The years of Kainan's life are only given in the LXX text. The object of this table, as of that in chap. 5, was pro- bably twofold, to give some account of the period from the flood to Abram's birth, a period treated as uneventful, and to draw attention to the gradual decline in the number of years reached by each patriarch. CHAP. II, VERS. 10-28, lai 10. "I ^VT is the imperf. Hif, with waw conv. from '^?^. 28. mri "^20 7i*. ' Coram eo' i.e. so that he witnessed it, 'during his life-time;' compare Num. 3, 4. Deut. 21, 16 (Dillmann). Cltoi "IIN occurs again ver. 31. 15, 7. Neh. 9, 7, but not elsewhere. The LXX have x«pa rUsv XaXSaiav (Acts 7, 4 « •y^y XaXdatav), x'^P" possibly having arisen from a reading lin (but the article is against this), unless we suppose that the reading xi^p" has arisen out of x^'Pi ^^d was then supplied with the article, and so tV rrj x^P?- Kn. takes IIX as="iin ' mountain' but this is very doubtful. Oppert in the Hist, des Emp. de Chalde'e, etc., explains 13''']B'3 "ilX as meaning ' Land (Vr) of the two {Kas^ waters [Dim)' i.e. Mesopotamia, the name being old Turanian. Since J. D. Michaelis, ";1N has usually been identified with the castle of Ur, lying within the Persian frontier, and six days' journey north of Hatra, mentioned by Amm. Marc. xxv. 8. But the Ur mentioned by Marcellinus was first founded by the Persians or Parthians (Del.), and being in an unfruitful and barren district would hardly be a suitable place for Abram, the shepherd-prince. Besides, D'lb'J points rather to the land about the lower Euphrates than to Mesopotamia, and most of the ancients (e.g. Eupolemus in Euseb., ^ra^j*. evang., Del., p. 275) pre- suppose that Ur was in Babylonia (Chaldea or Shinar). Another identification is that proposed by Sir Henry and Prof. George Rawlinson, Ur being 'HTJ^ (which occurs only in 10, 10), i. e. the present Warka, on the left bank of the lower Euphrates ; the name being explained by them as meaning 'the moon city,' after the Arab. .^. This view has been adopted by Loftus, Trav., p. 126. The view most current among modern expositors is that "IIN is El-Mugheir, a little 123 GENESIS, south of Warka, on the right bank of the Euphrates, where ruins are still to be found. The name niN is found on the inscriptions in the form Vru (i. e. ' townl viz. ' moon-town '), one of the oldest of the Babylonian royal towns in Sumer; see Schrader, X'. A. T.'', p. 129 ff.; Del., Far., pp. 200, 226. D*^{5'i would then be an addition due to the Jews, and not part of the native name (Di.). The identification with Mugheir, though adopted by many moderns, is perhaps not to be regarded as quite certain. Di. contends in favour of a site in north Babylonia, whence he supposes the Chaldeans of south Babylonia to have emigrated. The Casdim were the inhabitants of south Baby- lonia and Babylon ; they are not mentioned in the Bible or on the monuments before the time of Isaiah (see 23, 13). The name in a wider sense might possibly have included Meso- potamia. The origin of the Casdim is obscure, but they seem to have been a tribe which from small beginnings gradually acquired supremacy over south Babylonia and the capital ; cf. Sayce, I^ncy. Brit., art. Babylonia. The Talmud, Baba Bathra, 91, places Ur Casdim in the neighbourhood of Babylon. Ur Casdim has also been identified, — but with- out any great probability, — with Edessa (in Syr. wotjoV), by Hitzig. The Syrian Christians boast of Edessa as being the Ur Casdim of Abraham; see further, Di., p. 200. The old interpretation current among the Jews (also found in the Qoran, Sur. 21) takes "1IN as meaning fire, and narrates that Abraham confessed the true God, and denied the gods of Nimrod, so he was cast into the fire, but saved in a miracu- lous manner by God. Hier. probably had this in view when he translated Neh. 9, 7, '■ eduxisti eum de igne Chaldaeorum ;' see Del., p. 275 and his note 74. 30. Ivl, only here and as Ktib in 2 Sam. 6, 23 for 1.?.1, CHAP. II, VER. 30— CHAP. 12, VER. I. 12^ the original ) of the root, which still exists in Arabic Uj, iJj, and reappears in the Hif*. and Nif. of the verb in Hebrew, is here preserved. 31. Onh? ^b^^l''! . ' TAejy went out with them' i. e. perhaps ' They {the other members of the family) went out with them {Terach,' etc.). DDK cannot be rendered 'with one another,' as this is against grammar, the suffix never being reciprocal. To make Terach and Abraham the subject to 1NS''1, and understand Lot and Sarai, under CiPlX (Rashi, Del.), is very harsh, and there is nothing in the Heb. text to support it. Ewald (J. B., X. 28) supposes that some words designating the other members of the family have fallen out. The LXX read the text DON ^^ii'l, i^riyayev avTois, i. e. Terach, perhaps to avoid the difficulty ; so Sam., Vulg., Luth. The Syr. reads 2'?'* ^T?y, Terach being again the subject, yc/otaai jiajo (so Ilgen, Vater, 01s.). ]"in, Assyr. Harran, Syr. yti, Arab. ^^, Gk. Kappal, Lat. Carrae, was situated in north-west Mesopotamia, south- east of Edessa, about twenty-six Roman miles distant from it. 12. I. IQi^'^V A. V. wrongly, 'Now the Lord had said,' more correctly A. V. R., ' Now the Lord said,' the passage being like Judg. 17, 1. I Sam. 9, i; a new narrative is commenced, amplifying the preceding one which is regarded as a whole, the association of the two being in thought, not in time. Whether the imperf. with waw conv. can denote a pluperfect is very doubtful; the question is fully discussed. Driver, § 76. Obs., where it is pointed out that there is not sufiBcient evidence to justify the adoption of a pluperfect rendering in the place of the simple past. 1 24 GENESIS, y7 y7 'get thee,' the dat. adds an element of feeling to the bald ^?, implying a reference to, or a regard for, the person addressed. The dative is often found similarly after verbs of motion, e.g. Deut. i, 7. 40. 5, 27, etc.; see Ges., § 154- 3e; Ewald, § 315a. 'JiJIi^Q, probably Haran; cf. ver. 4 with 24, 4. 7. 38. In Acts 7, 2 ^S■^^<0 is taken as Ur-Casdim ; so Hupfeld. !JI':?'!^ for 1^?1^- Impf- Hif. of nsi with 3 demons.; the verb HNl and other verbs n"i5 frequently use the strengthened form of the suffix; cf Stade, §§ 576c, 127 b; Ges., § 58. 4; Dav., § 31. 5. 2. ItoyNI is imperf. with weak waw. The imperf. in this case is jussive, so YB'l'K1=lit. ' and let me make,' but as this is dependent on the command, ^get thee out' in ver. i, it comes to mean, ' that I may make.' Thus the impf. with weak waw is often used to express the purpose or design of a preceding act, which it does more neatly than when [yD? or nujJl followed by the imperf. is used; cf. Driver, § 60; Ges., § 128. i c; M. R., § 10; Ewald, § 347 a. The other two verbs pnaxi and nPlJXI (note the voluntative form used here ; in the case of the two first verbs it could not be employed) fall under the same rule. •^r.Dl' pointed according to Ges., § 63. Rem. 5 ; Stade, § 592 d. Here the imperative with waw is used where a volun- tative with weak waw would be expected, to express the inten- tion or purpose'with greater energy; cf. 20,7 rrril; 2 Sam. 2 1,3 13*131; Driver,§65; Ges.,§i30.2; M.R.,§ 10; Ewald,§347a. n!D^2. 'And be a blessing' LXX, by X31S''S^ 'to the north; and r?; by NO'il'!!' ' to the south! In Arabic lilt, IV conj.,= o _ I ' to go to Syria ' (^LUl), and |T,J^1, IV conj.,= ' logo to Yemen ' (j^y^l), lit. ' to go to the left and right; respectively ; see other similar instances in Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 36. "'^I'Q 'from my presence', 25, 6. Ex. 10, 28. 10. p"l"irr "135 recurs i Kings 7, 46. Cf. in the N. T. Matt. 3, 5. Luke 3, 3 ^ it-eplxiopos toD 'lopSdvov ; more fre- quently we find merely I33n, 19, 17. 25. 28. Deut. 34, 3. 2 Sam. 18, 23. The district (prop, circle) of the Jordan was the land on both sides of the Jordan, from lake Tiberias to the Dead Sea, called by Josephus to jjteya irediov, Bell, fud., iv. 8. 2. The valley of Siddim, 14, 3, also belonged to the n33. 'n'p'^12=' well watered; lit. ' a well-watered place ;' it occurs again Ez. 45, 15 b^-\^^ npt^D; cf Is. 58, 11 nn p3. CHAP. I3/VERS. 8-13- 133 T^^^\'^ P3, probably referring to the garden of Eden, 2, 8. LXX, (ur o jrapaSeto-osToC eeoO; Pesh. )o»^i» otJtt.»?t3 .^*( . Del. and Schumann, however, regard mn'' as used in a superlative sense, and render, 'as a beautiful garden;' cf. 10, 9 and the note there, i, 2. This rendering, however, is not so natural as the other. In Is. 51, 3 we have nin'' p, and in Ez. 36, 35 pj? p, used in comparisons. D'^"liJ?D yitO is added to tone down the previous pV p, the comparison with the garden of Eden being a somewhat too lofty conception. n3i^2. ' On the way to', lit. 'as thou comest;' for the second pers. sing, used impersonally, cf. Gas., § 137. 3c; M. R., § 123. 4. The second pers. thus used occurs chiefly in this phrase. The form of the suff. ru" is merely an ortho- graphic variation for the more usual 1", e.g. 19, 22. "lyU. LXX, Zoy opa, also called vb'^, 14, 2. A small town, generally regarded as situated on the south-east end of the Dead Sea. Tristram, however (Land of Moab), and Grove (Bible Diet., Smith) adduce reasons for thinking it was on the north of the Dead Sea; cp. Cheyne on Is. 15, g. Wetzstein in Del., Comm., p. 564, adopts the first view, and places Zoar in the Gores Sdfia,on the south-east of the Dead Sea. Pesh.reads JJ)X, ^2^^> } '^'^•^'"'j which Ebers, p. 272, accepts as the real reading. With this reading, which however is not necessary, -\V'i n3N3 would refer to dnSD ps alone, and not to the whole sentence. 12. 7nt^"'l. This verb is a denom. from ItiN 'a tent,'='to tent,' i.e. ' to ivander about nomad fashion,' hence, perhaps, the pi. 115)3. Render, ^ Moved with his tents towards Sodom.' 13. D^^j^tfln ' sinners,' i. e. 'habitual sinners,' different from DiNtph 'people sinning,' not necessarily as a habit; cf Ges., § 84. 6 ; also Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 40. 134 GENESIS, mn^b 'towards,' i.e. ' against Yahweh.' Cf. 20, 6. 39,9. 14''. Cf. 28, 14 najJi n^DVi noipi no*. 15. n3J]nb^ is impf. Qal of fflJ, with the suffix strengthened \>y i demonstrattvum; see note on 12, r. ^!<"]Xj notice the c(w«i' pendens, here marked as the ace. by ns, pNn 73 DX 'D 'For all the land . . . I will give it;' cf. Driver, § 197. & and 21, 13. 16. 7i^'' D^^ "ItiJt^, either I. 'so that, if any one can number^ etc.; cf. 11, 7. 22, 14. 24, 3, so Syr. .J», Del.; or II. Tuch, ' quern \pulverem\ si, quis,' "IB'N referring to "lay in the first half of the verse, and "ISV being repeated in the second half, where we would rather expect iriN. Tuch compares 50, 13 (=49, 30), (where, however, riN rather means ' ivith'), and Ewald, § 331 c. 3, cites Jer. 31, 32. Num. 26, 64, which are apparently quite regular. The LXX have simply el hivaral Tis, not translating "ityx. Perhaps, however, it is simplest to regard "itJ'X as in Deut, 3, 24. i Kings 3, 12. 13, as a link which cannot be literally translated. 14. 1. lil 7D"1Q^^ ''^"'1. The four kings' names are all genitives after the construct state iD''3. Hebrew prefers, as a rule, to repeat the construct state before each genitive ; cf. Ges., § 114. I ; M. R., § 75 c; Ryssel {Be Eloh. Pent, ser- mone, p. 61). The four kings, the subject to lb*!? in ver. 2, are not given again, as they can easily be inferred from ver. i ; cf. Ewald, § 303 b. I ; 9, 6 ,nt5»V Q^n^N th'i'2 '•3 'For in God's image. He (God),' etc., Esth. 2, 21. The renderings of the LXX, eV TTJ paa-iXeia tJ 'Ajuap^aX ^acriXe'rar Sevadp, and Vulg. 'factum est in illo tempore ut,' are probably merely intended to explain the meaning of the verse, and do not of necessity presuppose any variant. Clericus' emendation, CHAP. 13, VER. 14— CHAP. 14, VER. 2. I35 inserting DiDN before ijaiCiN, adopted by Ewald in his Komp. der Gen., p. 221, is not necessary. The meanings of the names in this verse are obscure. ijS-iON, cf Schrader, K.A. TP-, p. 135, has not yet been dis- covered on the inscriptions. Bohlen explains it from the Sansk. amarapdla (guardian of the immortal), which is doubt- ful (Di. hat hier keine Stelle). "jlinN is perhaps the Akkadian Eri-aku,'' Servant of the moon-god' (aku). Cf. Del., Par., p. 224. Formerly it was explained from the Sansk. dryaka, venerabilis, so Ges., Boh.; cf. Judith i, 6 Eipiax o /Sao-iXeiis 'EXv/ia/mi/ ; Dan. 2, 14 f (notice the y=V, and cf. on 4, 18). On the Assyr. inscriptions several kings of Elam have names compounded with Kudur. In the inscriptions the name of a deity Lagamar has been found. The name would perhaps =Cr(7Z»« of Lagamar; cf. Schr., K.A. T?, p. 136 if. t'Vin, LXX eapyaX, uncertain. Lenor. makes it=Akk. tar-gal, 'great Son.' diU, not a nom. appel. as A. v., 'King 0/ nations,' so Onq., for this rendering is too indefinite, and gives no suitable sense without some further name to define it ; but a proper name, compared variously with the 'circuit (" Galil") of the nations' (Is. 8, 23), Pam- phylia (Symm.), and Ci''Un 'iX lo, 5 (Ges., Nold.). Others, as Lenor., connect it with the Guii, Kuti that are frequently found in the inscriptions; cf. Lenor., La lang. prim., p. 361; Di., p. 222. A. V. R. has ' Goiim; marg. ' nations.' 2. The proper names in this verse are even more uncertain than those in ver. i, the readings being possibly corrupt; 136 GENESIS, cf. the LXX text with the Hebrew. These five towns were, with the exception of Zoar, according to the narrative in chap. 19, destroyed. 3. 7^5 *1"l3n. A pregnant construction; cf. ver. 15. Render, ' Came allied to the valley of Siddim;' cf. Josh. 10, 6 Xsh^ 1V3pJ ''3 ^for they have gathered together [and come'] unto us' Other instances of preg. cstr. are to be found in Ewald, § 282 c; Ges., § 141. Clton pay. ■ Valley o/Stddlm; i. e. ' Valley of the level fields; so Onq. V.'hpn -1K'''D; Aq., Symm., Theod. KoiKhs tS>v ciKaSiv, SO Vulg. The Pesh. takes ClBTl, z.s,=^'the inhabitants of Sodom.; and renders )ujoowo» ).Aaoa:»,^. Others connect it with the Arabic j-u ' stony ground! LXX have here ffi7\yi, ace. of time, in answer to the question 'when?' cf Ges., § 118. 2 a and b ; M. R., § 42 a and b; Ewald, § 300 a. When a particular point of time is men- tioned, the preps. 1, b, or 3 are used; so 01s. and Nold. prefer the reading of the Sam. here, viz. B'^rai — cf. M. R., § 42 b — as being more correct; see the next verse. 5. D*'«D"in. 'The Refa'im; or 'sons of the Rafa; i.e. CHAP. 14, VERS. 3-5. 137 ' Giants^ so LXX and Syr. here. Partly the name of the original inhabitants of Canaan, in the western and eastern Jordan-land, whose territory was promised Abram's descend- ants, 15, 20 ; partly a special name of the giants in Bashan, as here and Deut. 3, 11. Josh. 13, 12. The last traces of them in the O. T. are in 2 Sam. 21, 15 ff. nS"in '•T'^'', where they are spoken of among the Philistines at the time of David. U^TSp niDffil^, also simply ninths;, Deut. i, 4, and n"inB'];3=n"inB'y n^ Josh. 21, 27, was one of the principal towns of Bashan, identified with the present Tel 'AsterS, two and a half hours from Nawa, nearly between Nawa and M'zirib ; it is situated on a hill in a rich meadow-land, well watered, and many ruins are still to be found (Ritter in Di., p. 223). Wetzstein, however, prefers to identify it with Bosra, one hour and three quarters from Edrei, where ruins have been found. The name means ' The two-horned Ashtoreih' who, as the goddess of the moon, was represented with two horns. The name mDE'j; occurs frequently in Phoenician inscriptions, e.g. Esmunazar inscription, line 17, ?j;27 713 mriK'yi' n31 p^ (cf. Schroder, Phoen. Gramm., p. 225) 'a house /or the Baal of Sidon, and a house for Astarte' The town was probably so called as being devoted to the worship of Ashtoreth. Qm D'^tTtn DNI, possibly identical, as Ges. supposed, with the d^DtOT, Deut. 2, 20, the name given by the Ammonites to the D''NaT who formerly dwelt in their land. LXX have here, ?5wj la-xvpa S/ia avToic, reading Di^S and (.?) 0'3'n ^^^3 nnj, Job 20, 17, ■'^HJ explaining nnj,, the nnj being really cstr. state before the genitive B^m ; cf. Ewald, § 289 c; M. R., § 73, note a. 4 ; Ges., § 116. 5. "i:n n"lN2 carton pQJ.n. Note the form of the predicate in Hebrew. In English we say, 'The valley of Siddim was full of slime pits! i-c we have to use some term such as, consist of contains, or the like, to express the relation between the subject and the predicate. In Hebrew the pre- 14° GENESIS, dicate is expressed by the simple noun. ^ The valley of Siddim was slime pits! Cf. Ex. 9, 31 nntrani 3''2^? mv'B'n hy^yi.; Ps. 23, 5 iTin ''D13; see Driver, § 188. 2 ; Ges., § 106. I. Rem. 2 ; Ewald, § 296 b. "IQn is ^asphalt' or '■bitumen! found in the neighbour- hood of the Dead Sea and of Babylon. The Babylonians used it as mortar; cf. 11, 3. n"1?2J)') Did \yO. LXX, ^aaCk^vs ^oSonav Koi /SoCTtXeis To/xoppas, so Syriac and Sam., reading mDJ? "pV) dlD "pKi, which would be the more correct expression; cf on ver. i. The second "JPD might have slipped out by homoioteleuton. nOty '17D"'T. Rather the followers of the kings, for the king of Sodom (ver. 17) at least escaped. '^'^'7- ''l'j with the ace. ending n, implying motion towards, "■ mountainwards'. The form is pointed with -^ instead of -^, because the short a (pathach) before a guttural with long a (qame9) is changed into i (seghol); cf D3nn for O^nn, Ewald, §§ 70 a, 71. nnn, however, seems to be the only instance of this with -\. Delitzsch compares npD for n?p, the doubling being resolved, and the -^ changed into -^ ; cf his Commentary on the Psabns, 4th ed., p. 83. II. tUD"l. LXX, TTjv "mirov, reading the word as though it were tJ'bT . 13. 10''7Qn i^n"'!. 'And the/ugitive came,' i.e. ^\hti\ig\\.bii: or escaped one, who in such cases is wont to come,' see esp. Ez. 24, 26. 33, 21. 22. Or it may be taken as a collective. On the article with J2''i3S, cf Ewald, § 277 a; Ges., § 109. Rem. I c; M. R., § 68 ; cf TJ»n, 2 Sam. 15, 13. "'"l^S^rr. 'The Hebrew! nnjj means 'one who has come "13S)D {from the other side of) a river'. This name was given to the Israelites by the Canaanites ; the name being Hebrew, CHAP. 14, VERS. II-14. 141 the people who gave it them must have spoken the same language as they did. It is only used in O. T. to or by foreigners, or when the Hebrews are mentioned in opposition to other nations. The name Israelite was, on the other hand, a patronymic, and the national name used by the people themselves. The river from beyond which the Hebrews came is, according to some, the Euphrates; so most com- mentators. Reuss and Stade prefer the Jordan, on the ground that the Hebrews on their return from Egypt spent some time in the land east of Jordan, leaving the Canaanites in possession of that on the west, which, however, does not seem very conclusive against the general view. LXX render it here rm Trepdrr], Vulg. ' Transeuphratensis! Another ex- planation is that nay is a patronymic from nay, mentioned as an ancestor of Abram, 10, 24. 11, 14. 15. Num. 24, 24. «"ian ""iVi^n. Cf. on 12, 6. The terebinth grove being named after the Amorite Mamre, who possibly owned or planted it. 011^ JT^Il "'Vyn am. 'They being confederates of Abram! s^ notice the circ. clause. The text literally translated is, 'And they {were) owners of a covenant with A.;' pya being used to form an adjective here, as in 37, 19 niDpnn 7j;3= ^dreamer;' 49, 23 Qixn 'hv'^^' bow-men {\it arrow-men);' pya ■V)V=' hairy,' 2 Kings i, 8; fjja h)3'^=' winged^ Prov. i, 17, etc. Cf Ges., § 106. 2a; M. R., § 79. 6 d. We have a similar expression to nni "hv^i in Neh. 6, 18, viz. ny^iaB* ''^j;3. The phrase n'la ^yi occurs nowhere else. In Judg. 8, 33. 9, 4 it is a proper name. 14. pi'^T is the imperf. apoc. Hif. of pr\=' to empty out,' e. g. arrows from a quiver, or a sword from the sheath, Ex. 15, 9. Lev. 26, 33. Ps. 35, 3; but only in this passage and Ps. 18, 142 GENESIS, 43 with a personal object. Render, '■Let loose'. LXX have ripWixTja-c, 'musiered,' reading pTil as though it were p'T^l, which the Hela.-Sam. has, and which seems to have been the reading of the Sam. text, which has nt'\^ 'recensmt,' and the Vulg. ' numeravii' in"'l ■'T'S'' 1''5"'3n. 1'>3''3n='>^z> tried ones;' of. the Arab. i^,.;J^-=-' experienced! LXX, tovs ISiovs, who were inU ^Th'' ^home-horn slaves' as opposed to 5)03 nipO, 17, 12. 23, who were purchased slaves (or 1?, Ex. 23, 12); cf. the similar phrases, nU'p, 15, 3 ; nox'p, Ex. 23, 12. '^^DH only occurs here. ?T, i. e. Laish, on the north-east frontier of Canaan, which in the time of the Judges received the name of Dan, Josh. 19, 47. Judg. 18, 29. 15. Dn"'7i^ p^tT'l, lit. 'he divided himself against them,' i.e. 'he divided his forces and came against them;' cf. Job i, 17. I Sam. II, II, for a similar manoeuvre. For the cstr. praegnans cf. on ver. 3. n^.'in is on the left, i. e. north of Damascus, identified by Wetzstein with Hoba, twenty hours north of Damascus, in the neighbourhood of Hims and Tadmor ; cf. Del., Gen.*', p. 561.^^ 17. "li'l pQV b^in mtlj pttj^ — mentioned again 2 Sam. 18, 18, as the place where Absalom set up his monument — is hardly identical with DTl'inp niE' ver. 5, as it is now mentioned as though it were not previously known, and its position not far from Salem is against this identification, cf. ver. 18. It is usually — following Josephus, notice Ant., vii. 10. 3, that Absalom's pillar was two stadia distant from Jerusalem — supposed to be in the neighbourhood of Jerusalem. 18. D7ttj. Generally taken as Jerusalem, so Del., Kn., CHAP. 14, VERS. 15-18. 143 Targg., 'tlieTon.{Quaesi.), Joseph., etc. Others, Roed. in Ges., TAes., and Tuch, identify it with the SaKeln of John 3, 23, cf. Judith 4, 4, which, according to Eusebius and Jerome, was eight Roman miles south of Scythopolis. In Ps. 76, 3 Salem is certainly Jerusalem. The objections to its being Jeru- salem are : I. That this city lay too far south. II. That its old name was Jebus; cf. Judg. 19, 10. III. That Ps. 76, 3 is late, and the dPB' there is a late poetical abbreviation of DPtynv But as Del., p. 306, shews, Jerusalem would not necessarily be too far out of the way — whether Abram returned down the Jordan valley to Sodom, or took his way home through Samaria to Hebron — for the king of Sodom to come and meet him from the south-east, and Melchisedek out of Jerusalem. Further, the facts (I) that in Josh. 10, i there is a king of Jerusalem bearing the name piv ''JIN, which is very similar to p"!V*3PO, and (II) that the comparison of David, Ps. no, 4, with Melchisedek would be far more suit- able if he were king of Jerusalem, favour the identification with Jerusalem. The other two objections are not conclusive ; it is quite uncertain that D7K' is a poetical abbreviation of d1'K'1"1\ and that the old name of Jerusalem was Jebus is not of necessity fatal, as the name aPB* might have been inten- tionally chosen with some hidden significance, just like rf\'\'0 22, 2. ]vh'i> 7K7 'jn3 = not 'i/ie priest; as A.V., but 'a priest of God most high; so A. V. R.; see Ges., § 115. 2 a. jna "V ^N (which, as a proper name (cf. nt:' ijx), has no article) might mean '■the priest', or 'a priest;' but to avoid this ambiguity of meaning, the construction with the prep. 7, instead of the construct state, is chosen ; cf. M. R., § 76 b ; Ewald, § 292 a. 2. \\hv in the O. T. when joined with mn', or 7N, never has the article. 144 GENESIS, 19- \'^'hv ^^'r . . . ']1"in 'ikssed by God,' b after the passive denotes the agent; cf. 25, 21. Ex. 12, 16. Ges., § 143. 2; Ewald, § 295 c; M. R., § 51. 3. Rem. a. T^'^'p combines the double idea of creating and possessing. TMp is cstr. state, followed by two genitives ; cf. M. R., § 75 c. Rem. a. Possibly the two words, heaven and earth, were conceived of as really forming one idea=' /y^d' world,' and so construed as though one word stood ; cf on ver. i . The phrase pNl Wa^ HJp is only found in this chapter. 19^ to 2 0^^ are poetical in form. Notice i^i? for ^7.^ or n'ro, T"}^ for 'T'51^, and fSO, which occurs twice again, Hos. II, 8. Prov. 4, 9; all poetical words, though Dns is also found in prose writings; also the poetical sounding ]\h)3 ^X. 22. ''H^ '^Jl?3~in. ^ I lifl up my hand' i. e. ' / have, just at the moment of speaking, lifted up;' the perfect is used for the immediate past; cf Driver, § 10; M. R., § 2. i ; the mean- ing being, I swear by Yahweh, etc. ; cf Ex. 6, 8. Num. 14, 30. Deut. 32, 40 n'' d''J3B' W Nt^N ''3 (of God, always li ^m, Del.); Dan. 12, 7 D^OOT W I^XDE'I IJiO* anil; see also Ex. 17, 16. 23. DN. The negative particle DX is often used in the oath-formulae. The oath-formula would run in full some- what as follows : ^ I swear, if I do so and so, may Godl etc.; then the second portion being omitted, the first part came to have a negative force, so tiii=Iwill not, and N^) tiX^I will (Num. 14, 28). Render, ' I lift up my hand . . . that I will not take from a thread even to a shoe latchet, of all which is thine,' i. e. 'I will not even take the most trifling thing for myself.' On this use of DX, see Ges., § 155. 2 f . N. B. ; Ewald, §356 a; M. R., §i68/3. 24. Render, ' Nought for me, only that which the young men have eaten, and the portion of the men who went CHAP. 14, VER. 19— CHAP. 15, VER. a. 145 with me: 'Aner, 'Eschol, and Mamre, let them take their portion! Note the casus pendens NIDDI ^5K'K n:jj: cf. 3, 12. 15. 1. "Ib<^ ni'^n ^"2^=' Thy reward shall he very great! "131 TiDB' can scarcely be taken as a second predicate to ''33X, as this would rather require 1, and God cannot be regarded as Himself the reward. nS'iri, inf. abs. Hif. of nm, see on 3, 16. This inf. (properly a subst.), which is generally used as an adverb, is here regarded as an adj., and used as a predicate ; cf. t33?(?, used quite similarly in 47, 9 "n '3B' ''Di Vn n''J?"\1 tJVO; and ^JlDri in Job 8, 9 urns h^'On ''3; Ewald, § 296 d; Ges., § 131. 2. The Sam. has a correction naiN, which is easier. 2. "iTiy "jVin "'S^NI. Circ. clause. ^txiAtr,' Seeing that I am going to die childless! pn '« wz'Aj decedere;' cf. 25, 32. Ps. 39, 14. 2 Chron. 21, 20. ^^■'"^57, lit.='3(zr«, naked! but restricted by usage to one who has no children; cf. Jer. 22, 30. Lev. 20, 20. 21 (all). ^n'^i pttJD l^l = ' and the son of the possession of my household! =my heir. pB^D from pl^'D,=^B'D=' /o draw, to hold, grasp ' (the form being perhaps chosen on account of its similarity in sound to pB'Dl) = 'possession;' cf. PB'O'?, Zeph. 2, 9. ptlJQ p=tJ'ni'' in ver. 3, the construction being the same as in n^na bv^ 14, 13, which compare. Theod., Vulg. render pE'D p ' son of the manager! i. e. ^ of the steward! ptJ'D being from ppt}*, with the meaning, ' to go about busily,' cf. "iO» from mo ; which is possible, but forced and un- suitable. The other VSS. vary. The LXX have 6 Se vl6s Mao-c/c T^r olKoyevovs fiov (their rendering of ''T\''2 |3 in the next verse is 6 6e oiKoyevrjs fiov), Trjs ohoyfyovs being either a mistake L 146 GENESIS, for ojKiof , or vlos is a gloss, and the word should be oUoyevris ; see Frankel, £m/; P-,i7- Onq. has ''n'?3'i pl^! <<0p^ "i?^ nTV^^N nXppSl X^n '/Aw nourisher who is in my house, he is the Damascene, Eliezer.' The Syriac has lljaroclioj? »|..ji*^lo t.^ lli CO) -ISw^ i= ' Eliezer the Damascene, the child of my house, he will be my heir! Aq. has o vlos toC n-oTifo^roj oixtav /iou, connecting ptya with npK>0 ' a cup-bearer'. "ItyVx ptor^T Nin cannot be rendered with the Syriac Uaa9cc»>» »j^'!>L>Xio '■Eliezer the Damascene' (so A. V., but A.V. R. 'Dammesek Eliezer'), for this would either be niyPN ■'pb'Din, or ptTDT B'''N ntvS^K, or pt^m. p nr5)''^X. Hos. 12, 8, which Gesenius cites in favour of this rendering, is not con- clusive, the more correct rendering there being ' Canaan I in his hand are deceitful balances;' see Dr. Cheyne's Hosea, Cambridge, 1884, p. 115. Besides, TiU p in the next verse is not compatible with this explanation, see on 14, 14. Ewald, § 286 c, renders ^^J!'|i'N p'CDI ^Damascus of Eliezer ^ i.e. the city of Damascus, regarded as a community with which IJliezer was associated; cf. PlNty nV33- A view which is possible, but somewhat forced; Eliezer himself might be called pt^D p, but hiardly Damascus. The LXX and Vulg. translate the two words as one proper name, 'Dammesek Eliezer^ which is contrary to usage, men never having double names. Del. considers '\Vi'h^ as in apposition to p'B'D*!, but one would hardly explain the name of a town by that of a person. Hitzig and Tuch reject pb'DI Nin as a gloss; but this weakens the sentence, and, as Di. remarks, leaves the choice of the rare word pE^D unexplained. Di., adopting Ewald's construc- tion, explains as follows : ' These words could be well explained if Eliezer not only had a prominent position in Abram's household, but also was closely connected with Damascus ; CHAP. 15, VERS. ^-g. 147 then we might expect, failing other heirs, that Abram's property would in time fall to him, and return with him to Damascus when he went back thither. We certainly do not read of any such relationship between Damascus and Eliezer, but then this is the only passage where Eliezer is mentioned, and the Damascenes still in Greek times boasted of their connection with Abram' (cf. Del., p. 311). 3. nnri3 is? ""b Y^. observe the emphatic position of Y- 4. ^^in is inserted for emphasis, as in 3, 12 v nJriJ Nin, which compare. 6. n*in''2 'j?2t^ri'l . The perf. with waw conv. would here be quite out of place. It could hardly be frequentative, as believing in a person cannot be conceived of as a frequentative act. Like the other instances in 21, 25. 28, 6. 38, 5 — cf Driver, § 133. (2) — this is probably not a perfect with waw conv., but a case of the perfect with simple waw, where an imperf. with waw conversive would be expected. 13T t7 rDlLTT'T . Verbs of considering are either con- strued as here, with two accusatives, or with one ace. and the prep. 7; see M. R., § 45. 5 with § 51. i end ; cf. 38, 15. 50, 20. In Ps. 106, 31 we have XX'^'rh "b aK'nm; and the LXX of this passage, xai dXoyladrj aiira els SiKmoaivriv (as though they read 7 here), is quoted three times in the N. T., Rom. 4, 3. Gal. 3, 6. James 2, 23. 8. n?35- The pathach is not the article, but the preps. D, 2, 7 before many shoVt pronouns are pointed with long a (cf. Ewald, § 243 b; Ges., § 102. 2 d), but with HD the union is still closer, the vowel being doubled and the long a shortened into short a; see also Stade, § 134 f ; cf. nB3. 9. ttJ^UJ^, not ' threefold,' i. e. '■three of each kind,' as Onq. and Rashi, but ' three years old.' This is the only passage L 2 148 GENESIS, where it occurs in this sense, but doubtless the LXX are right in reading it in i Sam. 1,24 (B'^W 133 for xwh^ CinE33). 10. inVl riK'lp'? T^Ml W>\A = ^ each piece over against the other;' cf. on 9, 5 VnK t^'N, and the use of HB'N of inani- mate things in Ex. 26, 3. 5. Ez. i, 9. 3, 13. "ini 1^ ID^Jn n^l. '^a/ /^« Urds he did not divide.' -ilSS is collective, as in Ps. 8, 9. npia, a rare word; cf. Jer. 34, 18 f, possibly an allusion to this passage. 11. Ifl'^yn. The generic use of the article, as in 14, 13, which compare. iD'^^iSn 'the carcases^ always used of dead bodies in Hebrew. In Syriac ]l^ is used of a body, whether living or dead ; cf. Bernstein, Lex. Syr., p. 390 b. So 13Q in Chaldee ; cf. Levy, Chald. W. £., p. 254 b sub voce. Dnt< 3tZJ"''l. Hif. of atyj. 'And he scared them away,' lit. ' blew them away! The LXX read the consonants as ^B^'l DflK (TVveKd6icrev avTois, 12. 1^1117 tt)DttJn '^rT'V Render, ' And it came to pass, when the sun was about to set.' The NTil does not here, combined with K3?, form the predicate to tt'DB'n, but stands alone. ND^ l^Dtyri being a complete sentence in itself; 6*37, the inf. cstr. with 7, being used as a periphrastic future ; cf. Hos. 9, 13 ywh K''Xin7 CIBXI 'and Ephraim is for bringing forth,' etc., Is. 10, 32 IDJJP 3133 'in Nob is he for tarrying;' Josh. 2, 5 njD^ lytyn TTil ' and it came to pass, the gate being about to be shut;' cf. Driver, § 204 [cf. also § 165], where numerous instances are cited, and Ewald, § 2 1 7 d. b. Ges., § 132. note I, and M. R., § 113, combine the HTl with the inf cstr., which, here at any rate, is quite unnecessary. CHAP. 15, VERS. 10-17. 149 nOTin 'a deep sleep! LXX here, and 2, 21, e/co-Too-tr, ' a trance! rh-O, TOtyn nn"'N n^m. Render, 'And a very ier- rille darkness! lit. ' a terror, great darkness! nijIJ riDE'n being an explanatory apposition to nD''i<. n7D3. The participle is more graphic than the perfect n?33 would be. 13- tDn^ ^57 y"1^?3. 'In a land not theirs ;' of. Hab. 1,6 ■h ^ nuatPD T\'&h\ Prov. 26, 11 h vh nn bj?. The relative, which here would stand in the nominative, being omitted, the antecedent being indefinite; M. R., § 159a; Ges., § 123. 3 a; Ewald, § 332 a. i ; see also Wright, Arab. Gram., ii. p. 343, the construction in Arabic being the same as in Hebrew. Q^^ly^. 'And they (the Hebrews) shall serve them (the sirangers=^the Egyptians)! LXX, rai bovKaa-ovcnv airois, cited Acts 7, 7, ' and they shall enslave them,' which would require D3 najJl; cf. Ex. I, 14. Jer. 22, 13. nay with the ace. is bovKiva ; in Hif ., or Qal with 3, 8ouXoo>. 14. 'The nation which they shall serve am 1 judging I Driver, § ''SS- 3- The participle z&futurum instans; cf. on 6, 17. 16. ''ynn -mt 'in the fourth generation! LXX freely, TfTapTji he yevea. The construction strictly is (Ewald, § 279 d), ' And as a fourth getteration, they shall return; ' as in Deut. 4, 27. Zech. 2, 8. Jer. 31, 8; ace. of the complement. 1 7. ' And it came to pass, the sun having gone down! E'DtS'n nN3, being a circ. clause, by Driver, § 165, \n^1 does not belong to nK3, which is accented on the penult., and is thus /^/T^rf (see Driver, foot-note, p. 21), and so incapable of being combined with irT"! as predicate. Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 59, is surely in error when he speaks of riND as 150 GENESIS, participle (' ubi in participio nX3 nihil nisi notio diuturnitatis inest'). The ordinary editions and that of Baer have the accent on the penult. nTl n!37j?1. The subject in the feminine is followed by the predicate in the masculine. Perhaps, as Miiller sug- gests*(M. R., § 39. Rem. a), riabv was regarded as ace. after n\n, 'and there became darkness (i.e. it turned to a darkness);' see also Ges., § 147. Rem. 2. 18. n^"!^ . . . ni3, X\X..' to cut a covenant' ^opKia re fivetv, foedera icere; on the difference between ri'ia n"i3 and D''pn nnn, see on 9, 9. TiriJ ' I givel lit. '■ I have given ;' the act is regarded as so certain of its fulfilment that it is looked upon as already accompHshed; hence the use of the perfect in promises, contracts, etc.; see M. R., § 3. la; Ges., § 126. 4; Dav., § 46. 2. 3 ; Driver, § 14 ; cf. i, 29. 9, 2. 3. □"""^SQ IllJQ . The southern boundary of the promised land is elsewhere (Num. 34, 5. Josh. 15, 4. Is. 27, 12) the OnXD ijHJ, the modern Wady el-'Arish, and this has led Knobel to identify the DnXD nnj of this verse with the hxxi nnVD. But even if "inj can be used of smaller rivers and canals (2 Kings 5, 12. Job 14, 11. 28, 11. Ez. i, 3. 3, 15), it seems more natural to identify the DnXD inj here with the Nile or eastern arm of the Nile. In the time of David and Solomon (i Kings 5, i. 8, 65) the kingdom under their rule reached from the Euphrates to the Egyptian frontier. n-IC n™ . . . ^Jr. Cf. Ex. 23, 31. Deut. i, 7. josh. I, 4. Is. 27, 12. Notice the difference of idiom. In English we say ' the river Euphrates^ while in Hebrew we find ' the river of Euphrates; ' cf. M. R., § 79. i ; Ewald, § 287 e. b, who compares the German ' Rheinfluss.' CHAP. 15, VER. 18— CHAP. 1 6, VER. 5. 151 16. 1. "Ijn, probably a Semitic ii?im.e. = ' flight' (Arabic ^;j=* ' to flee,' fps* 'flight'), and scarcely, as she was an Egyptian, her real name. Perhaps, as Del. suggests, she was given to Sarai by Pharaoh, cf. 12, 16; and according to this the Midrash explains the name fancifully, as=X"(J''N NH ' behold, a reward.' The Arab nomad tribe D''"iJn, Ps. 83, 7, derive their name from "Wn. 2. r>"I7Q, lit. ' away from hearing,' i.e. 'so that T cannot bring forth;' cf. 18, 25 n'B'VO; 23,6 ^nD napD; 27, i riNnO, etc. njn>< as in 30, 3; cf. Ruth 4, ir. Ex. i, 21. Deut. 25, 9, etc. 3. rQffi7 Q"'3ffi "itoy. ij in the place of the genitive, as in 7, II (and regularly in dates, Ex. 16, i. 19, i, etc.) {TK* ra "n^ niB* hind ; cf. the note there. 4. h'pT\^, cf. I Sam. i, 6 f., is the imperf.Qal (intran-fe.) of a verb )3"V with — ; cf. ">»':, ^1.':, etc.; Ges., § 67. Rem. 3; Stade, § 510 g. The two forms of the imperf. are, I. 3b\ with the 3 doubled when it ceases to be final. II. 2iii) trans, (intrans. 313'.), with the D doubled. In ^pn the doubling has been given up, and compensation made by lengthening the __ into -^, as is usual with gutturals; cf. Vnn, "Ql, DD'.. 5. ''Don. 'The wrong done to me.' Obj. genitive; cf. on 9, 2. LXX, ahiKoiiMi 6K aov ] Vulg. ' inique agis contra me.' '^f^y^1^. The point over the second yod (Mass. note, Nnni "'• bv mpJ point on the last yod) probably marks it as superfluous, because the form elsewhere is ^^"'3, in pause Ip;?; cf. 17, 2. 7. The other passages where points are found over words in Genesis are, 18, 9. 19, 33. 33, 4- 37. ^2. 153 GENESIS, 7. nt^iip')T (cf. I Chron. 20, 2) is the companion form of nNSp'i^ which, however, does not occur in this verb; cf. '^l.''?'!, 37, 33 ; i^|'?J?'l, 2 Chron. 20, 7; the imperf. taking the aflBx of the third pers. fem. sing, either in the form i^^^ or 0^. □''nn pj^ 7J^, probably the well-known fountain on the way to IIB' ; hence the article. "lltt? ~\'\12. ' On the way to Skur;' cf. 3, 24 yy yu D"nn. "ntU must have been somewhere on the frontier between Palestine and Egypt. Josephus, Ant., vi. 7, 3, erroneously supposed that niE' was Pelusium, which is pD. Saadiah holds that -IIB' was Gifar,^Ua.. ' The Arab, geographers understand by the wilderness of GifSr (as distinct from the wilderness of the children of Israel, or Paran), the desert strip of land — which required five or six days' journey to traverse — bounded on the east by the desert of Paran, between Rafia in Philistia, up to lake Tennis (Menzaleh), and from thence to Qulzum or Suez "; in a word, the western declivity of the desert of Paran towards Egypt' (Dillmann). The name probably means ' wall: 8. n^l nt?D ''b^, more frequently the imperfect was used in questions after Hd!', \''»)2, etc., as being less outspoken and more courteous than the perfect. The perfect would = ' Whence hast thou come?' the imperf. ' Whence art thou coming?' or ' Whence mayesl thou he coming?' Cf. Driver, § 39 r; 42- 7- ntQ ">«. Cf. Ges., § 150. Rem. 5; Ewald, § 326a. ;iNO= simply ' whence ^ with a verb or substantive, see Gen. 42, 7. Num. II, 13. ntD IN is used similarly, but admits of being joined with a substantive, as 2 Sam. 15, 2 ntD *N nriN niy; Jon. I, 8 nnx DJ? HTD ^n1; but this is not frequent. CHAP. 16, VERS. 7-12. 153 nt "IN = ' where' but is used rather of things (e. g. with rfa, Tn, Dlpo) than persons ; for which nS''N is the common word, as in 37, 16. 11. mn is a fem. adj.; cf. 2 Sam. 11, 5 liJN mn; the masc. would be nin, like ns^ , n?3 (fem. pi. fTi^l , Deut. 28, 32). mb''. The participle fem. We have here the ground form of '^'nj^', which has remained unchanged, and not passed over into the segholate form JT]j'i\ This ground form re- appears before the suffixes, e. g. ''l?!?'!'' , ''IPi']?'i\ etc. ; cf. Dav., § 29, esp. p. 73. 2; Ges., § 94. 2. Ewald, § 188 b, supposes that as this form is only found when the second pers. is spoken about, the word was so pointed on account of its similarity with the second pers. fem. sing. It occurs again Judg. 13, 5. 7, but in Is. 7, 14, with the third pers., the pointing is ^'v!'- Tii^'^'y. Here the mother names the child, as in 4, i. 25- 19, 37 f-) etc. ; in P the father, so 5, 3. 16,15. 17, 19, etc. DNnpl is pointed in Baer and Del. edition OKii^l, in the common editions nNij?!. The second pers. sing. fem. is, in verbs v('h, usually pointed without the shewa; cf. Ewald, § 195 b, who mentions the two ways of pointing, and cites n".n as well. 12. Q1i< t^lD. 'A wild ass of a man', i.e. a man like the wild ass, who lives in the desert, wanders about at will, and cannot be tamed; cf. Job 39, g. t<'?.S is the onager, Arab. Ki, asinus ferus; Assyr. purivu. The construction is the same as in Prov. 21, 20 mx ^''03; Is. 29, 19 D1X VV^N; and probably Is. 9, 5 j'SJV' N^S, 'the subordinated noun describing merely the relation of the individual [part] to the whole [genus]; the figurative to the actual,' Ewald, § 287 g; cf. M. R., § 79. 2. Rem. a; Ges., § 113. 154 GENESIS, ''3D 7J? Tuch renders ' east o/,' referring to Ishmael's geographical position; cf. 25, 18. 23, 19, but this is un- natural and forced. The text apparently means, Ishmael shall live close to his brethren, before their face, but shall not be on friendly terms with them. This meaning seems to suit n b I'l ba il' better. 13. ''t^"! bt^ nnN = ' thou art the God of seeing', i. e. ' the all-seeing God! Tuch explains, 'the God who appears, manifests himself;' but this does not suit the explanation which follows in the second half of the verse. If 131 niDJ^ ''D. ^ For she said, Have I even here looked after Him that seeth me ?' \. e. Have I even here in the wilder- ness, where I should not expect to see God, seen Him. He saw her, but she did not see Him ; but after He had gone, she perceived that He had been there. ''^?. '^ ^ substantive ; out of pause pointed ''X^, in pause 'Ni'; cf. Job 33, 21 'N^p; Nah. 3, 6 '^^3 (both Baer and Del.); I Sam. 16, 12 ''tfP' = ' vision,' 'seeing! Cf. ''I'S, pausal form of ''IV, Ez. 27, 17 ; ''^n, pausal form of ''^n, Deut. 7, 15. ^NT at the end of the verse, pointed ''Xh, and Job 7, 8 *NT (both Baer and Del. ; ordinary editions have '^?<7 ; cf. Del., Gen., p. 321), is the participle act. of nxn, with the suffix of the noun=my seer, just as '^'^y^.=my word, differing from "J^'i, where the suflBx is a verbal one and would ='^e who or one who sees me.' The LXX erroneously take ^^"^r^^ as *'Nh ^X, and render 6 eeos 6 imhiiv fit, and paraphrase the second half of the verse with Km yap himiov eiSov 6(p6evTa /joi. Syr. has, ^-i- ]6)i ^r )i? LUij '^ \6fi^ j^/' ov i^r >JX-» »l^ ^=' thou art God in a vision, for she said, Lo, indeed a vision I have seen, after that He hath seen me;' taking CHAP. l6, VER. 13 — CHAP. 17, VER. I. 155 ■•X"! in a as a substantive, and paraphrasing 5. Onq. has a paraphrase, ''n''i.B' NJK PIN nnDN nx N^ia nn Nn^N NW riN V 7?'?^! "''^t' ^t?^ V/^om ar/ God, seeing everything ; for she said, Here indeed I begin seeing {= living, so some moderns, Tuch, etc., a sense nST does not bear), afler He revealed Himself lo me.' The Vulg., with 'Profecio hie vidi posteriora videntis me' takes '•"iriNj like *inN_ in Ex. 33, 23 ; cf. 2 Sam. 2,23 14. ' Therefore they called the well, well of the Living one, who sees me ' (lit. my seer, see above). ^~\p is third pers. used impersonally (cf. 11, g)=^'' Jllan nannie den Brunnen! The rend. ' Well of the living-one-of seeing,' "'^'T as pausal form of '^?. (see above), i. e. ' where one sees God and remains alive,' requires a reading '^'^ 'np^ which is unnecessary, and pre- supposes a compound (Wortcomposition), which is impossible in Hebrew (Di.). Wellhausen, Hist, of Israel, Eng. transl., p. 326, proposes to emend the text thus, in'Ni D^^?N Djn 'NT 'nnx TINI ' have I seen \God and remained alive\ after {my] vision?' cf. for the popular belief that one who sees God died, 19, 17. Ex. 3, 6. 19, 21. Mich, emends 'N^ ''ff? "i^?3 ' well of the jawbone (i.e. rock? Judg. 15, 19) of vision' With the naming of the well, cf 22, 14. 28, 19. 32, 31. The position of the Hagar-well is uncertain, see some identifications that have been proposed in Del, Gen.^, p. 321 f., who decides for its position on the road from Beer- sheba, along the ' Gebel-es-Sfir, which stretches from north to south. "l^lll, position unknown. 17. I. *>1U) 7t^ . ^N. The oldest and most general name of God, and restricted as a rule to Yahweh, but occasionally 156 GENESIS, used of other gods. The word is most common in poetry, elsewhere always with some qualifying word, such as )1vy, -\1, or as here '•IB' : it only takes the suffix of the first person vN. On ba, see Appendix II. ^"ItU, according to P the name of God revealed to the Patriarchs (see Bi.jI^xoduSjp. 54), 28, 3. 35, 11 (cf. 43, 14). 48, 3 (cf. 49, 25). Ex. 6, 3 (in all these passages, except 49, 25, with 7K). In poetry and the poetical style (Ruth i, 21) we find ilB* alone, it is very often found in Job. Explained by the Rabbins as =''!(• K*) • E* ' Ae who is sufficient^ ' the all- sufficient^ but such compounded names are not found in Hebrew; so Aq., Symm., and Theod. Roediger in Ges., Thes., supposes that ^IB*, which never has the article, is a plural form with the suffix of the first pers., like ''JIIN, Ges., § 121. 6. Rem. 4 ; but ''JITN is the only clear instance of this. Del. supposes the ending ''_ is an adjectival ending, as in ''31 {ZaKxaloi), ''30, ityiB*! ; but this would presuppose a noun IE' 'power,' which does not exist : and the adjectival suffix '_ is only found in a few proper names, and may admit of another explanation. Gesenius took it to be a pluralis majest., but it is doubtful whether a plural ending ■"_ exists. Most moderns take it as an intensive adjective formed from n'1B'=Tn{}', with the pathach preserved, as in ^"]B'=n'lB', and the proper name ''1^', Ewald, §1550. The form is thus similar to the nominal formation ?lfi?; cf. ''H, '^fO, with -^r- instead of -rr-; possibly, as Wright suggests, pointed thus by the Massoretes in accordance with the Rabbinical etymology of the word. The LXX render it always in Genesis by a pronoun, here 6 eedr aov ; cf. 49, 25 and Ex. 6, 3 {avTav), but elsewhere (often in Job) they have sometimes navroKpaTap, sometimes iKavos. The Vulg. has ' omnipotens' here. CHAP. 17, VERS. 2-5. 157 *^'Sr>^' before me', i. e. under my eyes, in consciousness of my presence, 24, 40. Is. 38, 3; different from nx ^^^n^, 5, 22- 6, 9. 2. 1«n l«T2n. Cf. on 7, 19. 4. ' As for me, behold my covenant is with thee, and thou shalt become a father of a multitude of nations! ^JX '^ prefixed, as in 6, 17. 9, 9, for emphasis; it is opposed to nriXI, in ver. 9. ni^7 r\'''^m. n"ni, perf. with waw conv., though no imperfect precedes ; compare the companion construction of waw conv. with the imperf. when no perfect precedes. So 26, 22 unai; Ex. 6, 6 iriN^ini; Driver, § 119 a. 2^^, cstr. state for ''??<, is chosen on account of the name Abraham. This form is also found in proper names, e. g. D17t^'3^{, nJ2X, but not so frequently as the longer form UN. Q"'"!^ lion, ptin is used here instead of the more usual bvi^, 28, 3. 35, II, on account of the etymology of Qm3N, suggested by the writer in ver. 5. 5. "fnCJ n« , . . «'ip'' «Sv The ace. after the passive verb as in 4, 18, which compare. nmii^, U^'i^=' exalted father ;' not identical with DTiax, where the 1 is the suffix of the first person, the name meaning, ' my father is high.' Di. offers an alternative explanation, ' Father of Raham or Ram^ i. e. ' the Height; The etymology of the second name nm3N given in the text is really no etymology, but merely a play on the words ; cf. the etymologies given for niJ, j''p ; the name being changed into Abraham, because thus pronounced, an assonance was produced between the Dn of pDn and Omnx. Dm3N does not = Fattier of a multitude. The etymology is quite unknown. Di. suggests that it may 158 GENESIS, be a different — perhaps older — perhaps more Aramaic pro- nunciation of D13N, since with Din, DNT and QHT could be interchanged. A word tiiVi,=-' multiiude,' does not exist; the connection with the Arabic word ILa^, mentioned by the Arabic lexicographers, being very precarious. '^Tini . . . pOn H^}. |n3, with two accusatives, in the sense 'to make any one anything,' Gas., § 139. 2; M. R., § 45) 5 ; so 1 Kings 14, 7. 16, 2. Jer. i, 5. The other con- struction with 7 in place of the second ace. is equally common; cf ver. 6. 48, 4. Is. 49, 6, etc. 7. 'QTiTv^ ^'throughout their generations' (successively); the plural suffix is used, J;^t being taken collectively. oninSE'D^ would be ' throughout their families ' (contemporaneously). Formulae of this kind are common in P; so 8, 19. 10, 5. 20. 31. 32. 13, 3. '^'^in^^ , . . "^7 nVnb, i. e. Abraham's descendants will stand in a close relationship to God as His servants, and be under His protection. He will protect and specially favour them, they will serve and worship Hiin as their God, Ex. 6, 7. Deut. 26, 17. 8. T^'\n\^, n"'-|i:i?3, and 1^35 Y"\« are all marks of P. Also the phrase, ' Thou and thy seed after thee,' vers. 7-10. 10. '\y\ ^3 03^ h^'Or^. ^isn is inf abs. Nif. of i'i'D or i)lD; cf. Ges., § 67. Rem. 5. The infinitive abs. being emphatically prefixed to indicate a command; cf. Ewald, § 328 c; M. R., § 106. I c; cf Ex. 20, 8. Render, 'Every male to be circumcised' i.e. 'let every male he circumcised! Ges., § 131. 4 b. 7, prefers taking the inf abs. as an imperative. 11. 00^7^21 is Nif. of ^^D for Onib: ; a root %^ does not exist; cf ^30ri, Num. 17, 28, for IJiBFl; n^JDH, where one CHAP. 17, VERS. 7-14. 159 would expect n'ip''pn, Ewald, § 234 e; Ges., § 67. Rem. 11 ; of. on II, 6. The perf. with waw consec. is in continuation of the imperative, which is implied in the last verse in the inf. abs. 7^13'?, Driver, § 112 (cf., however, § 113. i, where it is explained on the analogy- of Ig. 5, 5). 'W'2. is ace. of respect, as in 3, 1 5, which compare. See also I Kings 15, 23 V^JI HN rhn. 12. 7i?3') is imperf. Nif. oibbli (for ?I3*; the regular form, Job 14, 2); cf. 'tsMfl, Jer. 48, 2, as though they were from verbs l"y; cf. Ges., § 67. Rem. 5; Stade, § 504 e, who ap- parently regards P^iS' as from a verb ^1D. ID"'J3'' nSTDlZJ pi. 'Every male, when eight days old, shall he circumcised for you throughout your generations! riJOB' }3 D'D'' is a secondary predicate; cf. Is. 65, 20 p nyan ^3 m»'' rm nso; Job 15, 7 ^^1n nix |1E'''Nin; cf. Driver, §161. 3. "1^2 1^, a mark of P; sover. 27. Ex, 12, 43. Lev. 22, 25. njpD and I3f ?3 are also characteristic of P. 13. The repetition after ver. 12 is in the legal style of this writer (P); cf. 26f. 14. ' The uncircumcised male who shall not be circumcised as to the flesh of his foreskin — that soul shall be cut off from his people, my covenant he has violated.' The subject is placed first for emphasis, as a casus pendens, and taken up by Ninn K'SSn, instead of by a pronoun; cf. M. R., § 132 a; Driver, § 197. Obs. 2; Ex. 12, 15 and 17, 12. U^yy^=-^ fellow-tribesmen! A peculiar use, found chiefly in one or two stereotyped phrases. nniDST. Being cut off from one's fellow-tribesmen is probably to be explained of sudden removal by God, rather than death inflicted by man; cf. Di., p. 245 et sq.; Del., l6o GENESIS, p. 326. Tuch explains it as =001'' TIID, but if this were here intended, it would probably have been added; cf. Ex. 31,14. nr\"l2JT is perf. with waw consec, after a casus pendens ; cf. Ex. 12, 15 nm33i , . . tias b '•a; Deut. 17, 12 nB'x t^'Kni Ninn tP'sn n»i . . . ncv''; cf. Driver, § 123 a. tJ'ajn nmoji N\nn is a phrase characteristic of P; so Ex. 12, 15. 19. Lev. 7, 20 ff. Num. 9, 13. "IDn. Pausal form for IBH, so Wn, Is. 18, 5; Ewald, §93 a. 2; Stade, § 393 b. ^; Ges., § 29. 4, c. note. 15. '^"ito. The name T['Vif,=-' princess,' being the feminine form of "I'tf. The meaning of ''IB' is not so clear ; the LXX have 2apa; so 'I'D 2ii/5. Possibly the name nb* was an older form of the name m'E' (with (J fem. = n^), (Di.). The ending '_ is hardly an adjectival ending; cf. on '''^V, ver. i. Another explanation is that 'IE' is from nnB', 32, 29 ; and so ^' the contentious, disputing one;' cf. '''lK'=:n'lB'j which is quite possible, but cannot be regarded as certain. Other explana- tions are that ''"1K'= ' the merry one,' mtJ' ' one that makes merry, delights (er/reuende),' from Jlw, which Di. says violates both the laws of sound and form ; or from the Arabic (J^ ill L«, 'generosus/uit,' so ' the liberal, generous one.' 17. ]Q7n. n interrog. pointed with dag., ace. to Ges., § 100. 4; Dav., § 49. 2. Mnn rr^to D^T. The repetition of the interrog. n of the first member, after the DKl of the second member of a double interrogative clause, is uncommon [this seems to be the only instance] ; cf. M. R., § 145 ; Ewald, § 324 c. 18. rvrr^ h^'iV'ti^'' 'h = ' if Ishmael may live before thee', and as no apodosis follows, ' would that Ishmael might live;' cf. Driver, § 142; M. R., § 147; Ewald, § 329 b; Ges., § 136. 2. CHAP. 1% VERS. 15-26. 161 "h is also followed (exceptionally) by the imperative, 23, 13, or jussive, 30, 34. 19. ni^'lpl . . . mb''. The participle used as future, followed by the perf. with waw consecutive ; so 6, 17. 48, 4 ; Driver, § 113. i. The accent on nsopi is not thrown forward on to the last syllable by the waw conv., in accordance with the rule, that in the perfect Qal of verbs n"? and n"? the waw conv. does not cause the accent to move forward, Driver, § no. 4; cf. n"i''ni, ver. 4. 20. bW?3ttJ"'7'1. 'And with regard to /.;' cf. 19, 21 TXtn 131^' DJ 'also with regard to this matter;' 42, 9 wn ^2'^? DnP ' ivhich he dreamt about them;' cf. M. R., § 51. 5. Rem. b; Ges., § 154. 3 e. Tl'^'lDm . . . TiDIi, the perfect with waw conv., after a prophetic perfect ; so Deut. 15, 6 nD3yni . . , ^^^3 ; Num. 24, 17 dpi . . . 3313 Til, Is. 2, II. 43, 14; cf. Driver, § 113. i ad fin. ; M. R., § 24. 2 b. Rem. b; Ewald, § 342 b. 2. D^"'tD3. N''tJ'J is almost confined to P in the Pent, and Josh. h^'^'y. "^la^ vnniT ,- cf. 48, 4 a''i3x? hn'^^ Tnn^i. both in p. 23. 70 ''T is imperf. Qal of 770 or 7l», the form with waw conv. and retrogression of the tone being the same in both verbs. ntn Qvn oas^n. cf. on 7, 13. 24. *17Qnil is either reflexive, ' in his circumcising himself' i.e. 'when he circumcised himself ^ or better passive (see ver. 25, where Ishmael could hardly circumcise himself), 'in his being circumcised^ i. e. ' when he was circumcised'. 26. 7iS!l 'is the Nif. of ijlD, formed from the form Ij^jD,' Ewald, § 140 a ; see also Ges., § 72. Rem. 9 ; Stade, § 397 b, 7 ; M 1 62 GENESIS, cf. nnj from nnn, "in^ from -inn. Stade and Ges. both regard it, however, as the Nif'al proper of h'^a, comparing i^JfJ from 18. 1. "iai nrS nU?'^ Nim. Circ. clause, 'Wh'ie he was sitting at the door of the tent! LXX excellently, KaBrniivov avTov. "131 nriD is ace. of place, in answer to the question 'where?' Ges., § ir8. i b; M. R., § 41 b. QT^n DTO, LXX fie52 nsri, with short e (Seghol) (only here ; cf. Ewald, § 91 d) and dagesh forte conj., is unique. "•^nX is marked by the Massoretes ijini nna3 "j (i.e. "i pointed iBith paihach and profane^ i.e. ' not used of God'^. IJll i^2 'TTlD. It was regarded as a neglect of the duties of hospitality to allow strangers to spend the night in the street; cf. Judg. 19, 15, and contrast with this in- hospitality, 24, 25. Ex. 2, 20. Judg. 13, 15. 'The modern Arabs consider it a privilege to lodge strangers who may come to them, and often disputes arise as to who shall have this honour.' Kn. cited by Di. □nOSCJm. D''3B'n prop.='/o shoulder or place on the shoulders^ i. e. to put one's baggage on the beasts of burden, which was done early in the morning, so ' to rise early, to resume the journey'. The verb is a denom. from DDty ' a shoulder I or rather 'the portion of the back between the shoulders^ where any burden would be carried. N7, with emphatic or euphonic dagesh; an unusual use of dagesh, generally considered to be for the purpose of securing a clear and distinct pronunciation of the consonant : cf. Stade, § 40 b, c ; Ges., § 20. 2 a. Rem. 2 ; so 1NS 1»1p, ver. 14; N^ llDNil, I Sam. 8, 19; cf. Ex. 12, 31. Deut. 2, 24. It is only found in accurate editions and MSS. See also Del., Commentary on Ps. 94, 12, 4th ed. 3. nntyQ, prop. * a drinking feast; then generally ' a meal or banquet ;' cf. 21, 8. 26, 30. JTl2?3 = ' sweet or unsoured,' i. e. ' unleavened cakes ' (from }'XD ' to lap, suck '), and so more quickly prepared. 4. l^T D"»ia ; cf. on 2, 5. Render, 'They had not yet gone to sleep, when the men of the city, the tnen of Sodom, surrounded the house, both young and old, all the people in a body.' CHAP. 19, VERS. 3-9. 171 13D3 is third perf. pi. Nif . of 22D = i^aipj. NiFal being originally Nafal; the pathach being thinned down into hireq; cf. Dav., § 25. Rem. a; Ges., § 51. i; and compare the Arabic vii form Jilj[ (in-qatala) and such Heb. forms as nbyi, nE'iJ = 2^)} (Dav., § 9. I. Rem. b ; Ges., § 24. 2 b) ; Wright, Gram. Arab., i. p. 42. 33DJ becomes 3p3, and the pathach under the nun, standing in an open syllable before the tone, becomes tone-long qame^ : cf. Stade, § 86. 3 ; Dav., § 6. 2 b; see also Ges., § 27. 2 a. PKJpC = lit. 'from the endl i. e. including the whole, so in Jer. 51, 31. Cf. Judg. 18, 2. i Kings 12, 31 (not 'of the lowest', but ' of the whole body of the people '). 5. TyP^T\ ^= "■ to-nightj 'this night' the article, as in DVn, T\WT\, has a demonstrative force: Ges,, § 109. Rem.; Ewald, § 277 a. 3. So in 30, 15. 6. Tv7~\ . . . nnO. xh^ =■' the door of the house'. nns= ' the entrance (gate).' 7. "Tlt^ = 'my friends;' cf. 29, 4. Judg. 19, 23. 8. 7N for ih^ is found eight times in the Pentateuch and once besides (i Chron. 20, 8), and always (except Chron. 1. c.) with the article; see Ges., § 34; Dav., § 13. Rem. a; Stade, § 1 7 1 b. It is commonly explained as an archaism, but this is very doubtful. Q. ni^7n"tt?2. So in correct editions; the ordinary T : T ..• editions have |""J?P, with metheg, which is wrongly placed, as the tone is on the penult. LXX, 'AttoVto exer. Vulg. 'recede illuc ;' cf. Is. 49, 20 'h'i\'^\ 'stand away'. Render, ' Stand back'. ^IDUJ . . . int^n Ilt2i^''1. 'This one came in to sojourn and goes on playing the judge;' cf. 31, 15 13303 HN PDK D] ?3N*1 172 GENESIS, ' and goes on to eat up our silver ;' Job lo, 8 "iJJJ?Dni ^ and yet thou goest on to swallow me up;' cf. Driver, § 79) 'The action or its results continuing into the writer's present ; ' also Ewald, §§ 231 b, 342 a. i a. IDIDtiJ. When the inf. abs. follows the finite verb, it generally denotes a continued or lasting action; cf. Ges., § 131. 3b; Ewald, § 280b. "THhin. The n is the article, not the n interrogative. T V T 11. Q^"1'13D1 ^wiih blindness;' not absolute blindness, but temporary loss of sight; the word only occurs once again, 2 Kings 6, 18. Elsewhere we find l'i"'JV) Zech. 12, 4. Deut. 28, 28. Qni3D is from "i.1.?P [Safel of 113 (J^)] = 'to make blind,' which occurs in Aramaic ; cited by Levy, Chald. W. B. sub voce, as occurring in Num. 1 6, 1 4 Targ. Ps.-Jon. ("illiDn). The article is according to Ges., § 109. 3. Rem. I c. LXX, aopao-ta; Onq. Np.")aB* 'faiuilas;' Syr. jli^i^ ' illusiones! hrC, n:S^T ]tDpn. Cf. i Sam. 5, 9. 30, 2 ; llt. = 'from a little one even unto a great one,' i.e. 'all,' every one being regarded as either small or great, so the two extremes would embrace all persons. Cf. further, Dietrich, Abhand. zur hebr. Gram., p. 206, who gives a list of other expressions for 'a//,' 'nobody ;' cf. Ex. 11, 5. ^S?^ ... ]T2, as in 14, 23, and often. 12. nSD ^7 "'n ~\)i = 'Whohast thou still here?' \.t.'hz.%1 thou any more belonging to thee in Sodom besides those in thy house?' ]'C'C' PS'"1^3-PS collective ='jorej-z«-/flz«y' but the singular without the suflBx is strange, as one would expect 1''J.nn, which the Syr. has, yols^. Di. conjectures that 331 was CHAP. 19, VERS. II-15. 173 inserted between y and Jnn, as no mention is made else- where of sons which Lot had before the destruction. 13. ISTON CnnttJO "'D. The participle is used of future time, with the subject following, as in 3, 5, which compare. Dnp5?2 = ' (he cry concerning them;' cf. on 18, 20. mrr"' ''3D JnN as Inver. 27. 33, 18. Ex. 34, 23. i Sam. I, 22. Ps. 16, 10. 14. TlpT' 'who were to take,' ' the takers of his daughters;' so Ewald, § 335 b, better than (LXX, Targ. Ps.-Jon., Kimchi, Del.) 'who hadtakeni which would be more naturally expressed by lE'X and the perf. ; and Lot would scarcely leave his married daughters in Sodom without calling them away. ^5^ii "Idp. X with emphatic dag. (see on ver. 2), to ensure the clear pronunciation of the ^{ between the two u-sounds. . • . D riTT = ' to appear as,' for which there is no proper word in Hebrew; cf 27, 12. 40, 10. 15. Render, 'And when the morning dawned, the angels urged Lot, saying, Take thy wife and thy two daughters that are with thee, lest thou be swept away in the punishment of the city'. TOV inU,n 1Q3V loa = -iK'S'a is rare and poetical, Is. 26, 18. Ps. 58, 8; cf M. R., § 60; Ewald, § 337 c. ISJ^t^'^'l is imperf Hif. of fix. The waw conv. is used after a time determination : so 22, 4 Oninx N2'''1 '"{T^^B'n dIU, I Sam. 21, 6 ViTil TlNn, Josh. 22, 7 Mniil . . . Cini'B' 13; cf Driver, § 127b. nj^JJODH, lit. 'who are found' i.e. who are with thee in thy house; cf i Sam. 13, 15. 21, 4. The participle may often be rendered by the present, as in 4, 10. 16, 8. 37, 16, etc. riNVDJn probably refers to ^nB'N MN as well as to TniJ3 ^m DNi. 174 GENESIS, nODn |D. nSD = 'to be snatched off, carried away ;' so I Sam. 12, 25. Num.' 16, 26. '^V =^ '' punishment ;' cf. 4, 13. 16. nonon'i'l, imperf. Hithpalpal of Tim; cf. lOnDn' from niD, Dan. 8, 7; Stade, § 503. T(\r(^ riyCm = ' through Fahweh's sparing him,' i. e. 'because Yahweh spared him^ the subject of the inf. construct following in the genitive; cf. M. R., § 117; Ges., § 133. 2 : also Ps. 133, I D'>nx r\i^. Is. 47, 9 y\ir\ naxya. The inf. cstr. nPDn has the fem. cstr. ending; here intentionally, as nin'' nPDni could not be taken as construct state with a following genitive. The inf. with fem. ending n is common, especially in particular words, viz. i^?l!^, '"■?"?!, '"'?■?'?', occa- sionally we find n^nj?, nax^, nj^a"!, ni^tn; cf. Stade, p. 339; Ges., § 45. I. Rem. b. 17. tfl''IlJn hiA. The jussive form t23n would rather be expected after ^x, but cf. Ps. 121, 3 Dli^'i'X, i Sam. 25, 25 Dib'J ^X ; cf. Driver, § 47 ; Ges., § 127. 3 c. 18. ''^It'^, noted by the Massoretes vhp; DH^X does not of necessity imply that Lot did not recognise that Yahweh was speaking with him, and that ''3'lX = ' my lords, pausal form of 'ilX; as in ver. 19 we find singular suffixes. The Syr. and Saadiah regard ''Jnx as ^in, but the LXX, Onq., Vulg., and Sam. follow the Massoretes ; so Del. 19. ''3j23.']ri~]S . Imperf. with the so-called union vowel pathach instead of tsere ; cf. 29, 32 ''^?il.J<,1,; see Ges., § 60. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 636 b, who cites i Kings 2, 24 Kri ''J?''K'i»1, Is. 56> 3 '^H?!, Job 9, 18 •'TJ?''??^.. < ■^riDT. 1 with pretonic qame9, the tone is not thrown forward, because the word is in pause; see Driver, § 110, 2. 'riD = ''firiO. The perf. with waw conv., as in 3, 22, which compare. CHAP. 19, VERS. T.6-2,^. 22. "iyi!J, probably one hour south-east of the Dead Sea, in that portion of the Araba which is now called Ghor es Safia. In 14, 2.8 its older name is given, V?^ ', cf. Wetz. in Del. Gen., p. 564, and Di., p. 256, who remarks that the name was still in existence at the time of the Crusades (Segor ; cf. LXX, ^rjymp) ; the Arab geographers call it Soghar or Zoghar, and the Dead Sea, the Sea of Zoghar. Grove, however, in Smith's Bt'cf. of the Bible, art. Z'oar, brings forward evidence in favour of a site for Zoar on the north of the Dead Sea. 23. my!? . , . UJDttJn. ' The sun had risen over the earth when Lot came to Zoar;' cf 44, 3. 4 . , . n'Jjn 1NS» Dn IDN flDVI, Judg. 3, 24 1X3 Yil3J)1 KSi NIHI ; also 38, 25. Judg. 18, 3. Time or place determinations are generally subor- dinated to the main clause in a sentence ; here and in the other instances cited, the time determination is co-ordinate, and placed first for emphasis; cf Driver, § 169. 24. Q''l2t2JrT ]Q mn"' n^^Q, the fire and brimstone are described as proceeding both //rowz Yahweh and out of heaven, Xi'iavn p and nw nso; cf 2 Kings I, 12. Job I, 16. Di. comparing Mic. 5, 6 supposes that nin'' riND, like the Greek €K Aidr, was an archaic expression, similar in meaning to D^Dtyn |D, by which it is explained; cf Ewald, Hist, of Israel {Eng. Trans.), ii. p. 157. nt^J2 = irapa with the genitive. |D = i<. 25. ^DiT'T . naano is a technical word, always used of the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrha (to which there is at least an allusion even in Is. i, 7), just as ?^3P is always used of the great Deluge. ' Baer and Delitzsch's reading nT»2 should be corrected into nis^ : seejesaias, p. v, note. 176 GENESIS, 26. 'T'"in^5T3 '■from behind him' i.e. Lot; she was follow- ing Lot, and out of curiosity turned her face away from him. 28. nby is pluperfect, 'The smoke had begun to ascend before Abraham looked.' ]CJ:i5n napD. Cf Ex. 19, 18: 'Like the smoke of a smelting furnace.' jB'aD = ' a smelting oven.' '\MT\ ' a baking oven.' 29. □"'"IJ^n nt< "^Cm. The inf. cstr. always governs its object in the accusative; cf M. R., § ii6; Ges., § 133. i. 30. mj^D2. 'In the cave;' either the generic article, as in 14, 13. 15, II, or possibly a particular cave was meant, which the narrator could speak of as 'the cave;' cf 16, 7. 33- ■'i"')"?.^^- Scriptio defectiva for nrpB'PI ; cf. Ges., § 47. Rem. 3. This defective form is found occasionally, but by no means uniformly, in the Pent. It occurs also elsewhere, e.g. in Ezekiel '•V^J]'^ four times, with the full form also four times. N^n TvThl. Kin without the article — which would be expected, as n?i? is defined — as being in itself definite; cf 30, 16. 32, 23. I Sam. 19, 10 (all): see Ges., § iii. 2 b; M. R., § 85. Rem. c. This is a very rare variation for the more usual Ninn rh^l. rro'lpl^ with a point on the 1 ; cf ver. 35 HDj^a . Possibly the point refers to a various reading i^'?i?'?, S'S in ver. 35. Hieron., Quaest., ed. Lag., p. 30 (Appendix to the Genesis Graece), says : ' Denique Hebraei quod sequitur et nesciuit cum dormisset cum ea et cum surrexisset ab eo adpungunt desuper quasi incredibile et quod rerum natura non capiat coire quempiam nescientem;' cf Strack, p. 88. 34. ninOJ2. The ending n^ in this word is quite unique, and apparently without analogy ; cf Stade, § 308 d ; Ges., § 80. Rem. 2 b, classes it among nouns with the bare fem. CHAP. 19, VER. 26 — CHAP. 20, VER. I. 177 ending n^ , e. g. Canaanitish names of towns, cf. mSN, n^W, non, and other names such as J^JOPI, prob. abbreviated for nnjori, also n^m, prob. for "n^n? ; cf. Stade, 1. c. Olshausen, Grammar, § 38 c, explains the form by contraction out of '"'in?'?' Another explanation (cf Levy, Chald. W.B., i. p. 330) is that it is contracted out of ^^^? DI1 ; cf the Aramaic word NnnDi'=Nin D'r. T : T T-; 36. ]n"'lt^?3. }D is used intentionally instead of b (38, 18 b), on account of the etymology in ver. 37 ; cf vers. 32, 34. 37. nb^llD. LXX add the explanation, X/youo-a, 'Ek tov TTarpos juoD, i. e. 2ND yrom the father ' (like pp, niJ, not a strict etymology): another explanation is that the word is com- pounded of ''to for ''1? ^ water ^=^'\'a in Aramaic (cf Is. 25, 10, and the prop, name Nm Htt, Moab. Stone, 1. 8 = Biblical N3"7 ID, see Schlottmann, Siegessdule Mesa's, Halle, 1870, p. 41; and nj?aiD, Ktb., Jer. 48, 21; Kri, rm'O (cf. i Chron. 6, 64), a town of the Levites, in the territory of Reuben, which afterwards belonged to Moab), and 3X, the meaning being then ' semen patrts.' 38. ''Qy~p='jo« of my people,' after which the LXX insert, \eyova-a, Ylbs ytVovr ftov. ]i^y=' ielonging to the people' (abs. then concrete) bears the same relation to DV as JID^X to ajN (Del.). 20. I. n23n n!J"lN'. 'To the land of the south.' n locative and the construct state; cf Ges., § 90. 2 a ; Stade, § 342 d : so Ex. 4, 20 anXD nxiN ; Gen. 43, 17 f)D1'' nrw ; Deut. 4, 41 tJ'DK' nniTD; other instances in Genesis are (?)24, 67. 28, 2. 46, I. 113, probably three hours south-east of Gaza, where N 178 GENESIS, Rowlands found ruins bearing the name Chirbet-el-Gerir ; on a broad and deep torrent, Gurf-el-Gerar, flowing from the south-east; cf. Del., p. 344; Di., p. 262. 2. TVi51. ' And if thou art not going to restore ;' the affirmative form would be 3''E'D ^B''' QN; cf. 43, 5 DN1 n^B'D "jrN, neg. ; and ver. 4 n^B'D •]tJ''' ClK, affirmative. pN and tJ''' are often used thus in hypothetical sentences. 9. '\W ^^ "IttJ^ U''Wi:i = ' deeds which ought not to be done;' cf. 4, 2 13 ^tycn nriNI ' thou shouldest rule over him;' 34, 7 nfe'V N^ pi 'so it should not be done;' Ex. 10, 26 HD ^3y3 'how we ought to serve;' see Driver, § 39 a; M.R., 7. 2 b. 10. n'^fc^l TTC:i=-' what hadst thou in view?' so HNI in Ps. 66, 18 WNT ON JIN. 11. TlllSN "ID, supply in''B'y from rfS^y in ver. ro '(/ did it) because I thought;' cf. 27, 20. 31, 31. Ex. r, 19. p"^. Knobel and Del. render (I) 'surely;' cf Num. 20, 19 nan ps p-i ; Ps. 32, 6 D''3n Q'^D rpi^ p-\. (II) Di. prefers to translate ■ only,' ' at least,' not considering the two passages above cited decisive. ""ilJlinl . . . n«1'^ ]■'«. 'There is no fear of God in this place, and they will kill me;' cf. 2 Sam. 14, y 1331 ' and they will quench;' Gen. 34, 30 'hv 1BDNJ1 naoo TlD yxi. 12. '^«(/ .y^f z> tzZfo really my sister, the daughter of my father, only not the daughter of my mother, so she became my wife;' cf. on 12, 19. Such marriages, though prevalent among other nations, e. g. in Canaan, Assyria, Persia, Egypt, Arabia, were forbidden in the Levitical law. Lev. 18, 9. ir. 20, 17. Deut. 27, 22. From this passage it would seem that they were customary also among the Hebrews ih pre-Mosaic times. N 2 l8o GENESIS, 13. Q'Tlbw . . . "Wnn, marked by the Massoretefe mp, to shew that the true God is meant, although the verb is plural ; possibly the plural here is used because Abraham was con- versing with a heathen. Cf. 35, 7, where probably the angels are included under D'-n^N; see Ewald, § 318 a; Ges., § 146. 2. note. The Heb.-Samaritan text here, and 35, 7, read the singular. The later books of the Bible also avoid the plural ; cf. Neh. '9, 18 with Ex. 32, 4. 16. Tp^'7p'iA=' a thousand shekels of silver! ispB' omitted (cf. 8, 5)by Ges., § 120. 4, 2. The thousand shekels of silver could hardly be the value of the presents given to Abraham, ver. 14, for such a valuation of these gifts is here quite out of place ; besides the present here mentioned is given to Abraham for Sarah, and on account of the insult she had suffered; whilst the one in ver. 14 was for Abraham himself t^in refers to the gift, not to Abraham ; as in the latter case, no reason would be assigned for giving the thousand shekels. Iin^^ lUJ^ 737. The simplest way of taking these words seems to be Dillmann's. ' // is for thee, a covering of the eyes for all those who are with thee'. 727, introducing those whose eyes are to be covered, and ^7 being dat. comni. Del. renders, ' See, this may be unto thee a covering of the eyes (i. e. a propitiation which makes thee blind to what has happened, and this as though it had not happened ; cf 32, 21) to all who are in thy neighbourhood (a propitiation, in regard to their mistress who had been insulted).' The propitiation, being made first to Sarah, and then to those who were with her. But this would rather require ?5?1, which LXX read. Kill. Trdo-atf. Knobel and Tuch adopt another rendering, CHAP. 20, VERS. 13-16. 181 ' Wi'ih regard to all thai which has befallen thee;' which is forced and unnatural. 73 Jn^^T is separated from "^riN by the accents, and con- nected with nnail. Render, 'And among all (or "in the judgment of all" cf. Is. 59, 12) so art thou justified.^ h'2 HNI is taken by Tuch in close connection with ^nX 'for all which has happened {with) unto thee and {with) unto all.' But P3 JINI can hardly mean this, and nothing had happened 73 nx 'with alll T^TS'yTs probably ought to be pointed PlD?il, which is the usual form of the second pars. fem. perf. in a ? guttural verb, as the 1 is difficult before anything but a second perf. To take the form T\Vai as second perf., comparing nni??, 30, 15, is unsafe, as nnp7 there is probably infinitive. Del. takes nn33 as participle fem. standing for nx nnail, and renders, ' and with all justified^ viz. ' thou standest justified' The Mass. points seem to intend nnaJI as perf third pars, fem., which is pointed without shewa under the n, to dis- tinguish it from the second pers. fem. perf, which has shewa. The rendering would then be, 'And with regard to all — so it is settled;' but then the feminine would not be necessary. n''Din='/i!' procure right for any one' so ' to justify, set right;' cf Is. 11, 3. 4. nn3J may here be either pass, of n^ain, with an ace. of the thing, Job 13, 15. 19, 5 = '^ represent as right;' or passive of 7 n''3in, Job 16, 21 ' to pro- cure right for! Ges. renders nn331 'and she stood reproved,' which is possible, but unsuitable, as Abimelech is not re- proaching Sarah. It is possible that the sentence is corrupt. □"'^"'5^ mOD; cf D1J3 133 in 32, 21. Job 9, 24 .TtDDB' ':a nD3\ and noa, Ps. 85, 3, of covering sin; 133, Jer. 18, 23, of atoning, lit. covering, guilt; cf. also i Sam. 12, 3 DvVKI 13 y'JJ (if the Mass. text is correct here, but see LXX, and l82 GENESIS, Thenius in loc). The rendering of niDD by 'veil' is un^ suitable, and not supported by 12, 14. 24, 16. 29, 16. 17, compared with 24, 65 ; as it is not certain from these passages that women wore veils first when they were engaged (Tuch). Besides, a thousand shekels would be rather a high price to give for a veil, about £100. LXX have ravra ea-rai a-ot els Tijirjv Tov npo(Tairov (rov, Kal vnirais rais fifra (rov, Ka\ navra a\rjd(v(Tov : navTa aXfjdeva-ov being, perhaps, a guess on the part of the translator, who misunderstood the original. Onq. has : r\i] ■^^'nl n'TQi ^i^riiaT n'^nhm ti^n -^p-^^ niDii ri''b nih nh nn3in''N rpmi nd b by] '^''Q'V'n ba ' BeMd, it is unto thee for a covering of glory, because I sent {and) took thee, and saw thee, and all that is with thee, and concerning all that thou hast spoken, thou hast proved thyself right! The Syriac has : u..a-^ '^s^ °o* <^t J°v, Sym. (jivrela, Onq. Nas''3, were perhaps intentionally adopted for the same reason as N'J^''? in 12, 6 for I17N; see the note there, ad fin. 22. 2. "TTTT^ nt^ 'thine only 07te! LXX top dyamji-oV; of. Prov. 4, 3, LXX. According to Frankel, Etnfluss, p. 7, the rendering of the LXX was intentional, as Abraham had another son Ishmael. Isaac is called a ITT' p, as the son of Abraham by his own wife Sarah, not as the only remaining son after Ishmael was sent away; all through the narrative Isaac and Ishmael are regarded by the writer as standing in a different relation to Abraham; cf. chap. 21 with chap. 16. rf'tTSn yiN. 'To the district o/Moriah;' cf. Num. 32, r. Josh. 8, I. 10, 41, where ps occurs again in the sense of ' district.' nnD with the article (cf. ''J?n 'Ai,' pT-H 'Jordan,' pairi ' Lehanon ') is the name of the hill on which in later times the temple stood, 2 Chron. 3, i. Jos., Ant., i. 13. i f. This is the view usually adopted by modern expositors, as Del., Di., but is not without difficulties ; Moriah was the later name for the Temple hill ; the common name in use at an earlier period being Sion, and the whole district around the hill being called 'the district of Moriah,' would pre- suppose that it was a well-known name. Tuch prefers the view that nnD here=the miD in 12, 6, near Shechem, called Judg. 7, I miDH nyaj, on the ground of the LXX reading €is rr\v yriv Trjv {r^r]Ki]v, and in 12, 6 Tr)V Spvu Tiju v'^rjKr]V. But this Moreh was a place of no significance in the history 190 GENESIS, of Israel, and too far from Beersheba to be reached in three days. Further, no great stress can be laid on the reading of theLXX either here or in 1 2, 6, their translation being probably a mere guess, as it can hardly be a rendering of the Hebrew text. The VSS. render variously, and throw no light on the question. Vulg. has ' ierram visionis.' Onq. NjnpiS y^X? ' land 0/ worship! Syr. IJjeoolj )^»JJ=i-mONn px, cf. their rendering of 2 ChronA 3, i, 'land of the Amorites;' also Geiger, Urschrift, p. 278. rr'IQn, The derivation is unknown, but seems to have been connected by z. play with nxi; cf. vers. 8 and 14. For derivations of the word that have been suggested, cf. Gas., Thes., p. 819, also a note by Prof. Cheyne in the American Journal, Hebraica, April, 1885, p. 252. It cannot mean 'shown ofjah; which would be n^NiD (cf. n^EyiJO). 4. "•©■'T'ffin DV:i is connected by the LXX with '^'^■\ in ver. 3, but incorrectly. J^iyT is the imperf. with waw consec. after a time deter- mination ; cf. on 19, 15. 5. n37w. Cohortative, expressing the intention more strongly than the simple imperf. ; cf. Driver, § 49 a. ilD has here a local force, as Gen. 31, 37 (rare). 7. ''23n, also pointed ^))J}, and in pause V'^H; cf. Dav., § 49; Gas., § 100. 5; Stade, § 380. The suffix is a verbal suffix here with the nun damonstrativa ; cf. Stade, § 359 b. 4. 8. 17 rti^T ^'^rh'^-' God will provide him' etc.; cf. 4i> 33 nSJ'^S ^<■>^ nnvi; i Sam. 16, i "h VJ33 WXT 13, 17 12. 'And He said, Stretch not forth thine hand to the boy, and do not do anything to him ; for now I know that thou art CHAP. 22, VERS. 4-14. I91 a fearer of God (cf. note on 4, 14) ; for thou hast ?ioi withheld thy son, thine only one, from me.' nStyn N7T is almost=n3b'n K? '3, which would be more emphatic: ] here expresses a consequence ; see M.R., § 148 c; cf. its use in the waw conv. in 20, 12, ' and so she became my wife;' 23, 20; Driver, § 74. (IQISZD from Cl1^?D 'a spot^ 'a dot,' then 'anything;' cf. the French /ozn/. 13. "iHif?. Sam., LXX, Targums, Pesh., forty-two Codices (Tuch and Wright) read ^^^?, i. e. 'a single ram,' rams in ordinary cases going about in flocks (Tuch), which is preferred by some, e.g. Ewald, but which is not so probable, for nnx looks like an emendation of "iriN, and nriK explains how it was that Abraham did not see the ram before. Geiger, Vrschrift, p. 244, reads ">nN^ regarding Isaac as the one lamb (das Opferlamm), and the ram caught in the thicket as ' the other : ' and thinks, that as this view was objectionable, the reading was corrected into inti, which was again changed into "ID^. This however is improbable. nriN is not temporal, but local— ' behind;' cf. Ps. 68, 26; so nnn, as an adv., 49, 25, and a prep.: bv, as an adv., 2 Sam. 23, I, and a prep. tnX3. Perf., so Baer and Del., 'it was caught;' another reading is fn?<^., participle, 'caught;' so Theile. ■^203. So Baer and Del.; cf. ^I'.i, 2, 12. Ordinary editions point ^3B3. Render, 'In a thicket.' 14. nt^l'' "niMTl^^' Yahweh sees' i.e. 'provides;' cf ver. 8 ; so LXX, Kvpios eiSev. "lal ntyi^. 'Sothat{d. 13, 16) a is said {le. "peoplearein the habit of saying"), In the mountain of the Lord provision shall be made! 193 GENESIS, TTik'y^ ,^' provision shall be made' suits the context best; although the Nifal has not elsewhere this meaning. Some render, 'On the mountain of Yahweh He (YahweK) ap- pears;' but this is very awkward, and the point to be ex- plained is not so much Yahweh's appearance (there was no real vision, only a voice from heaven) as the providing of a substitute, ver. 8. Di. renders according to Ewald (§ 332 d), ' On the mountain where Yahweh is seen' lit. ' On the mountain 0/ Yahweh's appearing;' cf. Hos. i, 2. Ps. 4, 8, which how- ever gives no suitable sense; as one cannot regard it as a proverb to say, ' On the mountain where Yahweh appeared^ we should rather expect HNT' "^1 in 'the mountain where Yahweh appeared:' in either case the sentence is very in- complete. The sense 'provision shall be made' seems least objectionable ; as the Qal clearly means ' to provide' the Nifal may be regarded as its passive, though no other instance of this use can be cited. The LXX, Iv tm opfi Kupior a^Bi], would require HXII nin"i "ina. The text would be easier of explanation if HNT at the end of the verse were pointed nXT ; so Vulgate. 16. ''D introduces the contents of the oath; cf. 2 Sam. 3, 35. Jer. 22, 24. 17. ttJ'^'^T. The imperf. with simple waw used as a jussive, 'And may thy seed possess the gate of thy enemies ;' cf. 27, 29. 9, 27. 17, 2 ; Driver, § 134 : the ordinary construction would be the perfect with waw consec. 2'"]^1; cf. ver. 18, here pos- sibly the imperf. with simple waw was chosen intentionally. ^'^^1 would= '««(;? thy seed shall,' in continuation of ^3^N. 20-24. A. short notice of the families of Abraham's relatives in Mesopotamia, Nahor and Bethuel. It is probably inserted here, as Ribqah, Isaac's wife, was the daughter of Bethuel, CHAP. 22, VERS. 1 6-24. 1 93 Nahor's son, Ribqah being specially noticed in ver. 23. The families here mentioned can only be partially identified. 21. yij^. Cf. 10, 23, probably to be taken in a more limited sense here (Di.). tin is mentioned in Jer. 2g, 23, together with Dedan and T6ma, and so must be sought for in the neighbourhood of Edom. Elihu, Job's fourth adversary, was a Buzite, Job 32, 2. Del., Par., p. 307, compares the land Bdzu men- tioned in Asarhaddon's inscriptions. t3"li^ ""IN bslQp. t>NlDp is otherwise unknown. In 10, 22 D^^5 is the son of Shem. Perhaps DiN here, as Di. suggests, was the name of a single people, QIX in 10, 22 being the name of a nation in a wider sense. 22. Ito. It is uncertain whether 'W'2 is to be considered as the ancestor of the whole family of the Dnto, or of one tribe of the same, perhaps those who robbed Job of his camels, Job I, 17 (Kn.). Itn is very uncertain; the Arab geographers (cf. Di., p. 278) mention a 5^ in Mesopotamia, between Nisibis and Ras 'Ain. An Assyrian Chazu is found on the inscriptions (cf Del., Par., p. 306 f.), but its position is uncertain. 12J"I7'D is unknown; fj^T^ is also unknown; bi^lD^ is unknown as the name of a place; in 25, 20. 28, 5 it is the proper name of a person. 24. 'V^A^^'Sy , casus pendens, the narrative being resumed by waw conv., 'And his concubine, whose name was H'uma, she bare;' cf 30, 30. Is. 44, 12. Jer. 6, 19. Job 36, 7; Ewald, §334b; Driver, § 127 a; M.R., §i32c. ItiJjV'^S. trJ^'-a, also K'J^a, perhaps from J.^3 ' to divide;' the concubine dividing the married pair ; for the B' added, cf. o 194 GENESIS, the word t^'?"!'^ from ann : the word has passed over from the Semitic into Greek and Latin, ndXXa^, pellex. n^tD, DHJ, and ©Hil are all equally unknown; HDyQ a town and district at the foot of mount Hermon, not far from Geshur; cf. Deut. 3, 14. Josh. 12, 5. 2 Sam. 10, 6. 23. 1. mto ''"'n •'Dty. The phrase "S "n ''JtJ' is only found (in the Pent.) in P; so 25, 7. 47, 9. 28. 2. 5>mfr^ n^lp. 'Aria dfy,' so called perhaps from Arba, one of the giants who formed the original inhabitants of the land; cf. Josh. 14, 15. 15, 13. 21, 11. Others (Ewald, etc.) explain it as='J^our town^ which is improbable, and contrary to Josh. 14, 15. 15, 13. In ver. 19 Mamre is identi- fied with Hebron, and in 35, 27 the town is thrice named, Mamre, Kiryath Arba, and Hebron; so that Mamre was either another name of Hebron, or must have formed a por- tion of it, or have belonged to it. The LXX have an ad- dition in their text, 17 cotiv iv ra KotKm/iaTi, perhaps a marginal gloss, occasioned by 37, 14 [nan pDVD. The Sam. also insert pDV bn between V^IN and Nin. nnSnb, with NTivr fl3, 'small Caph:' there seems to be no reason for a being . written smaller than the other letters here, see another instance 2, 4, and the note there; cf. Strack, Proleg., p. 92, who does not, however, mention this passage or 2, 4. 3. inO 'his dead:' of common gender here, as in Lev. 21, II. Num. 6, 6; contrast Zech. 11, 9 nn»n 'the dying one: The distinction of gender in the case of a dead person being less regarded than in that of a living person (Del.) ; cf. Ges., § 107. I. note ; M. R., § 62. CHAP. 2,^, VERS. 1-8. 195 r^n "'il vt^. nn ''33 is only found in P : in 14, 13 they are called Amorites, and in Judg. 1,10 Canaanites. 4. Family graves were not uncommon among the people of high rank; cf. Judg. 8, 32. 2 Sam. 2, 32. i Kings 13, 30, and Is. 22, 16, where Shebna the scribe hews out of the rock a sepulchre for himself. nttJIn is characteristic of P. 6. As 1? "i»Ni> is a very unusual phrase (DrT'PX muh is found once, Lev. 11, i), Hitzig's conjecture WJ'Ott' V — which is adopted by most commentators, and brings the text here in accordance with ver. 13 — seems preferable. So in ver. 15 we must read V''"'^. '•''• ''' then, here and ver. 13, will be followed by the imperative (cf. i^j 18 with the imperf. ; 30, 34 with the jussive) ; cf. Ges., § 136. 2, 'Pray hear us! ' In ac- cordance with the politeness which both parties endeavour to shew (Di.).' LXX and Sam. understand "li? as=N?; then the text ought to be inverted uyDE' ''ilK, as in ver. 1 1 . C^nbt^ ^"^^2 = ' a prince of God,' i.e. belonging to God, under God's protection, and blessed by Him, or ' a mighty prince;' cf. Ps. 36, 7. 80, 11. li'^^ip innon, lit.='z« the choice of our sepulchres' i.e. ' in our choicest sepulchre^ cf. Is. 22, 7 T'pDV "inSD. The usual order of the words is here abandoned, the noun expressing the quality preceding, instead of following, the noun which it qualifies; cf. Ges., § 106. i. Rem. i. n73"^ = ^<^31, a verb n''^) following the conjugation of a verb n"? ; cf. Ges., § 75. Rem. 21c; Stade, § 143 e, note i a. '7nQ "IHpO; cf. on 16, 2 nib. 8. OitySJ ni^ ©■^ ^^,\i.\..= 'ifitiswithyoursoui;\.Q. 'if it he your intention;' cf. 2 Kings 10, 15. Job 10, 13. 23. 14- o 2 Io6 GENESIS, 9. nVsDQn. 'LXX, TO o-TTTiXaiou TO Sin\ovv,Yu\g.' speluncam duph'cem,' i. e. a cave with two entrances or two compart- ments, from the root i^Ba ; but — as may be seen from vers. 17. 19 and 49, 30 — npaaon is a proper name. b^bo Pp'21=^ for full money I i.e. for its full value in money; cf. i Chron. 21, 22 n!)0 ^1033 . . . 'p:ir\ DlpO 'h Wn, 24 vhri eiD33 njpK njp 13 xi?. 10. "i:i1 -Ijrty 1^1 h'^. Cf. on 9, 10 and Ewald, § 310 a. "131 'XI is the shorter form for D^XSVI D''N3. Render, ' With regard to all those entering the gate of his city,' i. e. ' his fellow- citizens'. 1 1. "'Jl^Oll) ''i-r« «^. 'Nay, my lord, hear me: Hitzig and Maurer read xi? as Xli5=>ii5; cf. vers. 13. 15, and see I Sam. 14, 30. 2 Sam. i8, 12, which is unnecessary, as X? suits the context better, Ephron refusing at first to receive anything for the field till Abraham presses it upon him. The same politeness and apparent unwillingness to sell any- thing, but rather to give it, still prevails in the east ; cf. Del., Com., 4th ed., p. 553. TinJ is perfect of certitude, often used in contracts or promises; cf. Ruth 4, 3 layj ni3a 'No' ami is selling; i Kings 3, 13 "b 'nnJ "^^^ ^ "iB'x DJ; Is. 43, 20 -i3n»3 inn: ■'3 DID ; cf. Driver, § 13 ; M. R., § 3. i a ; Dav., § 46. 2. 3. 13. 'And he spake unto Ephron in the ears of the people of the land, saying, If only thou — pray hear me — I give the money for the field, take it from me, that I may bury my dead there.' The optative sentence beginning with DX is broken off, and continued with ll? and the imperative. Olshausen supposes that some words have dropped out of the text after nnx. Hitzig ingeniously renders nnx DX, as perfect Qal of n^X 'if thou art willing; which is quite suitable; but the Qal of CHAP. 33, VER. 9 — CHAP. 24, VER. 2. I97 mx occurs nowhere else, the verb being only found in the Nifal; cf. 34, 15. LXX have eVtiSij npos ifioi «', i.e. probably 1? for V; comp. 29, 34. 31, 5 (Driver). 15. Cf. on ver. 6. The LXX and Sam. have also read tib here. 16. "11107 13.y. '■Current with the merchants;' the art. is according to Ges., § 109. i; M. R., § 68; cf. the shorter phrase in 2 Kings 12, 5 "135? 5)03 'current money I i.e. such as the merchants would accept. 'People had at that time no coins stamped by the State, but only bits of metal — which came into use through the requirements of trade — of a fixed weight, and possibly with the weight marked on them ; these pieces were weighed to avoid any fraud,' Knobel, cited by Di., p. 281. 17. Dp'^V 'So the field was ensured to Abraham;' Q.i.Y)x\s&x, § 74 a ; M. R., § 18. Rem. a. Dip in this sense occurs again in Lev. 25, 30. 27, 14. 17. 19. This use of Dip is peculiar to P. S<"lZ2?3 '^lu^ ^' hefore,' i. e. ^east of;' so iJS ?y in ver. 19 ; cf. 16, 12. 18. W "'J^i 7311. 1 corresponds to i? in ver. 10; it is distributive here, as in 7, 21, which compare. 19. n703On mto. rh^ya is only found in P; so again 25, 9. 49, 30. 50, 13. ]'n3n t^in b^"lJ2C . Observe that P never mentions the N1D0 ''Jl^N (13, 18. 14, 13. 18, i), but calls the place NiDD ; so 25, 9. 35, 27. 49, 30. 50,13. 24. 2. IJT'^ )pt=:'//^£ old one of his housed i.e. ^ the oldest;' so 42, 13 |Dpn ' the young one,' i.e. ' the youngest one;' 2 Chron. 21, 17 VJ3 \U^ ' his youngest son;' cf. M. R., 198 GENESIS, § 8ib; Ges., § 119. 2. Probably Eliezer is the servant, here intended. The Targ. Ps.-Jon. mentions him here expressly by name. Each large household had a servant of this sort; cf. Joseph in 39, 4. 22, also 43, 16. 44, i -\^ti W2 bv. At a later period the oflfice was one of the important posts at court; cf. i Kings 4, 6. Is. 22, ig. '^3"T' nnn 'TT' K3 0^ii; = ' place thy hand under my thigh,' i. e. swear to me ; cf. 47, 29, which is the only other passage where this mode of swearing is mentioned. Some (Tuch, Del.) see a reference to circumcision in these words. Others (Di.) explain — from 46, 25. Ex. i, 5. Judg. 8, 30 — the words symbolically, as invoking his descendants to maintain the oath and avenge any infraction of it; cf Di., p. 284, who cites an instance of a similar form of oath among the Be- douins in Egypt ; also the following extract from the Journals 0/ Expeditions in North-west and West Australia, by George Grey, vol. ii, p. 342, London, 1841: 'Genesis, chap. 24, ver. 9,' after quoting the verse from the A. V. the writer continues, 'this is exactly the form that is observed in south- western Australia, when the natives swear amity to one another, or pledge themselves to aid one another in avenging a death. One native remains seated on the ground with his heels tucked under him in the eastern manner ; the one who is about to narrate a death to him approaches slowly and with averted face, and seats himself cross-legged upon the thighs of the other ; they are thus placed thigh to thigh, and squeezing their bodies together they place breast to breast — both then avert their faces, their eyes frequently fill with tears — no single word is spoken, and the one who is seated uppermost places his hands under the thighs of his friend; having remained thus seated for a minute or two, he rises up and withdraws to a litde distance without speaking, but an CHAP. 34, VERS. 4-7. 199 inviolate pledge to avenge the death has by this ceremony- passed between the two ^' Ibn Ezra in his commentary on the passage has the following: t:*' .laT" nnn lli Na D''E' Qtyi ab n^iDn nnnn v^^: ^^^ p hm ■h'^n) h^jid^ tm lox IT" nnn it din Qib'^ onn dvon dsk'd h'^n^j' ^Ijx anpm ''3-11 nnn it n3 d^'k' iniana nns qn ovoni 1nltJ'^n Ninty ^d ^312n nitrv^ iWEn nnn iT" njn cijfDa i^n ^y Ti^m atj'v piNni .nin pN3 Nin pnv taSE'On nn 'Some say this refers to circumcision; but if this were so, he would have sworn by the covenant of circumcision, and not by Jehovah. What appears most probable to me, is that it was a custom in those days for a man to place his hand under the thigh of him in whose service he was : the meaning would then be, " if thou art in my service, place thy hand, I pray, under my thigh;" the master would thus be sitting with his thigh on the {servanfs) hand ; the meaning being, " behold, my hand is under thy authority to do thy will;" and this custom still exists in India! 4. '^'2='but,' after the negative; cf Is. 48, 2; see Ewald, § 354 a (who compares the German sondern (not aber) after nicht), Ges., § 155. i e, ad fin. Fifteen MSS. and the Heb.- ^am. Codex read DN"''?. pn!J"^b "^3^7 . When the pr. name follows, the preposition must be repeated ; when it precedes, it only stands with the pr. name; cf 22, 20 "jins Tini? ; see M. R., § 71. i. Rem. a. 5. nffinn. n pointed with seghol before the guttural with qame9, Ges., § 100. 4 ; Dav., § 49. 2 d. 7. 'The God of the heavens who took me . . . may He (emphatic) send His ungel before thee, and mayest thou,' etc. ' For this reference I am indebted to Prof. Driver, who kindly sent me a note he had received on this verse from Dr. Tylor, the Reader in Anthropology at Oxford. 200 GENESIS, nnp'?! , . , rhw"^. The perfect with waw conv. after the imperfect as a jussive; cf i, 14. 28, 3. 43, 14. 47i 29, and often ; see Driver, § 113. 2 a, cf. § in ; M. R., § 24 b. 8. !r^p'}^ . . . nnNn t^S nSl. 'Bu/ if she does not consent, then thou art free! rT'lpJ for n''!?.?, Ges., § 75. Rem. 7 : the tone does not advance with 1 conv. as the verb is a n"? verb ; cf. Stade, § 470 b. note. nt^T TlJ^lttJQ. nsr without the article as regularly after a word with a pronom. affix; see Ewald, § 293a; Ges., § III. 2 b. ntlJn ST'. Cf. the note on 4, 12. 9. ^^3^N is pluralis excellentiae, referring to Abraham; see Ewald, § 178 b; Ges., § 108. 2 b; cf. Stade, § 324 a; so 40, I '^rh dniinsK of Pharaoh; 42, 30 pxn '"JlIK, of Joseph. 10. r3Tt^ Hlw 73. LXX, anh iravrav tS>v dya8S>v ; SO 45, 18 onSD ps 31D riN; 2 Kings 8, 9 pb-DI niQ ijai. Q'^'^nD □"1^?. 'Aram of the two rivers', i.e. Mesopo- tamia, Deut. 23, 5. Judg. 3, 8. The two rivers are usually identified with the Euphrates and Tigris. Haldvy, cited by Di., p. 285, takes them to be the Euphrates and Chry- sorrhoas. Di. himself thinks that the Euphrates and Cha- boras (li^n) are the two rivers intended. 11. Qinn "Ib^l 7b<, i.e. the fountain that is usually to be found near a town; cf. Ex. 2, 15; see Ewald, § 277 a. 12. b^]] iT^pn. 'Pray cause it to meet me;' cf. 9, 22 for the omission of the ace, and the note there ; see also 27, 20 133^5 T'l^N nw mpn ^■2. 14. 'May it ie that the damsel to whom I shall say, Pray CHAP. 24, VERS. 8-16. 201 let down thy pitcher that I may drink, and she answer, Drink, and I will also water thy camels; (may it be thai) her thou hast adjudged to thy servant Isaac, and thereby I shall know that thou hast shewn my master kindness.' WTf] is the perf. with waw conv., where no imperf. precedes, used as a precative or mild imperative; cf. 47, 23 nonNn ns Onym; Deut. 7, 9 nvT'l; Driver, § 119 d. niJ3N1 . . . -It2« "lffi«. niDKI is perf. with waw conv. after an imperf. with "it^x ; cf. ver. 43, where the rela- tive is avoided; so Lev. 21, 10 N^JDI , . . pVI' "itJ'K; Is. 56, 4 nnni ncty'' nC'N; Judg.i, 12. i Sam. 17, 26; see Driver, §115. npffib^ . . . ly^n is a casus pendens, resumed in i^P^^, which stands before its verb for emphasis; cf. 28, 13. 26, 15; Driver, § 197. i. The text is to be pointed iy?n, this word being of common gender in the Pentateuch, also in Ruth 2, 21 j cf. Ges., § 107. I. note ; Ewald, § 175 b ; Stade, § 309 d, who regards nj;J as ' a remnant of an older period of the language, when the feminine ending did not exist.' The Kri directs the ordinary form to be read. nil is not 'through her,' Ribqah, but 'thereby;' cf. 15, 8. 15. ^ And it came to pass before he had done speaking, that, behold, R. was coming out,' etc. rh^ DID, the perf. after D"iI3 is very rare (Driver, p. 38. foot-note), contrast ver. 45 CnD n73N. The perfect after diD is found again, i Sam. 3, 7 "'•'' nx JJT' Q1I3 (if the punctuation is right), but immediately afterwards rhv DIDI ; cf. D1D3, Ps. 90, 2 rh'' mt23 ; Prov. 8, 25 ijjaan Cinn miaa; see Ewald, § 337. 3 c. nO^UJ hv Tny\. 'WUh her pitcher on her shoulder ^ circ. clause. 16. n^^^a T\11^. Cf.i2,ii nxiD na^ and the note there. ^^T'^^l2='a virgin^ from 7T0. ' secludere,' the maiden who 302 GENESIS, lives in seclusion in her parents' home, nopy from u7V, Arab, lie ' io be strong^ 'fully ripe,' ■=ihe: maiden who had reached a marriageable age, puella nuhilis. In HDPJ? stress is laid on the fact that the maiden is of a marriageable age, in npini that she is a virgin; so here vi^e have the addition njJI'' ^ E'''X1. 19. nrit!}7 17D Qt^ ^y. ' Untll they shall have finished drinking,' 1P3 being a future perfect; so TniT dN ~\V, ver. 33. Is. 30, 17 pna Cimnu ox 1V; and with the fuller phrase, tDX IK'N 15?, Gen. 28, 15 in''{5'J? ON "IB'S 1J? ; Num. 32, 17 ClJt<''3n DS "IB'N IV; see Driver, § 17; M. R., § 3. 2; Ges., § 126. 5 c. 21. ffi'i-ina rh T^V^T\1iyt2, CJ"'«ni. '^«(f //^ man was watching her in silence! ni^ntlJQ is the construct state before the preposition rb ; cf. 13 'Din, Ps. 2, 12 ; ps3 law, Is. 9, i; fj-ii:^ i-intTD, Job 24, 5 ; see Ewald, § 289 b ; Ges., § 116. i. tU"'~inQ defines nNntyD more clearly; cf. Num. 16, 27 cnxj it is OB'"! 'Ae {Laban) set; imperf. Qal of Db'' = D^B'; cf. 50, 26 nb'"! without Kri. The Kri here reads Dbl'l ' and there was placed^ impf. Hof al of Dlb*, with pathach not qame9; see BaerandDel., Genesis, p. 77 ; Stade, § 500 y, reads here DK'*1, the ordinary imperf. Qal of dlb*. Ewald, § 131 d, considers that the ii of the passive here, 50, 26 and Ex. 30, 32 (■]D''i from "]1D), has been sharpened into 1. 38. N7 Di^, prop.='z/"«o/,' after a negative '■but;' cf. (possibly) Ez. 3, 6 Tinnijiy UT^hv. nIj on; cf. Ges., § 155. 2 f. nnp'^T . . . I'rn . . . ^^V ci^, so Ez. 20, 33 f. dn 'nsnpi . . . TlNSini . , . l^m . , . nIj ; see Driver, § 115. 42-43. n'lni . . . rrht'a . . .'7®"' o«; cf. Lev. 3, 7 ns anpni , . . y-p^a wn 3tJ>3 ; Judg. 6, 36 f. . . . j?'>KhD nc" ox 'nvT'l; hypothetical sentences with a participle, with or without B*' or )ix in the protasis, and the perfect with waw conv. in the apodosis; see Driver, § 137 a; Ewald, § 355 b. I ; M. R., § 166. 2 ; cf. ver. 49, where an imperative takes the place of the perfect with waw conv. in the apodosis. 46. ritUNV The short form of the first pers. sing, im- perf. in n"p verbs is not quite so frequent as the long. Bottcher, cited by Prof Driver {Tenses, p. 89. note), mentions forty-nine instances of the short form, and fifty-three of the long. In the other persons, on the contrary, the full form is very exceptional. 48. mnnttJ^T here, and mVNl^, Deut. i, 16. 18, are the only instances of the first pers. with n_ in the Pentateuch ; cf. Driver, p. 89. foot-note. riQN T^- 'in the right way;'' cf. ver. 27. 49. 'And now, if ye are going to deal kindly and straight- CHAP. 24, VERS. 33-63. 305 forwardly with my master, tell me ; and if not, tell me ; that I may turn to the right hand, or the left;'' cf. ver. 42 f. and the authorities there cited. 56- lltoS? lt< □"'Q'^, VA..^=' days or ten,' i.e. 'a week or ten days;' cf. 4, 3 D''D'' f'pD NTil; LXX, vF^pas io-6i hUa. The Syr. has ^Irool. u.|il 'a month in days', Sam. B'^^ IN CD''; possibly, as Di. suggests, B'nn has fallen out before CiC; cf. 29, 14. lib's? =fi?i?faJ', '<2^ space often days' 56. "'DIT rr^bjJn mrfl. '■Seeing Fahweh hath pros- pered my way;' cf. ver. 31. 57- rT'D ni^ nSi^ttJjI. 'And let us ask her, herself lit. ' ask her mouthy i. e. let her speak for herself; cf Josh. 9, 14 i^NE' n!? niiT "IS riNi; Is. 30, 2 ■hm ^ iai. 62. 'iVow Isaac had come;' N3 is pluperf., accounting for Isaac's presence when Ribqah arrived; cf Driver, § 76. Obs. "li^l t^^lQ b>?l usually would mean, 'had come from coming to the well,' etc., i. e. had returned from a journey thither. But nap is the more suitable word for a journey, and what one would rather expect to find noticed is, where he had come to, or where he was. Del. takes KUa as a correlative of N37, 35, 16, or Nhp^ Num. 13, 21 and often, and says 'NUD Na says more than if^fl? N3 (Lagarde's emendation for 1??2 N3p N|i), that he had come to the well, but was not setded there, and now had come back from his journey thither,' which is much the same as the view first mentioned. Houbigant reads CiJ?p for NUD, Lagarde l??!!? ; but one does not see why the place wRere he came from should be noted. Ewald, § 136 h, renders, ' er war ehen gekommen nach ' {he had just come to), but how this can be got out of the Heb. text is not quite clear. Di. offers two 2o6 GENESIS, solutions of the question ; either (I) to strike out NUD, or (II) to read "OID from the Samaritan and LXX, 111D2; the meaning being in the second case, 'Isaac had come to the wilderness of Beer-lahayroi, for he lived in the south ' (circ. clause, as in 19, i). 63. mto? variously rendered : I. ' To ^^(fz'/a/is,' either over his approaching marriage (Del.), or on matters connected with his flocks (Tuch); so LXX, aSoKea-xrja-cu, Vulg. 'ad meditandum in agrof ni{J'7=n'''B'?in Ps. 119, 148; cf. 77, 4. 7. II. The Targg. Sam. etc. render, 'to pray;' cf. Ps. 102, i ilT'E', with npan in the parallel member of the verse. III. Aq. d/iiX^o-ai and Sym. XaXrja-ai. take niB'P as='/i9 taiA.' IV. Knobel andEwald render, 'to wail or lament,' comparing O'E* in Ps. 55,3.18. Job 7,ii,etc. (seever. 67). N .'5>o\X.,Neue Heb.Aehr., renders, 'to fetch brushwood:' the verb being a denom. from n''K', but this denom. cannot be proved to exist from other pas- sages; cf Ibn Ezra, D^n^bTl p3 noi'^ 'to walk between the shrubs! VI. Ges. reads tils'?; cf the Syr., which has cui^ocaX ' to walk! and ver. 65 VtVOI Ipnn. The renderings I and IV seem better than the others, perhaps IV (cf. ver. 67) fitting into the context a little better than I. ny r\1iD7, i.e. when the Oriental used to go out; cf 3, 8 avn nn^. 64. 7Q3n 7yJ3 7Dni ; so 2 Kings 5, 21 nnoiDn !'5J» I'S'^I. In Judg. r, 14 (=Josh. 15, i8) we find ms 'to spring quickly from the camel! LXX here KaTeirrjSrjo-ev. 65. rrsbn tiJ''Nn "^D. 'Who is yonder man?' cf Ges., § 34. Rem. 2 ; Dav,, § 13 ; Stade, § 172 b. nti5n=the Arabic i_£'^\-=who, which; it occurs again, 37, 19. 67. mto n^n^n. ijnx with the article and n of motion. The presence of the article before the noun, which CHAP. 34, VER. 63— CHAP. 25, VER. 2. 207 should be in the construct state, is explained by Ewald, § 290 d, Ges., § no. 2 b, as a loose co-ordination of the two words, instead of the second being subordinate to the first; cf. Josh. 7, 21. Di. regards lOX mtJ' as inexplicable, and considers that they are a gloss to bring about a closer con- nection with chap. 23. 25. 1. n©i<, not in the sense Sarah was, but a concubine; cf. ver. 6, where she is called a ^ibz, and i Chron. i, 32. mitDp, pr. n3.me=' incense.' 2. Many of the following tribes cannot be identified with certainty, as they have either disappeared at an early date, or become merged into other tribes. The genealogy occurs again in i Chron. i, 32 ff. in an abbreviated form. Keturah bare Abraham six sons (five if we regard pD and plD as one and the same). pDT, perhaps from lOT, a species of 'antelope! Knobel compares p»t with Za/3paft, the royal town of the KivaiSo- KoKirWai, on the west of Mecca, on the Red Sea, mentioned in Ptol. vi. 7, 5, but whether they are identical is uncertain. Grotius and Del. consider the Zamareni of Pliny vi. 32 as more probable. Ityp"" is identified by Tuch with \^T^ (10, 26); by Ewald with |K"i3, Hab. 3, 7 ; by Knobel with the Kaa-cravhai of Ptol. vi. 7, 6, south of the Kinaedokolpites, on the Red Sea, but these are the Gassanides (cf. Del. here and Di.). \'^1D and ]"TQ, the best known of the sons of Keturah. Q'J^ID and CJID occur again in 37, 28. 36 as names of the same people, so that probably pD and piD are but different forms of the same name. The Midianites are often ao8 GENESIS, mentioned in the O. T. ; in 37, 28. 36 they are spoken of as carrying on trade with Egypt. In Ex. 2 and 18 we find them dwelling in the Sinaitic peninsula, and in Num. 22, 4. 7. 25, 6. 17 f. 31, I flf. they are mentioned among Israel's enemies in the land east of the Jordan. In the time of the Judges (cf. Judg. 6 flf.) hordes of Midianites overran Palestine. They are also mentioned in Is. 60, 6 as a trading people. Their territory on the east of the Elanitic Gulf stretched from the neighbourhood of Sinai northwards to the territory of the Moabites; see further, Di., p. 291 f pnCJ'' is unknown. mC? is mentioned in Job 2, n as a tribe in the neigh- bourhood of the land of pjf, but otherwise unknown. Del., Par., p. 297 f, compares the Assyrian Suchu, on the right bank of the Euphrates, between the mouth of the Belih and Chabor; Di., the Smi; of Ptol. v. 19; cf Di., 1. c. Others {H. W. B., 9th ed.) connect it with the Arab tribe is^U-., east of Aila. 3. On NIB' and pi, see 10, 7. Probably the northern branches of these two great Arab tribes are here meant, the genealogy in these verses being more limited in range than that in chap. 10 (Di.). Of the sons of Dedan nothing further is known; see conjectures in Di., p. 292; Del., P- 372- 4. riD''J^ occurs again in Is. 60, 6, mentioned with Midian as rich in camels, and as bringing gold and incense from Sheba. Del., Par., p. 304, compares the Eajdpd of the inscriptions. The other names do not occur elsewhere; see Di. 1. c. for conjectures about them. 8. jntoT. Sam., LXX, Qij:^ j)3b>i as in 35, 29. T^OJ^ b!^4 P)Db^"'T. ' And was gathered to his people ;' cf. CHAP. 25, VERS. 3-13. 209 the synonymous expressions, TTlUN bi< ^?n, 15, 15; bn flDNJ ITlUN, Judg. 2, 10; and TTinN D5? aar, Deut. 31, 16. The phrase VDJ! ?X fiDXJ is peculiar to P; so in 35, 29. 49, 33, etc. 10. mton is in apposition to pay iTW in ver. 9. n?2ty=not ^ thither I but, in a weaker sense, ^ there;' so Jer. 18, 2 nan ns nrotJ'x nDtyi; 2 Kings 23, 8 nt:p •va\f. D''3n3n not?; see Ges., § 90. 2 b. 1 3. tDmbinb OnTDto . ' WUh their names, according to their genealogies'. The two words are to be taken closely together. JT'U the best known and most important of the descend- ants of Ishmael, 'the Nabatheans! The Nabatheans dwelt in Arabia Petrea. In Is. 60, 7 they are mentioned with Kedar; the two names also being found together on the Assyrian inscriptions of Assurbanipal (Schr., K. A. T?, p. 147). Probably they are identical with the Nabataei and Cedrei, mentioned together by Pliny, v. 12. The only other notices about nUJ in the O. T. are that Esau (28, 9. 36, 3) married Mahalath (called, 36, 3, Basemath), the sister of Nebayoth, and Is. 1. c, that they were rich in cattle; see further, Di., p. 294. Tip . ' The Kedar enes'. A nomad tribe in the Syro- Arabian desert ; they are frequently mentioned in the O. T. in the time of the kings. In Is. 21, 16 f Jer. 49, 28 they are mentioned as skilled bow-men ; Song of Songs i, 5, as dwelling in black tents, but Is. 42, ir. Jer. 49, 31, in open villages. In Is. 60, 7. Jer. 49, 32 they are spoken of as rich in camels and flocks; and in Ez. 27, 21 as trading with Tyre. The Rabbis use the name lip for Arabia in general, "np pE'? being the Arabic language. 7t^ni^ and Qtol2 are unknown names. p 210 GENESIS, 14. J^QttJQ is unknown. TTtm is probably different from the Duma of Is. 21, 11 and Josh. 15, 52. Wetzstein identifies non here with the Duma in East Hauran. Di. and Del. consider it to be the i^ovjxaOa of Steph. Byz., Domata of Pliny, vi. 32, the modem iL.jj Jjj4^ = ' Ihe rocky Duma,' in the lowest-lying district of the Syrian Nufdd land; the so-called Gof (Del.), on the borders of Syria and Arabia. t^toQ, usually connected with the Maa-avol of Ptol. v. 19. 2, north-east of Duma. In Asurbanipal's inscriptions, Mas'u is found together with Nabaitai and Kidri (Schr., K. G. F., p. 102; K.A.T?, p. 148 f.). 15. TVr\ is unknown. Baer and Del. read lin, Theile "nn, with the marg. note, ^^^ n''"inx D''"iaD3, i. e. ' in other copies "nn;' so I Chron. i, 30, Sam., Joseph. The Massora mentions the reading here as being Tin, not Tin ; cf Baer and Del., Gen., p. 77 f. NCn is identified by Wetzstein with Taima, three- quarters of an hour from Duma, in the Hauran ; by Knobel with ea/ioi, Ptol. vi. 7. 17, on the Persian Gulf, or the Banu Taim (^ jJj) also on the Persian Gulf; by Di. and Del. with NDTl, a tribe mentioned in Jer. 25, 23. Job 6, 19, as traders (cf. Is. 21, i4)=iU4j, on the border of the Negd and the Syrian wilderness ; also found on the inscriptions, together with the Mas'ai (Schr., K. G. F., p. 262 f.). 'I'lJO"' and ty^D2 are mentioned (i Chron. 5, 18 fif.) as neigh- bours of the tribes east of the Jordan, who made war against them and partially subdued them; {yifii is otherwise un- known. "1113'', ' the Itureans,' dwelt in the hill country of Lebanon and Hauran, according to Strabo; cf. Luke 3, i. TV2np, not mentioned elsewhere. CHAP. 25, VERS. 14-18. ail 16. Qni'^tfl^'l QH'^IJiTO. 'In their villages, and in their encampments^ i. e. who dwelt partly in unwalled villages (Lev. 25, 31. Is. 42, 1 1) and partly in moveable camps (Num. 31, 10. Ez. 25, 4). riT'tJ is from "\1D, and means 'a camp,' the tents being pitched in the form of a circle; cf the modern ,ljj (Burckh., Bed. 26, cited by Di., p. 297). LXX, iv Tois fTKTjvais avrav, kol iv tolIs eVavXecrtv avroiv, CrU3b^7. ' According to their tribes' ntDK occurs again in Num. 25, ig, and — as here — is used of an Arab tribe: the word is more an Arabic than a Hebrew word, and its use here and Num. 25, 15 is perhaps, as Di. suggests, intentional. Ryssel, De Eloh. Pent, sermone, p. 71, says of riDX, 'quae vox ad sermonem populi Midianitici spectat (eodem sensu dictum atque apud Scotos clan, apud Arabes gum=^p): 18. n^'^in. See 10, 29. It is not the Indian Havila, but the land of the XavXoT-aioi (cf. iiJjJ.». in Niebuhr, Beschreibung von Arahien, p. 342 : Del.) of Strabo, xvi. 4. 2, between the Nabatheans and the Agroeans. Thus the Ishmaelites spread themselves over the country between the Persian Gulf to the wilderness of Shur, on the confines of Egypt. D''")!?^ ''JS ':'y . . . nity. See on 16, 7. n"l1t2Jt5 nDt^l. 'In the direction of Ashur'. n3N2, cf. on 13, 10. miB'N is explained by Del. as meaning ' up to the lands under the Assyrian rule (bis nach den Landen as- syrischer Herrschaft).' Noldeke (Unters., p. 26) considers that miE'N is the name of an Egyptian place, which has been corrupted in the Heb. text. According to Hupfeld it has arisen out of miE' n3N3 (i Sam. 15, 7) by corruption. Wei. and Del. [Par., p. 131) think that it is an instance of ditto- graphy for -m ly. p 2 21 a GENESIS, ^:,Q hv='eastof;' cf. i6, 12. ^^'2=^' sealed;' in i6, 12 pB* is used of Ishmael; cf. Judg. 7, 12 pDJ)3 n'-l'SJ dip ''Jl bl. 19-34- 20. &"lb4 pD = DnN nntJ' in Hos. 12, 13, 'Mesopotamia' 'pa in Aramaic = "a j/o/J^," and in Arabic (where it is a Nabathean foreign word, Gawaliqi, ri2. 2) = " ploughing oxen," and then their "plough" so a fixed measure of land, like jugum, jugerum (Lane, p. 2353), and is regarded by Lagarde {Proph. Chald., p. xliii) as Persian. But II. Raw., ^2. 33, padanu (which as paddnu means elsewhere, accord- ing to Schrader, K. A. T?, p. 612, "way, path") is equivalent to ginil {garden) and iUu {field), (compare Del., Par., p. 135), and so it might have meant "field" or "plain" in Assyrian (cf \jZs> '' depression, plain" Ges., Thes., p. 1092),' Di. It is most probable that Onx mb* in Hos. 1. c. is the Hebrew translation of the word. In 24, 10 we have DIN trsn for DIN pS (P)- The LXX and Vulg. render it Mesopotamia Syriae or Mesopotamia; cf. the campos Meso- potamiae in Curt. iii. 2. 3 ; v. i. 15. From this it by no means follows that the two ideas are completely identical, still less that Paddan Aram was the district round Harran. ' Still it is worth noticing that the name p3 (cf. 48, 7) attaches to a place Fadddn, and a Tell Fadddn, in the neigh- bourhood of Harran, which Jaqut still knows of (Chwolsohn, Ssab., i. 304 ; Mards., ii. 337). That the neighbourhood of Edessa and Harran is a plain surrounded by mountains is evident from Edrisi p. Jaub. ii. 153; Wilh. of Tyrus, 10. 29. Buck, Mesopotamia, iii,' (Kn. in Di.) Dix p2 is only found in P as the name of Mesopotamia ; so 28, 2. 6 f. 31, 18. 33> 18. 35, 9. 26. 46, 15. CHAP. 25, VERS. 19-26. 313 21. mn'' t7 inyT, llt. '■ suffered Mmself to le prayed to! i.e. 'hearkened to him! The Nifal tolerativum ; cf. Is. 53, 7 nJW Nim ; and Cheyne's crit. note, ad loc. 22. 12!J"in''T is imperf. Hithpo'. of }*VT ; see Gas., § 55. i ; Stade, § 532 a. 7 ; cf. mJn^ from 113, li'^nn'' from ^J^Jn. W nt Xych ]3 '0^ = ' i/ thus, why am I?' \.t.'ifithe thus, why do I live?' cf. QiTl "h nth in 27, 46 ; so the Syriac. The LXX, El ovTii) \\ioi fiiWei yivetrdaij, tva tI y-oi tovto; and SO Vulg.; hence it has been rendered, ' if it be so, why am I thus?' i. e. pregnant; but nt cannot be predicate, as the LXX have taken it; nt merely strengthens the riDP, as in 18, 13. 23. (a) 'Two nations are in thy womb, [[i) And two peoples shall separate themselves from thy lap : (a) And one people shall overpower the other, (0) And the elder shall serve the younger! The answer given to Ribqah's prayer is poetical in form. 3T and "i^yv in prose would require the article ; cf Ewald, § 294 a. □^?TD Di^7. On ID used in comparison, cf. Ges., § 119. I ; M. R., § 49. 2. 24. V^yy^ 1t<>'?2'^T. 'And her days were full;' so 29, 21. 5°= 3- □tjiri is contracted from O'DNPI . 25. '^31Q~I^5, probably referring to the colour of his skin, rather than the hair; cf David in i Sam. 16, 12. 17, 42. i9> 13- Itoy . 'Esau ' = ' hairy one! 26. S.py"' the author takes from 3|5y, a denom. of ^pV ' heel! =^' heel-holder ;' cfHos. 12, 4. 'R.&iss, Gesch. des A.T., p. 52, explains Jacob 2l&=.' successor.' In 27, 36 another explanation is given; see the note there. 314 GENESIS, DDN rn^H; cf. on 24, 30. 27. T'lSJ l^T. '1*V is ace. after yii, not gen., for then Vf would be necessary,' Wright: the form VV, however, does not occur in the O. T. Cf. 2 Chron. 2, 1 1 bK' H' nT2); Ps. 44, 22 ai? niDlijyn JJ1% which are parallel to this passage. The pi. cstr. is used in i Kings 9, 27. Amos 5, 16. mto W^i^ = ' a field man,' one who spends his time in the fields hunting; but nDlxn t^'N, 9, 20, = ' an agriculturist: on ffi^^i. 'yi quiet, domestic man! 'An upright man' does not suit the context here, and hardly fits in with the later accounts of Jacob's dealings with his brother. Elsewhere on a\v!a.ys=^ upright,' except Ex. 26, 24. Dn is here the German 'fromm,' which also means ruhig {quiet), thus ' ein frommes Pferd,' a quiet horse. n'hryt^ for D'.^™,- see Ges., § 23. 3. Rem. 2; Stade, § 109- 28. VD3. T'JJ '^3. 'For venison was in his mouth,' i.e. was according to his taste; cf. 27, 5. 7. 30. mn Dl^n Cn^^n ]n. 'From the red {stuff), this red stuff;' the words ntn h1V.n being epexegetical ; cf. M.R.,§72.3. 31. D'T'3 Tn'y^. 'Sell now first of all' etc.; see M. R., § 56. 2. Rem. a, who points out the different shades of meaning in Di'3 and Di>n3. 32. mn7 *]':'in •'iiN rr:ir\. ' Behold, i am going to die; i. e. Esau's life was a dangerous one, and he might meet his death at any moment. Tuch prefers the rendering, '/ am at the point of death; i. e. from hunger, which is not so natural (so A.V. and A. V.R,), and ^^ould be better expressed by no ''J^n. CHAP. a5, VER. 27 — CHAP. 2,6, VER. 13. 215 26. 3. ^«n n!J"\«n 'r'D n«, i.e. Canaan and the ad- joining districts, nv^X being used of the different portions of what was afterwards the land of Israel, as in i Chron. 13, 2. 2 Chron. II, 23. ban, cf. note on 19, 8. 7. '\r\fiii^h = ' concerning his wife;' cf. 32, 30 HT HD? '•DB'i' ^NB'n '■lohy dost thou then ask about my name?' 43, 7 Umhoi'l IJ^ E'''Nn ^Nty P1NB' ' the man asked indeed about us and about our birth-place^ 8. npn n« pTOO. ' sporting with r: rvA pnv = Dy pnv, of mutual playing or caressing, and so distinct from D pnx, where the action is not mutual ; see 39, 14 (Luzz. cited by Del.). 10. "w ayn "Tn« iDty laras. '0«« o/^ /a« /eo//^ might have lain with her, and so thou hadst brought ' etc., lit. ' almost had one of the people; ' cf. Ps. 1 1 9, 8 7 pN3 'il^a DVD3 ; Prov. 5, 14 Tl^n DJ)J33. riNim is the perf. with waw conv., after DV03; cf. Driver, § 115, p. 160 : the tone being thrown forward on to the last syllable. Del., p. 385, explains the position of the tone on nNini as due to the 5? following, which would otherwise be scarcely audible, comparing Is. II, 2 nnJI (where, however, the tone on the last syllable may be due to the waw conv.; cf. Driver, §110. 5). See also ver. 22 iT'ijJJ U"i, and cf. Ewald, §§ 63 c, 193 b. 12. D"'"ll?\y n^Q. 'A hundred measures,' 'a hundred- fold'. lyB' in Biblical Hebrew does not occur again in this sense. In Aramaic and the language of the Mishna, 1J!<5', Pa'el of "iyE' = '/o reckon, estimate' (cf. Targ. Onq. here, 2,l6 GENESIS, 'nni|B'-l3 nm in ^y = '/Ae hundredfold of that which they had estimated it (the field) ;' cf. Levy, Chald. W. £., ii. p. 504), and N1VE' subst.=' interest, price;' see Levy, 1. c, and cf. the Arabic J^S-; 'pretium annonae.' LXX and Syr. in- correctly read D'l.lIB' ' barky.' ' A hundred measures ' would imply that the harvest was very abundant. The neighbour- hood of Gerar was very fruitful, and at the present day the Arabs have grain magazines at Nuttar Abu Sumar, a little north-west of Elusa; Rob., Pal., i. p. 562. 13. 7131 '^'ibn. Cf. the note on 8, 3. 713, the participle, here takes the place of the more common inf. abs. ; so Judg. 4, 24 nB^i?) yhn b^-i^ •'jn Ti nirii; 2 Sam. 16, 5. 18, 25 ^S aipl T^n ; cf. Ewald, § 280 b ; M. R., § io8. b'}}\, however, may be perfect, cf. Josh. 6, 13. Is. 31, 5 ; see Ges., § 131. 3. Rem. 3. 14. niiy occurs once again in Job i, 3; cf. the N. T. Oepairela, Matt. 24, 45, and see Ges., Thes., sub voce. 15. D1t^7Q''T . . . QIDHD. Notice the masc. suffixes referring to feminine nouns; so ver. 18. 31, 9. 32, 16. 33, 13. 41, 23; see Ewald, § 249 b; Ges., § 121. 6. Rem. i. C31t^7Q"'T with double ace, according to Ges., § 139. 2; M. R., § 45. 2. 18. Dn"lli^ ''ty^l. LXX, 01 n-mSey ; SO Sam. and Vulo- reading nny, possibly from pnv nny in ver. 19. QloriD^T is imperf. with waw conv. in continuation of nan. 19. 0''''n 0''Q. 'Living, i.e. flowing water,' as con- trasted with still water; so Lev. 14, 5. Jer. 2, 13. 20. ptoi*='j/r2/«y' the word only occurs here. 21. T\':'d^=' hostility: CHAP. 2,6, VERS. 13-39. ai7 2 2. r\']'2.'n')^' wide spaces.' Probably the modern Ruhaibe, about three hours south-east of Elusa, eight hours south of Beersheba, where remains of fountains are still to be found : cf. Robins, i. p. 289 fif. ^3, not =071 recitativum, but as in 29, 32.33. Ex. 3, 12, affirmative, ' surely^ ' indeed' li^lO*) is perf. with waw conv. without a preceding imperf. ; cf. 17, 4 ; Driver, § 119 a; M. R., § 24. 2 b. 26. inj>"lJ3 ntnt^l. nrnx is a pr. n. with the fern, ending n^, like ^^,^5, n»"^3, ver. 34; n^np, 28, 9 : so LXX, Syr., Vulg., Saad. Onq., who renders "'Ci'^Ol ^"^^X, Berl. (some texts ^'^iD^]'^C)J seems to have taken ntnx as fem. cons, state of ntnx, in the sense of 'y6s ; Supposing that to be the capacity in which he acted as his 'friend;' cf. Judg. 14, 20, LXX. Translate,' prz'/;^ Ahuzzath, his counsellor! 27. 13T Dil^^T. 'R.QTidtr, ' Seeing that (pr since) ye hated me, and sent me away /rom you.' 28. 1^*1, inf. abs. Qal of TMO for nNT; so iHE', Is. 22, 13 ; and see Ges., § 75. Rem. 2. TO^ = here a compact ratified by a solemn oath ; so Deut. 29, II. Ez. 16, 59. 29. ntoi*n is pointed with tsere, instead of seghol, under ai8 GENESIS, the n; so in three other places, Josh. 7, 9. 2 Sam. 13, 12. Jer. 40, 16 (Kri). In the last two instances and here, 'in order to avoid, by emphasizing the final sound of the first word, any confusion in sound with the initial sound of the next' (Del.). Cf. also Ges., § 75. Rem. 17 ; Stade, § 1436. Rem. 3, who gives other instances, e.g. Josh. 9, 24 <^'^V^; Lev. 5, 9 nva; ; Nah. i, 3 n^i] (but not Baer and Del. in their edition, who point ni3V with seghol). nita p"1. ' Only good,' 'nothing hut good ;' cf. 6, 5 JJI pi; Deut. 28, 33 fix-il plK'y pT. 31. Vn^*? tt?"'«. Cf. the note on 13, 11. 33. nn® = ' oath' The author takes it as equivalent to n;y3^. The word is a ajra| Xeyo'/i. In 21, 31 another account of the origin of the name Beersheba is given. 34. Cf. 36, 2 foil. 35- ■']T.r'''?l scripiio defediva, for ny^nni; cf. 19, 33 i'P.!?*m; 27^ I Trnani. ni") r\~lQ, cf. Prov. 14, 10 itrsJ n-VO, = ' bitterness of spirit! LXX, r](iav EplCova-ai, but incorrectly ; so Onq. HXini IM^tpi I5'l?'? =: ' tAey were disobedient and provoking to anger' etc.; taking it from nno = ' to rebel' 27. I. Jnt^'^tD = lit. ' away from seeing I i.e. "so that he could not see;' cf. 23, 6 and the note on 16, 2. 3. ']''7n. vljl, a o!n-a| XFyo>., is from n^ri '/o hang;' just as '^a is from n^3, i^-n from nh. The LXX, Vulg., Targ. Ps.-Jon., Ibn Ezra, etc. render 'quiver.' Onq., Pesh., Rashi, ' sword.' The former rendering is preferable, being more in CHAP. 2,6, VER. 31 — CHAP. 37, VER. 8. 219 accordance with the context (bow and quiver are more naturally mentioned together than bow and sword) ; cf. Is. 7, 24. 2 Kings 13, 15 : and the root npn, '/:0O Dn« ntoy^^l. 'That I may make them [info] dainty dishes! nfe'S? with a double ace, according to Ges., §139.2; M.R., §45. 5. 12. 'Perchance my father will feel me, and I shall he as one that mocks in his sight,' etc.; cf. Driver, § 115. yni^riO is part. Pllpel, from jjyn ; cf. Ges., § 55. 4 ; Stade, § 281. Jjyn, like the Arab, jeiif, means ' to stammer,' 'stutter,' and then ' to mock; ' cf. yb and i]lb. 13. ^Tt^^p. 'Thy curse I i.e. the curse that shall come upon thee; cf the note on 9, 2. 15. m?3nn=lit. '•costlinesses' 'costly things', ' desidera- bilia,' so il33 must be understood before it. Esau's best clothes are intended, which he wore on any festive occasions ; cf Judg. 14, 12 if. 20. «!J07 ninO nT rro. 'How then hast thou found it so quickly?' lit. 'how then hast thou made haste to find it?' cf Ges., § 142. 2; M. R., § 113. mnD corresponds to the adverb in English. 24. "iQt"^'''! is really in point of time before in^ia'T in ver. 23. In ver. 23 the transaction is briefly described by the single word inani'l, the particulars of the blessing being added by 1 conv. ; cf Driver, §75/3; so in 37, 6. 42, 21 fif. 45, 21-24. 48. 17- Itoy "^yi nt nnN. 'Thou art then my son Esau; = ' art thou then my son Esau?' An interrogative sentence without the interrogative particle H; cf 2 Kings 20, 9. Job 38, iS; Ewald, § 324 a; Ges., § 153. i. nj is added to give emphasis to the question. 26. npttJ'l. Cf on 2, 12. CHAP. 37, VERS. 9-2g. 2,2,1 2 7^-29 are the words of the blessing. The blessing is poetical in form : observe the parallelism in the verses, and the poetical words and forms, e.g. nXT for npr}^ pxn 'iiDB', nin for .T.n, 2"^^. ' Behold, the smell of my son is as the smell of a field which Yahweh has blessed: 28. (a) And may God give thee of the dew of the heavens, and of the fatnesses of the earth, (0) And abundance of corn and wine. 29. (a) May nations serve thee, and peoples how down to thee; Be a prince over thy brethren, and may thy mother's sons bow down to thee : {0) Cursed be those that curse thee, And blessed be those that bless thee.' 28. "i3T3ffll2, the B* is undageshed (of. Ci''JiiB'P, Jon. 4, 11; Dnn'ialD, Ez. 32, 30), as it is pointed with shewa. The word is compounded of }0 partitive, and ''3DB', corresponding to isDO just before. ''3^^' is plural cstr. from JOE', like C^Qi? from I9iJ, i3''^l?3 from iJoj, not from |0f . The A. V. takes it as pi. of ip^?, but the sense and the parallelism are against this. On p, part., see on 4, 3, and cf. 28, 11. 30, 14. Cf. the rendering of the A. V.-R. in these verses. On the great fertility of the land of Canaan, cf. Ex. 3, 8. The dew is here mentioned instead of the rain ; as in summer, in Palestine, there is very little rain, and the dew takes its place ; cf. 49, 25. Deut. 33, 13. Hos. 14, 6. Zech, 8, 12. ©"l^ri from C'T" "to take possession;' so called as taking possession of the head or mind; cf. Hos. 4, 11. 29. 'inntU';'! Ktb.; Kri ^innK>:i. The Kri is preferable, as the plural precedes 0"?)!!). The Ktb. is possibly— as in 43, 28 — an incorrect way of writing the word. The sing, might perhaps stand by Ewald, § 316 a; Ges., § 147 a. 322 GENESIS, rrin for nin. The verb nin for n^n is North Palestinian and late; cf. the Aramaic niq and )oot. The imper. occurs again in Is. i6, 4 and Job 37, 6 (with N for n). ■]Qt^ ""Dl . . . ^"TT^^?; cf. Ps. 50, 20, where they are again rhythmically interchanged. 'jTll . . . Tnt^. The singular for plural; cf Ex. 31, 14 nov niD iT'i'l'nD; Lev. 19, 8 Nty 131J? vb^H); Num. 24, 9 niiN T'TiNi 11-13 TijnnD; see Ewald, § 319 a; Ges., § 146. 4 ; M. R., §135. 4 b. 30. 2py ^52J'^ t<2J"' ^t^. '/aco5 having only just gone out; circ. clause; cf Josh. 4, 18 Dijnan ^Ti niD3 IpflJ '//^^ soles of the feet of the priest having been withdrawn;' 2 Kings 12, 7I3 i-|^3n pna nx Q'':n3n Iprn ^ 'the priests not having repaired the breach in the house;' see Driver, § 165; Ewald, § 341 c. 31. ?3i^"''1 is imperf with weak waw in a jussive sense; so innE'''1, ver. 29; see Driver, § 134. 33. "iJT rrnn . . . "nrr'i, so ver. 34 "iji npjjx pv^^'ii; the verb being followed by a substantive derived from it in the ace. ; cf Matt. 2, 10, and see Ges., § 138. i. Rem. i. "HSn h^irr t>5lDS *^^ = ' who then is he, the one that hunted?' cf. Ps. 24, 10 tuan •^■a nt Nin id 'who then is this one — the king of glory?' Zech. 1, 9 n^JN HDH HD 'what are they — these?' Nin N1SN '» anticipating the subject; see Driver, § 201. 2 ; Ewald, § 325 a. 1<1''1 T^SJ 12(1. ' Who hunted game and brought it;' cf- 35, 3 ''n'"! ... TIN njyn; 49, 17 Sjsii , . . ii^ijn. The par- ticiple breaks off into the imperf with waw consec; a fact being stated, not a possibility, in which case we should find the perf with waw consec.; cf. Driver, § 117; M. R., § 15 j Ges., § 134. 2. Rem. 2. CHAP. 27, VERS. 30-39. 223 34. py2"^T . . . J^JSffiD is either to be explained as 19, 15 by Driver, § i2'7 b, the imperf. with waw conv. after a time- determination, or the word ''n.^l must be supplied with the LXX, Sam. ; so Tuch, Di. TT'l might easily have fallen out after rtTf at the end of ver. 33. Hitzig emends as follows (his emendation being accepted by Geiger, Urschrift, p. 377), ■i^J^ Da ""DSIl. Cf. 4, 26 Nin nj mh; Num. 14, 32 nns DD''"i3S1; see Ges., § 121. 3; Ewald, § 311a; M. R., § 72. I and Rem. a. 36. 'Zr it that they have called his name Jacob P /or he hath supplanted me now twice^ etc.; cf. 29, 15 nriN TIK "lan. LXX, diKaims iKKrjBr) ; Vulg. 'juste vocatuvi est nomen ejus; ' cf M. R., § 143. Rem. b; Ewald, § 324b, who remarks that iDH 'is used when the reason is unknown '= the Lat. numquid, Ger. etwa. In 25, 26 another explanation of the name is given. L:''DyD nt; cf Ges., § 122. 2. note; M. R., § 91. 37. Vri3?2D, with a double ace; see Ps. 51, 14 nm ■■jaoDn ninj; so nvo, Judg. 19, 5 xirh na in^ ij?d; cf. Ewald, § 283 b (2). n37, scriptio plena for ^? , only occurs here in the Penta- teuch ; cf. n3''N in 3, 9 for T^N. 38. nD"^2rT, see on 34, 31. 39. ''MttJtS, not D partitive as the A.V. margin, nor cstr. plural of lOK'p as A.V. and M. R., § 136. Rem. a ; cf ver. 28, because tiDD in the second half of the verse is against this, but privative (so most modern scholars). 'Away from the fatnesses;' cf vers. 37, 40. Render, ' Far from the fatnesses of the earth be thy dwelling-place, And far from the dew of heaven from above! Other instances of I? privative are Num. 15, 24 TVtiT^ iJiyo 224 GENESIS, 'out of sight of the congregation ;' Prov. 20, 3 yiD 'away from strife ;' Job 11, 15 ClIDO 'without blemish' The sterility of Edom is here contrasted with the fertihty of Palestine ; so ver. 40, 'And by thy sword shalt thou live, and thy brother shall thou serve; And it will be, when thou rebellest, thai thou wilt break his yoke from off thy neck.' 40. "J2~in 71^, i. e. the sword is conceived of as the means of procuring the necessities of life, or as the basis on which Esau's life will rest ; cf hv in Deut. 8, 3 ni!' DH^n bv ; Is. 38, 16 vn'' nn'hv- T'in. The root Ti"l occurs four times in the Old Test., twice in Qal, Jer. 2, 31. Hos. 12, i, and twice in Hif'., here and Ps. 55, 3. Ill is the Arab. .iL conj. I. ' to go to and fro ;' II. 'to desire, long for;' III. 'to strive after, wish! In Hebrew the root means ' to wander about unrestrained^ a meaning which suits Hos. and Jer., loc. cit.; Judah being described (Hos. 12, i m 'ijj) as still wandering about with regard to God, i. e. independently, of his own free will, with- drawing himself from God; so Jer. 2,31 UIT 'we have wandered about', i. e. abandoned God. In Ps. 55, 3 "in''b'3 lilN (where the Hif il is used) the meaning is slightly different, 'I wander to and fro in my meditation^ ' I am tossed about by anxiety and care'. Del. and Kn. render here, 'when thou roamest about' but this is unsuitable, as a yoke would not be broken by roaming about, nor could a person under a yoke be well conceived of as roaming about at will, "iiysa in this case would be like Num. 27, 14. Tuch renders, 'when thou rebellest' (cf. Jer. and Hos., 1. c), to which Di. objects that every one who is under a yoke rebels, but does not get free ; but this is not CHAP. 27, VERS. 40-42. 225 conclusive against Tuch's rendering. Di. prefers the render- ing, ^when thou sirivest;^ cf. A IV, the meaning being, ' when thou, though in bondage, strivest to become free, thou shalt break off the yoke from thy neck, and attain thy desire.' The A.V. renders, ' when thou shalt have dominion' (^o Kimchi ; cf. Ges., Thes., p. 1269 a), as though Tiin were from mi, but this is tautological. Other renderings are, 'when thou shalt wish;' ' when thou shalt bewail,' both extremely doubtful. The Versions seem to have misunderstood the word. Onq. renders it by "Ul '"O^^? t^"'?''V^ "^5 ' when his sons transgress ' etc., probably a paraphrase. Syr. has ooll .|o ' and if thou repentest;' but how they get this out of Tiin is not clear. LXX have rjv'iKa iav KaOeXrjs, probably connecting it with TC, Hif. inin. The Vulg. has a free paraphrase, ' tempusque veniet cum excutias, et solvas jugum ejus', etc. The Heb.-Sam. has "nxn, Nif. of "IIX (^when thou becomest great'"), for inn, so the Book of Jubilees (Di.). The best rendering seems to be either Tuch's or Dillmann's. The A.V.R. renders, 'break loose.' For the fulfilment of the blessing, cf 2 Kings 8, 20 ff. 16, 6. 41. ""Ib^ hltH '^J3'i lllp'^. Render, 'The days of mourn- ing for my father I etc., i. e. Isaac would soon die ; cf ver. 4 and ver. 7, and then Esau contemplated taking vengeance on Jacob ; ''?^? being obj. genit. Others, e. g. Luther, Kalisch, render as genit. of the subject, 'days of grief for my father' i. e. Isaac would grieve when he heard of Jacob's death. But the genitive after isax is always obj. genit. 42. ■^And they told (lit. it was told) Ribqah the words of Esau;' on the construction, cf. the note on 4, 18. OnSilD. ' Will revenge himself upon thee,' lit. ' procure for himself satisfaction, or ease (viz. by taking revenge) ; ' cf. the Nif. omN in Is. I, 24. Q 2,0,6 GENESIS, 44. D''"I^^^ Q''0''. 'A few days,' lit.' some days;' cf. 29, 20 Dnns D''Di3; Dan. 11, 20 CinnN CDUI. ' Ribqah mentions a short time in order to persuade Jacob more easily,' Di. 45. nDttJI . . . ^Itjj 1J?. 'Until thy brother's anger turn . . . and he forget;' cf. 18, 25 HTll , . , T\'<'axh, and the note there. Di'^Jti} Di; cf. Prov. 17, 15. They would both perish, as the murderer would (9, 6) be put to death. 28. 2. D"lb^ (1313. The construct state with n local; cf on 20, I. The syllable n-^ is pointed with orthophonic Ga'ya (cf Ges., § 16, 3), so that its sound may be kept distinct from that of the following X in DIN; cf 44, 2 flD3ri j;''a3 ; n, 25 "^.f'ryK'n (Baer and Del. ed.); see also Stade, § 56.' HJ^S = n|^3; cf n^D = n^D; and see Del. on Ps. 3, Comment., 4th ed., p. 83. 3. rv\V\ . . , -fnt« "I'^y. The perf with waw con- secutive, after the imperf as a jussive; cf on i, 14. 5. Cf Hos. 12, 13 Q-iN niB* IpV n-Qil. 6. n^ipi. We should expect here nJ'B'il; no adequate reason can be given for the use of the perfect with waw here, where the imperf with waw cons, would be expected : pos- sibly the present reading has arisen through 1 having dropped out between 1 and B'. See Driver, § 133. Di. explains it on account of its being dependent on ''3, but this would require the waw conv. with the imperf when another perfect had preceded, as already VDB'''l in ver. 7. CHAP. 37, VER. 44— CHAP. 28, VER. 1 3. 237 1!J"'T • « . "iDinn. The imperf. with waw con v. continuing an inf. cstr., a fact being stated ; cf Driver, §118 ad fin. So 39, 18 ^5^pN1 , , , iD^nna ; see also Ges., § 132. 3. Rem. 2. 9. Jn^riQ. In 36, 3 nD'2>| (cf the note there) is the name of the daughter of Ishmael whom Esau married. T'ttj^ 7J? = ' in addition to his wives,' i. e. the wives men- tioned 26, 34; so 31, 50 inm hv v 3- Vnt»«")n = 'a/? his head: vnityNnn for Vn'iB'Nnp; of. VniV^ino for Vnijjn^D. The plural is the plural used to mark extension of space (as here) or time; see Ges., § 108. 2a; Stade, § 313 b. The feminine plural being used, according to Stade, § 322 c ('single things in which a definite quality- appears'), niB'NiD = ' /4a/ which is at the head,' just as nil'no = 'that which is at the feet ;' cf; niDJJDD and ni3*lJ)D "■dainties;' niKPflJ 'wondrous deeds! 12. D^p from ispD, with the ending Q^,^, as in 0?'l^< from ?!iNj D|3; cf Stade, § 293; Ges., § 87. i d. This ending is more frequent in proper names, e.g. D!^1.P, ^^^^., ^1^., f^V^?, D'ipj?. npD is a aira^ Xeyofi. nO''?:^CJrT . . . ItUl^ll. ' With its top reaching heaven- wards ;' cf II, 4, and see Driver, § 159. 13. r^jr n2J2. 'Standing on it' (the ladder). LXX, tV auT^s ; so Vulg., Syriac, Del. Tuch and Di. render, ' standing Q 2 328 GENESIS, dy h'm' (Jacob), which perhaps is better (cf. i8, 2), as one does not see why it should be said that Yahweh stood on the ladder, while the thought, ' Yahweh stood by Jacob,' is more natural ; and if fbv referred to DPD, we should expect IP, or npvb, after n»K''V 14. m^iT , , , ^J^^p^; cf. on i, 2. 15. "131 DN IttJi^ IV- ' Until that I shall have done; lit. ' until that when;' cf. on 24, 19 and Num. 32, 17 DX "it^N IJ? QjN^an ; Is. 6, 1 1 onj? >m on -\m, ny. 16. TiyT' b<7 ""^iJ^I = ' without my knowing it,' circ. cl.; cf. Driver, § 160; see on 24, 31. 17. N"113 no. 'How dreadful!' cf. Ps. 8, 2 T-IK HD 'how gloriom!' Num. 24, 5 'X'b<\^ Ut3 TO 'how goodly are thy tents,' etc.; see M. R., § 93. Rem. c. 20-22. The apodosis commences with 17 niiT' iTni at the end of ver. 21. Render, 'If God be with me, and keep me on this journey which I am going, and give me bread to eat, and raiment to wear, and I return safe and sound to my father's house, then shall Yahweh be my God, and this stone,' etc. ; so LXX, Pesh., Vulg., Di., Del. ; and this division is more natural than that proposed by Tuch, who commences the apodosis with ver. 22. Cf Driver, § 1 15, on the perfect with waw conv. after an imperf. with DN. 29. I. The LXX add after Dip iJ3 nviN, trpos Ad^av t6v vlov BadovfjX Tov Svpou, dBeXcjJov Si 'Pe^iKKas, fiijTpAf 'laxmjS xai 'Htrav, probably a gloss to harmonise this passage with 28, 5; the expression Dip ''32 nvis for Mesopotamia — which is only found here — being in itself more or less indefinite. CHAP. 28, VER. 14 — CHAP. 39, VER. 7. 229 2. 'And he looked up, and behold a well in the field, and behold there, three flocks of sheep were lying by it ; for out of that well they used to water the flocks^ etc. 3. '■And all the flocks used to be gathered thither, and they used to roll away the stone from off the mouth of the well, and water the sheep, and bring hack the stone upon the mouth of the well to its place! Observe the tenses, which are instructive. The participle D^xm , ' were lying! describing the condition at the particular occasion, the frequentative imperfect Ipt^S and this followed by four perfects with waw conversive, laDNJI, lij^l, IpE'ril, U''B'm, describing what used habitually to be done ; of. Driver, §§31; 113- 4^; M. R., §25; Ges., §§127. 4 b; 126. 6d. 2. n^TT^ l^t^iTI. 'And the stone on the mouth of the well was great', lit. ' and the stone was great on the mouth of the well;' nbinj without the article, and therefore predicate; so in ver. 7 PHJ DVn llj; [n; cf. Ges., § no. 3 (misprinted 4 in the 1880 ed.); Dav., § 11. Rule 2 ; M. R., § 125. 1«nn ""S hv n^nj p^m, i.e. 'the stone on the mouth of the well,' etc., which in the more common con- struction would be nN3n ''S hv "ityN pxn nhlJI; cf. Mic.6, 12 With these two verses cf. 24, iiflf. Ex. 2, 16 if. (where, however, the tenses are different, a single occasion only being described). 4. Tin = ^ my friends r cf 19, 7. < 6. rii^^ = ' is coming,' participle not perfect ; in ver. 9 TWO, is accented on the penult., and is therefore the perfect. 7. n^pOn FjDSn ny Vh. 'it is not time for the cattle to be gathered together,' lit. ' it is not the time of the being gathered together of the cattle! i- e- for the cattle to be collected and put up for the night. On the construction of the inf. 330 GENESIS, cstr. with a subj. following and a construct state preceding, cf. Ges., §§132. lb; 133.2; M. R., §§ in, 118. 8. Q'^'nyn 73. The LXX have rnvras tovs Tioinivas, reading D''V^n"i'3, an easier reading than that of the text ; so the Sam. here and ver. 3. i2Vtym . . . ^hh:^') . . . idd«"' itt)« ly. The impf. continued by the pft. with waw conv., as in Ex. 23, 30 IJ? psn DH rhn:) man -\m ; Hos. 5, 15 '-js iB'pa'i )am'< -\m *iy, and often; cf. Driver, p. 161. 9. n«i hn-)") . . . "inn laniy. cf. on 38, 25. rT'lt^^ "iCJt^. b ItJ'N to express the genitive, as in 40, 5 nnvD ipab ^m nsxni rtpmn ; 47, 4 y'\2v'? -\m ;xsi' ; see Ges., §115. I ; M.R., §83. II. npy^ pty"iT. PWi (ver. 13) Pi'el = 'io Mss fondly ^ or ' cover with kisses' as distinguished from the Qal p^fJ (here) ' to kiss ;' cf. and KaTatpiXea in Greek. 13. ^pV' ynty n«. LXX, ri Suofj.a 'laKi/3; so LXX in Num. 14, 15. I Kings 10, i, possibly confusing j;»B' with QB', which was very similar in sound. 14. CQ"' CJin. 'A month, days; i.e. a whole month; cf 41, I D''0'' Xi'T\VO ' two years ;' Num. 11, 20 n''0'' B'ln : CD' being loosely subordinated to vr\n; see Driver, § 192. i; Ewald, § 287h; Ges., §118. 3; M.R., §71. 4. 15. "i:i1 "TI^ ■'Dn. Cf 27, 36. 'Art thou, as a brother, to serve me for nothing P' lit. ' is it the case that thou art my brother, and shouldest serve me for nothing i'' cf the Vulg. ^ num quia f rater mens es, gratis servies mihi?' On iJm3V1, perf with •waw conv. after ''3, without an imperf preceding, cf Driver, §1237. 17. nlD"l nt-^T' ''3''J?1. The predicate in the plural with the subject in the dualj as the dual in Hebrew only occurs in CHAP. 39, VERS. 8-36. 231 a few nouns, never in the verb or adj. (contrast the Arabic); see M. R., § 134 ; Ges., § 146. 5. mS'l . ' Weak^ lit. ' tenderl neither bright nor clear. So LXX and Syr. But Onq. and Saadiah take ni3T as meaning ' beautiful^ as though Leah had fine eyes, but otherwise was not so handsome as Rachel. Good eyes were considered by the Orientals one of the essentials of beauty; cf. Song of Songs 4, I. I Sam. 16, 12. 18. d'^^ti? i*lty. Jacob wished to purchase his wife by seven years' service without hire, the seven years' service taking the place of the ordinary price ("iriD) paid the wife's relatives before marriage; cf 24, 53. 34, 12. Hos. 3, 2. I Sam. 18, 23 ff. 19. 13T TlD ^113. '// is better for me to give her to thee, than for me to give her to another man;' cf Ex. 1 4, 1 2 137 21D ''3 131133 wnioD nnsD nx i3y; Prov. 21. 9 :j rua bv n3K'b 3iq D''JnD ntyXD; so ver. 19. int< CJ'^t^7, i.e. a stranger; cf Jer. 6, 12. 8, 10. At the present day in Arabia the cousin is preferred as a husband to a stranger; cf Lane, Marnier s and Customs, vol. i, p. 167. < 21. ^niyif^ nW nin. ri3n is accented on the last syllable, on account of the light consonant N in ns, that both n and N may have their full sound. 22. nnttJD, i.e. the wedding banquet; cf Judg. 14, 12. Tobit ir, 19. 23. The bride was brought to her husband veiled (cf 24, 65), and so the deception practised by Laban could easily be accomplished. 26. Ill'l ntoS?'' ^h^=' it is not customary in our land' lit. ' // is not wont thus to be done;' cf 34, 7 \\VT N? p1 ; 2 Sam. 13, 12 ^N-ltyi3 )3 rim'' ^ ''3. 2^2, GENESIS, 27. n^^t yitU. The wedding festivities usually lasted a week ; cf. Judg. and Tobit, 1. c. njriDI, i.e. Laban and his relatives; cf. 24, 50. The LXX and Sam. read JDNl . 30. TTn 7N D2. D3 = 'also;' the second DJ in ns DJ bm may either emphasize Rachel only (see Ges., § 155. 2 a), or may be taken with [D = ' eh'am,' ' sh'll more than' which is perhaps a little forced. Di. condemns both ways as against the usage of the language, and following the LXX and Vulg., rejects the second D5. Knobel takes the second QJ with anx''!, i.e. did not only go in to her, but also loved her: but this would require DHN DJ 3nx''1 ; cf 31, 15. 46, 4. n^^bO . . . nnk^iT. On the comparative, cf. M. R., § 49. 2 ; Ges., § 119. I. 31. HKIito, not absolutely ' kaied,' but relatively 'less loved;' cf Deut. 21, 15. Matt. 6, 24. 32. ■'S niQK. ''3 as in 26, 22; cf the note there; so ver. 33. ''"'^yi . . I nt^l. 3 , . , nXT = ' to look upon with compas- sion;' so I Sam. I, II ^ncN •'JW riNnn nxn dn; Ps. 106, 44 DnijixnNiii. ''Jinb*''; cf 19, 19 and the note there. 33. llyJDtU = 'hearing'. 34. ■'7^* . . . mb"". ' Will become attached to me;' cf Num. 18, 2. 4. '')? as ih.ov.g\i. = ' attachment' or 'dependent! ViTSp. As the mother in the case of the other three sons, Simeon, Reuben, and Judah, gives them their names, so probably the reading of the LXX, Ua\^}(9,), Syr. l'»* = nxnp, is correct. Nip would = 'one called him,' 'people called him! CHAP. 39, VER. 37— CHAP. 30, VER. II. 233 35. TWiTV^ = ' praise^ 'a subject of praise.' A Hof'al derivative; cf. Ps. 28, 7. 45, 18. Neh. 11, 17, where the n of the Hif. of m^ (mi) is irregularly retained. 30. < 1. nn?3; cf. on 29, 6. 2. •'33^^ Wrh^ nnnn. 'Ami in God's stead?' it. 2.m I all powerful, so that I might give you children ? so again 50, 19 ('jn); cf. 2 Kings 5, 7 n^nn^Ji niDni' ^n D^ni^Nn. 3. ''Dll hv ; so 50, 23 fiDV ''3-13 ^5? ; cf. Job 3, 12. Rachel follows Sarah's example (16, 2), and gives her maid Bilhah to Jacob, so that she might rear up her (Bilhah's) child as her own, and in some measure escape the reproach of childlessness. 6. '^|3T with the tone-syllable doubled; so *|nj?3n, Job 7, 14; cf. Stade, §71. 3- lr\ = 'judge! God heard Rachel's prayer, and decided (p^) according to her wish. 8. DTlv^ '^T'1DD3 = lit. ' struggles of God,' i. e. struggles or wrestlings for God's favour; cf. ver. 6. 29, 31. 30, 2. The A.V. renders, ' with great wrestlings,' i. e. for the husband's love : but the sisters were never rivals for the husband's love (cf. 29, 33 and ver. 15 of this chapter), as Rachel was always the favourite wife of Jacob. ipiDQJ is a aira^ Xcyo'/i. and the only noun of this form; see Stade, § 251. *7naj = 'one ob- tained by struggling' (?). Di. Kampfmann (^man of combat' or ' struggling '). II. 13^ = the Kri 13 N3 '■ good fortune comes;' so Onq. and the Syriac (w»4j, ji?" ' my fortune cometh ') : but this reading of the Kri is unnecessary. The Ktb. 133, pointed 133 (LXX, Iv Tv)(r)- Vulg. feliciter') — the pausal form of 12 — yields a good sense, 'I am in luck;' cf. ^iB'Na, ver. 13. 13 234 GENESIS, (cf. Is. 65, II, where it is the Babylonian god of good fortune, identified with Bel, and later with the planet Jupiter) was the name of an old Phoenician and Canaanitish god. Traces of the name are still preserved in the proper name tJ 7V3, Josh. II, 17, and the Phoenician proper names njJIJ, OyJIJ ; see Euting, Sechs Phonizische Inschrifien aus Idalwn, p. 14 (1875). The Ktb. might be read ^J3, and explained by Ges., § 102. 2 c, the 3 being pointed with pretonic qame9; the mean- ing being, as above, ' F am in luck! But this is improbable. The A.V. (but not the A.V. R., see Prof. Driver's paper on the Revised Version in The Expositor, July, 1885) and Gr. Ven. (^Jxft a-TpaTevixa) give nj the meaning of I'm; cf. 49, 19. But 13 never means 'a troop! and 49, 19 is not decisive on the meaning here. 13. '''1tyNIl='/«;«>'/rM/frz'/c/'i.e. laminluck; cf.ver. 11. ''J'^'^tyN ^3. 'For the daughters are sure to call me lucky ;' cf. Is. II, 9 nj)T pxn nxi'D 'a; Jer. 25, 14 on nnj) 'a. The perfect of certitude or prophetic perfect; cf Driver, § 1418; M.R., § 3- 1; Ges., § 126. 4; Dav., § 46. 2. 3. 1ffii^ = '//^e lucky one;' cf mB'K I'the goddess of good fortune! 14. ChiTn is pi. of ■'•]«; cf niN^ij, from an obsolete singular vv, i_- of the singular being softened into N in the plural; so 'hn, pi. n-'N^Q; •'3V, pi. nisas and D''xax; '•na, pi. CNnai; cf Stade, §§ 122. 301 a. QiNin = 'love apples^ i. e. the fruit of the Mandragora vernalis, or mandrake, of a yellow colour, and similar in shape to an apple; found in Palestine, especially in Galilee. There seem to have been two kinds of d''Nin, the Mandragora vernalis and autumnalis (Song of Songs 7, 14), unless we suppose with Tuch that in But cf. Baer and Del., Liber Fsalmorum, Lipsiae, 1880, p. 115. CHAP. 30, VERS. 13-18. 2,^^ this passage the fruit is intended (at the time of the wheat harvest, i. e. May to June), while in Song of Songs the blossom is meant (cf. the LXX rendering in Song of Songs, 01 fiavSpayopai, with their translation here, ;u^Xa iJ.avSpayopS>v), On the supposed efficacy of the d'STiT as love potions, see Tuch, p. 385 f., and the authorities cited by him. 15. 'Is thy taking away my husband a little thing, and (art thou) /or taking away the love apples 0/ my son too?' cf Esth. 7, 8 nai^Dn nx tynai* Djn; 2 Chron. 19, 2 nrv^ v^-hT\. nnpPI is not perf as Tuch, but inf cstr. used' as a peri- phrastic future ; see Driver, § 204 ; alsoGes., § 132. 3. Rem. i. Di. remarks that 'the inf nnpPI ("and to take" = "and thou wilt take" 1) expresses the intention more forcibly than the more natural construction with the perfect 'jiOpj'); see 20, 16.' 16. '^'^niDto ^ito, i.e. by giving Rachel some of the love apples. Sin n7''72; cf 19, 33 and the note there. 18. "l2tt/to^. The reading given in Baer and Del.'s edition is pointed ~^^^'f., with the Kri perpetuum "i?^., i. e. wherever ■l3{^E= '^o//or^zr«'(Wright); so apparently the LXX, 'I(r(ra;^ap ; Vulg. Issachar; Syr. j^m./ ; Saad. JIXLlo ; Josephus, in fila-6ov yevoiievos. The reading of Ben Naftali, "'?"?'"^1, is the same as that of Ben Asher, but 336 GENESIS, written diflferently. Some think that Ben Naftali read 1?'f,^. {'affertproemium') = "i^'E' !A^\ ; see Baer and Del., loc. cit., 'Ai eerie de Ben Naf. falluntur'. Mose ben Mocha read ">|?'T; ' esi proemium,' after Jer. 31, 16. 2 Chron. 15, 7. 20. ''2^2t and 'J?3ti are both a-na^ Xeyo/x. pblt (of the same form as \r\w) = ' habitation' In this verse two explanations of the name are given, (a) I3t . . . '313t 'presented me with a goodly present^ and (3) '•Jpaf ^ (paT with the ace. like pt:' and nij) ' roz'// dwell with me,' probably being derived from different documents; so ver. 24. 21. X\y^'~\=^'vindicatio;' the daughter's name is here given, as necessary to explain chap. 34. Jacob's daughters are else- where presupposed (46, 7. 37, 35), but not mentioned by name. 24. F]DV explained from ver. 23 ''na^^ nx D'n^K ^IDN, as though it were PIDX1 = ' taker away,' i. e. of my reproach of childlessness. In 241" the name is explained differently, "ins p "h "" fJOV ' OT(y/ Yahweh add to me another son,' so=' multiplier ;' see on ver. 20, and cf. 35, 18. 27. I^T Tli^JJO N3 DN. '1/ now I have found favour in thine eyes, — / have observed the omens, and Yahweh has blessed me for thy sake! The apodosis to "IJI insSO NJ DN is sup- pressed; the apodosis would perhaps run ''^j?D navn N3 ^N, as in 18, 3. The words cannot be translated ' Would that I had found favour in thy eyes ' (Ges. in Thes.), as this would re- quire the imperf., not the perfect; cf.Ps. 81, 9. 139,19. intyru; see on 44, 1 5. The LXX have olaiviaaiiriv av, making intS'nJ into the apodosis to iJINSD m. The A.V. renders, 'I have learned by experience', following the Vulgate ' experimento didici.' "■ In Assyrian the root zabal = 'to bear,' 'lift up;' it is possible, therefore, that ':')2r should be rendered, ' will lift me up,' i. e. ' honour me;' see Cheyne's crit. note on Is. 63, 15; Del., Heb. Lang., p. 38 f. ; and his Prolegomena (Leipzig, 1886), p. 62. CHAP. 30, VERS. 20-33. 237 28. ''71^ = lit. ' upon me! ?y because it will be as a burden to him; cf. 34, 12. 29. ' Thou knowesi how I have served thee, and what thy cattle has become with me! Timaj) "IB'X HN and ^^^ lE'N ilNI "151 are both accusatives after nIn^ nnx is emphatic, ' /.^ok with whom I have been in service shouldest know.' TIN ' with me,' i. e. under my care. 30. yiS'^l. Waw conv., as in Ex. 9, 21, which compare. ''7il'^ 7, lit. ' at my steps,' i. e. wherever I went ; cf. Is. 41, 2 mw inNIp' plV 'whom righteousness meeteth wherever he goeth;' Job 18, 11 fhrb inTsni. '^3JN ID3. Emphatic, '//i3o.' You have been prosperous, when shall I begin prospering ? 31. nyii^ nmtljb^. '■ I will again feed ;' so 26, 18 3E'''1 narT'l pnx^ ' and Isaac dug again! Two verbs to express one idea, where in English an adverb is used; so Ps. 7, 13 E'C3?^ . . , DIB'* '•will again sharpen;' see Ges., § 142. 3 b; M.R.,§3oa. 32-43. These twelve verses are very obscure, possibly corrupt. In ver. 31, Jacob, in answer to Laban's request to tell him what reward he desires, replies that Laban is to give him nothing if he will accede to a proposal he has to make. In ver. 32, Jacob proposes to go through Laban's flock, and separate the particoloured and black sheep, and all the particoloured goats. The normal colour of the goats is black, or at least dark-brown ; that of the sheep, on the contrary, white; see Song of Songs i, 2. 6, 6. Dan. 7, 9 ; cf Song of Songs i, 5. The greater number of the sheep and goats would naturally be of normal colour, white and black respectively. Jacob proposes that the abnormal cattle 238 GENESIS, shall be his hire. Laban, vers. 34-36, consents to Jacob's proposal, and separates the normal and abnormal coloured sheep and goats, and sends the latter off, under the charge of his sons, three days' journey distant from the remainder of his flock of normal coloured animals, left in Jacob's charge. Jacob, in order that the animals left with him may bring forth a greater number of abnormal coloured offspring than they would usually produce, has recourse to the stratagem of the peeled rods in the drinking-troughs (37-39). Ver. 40 seems to contain a second contrivance on the part of Jacob to increase his flock, but the text is very obscure and almost certainly corrupt (see the note there). Vers. 41, 42 either contain a third stratagem, or refer to the previous two (the frequentative tenses perhaps supporting the latter view), 41, 42 being a more detailed account of the contrivance prac- tised in vers. 38, 39. 32. DVn seems to imply that the cattle separated that day, if of abnormal colour, were to belong to Jacob; but against this is firstly ver. 31, where Jacob declines any hire, and secondly vers. 35, 36b, where Laban, not Jacob, separates and drives off the abnormal coloured cattle, which seem, according to ver. 32, to belong to Jacob, but here are apparently regarded as Laban's. To avoid this difficulty, some, e. g. Tuch, sup- pose that Jacob's hire is to be the abnormal coloured cattle that would be born, cf ver. 37 ff.; but nothing is said of this in ver. 32, and it is questionable whether iiafc' DTil would fit in with this view. Di. proposes to alter the accentuation of ver. 32, and point the first NvD with Athnach; then the meaning would be ' every black sheep among the sheep, and spotted and patched among the goats, shall be my hire,' i. e. you are to give me nothing now, but the abnormal coloured cattle born after the division, in ver. 32, has taken place will be CHAP. 30, VERS. 32, S^. 239 mine ; cf. iriD, ver. 33. This seems the simplest solution of the difficulties. "iDn is inf. abs. Others prefer taking ^D^ as imperative, addressed to p7, which suits ver. 35, but not "IDVN. *lp3 N1PI31 ' spotted and patched'. NI^JD is not found again outside this chapter, except in Ez. 16, 16, pi. fern. riiK?t3- ''"'^'^ '"''''"''' ' and {these) shall be my hire^ i. e. the sheep and goats of abnormal colour that shall be born after the division men- tioned in this verse has been carried out ; see above. XVO is used here of both sheep and goats, being further defined by n''2b'3 and U'X^. Ver. 35 is a more minute description of this verse. The LXX have ■napihSerai, reading the easier reading "P| ^35J*_; Vulg. ' gyra omnes greges tuos' (733 13j;), both regarding "iDn as imper. ff^^toi . A form peculiar to the Pent., for which we find elsewhere DiE'33. 33. TipiS ''n nn31>l. MuhlauandVolck(Ges.,Zr.PF:^., 9th ed.) render here and i Sam. 12, 3, 'bear witness for me;' but as 3 . . . nJV always elsewhere means ' to bear witness against,' and as this meaning is not unsuitable in i Sam. 12, 3, it is preferable to follow Del. and render ' my righteousness shall testify against me,' i. e. I shall be self-condemned (Wright). "ino 'QVI = ' hereafter ;' cf. Ex. 13, 14. Deut. 6, 20. Josh. 4, 6. "J''JO 7 . 1 t t^^ri ""3 . ' When thou comest about my hire, before thee,' i. e. when thou comest to inspect the cattle (my hire) which will be before thee ; or yi?t> may be connected with TlpTV ^3 nnjyi, in the sense 'my righteousness will testify against me . . . before thee ; ' but the position of y^s?, at some distance from 'nplS U nnJVIj is against this. 24° GENESIS, mm = Din 'u^NI, as the black sheep, being Jacob's hire, could not be regarded as stolen. 35. "^P^, imperf. Hif., not Qal, although the apocopated imperf. third pers. masc. sing. Qal and Hif. are the sanje, the context alone deciding the conjugation intended. Laban is here the subject, as is clear from Via at the end of the verse, and apV p31 U^a in the next verse. The cattle left with Jacob were of normal colour, white sheep and dark-coloured goats. 36. 13"'2 'between htm.' LXX and Sam. i3Ji3 (Dn''J''a) 'be- tween them,' i. e. his sons. 37. 7pQ doubtless collective, hence the fern, (as |n3, cf Jer. 4, 2^^, shews); elsewhere it is masculine. il32T' = 'Sty rax' (Sty rax officinalis). Arabic i^^- The noun r\y:h is of the same form as HJiB'Si, n^N, n__ = ''__ (cf the Arabic name ending in J = -i.^, and see Stade, § 301 b), from pS so called on account of the milk-like gum that flows from it when its bark is cut. Others, following the Vulg. here and the LXX in Hos. 4, 13, render 'poplar;' so A.V. here. Xh = ' almond! Arabic jJJ, Aram. Ijcuiik. Del. remarks that xh is the more Aramaic-Arabic word for TPB'. pniy = 'plane tree' {Platanus orientalis), from I31V 'to strip; so called because the bark peels off from year to year, and the tree becomes as it were naked. f]iynn = Pib-n, inf. abs. 'exposing the white ;' one of the very few instances in Hebrew of an abstract form with the force of an infinitive; so K'jk'P, VDO (as inf cstr.) from J?DJ, rm:> (Neh. 12, 45, with ace); cf. Ewald, § 239 a. In Aramaic the inf of the first conjugation (=Qal) is formed by pre- fixing D. CHAP. 30, VERS. 35-40. 241 38. d^tom, rare and Aramaising, here explained by DID ninpB'. mnpffi is pi. of ngy, nke n'nK?^, Ps. 12, 7, from ION; cf. Stade, § 187 b; Ewald, § 212 b, who cites ''^^p from '^3b. n337 ' over against' nDOrT'T from D»n, instead of njtpnPil, as i Sam. 6, 12 ^r0; Dan. 8, 22 njt°-V,- (aU)- I" Arabic the third fem. pi. form is (TjiilT, and in Aramaic i^^\^\; see Ges., § 47. 3. Rem. 3; Stade, § 534. i. ff. W.B., 9th ed., gives the root as i3n\ not Dtsn, n:»ni = n:Dn\'; cf y^"!. from ^b*;. if it is from Dpn it follows the analogy of ip.'!, Tl"!.- 39. lOrT'l, plural masc, because the male animals are included, lon'' is either imperf. from Qon — 'Sn'', or imperf. Qal of on;, for W or ion;.; cf Judg. 5, 28 ^inN for 'iins ; Ps. 51, 7 ''^npn;, for "Jnjpn;': see Ges., §§ 64. 3. Rem. 3; 67. 5. Rem.; cf Stade, § 523d, who regards ^pp;. as lightened from loni, for 'ISD'., after the analogy of verbs T\"b. ni7pOn h^. Cf 24, u D''Dn -1^3 b^ 'at the well of water! W^ip)} = ' striped: 40. Q"'3tl''3m are the particoloured animals, goats and sheep ; these Jacob separated from the normally coloured animals in Laban's flock. He then turns Laban's normal coloured animals in the direction of the D'Hto, so that they might have these before their eyes. But these abnormal coloured animals belong to Jacob, according to his agree- ment with Laban, and so cannot be spoken of as Din Pai IpJJ \:h JNVa. If the text were emended as follows, the difficulty would disappear, 1JXV3 din ^■y\ npj? ^N 13^ JKV ''J3 [JT-I, i.e. ' he set the face of Laban's flock towards what was striped and (towards) everything dark in his own flock! p? has fallen out H 242 GENESIS, of its place after |NV, which then received the article, and the waw of iJXVn disappeared before the waw of r\0.. Knobel emends by reading ipjj b^, with Onq., Ps.-Jon., and takes 1J2 for iJS^ ' 6e/ore,' as Ex. 23, 15. Ps. 42, 3 ; but then Jacob's dark and particoloured cattle are described as Laban's. Wright adopts Knobel's emendation, but avoids the above- mentioned difficulty by deleting ]2b and reading INV3. p? might certainly have crept in, from the pi? [NX in the next line. Del. retains the text, and supposes that after the first separation, ver. 32, the normal and abnormal coloured cattle were left together. But the abnormal cattle could hardly be called Laban's even in that case, and it seems scarcely possible that Laban, who apparently was anxious to prevent any duplicity on Jacob's part (cf ver. 35, where /le, not Jacob, separates the normal and abnormal coloured cattle), would passively submit to this second stratagem by leaving his own cattle (i. e. those that were sent away under his sons' care, cf. ver. 32) under Jacob's charge. 41, 42. The old translators explain these verses by the fact that the strong cattle bring forth their young in winter, and the weak cattle theirs in the spring : thus niitypDn would be the winter cattle, and d''St3j;n the spring cattle. 41. Dtol . , , nTII, perfs. with waw conv. in a frequen- tative sense; see Driver, § 120. '^^^I!',!? is inf. Pi'el of Q^^ with the third pi. fern. sufiSx '"'|-vr- for I-^^; cf. 41, 21 ill?"!!?, and see Ges., § 91. i. Rem. 2; Stade, § 352 b. 2, who re- marks that the dagesh should be struck out. 43. nin 'jNi?, the collective being construed with a plural adjective; cf. i Sam. 13, 15 lay Q'^NVDin Dyn ns, I Sam. 17, 28 njnn jKvn tsyo; cf. Ges., § 112. i. Rem. 3; M. R., § 85. Rem. b. CHAP. 30, VER. 41 — CHAP. 31, VER. 8. 343 81. I. ntn *725n = 'tUs wealth;' cf. Is. 10, 3. Ps. 49, 17. 4. mton is ace. of place; see M. R., § 41a; Ges., §118.1. g. 133''t^, referring to ''iS; cf. Lam. 4, 16, where '•JS is followed by a singular verb. 6. n3nS^1 for IHN, also pointed n2PiS (cf. the Arabic jTjijl), is only found again in Ez. 13, 11, 20. 34, 17; see Ges., § 32. Rem. 5; Stade, § 178 c. 7. 7nri for PO'"?) with retrogression of the tone by Ges., § 29. 3b; Stade, § 88. 2b. bnn is Hif. of h^Tw cf. the Lexic. and Ewald, § 1 2 7 d. The n of the Hif. is retained, as though it were a radical letter, in the forms 1?nn^ (notice the dag. in % Job. 13, 9 ; 'hr\r\\, Jer. 9, 4 ; ^nn^l, i Kings 18, 27 : see Stade, § 145 e, and Wright, Gram. Arab., i. p. 37. fl'rnm . . . ^nn . I. Either like Num. 11,8 IDph . . . IDE', 'the fact being stated summarily by the perfect, and this tense being followed by the perfect with waw conv.;' see Driver, § 114a. II. Or like Num. 21, 15 jVK'J'l ...HDJ: C|i?nni not being subordinate to 7nn (the imperf. with waw conv. would be required then) but co-ordinate ; see Driver, §132. 'D'^iya mtoy. 'Ten times;' LXX, him aixuSiv, possibly corrupted out of a reading fivav. The translators, not under- standing D''J"iD, wrote tha Hebrew word in Greek, and this passed over into afivav; cf. Frankel, Ehtf., p. 18, and ver. 41. The word D''J1D is peculiar to this chapter, elsewhere CDya is used, e.g. Num. 14, 22. Aq. has 6c/ca dptdno-is, Symm. SeKwas dpl6fia. 8. The account of the agreement made between Jacob R 2 444 GENESIS, and Laban in this chapter differs from that in chap. 30, and appears to be derived from a different source. iTTT' Q''^pJ. n^^^ the singular is perhaps due to the following inaty; see Ges., § 147 d. ^ If he were to say thus, The spotted shall he thy hire; then all the flock used to hring forth spotted: and if he were to say thus, The striped shall be thy hire ; then all the flock used to bring forth striped.' Cf. Num. 9, 19-21. Ex. 40, 37 ^b DN1 1J?D'' N?1 ]:i'^n npj)'' (the apod, being in the imperf., as the waw is separated from the verb by nI?); see Driver, § 136 8. Obs., cf § 123/3. 9. D^ll^i for pi3N; cf on 26, 18. 10. Omn = xi^Jt:, in 30, 32 ; it is found twice again in Zech. 6, 3. 6 (of horses), and = ' speckled! Dnnn probably = 'covered as it were with hailstones' (T)?), so 'white spots on a dark ground' (Tuch). 13. SNiT^n b«n. 'I am the God of Bethel! Wl being loosely connected with ^xn, instead of being subordi- nated in the genitive; cf 2 Kings 23, 17 i>xn^3 n^TDn (but cf Driver, § 191. Obs.). Or ^N.T may be regarded as construct state with the article, see Ewald, 290 d (3), who cites other instances, e.g. Jer. 48, 32, etc.; see also Is. 36, 8. 16; and cf. M.R., §76b; Ges., §110. 2 b. 14- n^ir^Xm . . . )^rr\. On the first verb with a com- pound subject in the singular and the second in the plural, see Ges., § 148. 2 ; cf also M. R., § 138. 15- ^13« a:i hyt^Cf^. 'And goes on to eat up;' cf on 19, 9- D3, emphasizing the verb as in 46, 4. Num. 16, 13; cf the note on 29, 30. 16. "i^. 'So that;' so Del. and Kn., comparing Job 10, 6. CHAP. 31, VERS. 9-20. 245 Deut. 14, 24. Di. prefers the rendering '■rather^ or ^nay, rather;' cf. Ps. 37, 20. 49, 11. 19. ttiS ']7n. In 38, 13 we find \h, the shorter form; cf. yixh, Num. 21, 4, and the short form 3D, Deut. 2, 3; see Stade, §6196; Ges., § 67. Rem. lo. pn is pluperfect, ^had gone! d"'D"inn = ' The Teraphim,' Laban's household gods. LXX here to. e'tSaXa, but the word is variously rendered by them in the other passages where it occurs. The Teraphim were of human form (i Sam. 19, 13), and were worshipped as gods (ver. 30. Judg. 18, 24). Their worship was not re- cognised as legitimate (see 2 Kings 23, 24; -cf. Gen. 35, 4 and Hos. 3, 4), yet they were at all times regarded as house- hold oracles (Judg. 18, 5. Zech. 10, 2. Ez. 21, 26), and (pos- sibly) as bringing prosperity; therefore Rachel takes them with her, to avoid bringing misfortune or ill luck on her household; cf. Judg. 18, 17, where the Danites take Micha's household gods. The pi. form may here only denote a single image, as in i Sam. 19, 13 (see Ges., § 108. 2 b); cf. ffiJllK and I3''^J?3, both used as intensive plurals; the pi. suf. in ver. 34, and 'ni'N in ver. 30, not being decisive in favour of taking D^Sin as a real plural; cf. Ewald, § 318 a. No certain etymology has yet been found. The one most commonly given is from the Arabic i_J,j 'commode v/vere,' which would agree with the idea that the D'Sin were the gods who were supposed to bring good fortune to those who worshipped them ; but it is not certain that w5^ does not rather mean 'to be soft;' cf. Tuch, p. 395 ; Del., p. 555, who also suggests a comparison with the Sanskrit tarp, ' to be full.' The n''^^n stood in no connection with the D*S"iB'. 20. 17 riN . . . 133''T = 'deceived;' cf. 2 Sam. 15, 6 246 GENESIS, ai? ns DI^B'^N 233*1, but in the sense ' /o win over secretly ;' cf. KkkitTeiv voov and KKinrciv Tiva (Del.). i^n hv is only found here, "hri = N^ with the finite verb, occurs in Job 41, 18. Hos. 8, 7. 9, 16 (Ktb.). Is. 14, 6; see Ewald, § 322 a. Render, ' In thai he did not tell.' On by, cf. Ges., § 104. I c. 21. "inin. 'The river' par excellence, i.e. the Euphrates; see Ges., § 109. 2. So often, e.g. Is. 27, 12. Ps. 72, 8. 23. Vnb< nb<. ' His friends and fellow-tribesmen ;' cf. Lev. 10, 4. 2 Sam. 19, 13. 25. ^y7i^T "^m . . . "in^. From a comparison of vers. 21 and 23 with this verse, Jacob and Laban apparently- encamped in the same place (so Vulg.); yet the narrative evidently implies that Laban encamped in one place and Jacob in another. Possibly in vers. 21, 23, and here, ly^JJ nfl may mean the hill country of Gilead in general, "j in (like "i px) in the O. T. being the name of the mountain range and country of Gilead, south of Jarmuk, up to the plain of Heshbon (Deut. 3, 12 f. Josh. 17, i. 5. 2 Kings 10, 33, and often). In ver. 25, Jacob encamped "in?, which seems to point to some special hill, possibly the hill called at the present time Gebel Gil'ad, on the south bank of the Widy Jabbok (cf. ver. 54). Jacob's camping ground would then be described as nra (a special hill, with which the reader would be familiar), while Laban's is described as in the neighbourhood (cf. ver. 25, Jb'^i), the actual spot not being indicated. 26. n^^m n''toy. The imperf. with waw conv. used to define nbty; so in i Sam. 8, 8. i Kings 2, 15; see Driver, § 76 a. CHAP. 31, VERS, ai-33. 247 27. miS riNiro no'?. 'Why didst thoujly in secret?' see 27, 20; and cf. Ges., § 142. 4. Rem. i. 'inbttJi^V ^ And so I could have sent thee away;' see Driver, § 74 a. On the -^ in in^B'^'l, see Ges., § 65. 2. note ; also Stade, § 633 a. 28. ItoV rh'DDil = 'thou hast acted foolishly; Vtyg for nVtJ'J?; cf. nN-1, 48, 11; nB'5(, 50, 20; 'inB'll, Ex. 18, 18; and see Ges., § 75. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 619 k. In IB'J? nbon the construction is the same as in 8, 10 nPtJ' fJO''!. 29. '^T^ Si^*? CJ''. Cf. Mic. 2, I. Prov. 3, 27; the neg. is ^T• hvh pN, Deut. 28, 32. Neh. 5, 5. Hitzig explains the phrase as meaning ' My hand is for God,' which would be suitable if the meaning intended were, '/ am capable or able to do everything' but scarcely suitable when the meaning is, as here, '1 have the power.' Schumann, quoted by Wright, p. 87, renders, ' My hand belongs to strength^ i. e. is strong, on which Maurer remarks that in prose this would require ''1'h ^X K'\ Del., Tuch, Ges., Di. render, ' // is in the power of my hand;' see Ges., § 152. i. Q3"'lt^. The plural suffix refers to Jacob and those who were with him. 30. 'And now (when) thou art going right away, for thou longest sore for thy father's house, why hast thou stolen my gods?' "^n and fiD33 are infs. abs., prefixed to the finite verb for emphasis; see Ges., § 131. 3a; Dav., § 27. Rule; M. R., § 37 a. flD33, on the form, cf. Ges., § 51. Rem. I. 31. Tlb^'T' "'D. Cf. the note on 20, 11. 32. "^tljb^ Dy 'with whomsoever', for IDy . . . nw ; the phrase is unusual, yet imitated here by the Syriac, ? ^ liik ; 248 GENESIS, see Ewald, § 333 a; Ges., § 123. 2. foot-note; M. R., § 158. Rem. a. In 44, 9. 10 we have the regular construction ins . . . nt^K. 33. rinQt>^n is pi. of nan, with the insertion of a n; see Stade, § 188; Ges., § 96; and cf the Arabic ill, pi. eyl^l, with J instead of the Heb. n. The Aram. jLi/', pi. ]o%:isl^, and XOX, pi. S1D. 39. "Tlt^in «^ T\Q'\-i;^. Cf. Ex. 22, 12. natSnW, for n|XDnN, as though from a verb r\"h ; see Ges., § 74. Rem. 4; cf § 75. Rem. 21 c; Stade, §111. X^n here is synonymous with DpE*, Ex. 22, 12. QV T)i;3 with the old binding vowel ^~^; cf on i, 24. It always has the tone with the exception of two places, Lam. I, I and Hos. 10, 11, in the former of which the accent is on the penult., on account of a word of one syllable follow- ing; cf Ges., § 90. 3 a; Stade, § 343 d. The two imperfs. nitonx, rutypan are frequentative. 40. Cf Jer. 36, 30. In the East the cold at night is quite as intense as the heat by day. 41. Q^iJ^D Vrm^. Cf ver. 7. Ten here, and ver. 7, is a round number = ' often! CHAP. 31, VERS. 33-47- 349 42. "IHD. Sover. 53; cf. XilD, Is. 8, 12. ins is abstract for concrete ; cf. iri^as = ae^aa-jia. The Pesh. uses ]ii\—? here and Is. 8, 12 in a similar way. In the Jer.-Targ. on Deut. 32, 15, and the Targ. on Hos. 8, 6, and often else- where, we find X^n"! used, as ina here, and N11D in Is., 1. c. ; compare also a similar use of HNTi in the Talmud, Sank., 64 a "IJI Ip'iHD iriNI* N''Sin ' he takes his god (i. e. idol) out of. Ms bosom.' Render, ' I/the God of my father . . . had been with me . . .for then ;' an aposiopesis : or nnjj '3 may be regarded as an apodosis and rendered, ' indeed then thou hadst,' etc. ; cf. 43, 10 ^lyo nny '•a uncnonn ^h "la; Num. 22, 29 tyi 1^ nny *3 . , , ain ; 2 Sam. 2, 27 (tx ''3); and see Driver, § 141. Cf. Ewald, § 358 a. 43. n7^57 ntoj^N TVd. * what am I going to do to these?' i.e. how am I going to harm them? For h TVi^'S in a bad sense, see 22, 12. 27, 45. Ex. 14, 11. 44. rrrn . . . nr\")D3. cf. on i, 14. The subj. to n\T cannot be n''ia, as this is fem., and the action itself (the making a covenant) cannot be regarded as a witness, and so cannot be subject; Di. therefore deletes the b before IV, which then becomes the subject, = ' and let there be a witness;' otherwise we must suppose with Olshausen that something has fallen out of the text. 45. nniJQ nO'^'T'l, llt. 'and he set it up {so that it became) a pillar ;' cf. i Kings i8, 32 naro d''J3Xn nx nJ3; Gen. 28, 18 naVD nnx DB'''1; see Ewald, § 284 a. i; Ges., §139. 2; M.R., §45. 5. 47. i^rmnto "l^"" = Heb. ly^J, the first occurrence of Aramaic words in the O. T. NniintJ', cf. Job 16, 19 ^intol = ' my witness^ after the form of the Aramaic participle. Del. remarks on this : ' We have here a historical proof which 250 GENESIS, cannot be objected to, that the language which was spoken in the ancestral home of the Patriarchs was different from that spoken in Canaan,' i.e. Abraham spoke Aramaic, but when he came to Canaan adopted the language of that country, viz. Hebrew. The naming of the place with an Aramaic and Hebrew name was perhaps occasioned by its position on the frontier, between Aramaic and Hebrew- speaking people; see Di., p. 336. 49. As the text stands, ver. 49 must be closely connected with 48, 'and Mizpah {he called the place) because he said,' etc. ; so Kn., Del. ; but nSVDni is strange, as nothing has been said about a nSSD ' a look-out^ ' watch-tower' Ewald emends, nsSDH nasoni ' and the pillar {he called) Hammizpah' {Komp. der Gen., p. 64), which is supported by Saadiah. The Vss. vary, and do not give any clue to solve the difiSculty. Di. suggests that ver. 49 was first added by the redactor of the book, as at his time a Mizpah in Gilead was better known than a Masseba, but expresses some doubt as to whether all ver. 49 was added by the later editor, or only a portion. Del. remarks that ' The addition, vers. 49-50, says nothing more than that there was a tradition which referred back the name of Mizpah of Gilead to the scene between Laban and Jacob.' 50. Ob< in an oath, as in 14, 23, which compare. 52. ON with a following DN1 = sive . . . sive ; so Del., who compares Ex. 19, 13 H'lni ^ t^'N DX nonn DN 'whether beast or man, he shall not live.' Di. prefers to take them as the DX in ver. 50, and renders, 'surely not I, I will not pass;' the DN and then i^b expressing a strong negative ; but this seems unnecessary. 53. lUDty"'. Perhaps the plural is used as the gods of CHAP. 31, VER. 49 — CHAP. 33, VER. 9. ^51 Nahor are mentioned, the narrator supposing that Nahor worshipped idols, as Laban did (of. the Qiain) ; cf. Josh. 24, 2. LXX, Pesh., Sam.jVulg. give the sing. taSB''. 54. Cf. 26, 30. 2 Sam. 3, 20. 32. I. DflMX is rare (cf. Ex. 18, 20. Num. 21, 3, and cnriiK, Ez. 23, 45). The usual form is tariN. In the fem., on the contrary, the usual form is I'^ntJ ([flK only in Ez. 16, 54). 3. 0''3n?3 = ' iwo camps' LXX have napefi0o\at, as though "o were a plural from "'Jno. The dual, however, suits vers. 8-1 1 better than a plural. The two camps were his own, and the angel host he had just met. C!'':nD, belonging to the tribe of Gad, was situated north of the Jabbok, and was one of the most important towns in Gilead. Some identify it with the ruins, still extant, called Lx^ Mahneh, but Di. con- siders ijLsr* too far east and north for the d''3nD of this verse. 5. pint^n. Cf. Ges., § 47- Rem. 4; Stade, § 620a; see on 3, 4. int;j^T is imperf. Qal, by syncope, for inNNI ; so 3nK for anXN, Prov. 8, 17: see Ges., § 68. i. note; Stade, § 112 c. 6. nn'rtiSNi. cf. on4i, u. 7. '^nSIp'? "[^rt Q31. The participle without any subject expressed; so aan tjK, Deut. 33, 3; Q''n7E'D ON, I Sam. 6, 3; cf. Gen. 24, 30 (with njn); 37, 15 (also with njn) : see Driver, § 135. 6. 2 ; Ewald, § 303 b. 8. 1^||T is imperf. Qal from mv, Ewald, § 232 c; Stade, § 510 g. The ^- in the last syllable is due to the tone being drawn back to the penult, as in Job 20, 22 v 1X1. 9. nn^rr runorr 7^^. n^no, usually masc, is here a5a GENESIS, fern., as in Ps. 27, 3; as the masc. immediately follows, the fem. is strange; the Heb.-Sam. reads ^C?*?. irrDm , . . NII"" □«. Cf. i8, 26. 24, S, and ver. i8 of this chapter, where 13 takes the place of dN ; see Driver, § 136 a, and cf. § 115; M. R., § 24. 2 a. ntO'^^D is abstract, 'escape^ and then coxxcxeX^,' escaped ones! 11. ^yc^ "TlJt^p, render as a present, [tip being a stative verb, '/<2OT unworthy I lit. ' /i?o small;' see Driver, §11; M. R., § 2. i; Ges., § 126. 3. 730. On the (comparative) )D here = the positive with 'too; see M.R., § 49. 2. Rem. a; cf. 18, 14 im nin*D N^SM; 4, 13 NIB'JO 'JW i'HJ. ''7p?33 "^3. 3 is pointed with dag. lene, although the previous word ends in a vowel, and has a conjunctive accent, because the aspirate in the connected sounds 121 is hardened (i.e. removed), just as in 33, 33, S3, 33, 33; see Ges., § 21. i. Rem. 2, and Del., p. 416. niinti ■'Jtyb TT'^n. ' I have become {and sUll am) two camps;' see Driver, § 8. 12. int^ , , . t^l"'. Cf. on 22, 12 and 4, 14. Q"'33, 7J^ £3b<. The phrase occurs again in Hos. 10, 14 (cf. Deut. 22, 6), and is a proverbial expression, py depicts the mother hovering over her children, and vainly trying to defend them : or pj? may be taken as in Job 38, 32. Ex. 35, 22 d'E'Jn 7J? d''B'JNn 'the men together with the women' The first explanation is perhaps preferable. 14. "IT'l t^in ]Q = ' of what he had; lit. ' of that which had come into his hand;' cf. 35, 4 dT'3 "ll^N. A.V. ' of thai which came to his hand;' better rendered in the A.V. R. ^ of that which he had with him! CHAP. 33, VERS. 11-35. 253 16. □n''J2. The masc. suf. for the fern., as in 31, 9; cf. 26, 18 and the note there. D"'"lD = '■young iullocksl standing in the same relation to mis as anij) 'foals' (here ' asses' foals') to the nUiriN. I?. "11:17 -n)) "ni^, lit. 'flock, flock alone; i.e. 'by herds or flocks,' so that each flock had one servant ; cf. Ges., § 108. 4; M.R.,§72. 2. 18. TJffi3p\ So pointed in Baer and Del.'s edition, fol- lowing Ben Asher's reading. Ben Naftali reads, however, ^^'Jl^r- ^^^ Asher's reading was Y>''(i"^o\mceA yif-gha-shacha, Ben Naftali's yf-gosh-cha ; cf. Baer and Del., Gen., p. 85. The imperf. B'SS^. would be a by- form of ^i^\; cf. i Sam. 25, 20. On the Hatef-pathach under B*, cf. on 2, 12 3nr^. 20. p"inn. Cf. on ver. 5 intsxn. D3Nj2bS, for D?^3% used as the imperf. of ^y (Qal) ; so Ewald, § 127 b : (II) Stade, § 486, and Ges., § 69. 2. Rem. 3, regard it as an imperf. Qal ??V = P^V = 731'' = 751'' ; cf. the Arabic imperf. J^^Jj from j^j, and Wright, Arab. Gram., i. pp. 89-90. 30. Cf. Judg. 13, 17. ■^Dtyv. 'About my name ;' cf. 20, 2 and the note there. 31. "'©03 ^23ni. Cf Ex. 33, 20; also Judg. 13, 22. Deut. 4, 33 ; and the note on 16, 14. •\ = and yet. 7^^''JD, or ^NUa in ver. 32, = 'face of God j' cf. on 4, 18 ^JNty'ino. In ij^ija the '' is the old binding vowel; see on TinjJ, 31, 39. The position of bif>iti cannot be ascertained. 33. ^:^ nttjjn T'J nt^ = * the hip-sinew, which is on the hollow of the thigh! ntT^T T'J = the Arabic \U, the nerve or tendon which goes through the thigh and leg to the ancle, the nervus ischiadicus ; see Ges., Thes., p. 921a. The law forbidding the children of Israel to eat the HB'jn TiJ is not CHAP. 3a, VER. 26 — CHAP. 33, VER. 7. 2SS mentioned in the O. T. It is to be found in the Talmud, Trad. Chullin, chap. 7. 33. 3. i^im is emphatic, he, Jacob, as opposed to the persons mentioned in ver. 2 ; see Driver, § 160. Obs. 4. inpttJ'^T. Mas. note, lipj 1^53 inpt^'l = 'with points on every letter' The Mid. Bern., cited by Strack, Prol. Crit., p. 89, has ui) f':jD ipt^j xi'E' iij; \h)3 iip3 inpty'ii, i.e. 'inpE'''i with points over it, because he did not kiss him with all his heart;' cf. the Ber. Rab. in Strack, I.e., where Rabbi Yanai, answering Rabbi Simeon ben Eleazar, explains the points on inpE«1 thus : 13B>J^ N^S Spmh N3 vh^ ' because he did not come to kiss him i^Jacoh), but to bite him,' and goes on to say that Jacob's neck was turned into marble ; an account hardly in keeping with what we are told of Esau, who is never depicted in the O.T. as an inhuman person. The points probably here, as in the other cases where they occur, mark the word as suspicious; cf. Ewald, § 19 d. The translation of mpB''"! is wanting in several MSS. of the LXX ; cf. Lagarde, Gen. Gfaece, p. 134. The Targ. Ps.-Jon. explains that Jacob wept because his neck was painful, and Esau because the effort gave him the toothache ! ! 5. ^Y> nbt< ''D. ' Who are these to thee!'' ^!? is an ethic, dat. ; cf. Ewald, § 315 a ; M. R., §51.3; and see Ex. 12, 26. Josh. 4, 6. 2 Sam. 16, 2. pn with double ace; see Ges., § 139. 2 ; M. R., § 45. 3. 6. 7. IttJjm, agreeing with the subj. immediately follow- ing; so B'jril, ver. 7. On the gender and construction of the verbs in these verses, see M. R., § 138. Rem.; Ges., § 148. 2; Ewald, § 340 c. 256 GENESIS, 8. ™nan h^ '']h "^tt. ' what to tUe is all this camp ?' i.e. the cattle (32, 14-22) which Esau had already met; cf. ^nwa "itrK. ''0 by attraction = nD, so Judg. 13, 17 "yov iD; cf. 32, 28 10B' no. Ewald, § 325 a, and Di. prefer the ren- dering, ' Who to thee is the camp?' i. e. ' what dost thou wish to do with them ?' ' because he brings the people into the fore- ground.' 10. Pnp^") = ' pray take;' cf. 40, 14 fl^B'JJI 'pray shejg mercy;' Judg. 6, 17 niX 'P n''b'yi ' pray give me a sign;' see Driver, § 119 S; Ges., § 126. 6. Rem. i. tDTlb^^ ''3D n^lD. 'As one sees the face of God', i.e. Jacob sees that Esau's face wears a friendly (lit. divine) aspect. ' It is a divine friendliness with which he came to meet him,' Di. nXT, the subject to the infinitive, is here indefinite, as Ex. 30, 12. 1 1 . nt^^n is third pers. fem. sing. Hof. from N13, with the old feminine ending n (instead of n), which is preserved as the usual ending of the third fem. perf. in Arabic, Aramaic, and Ethiopic, and appears in Hebrew before the sufiixes, and sporadically elsewhere ; cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 60; Ges., § 74. Rem. i; Stade, § 407 b. Other instances of the fem. ending are "^li^, ^N^SJ, nnB', n^?N (the only case with the strong verb). LXX have here 09 ^VfyKd aoi, = nf<3n, pos- sibly not understanding the anomalous form. Tl^ll = 'present ;' so i Sam. 25, 27 n^nn = ' a present', i. e. as a proof of favour, and often accompanied with a blessing. Knobel compares the presents paid the clergy in the middle ages, called Benedictiones. 7i "^7 UJ"" ''^l. ^ And because I have everything! ''3'] as in Judg. 6, 30. I Sam. 19, 4. Is. 65, 16 ; see Ewald, § 353 a. CHAP. 33, VERS. 8-17. 257 Esau has DT ' an abundance ; ' Jacob, being under especial divine protection, can say he has 73 ' everything! 13. "^ya r\T^V = ' laclanies' i. e. ' with young ;' so Is. 40, II. "hv = 'upon me;' cf. 48, 7. i Sam. 21, 16; i.e. the cattle who were with young were a burden and responsibility to Jacob. The A.V. '■with me' does not sufficiently express the W iriQT . . . QlpOTl, lit. = '■and they over-drive them . . . and they diel i. e. 'if they over-drive them . . . they will die', the death of the cattle being conditional on their being over- driven; cf. 42, 38 nmiim , , . pON inxipl = 'and if trouble befall him . . .ye will bring down;' 44, 22 riDI lUS nx 3tyi ; cf. 29. See, on two perfs. with waw conv. forming a con- ditional sentence, Driver, § 149 ; also Ges., § 155. 4 a; Ewald, §357a; M.R., §28. DIpDIT, the masc. suffix for the fern. ; cf. on 26, 15 ; and on the third pers. pi. used impersonally, see Ges., § 137. 3; M.R., §123. 1. 14. niS<7Qn vJT/ = ' according to the pace of the cattle'. T]'2VO'0 =^ '' property' (cf. njpp), here, from the context, in^ eluding cattle; cf. Ex. 22, 7 with vers. 9 and 10; i Sam. 15; 9- 17. n""!! = perhaps, as Del. suggests, 'a house' i.e. not a tent, PHN 27, 15, but 'a building;' here opposed to TQO ' booths' ' tents.' Hence the name of the place, n3D. niwD was probably on the eastern side of Jordan, in a valley, a little further west than Peniel; cf. Judg. 8, 5. 8. Ps. 60, 8. Its exact position is uncertain. At the present day a Sakftt (l:i>^L;,) exists, south of Bethshan, on the western side of Jordan, which is apparently distinct from the n3D here mentioned; see Di., p. 348; Del., p. 421, s 358 GENESIS, 18. D7ty = Dli'B'a, 28, 21, 'safe and sound,' after his late meeting with Esau, and the danger there might possibly have been in encountering him. The LXX, Syr., Hier. take D^E' as a proper name. The Heb.-Sam. reads h^b^ here; cf. 43> 27- QDty, afterwards one of the cities of refuge (Josh. 20, 7), in the hill country of Ephraim, called in the time of the Romans Flavia Neapolis, and at the present day by the Arabs Nablous (umLIj). ''JD nt< = 'before ;' cf. on 19, 13. 19. D3tiJ ''nt^ ~\ycT\ '^^1 TO. 'From the sons ofHamor, the father ofS.,' i. e. the father of Shechem (34, 2), after whom the city was called Shechem ; cf. 4, 1 7. The LXX omit ■iJl, ' in order to agree with 34, i ff.,' Di. nt2''tr'p. LXX, Onq., Hier. render, 'lambs;' cf. Ber. Rabba, c. 79 ; Targg. Ps.-Jon. and Jer. 'pearls! Rabbi Akiba, in the Talmud, Trad. Rosh ha-shana, 2 d^ST relates that in Africa he heard a coin ('"IV?) called nD'fe'p. Probably the word = ' that -which is iveighed,' from Db'p = Arab. k-lS = 'to divide,' 'fix;' cf. k.Ls 'a weight,' 'pair of scales,' then 'a fixed weight,' equally used with the shekel by the patriarchs. From a comparison with 23, 15. 16 some have supposed the "p to be equivalent to four shekels, but this is quite uncertain. nD'i'E'p occurs twice again. Josh. 24, 32. Job 42, 11, but neither passage throws any additional light on the word. 34. I. :ipv'h TMh^ itij« r^vh ni (cf. i6, 15 f. 25, 12), an instance of P's circumstantial style. 2. nnt^ ^Sffi""! MB' with the ace, as in Lev. 15, 18. CHAP. ^^, VER. 1 8— CHAP. 34, VER. 8. 359 24. Num. 5, 13. 19. 2 Sam. 13, 14. Deut. 28, 30. Kri; cf. i'JtJ', which is construed with an ace. and always has a Kri aaty. There is no need to emend the pointing to I^W^ (cf. 26, 10), as some desire. 3. "13^3n. Cf. the note on 24, 14. "IJ^jn 17 by "QT^T = '(Z«,' but it is also found with other verbs, though only here with Jin (Di.). 27. Ipl?"' ''32. LXX, Syr., Saadiah, Sam., and two MSS. (Wright) read 'Jai, which is not so abrupt; possibly waw originally stood before y\. 35. 1. 7i^n''l rh^. Bethel was situated on a hill; cf. ver. 8 IjNnil^ nnno; I Sam. 10, 3. 2. "133(1 Tl^i^ nt^, especially the Teraphim (31, 19) which Rachel had taken with her. nDi inpN = ' strange gods,' lit. 'gods of strangeness;' cf Josh. 24, 23. Judg. 10, 16. So ^D3 |3 'w« 0/ strangeness' =' siranger' {1*2, 10. Ex. 12, 43). *l"in^n for n-innn, by Ges., § 54. 2 b ; Dav., § 26. 3. 3. Tl^l . . . '^ni^ ri3yr?. The participle continued by an imperf with waw conv., a fact being stated; so 49, 17. Num. 22, II )''V DN Dill nnvDD Ni'\T; cf on 27, 33. 4. Q'^D^DH, i.e. the earrings that were worn as talismans and amulets, and so belonging to the heathen practices, which Jacob required them to give up. n7Nn nnn. ' Under the terebinth^ i. e. the well- known terebinth, which would be familiar to the reader; hence the article; cf 12, 6. Possibly, as Tuch suggests, the tree mentioned here is the same as the one in Judg. 9, 6, where Abimelech was made king. The LXX have here the addition, Kai dnai\.ea-ev aira emr t!js (rfjixepov fifiipas] which Frankel, Einf., p. 56, explains as a marginal gloss, added by a pious reader who objected to tDt:''1. 5. QTT^S nnn, not '« mighty terror^ but 'a terror of God,' i. e. one caused or sent by Him; cf DM?N IDS, 2 Chron. a64 GENESIS, 20, 29; miTnna, 2Chron. 14, 13. nnn is a ^Tral Xeyd/x. The genitive is an objective genitive ; cf. on 9, 2. 7. DTiVmH V'^t^ "hXi plural, perhaps because Qinissn here includes the angels; cf. 28, 12; see also 20, 13. Josh. 24, 19. Onq. here has ^n N^a^^o 'angels 0/ F.;' but Berliner in his edition gives l\ r\''b ''^|l^l''^«, i.e. 'K appeared to him;' cf. M. R., § 133. 2. Rem. a; Ges., § 146. z. foot-note 2. 8. mDl p^N, probably identical with the palm tree of Deborah, Judg. 4, 5, and perhaps with the Terebinth of Tabor, mentioned in i Sam. 10, 3. 10. Cf. 32, 29. 11. "[''2':'nn. in 46, 26 we have 13T' ''NV; COTD is never used in this connexion. 14. pt^ nSlSJn . . . nn^?2. ps mXD is epexegetlcal ; cf. 15, 18. 25, 30; and see M. R., § 72. 3. "[D3 rr'Vy "fD"*"!. Cf. 28, iS |»B'PS''1. IDJ was probably a libation of wine (Targ. Ps.-Jon., wine and water). Some (Kn., Wei.) take IDty , . . pVI as epexegetical to ^D^^. 15. DtU Int^ in Ityt^. contrast ver. 13 and ver. 14, where Dty is omitted, as no confusion can arise in the sentence through its absence; see M. R., § 157 c; Ewald, § 331 c. 3. 16. Y"1t^n n"^n3 occurs again 48, 7 and 2 Kings 5, 19 ; but neither of these passages throws any light on the word m33 ; however, from 2 Kings, 1. c, it could not have been a very great distance. LXX have here Xa^pada, but in 48, 7 Tov iKTiohpojxov Xa^paBd (a double translation), i. e. either a stadium, or hke the Arabic ,_^ ]ojJ^ (i. e. as far as a horse can run), a measure common among the Arabs ; see JI. W. B., 9th ed., p. 368. Syr. l-lfioiS, a 'parasang^ = CHAP. 35, VERS. 7-19. 265 eighteen thousand paces or three German miles ; of. Bernst., Syr. Lex., p. 408 b. Onq. has ''J'l^ ^^"'7' = ' aiout an acre^ etc.; cf. Levy, Chald. W.B., i. 384 a. Del. and Tuch take it as =' about an hour's journey! Cf. Ges., Thes., p. 658 b. 17. j2 \7 nt Q3 ''3. Cf. 30, 24, where Rachel wishes that she may have another son. 1 8. ^31S 'j2 = 'jo» of my sorrow;' inasmuch as giving birth to him cost her her life. His father, however, instead of this ill-omened name, called him pD''33 ^ son of the right hand,' i. e. son of good luck, the right side being considered by the ancients as the lucky side ; cf. Ges. in TTies., p. 599, and Sector and aplcrrepos in Greek. |3 is pointed with hireq like the pr. n. np'' [3 in Prov. 30, i; t" I?, Num. 11, 28, etc.; cf. '^^''^ I?) Jon. 4, 10. Del. gives two other explanations of the name ' son of good fortune.' I. He might have been so named because he was born when Jacob was free, his other children having been born when he was in Laban's service. II. Be- cause he completed the lucky number (twelve) of his sons. In Ps. 89, 13 I'D' ^ 'the south' so Rashi explains the name as meaning the 'south son,' as opposed to the others, who were 'north sons,' being born in Aramea; but Canaan is nowhere called ' the south land.' 19. dnV JT'n Nin nniS^^. So 48, 7, i.e. BetWehem, two hours south of Jerusalem ; cf. Mic. 5, i nmSN hrh n'3 ; I Chron. 4, 4. Matt. 2, 16-18. Di., Thenius, and others, from I Sam. 10, 2 ff. (cf. Jer. 31, 15), consider that Rachel's grave must be sought for much further north, in the territory of Benjamin, or on the boundary between Benjamin and Ephraim, on the way between Ramah of Samuel and Gibeah of Saul, not far from Bethel. Di. points out that this would be more natural, as Rachel was the mother of Joseph and 366 GENESIS, Benjamin; t2rh IT'S Nin here and 48, 7, therefore, is con- sidered by them as a gloss, which was caused by the fact that Ephrath Bethlehem was better known than Ephrath near Bethel. 2 1 . "ny ':'i:iri^ n^^nO . ' On the other side of Migdal 'Eder;' so Amos 5, 27 pB'Dni' nN^inD -on the other side of Damascus^ beyond Damascus. "nj^ ^n:iQ = 'Herd's tower;' cf. 2 Kings 17, 9. 18, 8. 2 Chron. 26, ro. It is placed by Di., who holds that there were two Ephraths, near Hebron. Knobel places it at Jerusalem (cf. Mic. 4, 8); so the LXX, who place ver. 21 after ijsrT'na in ver. 16. Del. considers that it was near Bethlehem. 22. ]3ffi2 with 3 with dag., an exception to the rule given in the note on 34, 7. "X^ nattj^l. Cf. 2 Sam. 16, 22. I Kings 2, 22. The Massoretes here have a note, p^DQ VVDN3 XpDS, i. e. ' a gap in the middle of the verse'. There are three of these niXi^pa in the Pent., and twenty-eight in the books from Joshua to Ezekiel. They are not mentioned in the Talmud or Midrash (Del.). Verse 22 down to i'XiB''' has a double accentuation, according as it is read as a complete verse or as a half- verse. Geiger, Urschrift, p. 373, points out that in the public reading of the text the two verses 22 and 23 were read as one, so that the passage might be passed over in reading as quickly as possible, and the attention of the audience diverted from the evil deed of Reuben. The correct accentuation makes ver. 22 end at pNlB*'', and ver. 23 begin at ViTI, one section ending at ver. 22, and a fresh one begin- ning with ver. 23. The first way of accenting the verses here (viz. making 22 end at ijN^B", and 23 begin with vnil) CHAP. 35, VER. ai — CHAP. 36, VER. a. 267 is called |innn Dy!3 {'lower accentuation'^; the second way (viz. making the two verses one), |1i7V D5?!3 (' upper accentua- tion'). Cf. the double set of accents in the Decalogue in Exodus and Deut., and cf. Num. 25, 19 and Deut. 2, 8, where there is a gap in the middle of the verse. The LXX have the addition, koI novr)pov e'^ai/i; fvavTiov avTov = liJ''lf3 Vl''1) pos- sibly added to avoid the abrupt ending, which is regarded by Di. as intentional, to draw attention to 49, 3 f. 26. ik). Sam. and Heb. MSS. (Di.) ^^^'?'!,, as in 36, 5. Iffit^ is ace. case by Ges., § 143. i b; M. R., § 47. 2 ; cf. 4,18. 36. The Toledoth Esau follow in this chapter, preceding those of Jacob, just as Ishmael's preceded Isaac's; the object of the chapter, and its position before the account of Jacob's family, being to dispose of Esau, and leave the course of the narrative entirely free for Jacob's history. The Edomites, Esau's descendants, first appear again in Num. 20, 14 flf. Such a detailed account of the history of Edom can be ex- plained sufficiently from the fact that Edom always passed as Israel's brother (cf. Num., 1. c), and occupied an important position in the history of Israel. A partial list of the descendants of Esau is given in i Chron. i, 35-54. 2. In 26, 34 Esau married Yehudith the daughter of Beeri the Hittite, and Basemath the daughter of Elon the Hittite. In 28, 9 he takes, in addition to his other wives (Vtyj by) — i.e. those of 26, 34 — Mahalath, Ishmael's daughter. Thus, according to 26, 34. 28, 9, Esau's three wives were, i. Yehu- dith, Beeri the Hittite's daughter; 2. Basemath, Elon the Hittite's daughter; and 3. Mahalath, Ishmael's daughter. 2,68 GENESIS, Here Esau's wives are given, i . Adah the daughter of Elon the Hittite ; 2. Oholibamah the daughter of Anah, the daughter of Tsibeon the Hivite ; 3. Basemath the daughter of Ishmael, the sister of Nebayoth. There are three serious discrepancies in the two accounts, i. The Basemath of 26, 34 is here called Adah; 2. the Oholibamah the daughter of Anah, the daughter of Tsibeon the Hivite (cf below) = (apparently) Yehudith the daughter of Beeri the Hittite of 26, 34; and 3. Ishmael's daughter Mahalath, 28, 9, is here called Base- math. With regard to 2. iinn fWV n3 we must read (i) for '''"^j ''"^'^i as ver. 25 (cf ver. 20) shews; and (ii) either render n3 'granddaughter^ cf ver. 39 (?) and 29, 5 (where p must= 'grandson'^; or emend and read p, so Sam., LXX, Pesh. ; cf ver. 24. note, where Anah is Tsibeon's son, and ver. 25, where Oholibamah is Anah's daughter. Various hypotheses have been adopted to reconcile the different accounts of Esau's wives. Some have held that Esau had five wives; others (Hengst., Ros.) that the wives had two names, or had their names changed. Kn. and Ewald suppose that the names have been corrupted by copyists. If this is the case, the corruption must have been, as Di. points out, very great. Others (Del., Tuch, Nold.) explain the difference in the two accounts as arising from two different traditions. This seems the most natural solution, this chapter (36) embodying one account, and 26, 34 f 28, 9 another; see further, Del. and Di. 6. Esau takes his wives and children, and all his property, and leaves Canaan for the land of Seir, out of the way of his brother Jacob. yit^ hV< as it stands yields no suitable sense. The Targums and Vulg. read mnx pK ^^. Ges. renders the CHAP, •i,^, VERS. 6-16. 269 text, '■to a land east o/"(lit. before) Jacob ;^ but iJQD can hardly mean this. LXX and Sam. read [yja pxo, possibly a cor- rection. The Syriac has -r^^^ l^'-l!' cf. vers. 8, 9, which is probably the correct reading of the text ; so Di., Tuch. 7. nntiJD. cf. 4, 13 NiB'jo. 8. T'i?iy, embracing the hill country of Edom east of the Arabah, reached from the Dead Sea to the Elanitic Gulf. The northern half is at the present day called Gebal, and the southern es-Serah. 1 1 . The Canaanitish line. "K^TS is the name of a district of Edom (Jer. 49, 20. Amos I, 12. Hab. 3, 3) celebrated for its wise men (Jer. 49, 7. Bar. 3, 22 f.); the home of Eliphaz, Job 2, 11. "1Q1N, lD2i, and QHyJI are quite unknown. Wp. Cf. 15, 19, where the Kenizites are mentioned among other tribes dwelling in the south of Canaan. 12. pbOV, 'not identical with the Amalekites of 14, 7, who dwelt in the south of Canaan; but probably only a portion of those, who attached themselves to the families of Eliphaz, or were subject to them' (Di.); cf. ver. 22. 13. The Ishmaelitish line. The names are not further known. 14. The Horite line. Nothing further is known about the names here given. 15-19. The tribal princes of Edom. 15. 1^*17 ^^, a denom. from ^.?5< 'a thousand' = chiliarch or phylarch, mostly used of the tribal princes of Edom, more rarely of those of Judah, Zech. 9,7. 12,5.6; see Prof. Driver, The Expositor, July, 1885. 16. mp f)17i^, mentioned in ver. 18 as the son of Esau by Oholibamah, is wanting in the Sam. Codex and Vs., ayo GENESIS, and one Heb. MS. (Wright), and is rejected as spurious by Tuch, Knobel, Del. Di. considers that it either crept in here by the oversight of a copyist from ver. i8, or is a gloss assigning Korah, according to another theory, to the family of Eliphaz. 20-30. The tribes of the Horites. The inhabitants of the land, as opposed to the descendants of Esau, who took possession of it (Deut. 2, 12). 20. ^inn from "iin 'a hole^ so 'a dweller in a hole or cavel ' The land of Edom abounds in holes or caves ' (Di.). The identification of the names in the following verses is un- certain ; c£ Di., p. 366 f. 24. rT'^^T. Most commentators read IT'S* with i Chron. r, 40, LXX, Syr., and Vulg. ; the text as it stands yields no suitable sense. DQ'^i^. Targ. Jer., Saad., Kimchi, Luther, 'mules;' so the A.V. ; more probably ' hoi water springs ' (A.V. R. ' the hot springs'), which Del. identifies with the hot springs of Kalirrhoe, beneath Zerka Maein, on the east side of the Dead Sea, about two hours distant from it ; cf. Hieron., Quaest. ed. Lag., p. 56. Onq. and Ps.-Jon. seem either to have read D''IO'Nn, 'the giant race' mentioned in Deut. 2, 10, or to have taken QDTI as meaning this. Pesh. gives D^D, and one Heb. MS. (Wright). 26. ^ffi""!. LXX, Pesh., Vulg., i Chron. i, 41, and most commentators read '^'^\. 30. Dn'^D7t^7'. ' According to their tribal princes'. LXX, iv T-ais ^yfiiovlais, reading DiTBpNp, possibly the correct read- ing, as this is the only place in this chapter where fjlbx is written without the 1 . It is worthy of notice that many of the names in this list, vers. 20-30, are names of animals, e. g. CHAP. 36, VER. 30 — CHAP. 37, VER. 3. 271 73'IB'= in Arabic 'young lion ;' ruy ' wild ass ;' [{yn, a name of an animal in Deut. 14, 5; Jljjax=in Arabic 'hyena,' etc. Di. remarks, ' that it is a natural thing for peoples amongst whom the arts and trades were not developed to be fond of choosing their family names from the names of animals.' Cf. Rob. Smith, Journ. Phil., ix. 75 ff. 31-39. The names of the kings who ruled in the land of Edom. The names in this list are also doubtful; cf. Di., p. 368 ff. 33. ni21?2, now a litde village in GebSl, El-Butseirah, four miles south of the south end of the Dead Sea. 37. "irr^n niimO. Several places in the O. T. are called Rehoboth. The one mentioned here has been identi- fied with il^, Rahba, on the Euphrates (^n3^ elsewhere being the river par excellence, i. e. the Euphrates), south of Circesium. But this identification is not certain. 40-43. A brief review of the tribal princes of Esau. The list contains partly names of individuals, e. g. Hp, nJ33''!'nx, and partly names of districts, e. g. pis, rh^. Most of the names of places in this list are uncertain. n7i^, perhaps the seaport np^N; cf. on 14, 6. p''3, also called in Num. 33, 42 piS, in Idumea, between Petra and Zoar, well known through its mines. 37. 2. 'Joseph, being seventeen years old, was tending the flock with his brethren, while yet a lad, with the sons of Bilhah, and with the sons of Zilpah, his father's wives, and Joseph brought an evil report about them to their father! nj?1 rrrr. Cf. the note on 4, 17. 372 GENESIS, "^y^ i^im. LXX, i)v veos. A.V. renders incorrectly, ' and the lad was with the sons of Bilfiah! for the clause is a circumstantial one; cf. Driver, § i6o; M. R., § 152. Pesh. and Onq. seem to have misunderstood the words; the Syr. has iaJLs pi )ooi )ls» ooio 'and he was growing up with;' and Onq. 'J3 DV ^^^ fn n^m for nvn i3:n=nvn sin njni; cf. on 32, 7. 17. a"'"i?2« Tii'OttJ. Cf. 27, 6 imo t^x nx '•nvotj'; here the object is omitted ; cf. M. R., § 46. 2 ; see also Ewald, § 284 b. ilDTn 'towards Dothan.' Dothan or Dothain, = 'two foun- tains (?),' or perhaps 'cisterns' was about five hours north of Samaria. In Judith 3, 9 f. 4, 6. 7, 3. 8, 3, it is called Aaraia or Aadatfj., and is described as on the south side of the plain of Jez- reel, between Scythopolis and Gabae, near the ancient Ginnaea (Genin). Through the plain of Tell Dothan, south of Genin, the road from Bethshan and Jezreel to Ramleh and Egypt passes (Di.); cf. ver. 25 and Ebers, Egypten und die B. Mose's, p. 288. The form t)!^i'^ is the Aramaic dual, of which |ni1 is a con- traction ; cf. \'!pp_ and ^\'!T^P., ^TV. and ^-.TV., and see Ges., § 88. I. Rem. i, and the forms found on the Moabite stone, e.g. fnnp = Q'niip, line 10; [riNO = airiND {'two hundred'), line 20; ini'lT = Wnbll, line 30; |mn = D''jnin, line 31. 18. "iS^DrT'l . . . nip'' Diam. Cf. the note on 2, 5; also Driver, § 127/3. irii^ l':'3]ni1. ' They plotted against Mm: Hithpa'el with the ace. as in i Chron. 29, 17 n^X b'2 TiaiJnn ; see Ewald, CHAP. 37> VERS. 11-25- ^75 § 124b; Ges., § 54. 3c; cf. Ps. 105, 25, where p^ann takes the prep. 2, not the ace. as here. 19. mt37nn hv2. Cf. on 14, 13. nt^n as in 24, 65; cf. the note there. 21. ttJD2 IJi] N7 = '/«/ iis not smite him as to li/e,^ i.e. mortally; so Deut. 22, 26 {ysj inxni ; see Ges., § 139. note, and cf. the note on 3, 15. 24. ni^n. Cf. Jer. 38, 6 (where Jeremiah is cast into a pit with no water in it, but mud) ; Lam. 3, 53. 25. Cnb 75S7 = 'to take their meal' lit. 'to eat bread,' the meal being so called from the chief article of food ; cf 3I) 54- 43> 25' Matt. 15, 2. c^WD©"' nn-i«. So Is. 21, 13 w:-u nimN; Job 6, 19 t?ttn niniN. nmx is the part. Qal fem. of HIN, used in a collective sense. n"ix = ' « single traveller' i^n^** ' a company 0/ travellers' 'a caravan' Other feminines used col- lectively are niqx ^brotherhood,' from HK 'brother;' njJJ? 'a OT(2M 0/ clouds,' from |35f 'a cloud;' ni)i-i 'a band of exiles;' see Ges., § 107. 3d; Stade, § 312 b. ri^<2J = ' tragacanth gum :' nx — ' balsam ' CIV for ''IV, like "'«"! for '•NT, Job 37, 18; W for "'OT, Is. 38, 10): vh :=' ladanum;' three articles which even at the present day form the chief trade of the Arab-Egyptian caravans. Ebers, Egypten etc., p. 292, has found nX33 and nx on the Egyptian inscriptions, but not D?; he also (p. 293) mentions that gum, balsam, and incense are the chief imports from the East to Egypt at the present day, and — with the exception of a short distance by rail — are brought by the same method, i.e. caravans, as in the days of the patriarchs. The caravan road from Damascus to Egypt is the same now as in the time of Joseph. T 2 276 GENESIS, 26. l'JJ2 T\'d^'- what gain, that we kill?' on the construc- tion, of. M. R., § 93. Rem. b; see also Ewald, § 326 a. 28. C^'^IQ. Cf. on 25, 2. The name of Ishmaelites was probably of more modern origin than that of Midianites, and applied generally to all Arabs (Di.). r|D3 D''ltoyi. S'^.B' being omitted by Ges., § 120. 4. Rem. 2. The LXX have eiKoai xpvarav, so in 45, 22. The price of a slave between five and twenty years was twenty shekels; see Lev. 27, 5. On slavery in Egypt, see Ebers' note, Egypten und die Bucher Mose's, p. 293 ff., where he shews that the narrative in this chapter is quite in accordance with what used to take place at the time of the Pharaoh, whose favourite Joseph became. 33. Fjlta F|"lt2. Cf. Ges., § 131. 3. Rem. 2, and see Job 6, 2 ^i?,?*: h'ipf, the inf. abs. Qal and imperf. Nif., Gen. 46, 4 ribv Di i>Vi<, inf. Qal and imperf. Hif. 35. "'S, either (i) introducing the words of the speaker, or (2) the Latin imo, ' no.' n7t'TD, which is the reading of all the versions here. "lD''taiD 7. "la^taia is the same as J)1D ''DIS, 41, 45. 46, 20, the former name being abbreviated from the latter. LXX have both ner^^p^r and nevTe^pqs, see Lagarde, Gen. Graece, pref., p. 20. The name is the Egyptian Peti-pa{pha)-ra, CHAP. 37, VER. 26 — CHAP. 38, VER. 2. 277 meaning, ' one devoted to Ra^ the sun god, see Ebers, p. 296. Ra is the Egyptian sun god, the chief place of his worship being Heliopolis. Brugsch, Gesch., p. 248, explains the name 2.s^puti-par, ' Gift 0/ him that has appeared.' D"'"1D, either to be taken in its literal sense, cf. Ebers, p. 299, or merely equivalent to ' officer,' ' official;' see further, Ebers, pp. 297, 300, who renders 0*^0 ' courtier ;' remarking that D1^D, among the Orientals, had much the same meaning as ' Schranz' in German {^'parasite' 'courtier'). DTlHtOn 'yW=' captain 0/ the executioners' The captain of the executioners was also chief of the body-guard and superintendent of the state prison (40, 3 f.), see Ebers, p. 301, who describes Potiphar's office as that of chief minister of police. A similar office existed among the Babylonians, 2 Kings 25, 8 ff. Jer. 39, 9. 52, 12. Dan. 2, 15. See further, Ebers, p. 300 ff. The LXX have apxt-iiaynpos, which render- ing is perhaps due to 39, 6. 38. X. tfl''1 ' turned aside ^ Del. renders, ' removed his dwelling' sc. IpriN; but tjil without ipnx is not found in this sense, and further, no pr. name of a place follows ly. '^Q7"I1>. Adullam was in the plain (ni'Dtr) of Judah, presumably north-west of Hebron (Di.), identical, perhaps, with the modern Deir Dubban, north of Eleutheropolis. 2. '^:y:D UJ'iS. Onq. renders ^-f^ i?3 (cf. Erov. 31, 24, Is. 23, 8) 'a merchant' possibly finding Judah's marriage with a daughter of Canaan objectionable. Berliner, however, in his edition has ^l^p- ">??, but mentions the other reading in his notes, p. 14 of part ii, Cf. Levy, Chald. W. B., ii. p. 528. 278 GENESIS, 3. N"ip"'1. Sam., Targ. Ps.-Jon., Heb. Codd. (Di.) read N^pnl, see 29, 34 and vers. 3, 4. 5. HTn, see Driver, § 133. LXX has avrq 8e fjv, which points to a reading Nini (hardly nn\ni, Di.), which gives a suitable sense; cf. i Sam. 23, 15. 24. 2 Chron. 10, 2; see also Geiger, Urschrift, p. 462. As the text stands it must be rendered, ' he {Judah) was,' but the perf. with waw is very harsh, and a reference to Judah is not what we should expect. I'''f2a=the Tras of Mic. i, 14. Josh. 15, 44; it was also in the low country (n^SB') of Judah. 8. D2'''1=to perform the duty of marrying the deceased brother's widow when he left no son; see Deut. 25, 5. The brother-in-law in this case was called D3*. 9. nnttJT . , . nTT). The perfect with waw conv. in a frequentative sense, see Driver, § 121; also Ewald, §§ 342 b, 345 b. Other examples are Num. 21,9 ... B^mn yffi DX nMl ■■m . . . unni; judg. 6, 3 Thv'\ . . . yir d^? nw; Ex. 33, 9 nTi . . . iTni, with a simple impf. following. Other instances of dK in a temporal sense with the perf are Ps. 41, 7. Amos 7, 2. Is. 4, 4; compare Ewald, § 355 b. n2J~l« nniyT; a pregnant construction, see Ges., § 141. V^l must be understood after nntJ'l. |nj. Cf. the note on Nt^J, 4, 13. 11. "flt^ iV2, is ace. of place, see Ges., § 118. i. 12. '^^^ nta hv bV^, llt. 'he went up about the shearers of his flock; i. e. to see after them ; cf the use of ^V in 30, 33 '^'^V^.- ' -^w companion: LXX and Vulg. read the con- sonants as inn 'his shepherd;' so Luther. CHAP. 38, VERS. 3-15. 379 nnDSin is probably the Timnah near Gibea, in the hill country of Judah (Josh. 15, 57), and not identical with the Timnah belonging to the Danites (Josh. 19, 43), on account of rhv ; Di. after Kn. Tuch (cf. Merx's note however) and Del. consider that there was only one Timnah. The name is found on the inscriptions in the form Tamnaa, Schrader, K. A. T?, 1 70. Rob., Pales., ii. 343, mentions three Timnahs, and considers the one occurring here to be in the hill country of Judah. 14. nm]Ci':!« ■'"t^i -^Dni. cf. Judith lo, 3. D^m, i. e. the face ; cf. Deut. 22, 12. Jon. 3, 6, where the object of nD3 is omitted. n^ynm; 'And veiled herself;' cf. Prov. 7, 10. LXX, Pesh., Onq. render, ' adorned herself.' 'Ct^yV nnDl='a/ the gate of Ainaim.' ^yS. being the same as Orj; (cf. on 37, 17 nyni), Josh. 15, 34 (with the article), and 0^''!' in ver. 21. So most modern commentators; cf. ver. 21. The Vss. took the word as a nam. appell., contrary to ver. 21, excepting the LXX who give AiVav. The Pesh. has )fcCi»o/ N -\a 'dividing of roads ; Onq. TW'^^ '^\T'9., lit. * division of eyes,' i. e. cross- way ; cf. Levy, Chald. W.B., ii. p. 212 and p. 304. Targ. Ps.-Jon. pniN nB>-iS ppanpp fj^iypoi, i.e. 'the cross-ways whither every one's eyes look!' Vulg. 'in bivio iiineris.' Saad. ifn°2 'a watch tower' The A. V. has, ' in an open placed margin, ' The door of eyes' A.V. R. 'z« the gate of Enaim! rW^ "iS rXltSl "Hh '^'\r^"\ = ' without her being given him to wife;' circ. cl. 15. rxi'sh nittiniT. Cf. i Sam. 1, 13 rr\\2vh 'h^ naK'n-'i. n"':D nnD3 "'3. LXX and Vulg. add r\rv ^S 'and 28o GENESIS, he did not know her,' to explain "a "3 ''S, which gives the reason why Judah did not recognise her, and not why he took her for a harlot. 1 8. "JQnn. ' The signet ring' which was worn round the neck on a chain (ijiJis). As these were always worn by their owners, they would be easily identified again by them ; cf. Song of Songs 8, 6. On Qmn, cf. a note in Del., (?««.*, P- 557i where he regards the word as the only possible trace of the use of writing in Genesis (die einzige mogliche Spur des Schriftgebrauches in der Genesis). '^lODl. 'And thy staff.' ntJD was a carved or ornamented staff, and so different from 7pD, a stick in its natural con- dition. Among the Babylonians every man carried a stick with an ornamented top, and wore a signet ring ; see Herod, i. 195. The Versions render pTia differently. LXX have opfila-Kov, ' a necklet! Hieron. ' armillam'. Onq. ^Q'B'iB' ' thy cloak'. Syr. ^^ojk ' thy cloak! 21. t^in n?Z5"Ipn. Cf. the note on 19, 33. nE'lp='<2 religious prostitute! lit. ^ one dedicated' (K'''n.i? 'to set apart! 'dedicate') to the goddess Ashtoreth (mriE'Jj). Cf. Deut. 23, 18 for the law forbidding this dedication to Ashtoreth in Israel. 24. D'^tyin ttJbttJOa TTIV 'And a happened after about three months;' the double preposition is exceedingly rare, but cf. I Sam. 10, 27 LXX {yinoa; i Sam. 14, 14 ■>xnn3; Lev. 26, 37 3-in ''JSoa, also nJtTNnna. chn is here fem., but nowhere else ; the Heb.-Sam. reads the more correct riB'i'E'. f]"ltonl. This punishment in the Levitical law was ap- plicable only to the daughters of a priest; see Lev. 21, 9. In other cases the offender was stoned, Lev. 20, 10. Deut. 22, 23 ff. John 8, 5. CHAP. 38, VERS. 18-29. 281 25. ' She was being brought out, and she sent to her father- in-law, saying, By a man to whom these belong am I with child;' a more expressive way of saying, ' As she was being brought forth, she sent' etc.; so Judg. 18, 3 HDHI . . . ni3 DV HDH ITan ; I Sam. 20, 36 HT Nini p lyan, also Gen. 29, 9. 44, 3. 4; see Driver, § 169; Ewald, § 341 c. nS^^rS is fern, partic. Hof. of NV^ for rm\'Q ; cf. lbN> for -ibN^, D^'^V^ for Ci'ri%,^; see Stade, § 1 12 c ; Ges., § 23. 2 b. 28. T" 'jr>"'1. ' And one stretched out a hand' i.e. a hand appeared; cf. |n'' in Job 37, 10 mp [n'' ^N HDK'JD; Prov. 13, 10 nXD in* JHD p"i; so Del. Di. prefers to render, 'then he (sc. pSn) stretched out ' etc., i. e. there was stretched out ; see Ges., § 137. 3. Rem. i; M. R., § 123. 3 ; and cf Cheyne's crit. note on Is. 14, 30. ''Jty, i. e. 'a thread coloured with crimson.' ''i^ is the crimson colour derived from the cochineal; called in Heb. either iJt}', or more fully ''JB' TW^^n. 29. 2''ty03 TT'T, hardly, ^ and he was as one drawing back his hand,' i. e. made an attempt to draw back (Del.) ; but rather equivalent to ^TP ^f^i'''??) or ^^''E'ns ' and it came to pass when he drew back;' so Di., who compares 40, 10. Jer. 2, 17; Ewald, § 337 c; but see Driver, § 135. 6. Obs. 2, who suggests the emendation 3''^n3 as more in accordance with Biblical analogy. y"lS 'yhv D2"I3 7^^=' Why hast thou made a rent for thyself?' (20, 3) i^'h'S 'for thyself 'on thy account'); so LXX, Aquila, Luther, Di., Del. Others (Ges., Kn.) render, ' Why hast thou made a breach?' ^ Upon thee a breach!' cf 16, 5 "jipSJ ''DDn: i.e. either (Ges.) 'thou must bear the guilt of this breach;' or Knobel, 'may a breach come upon thee;' but this is not so natural, and would rather require pan. 38a GENESIS, 39. 1. D''^Kl^at2;''n. ' IshmaelHes,' i.e. Arabs; cf. 37, 28, the name being given to Arabs in general. 2. n"'72D ©■'N. 'A prosperous man;' n'h'^'a in the next verse is slightly different ='/o cause to prosper' 3. ntoy t^in nty^ ^21. ' ah that he was doing', almost equivalent to HB'SC Nin nt^K ^"2^; so ver. 6 ^3N, ver. 22 n''B'y; I Kings 3, 2 n''n3ie ; see Driver, § 135. 2. Obs., 'the participle denoting not a continuous state, but a fact liable to recur.' The position Joseph held in Potiphar's household was that of steward, somewhat similar to the post Eliezer occupied in Abraham's family (15, 2f); cf Ebers, p. 303, who speaks of the position of steward as ' a dignity which we meet with at the earliest times in every great Egyptian household.' 4. 17 ty"* 731 for h B''' nm hy\; cf ver. 5. Ex. 9, 4. 18, 20. On the omission of the relative, see Ges., § 123. 3 a; M. R., § 160; Ewald, § 333 b, who remarks that 'the omission of the relative in prose is almost entirely confined to the books of Chronicles.' 5. T'pDn tt^Q. WD with the perfect, as in Ex. 5, 23 nvia ^N TIKI rSDl; 9, 24 113^ nriM TNO. In Ex. 4, 10 the inf follows tND. 6 ff. On the history of Joseph and Potiphar's wife, cf the Egyptian tale, contained in the Papyrus d'Orbiney, translated by Ebers, p. 3 1 1 ff. 1n« VV ^'tI. inx referring to Joseph; cf ver. 8 "RX; "■and he did not know anything with him [Joseph)' ^he: did not trouble himself about anything that was with him, i. e. he left everything to Joseph's care, except his food, which CHAP. 39, VERS. I-I4. 283 could not be entrusted to him on account of the strictness of the Egyptian laws as to cleanness and uncleanness ; see 43, 32. 46, 34 ; so Kn., Ebers. Del., however, explains differently. Potiphar left everything he could to Joseph's care, except eating his food, which naturally could not be done by deputy. iPiN may also be taken reflexively, and referred to Potiphar ='tti2"M himself^ i.e. in his own mind; cf. Ges., § 124. I ; M. R., § 89 a. The A. V. offers a third rendering, also regarding iriK as reflexive, ' And he knew not aught he had! 8. n^22 nj2. ' What is in the house;' or r\n=^ anything,' as in Prov. 9, 13. Job 13, 13. The Heb.-Sam. has riDIKD. 9. ''^tyo nm n"«ni h^'^> ^:>'y'V^ = ' he is not greater in this house than I am,' i. e. I hold the same position in this house that he does. These words are taken differently by Maurer, 'There is nothing in this house too great for me;' and by the A.V., ' There is none greater in this house than I.' But UJ''N cannot be translated indefinitely, as it would be in these two renderings. 10. Q1^ DV = ^ day by day', 'daily;' so Ex. 16, 5. Prov. 8, 30; see Ges., § 108. 4; Ewald, § 313 a; M. R., § 72. 2. 11. TWT^ DVn^ "TT'l. 'And it came to pass, just about that time;' cf. Deut. 6, 24 ntn DVna \ir\''rh\ Neh. 5, 11 DVn3 Xirh NJ Sy^n. In 50, 20 we find the more usual form ntn on. 12. ITJ^^. In the singular we should — from the analogy of other words of the same kind, e. g. ''3?^ from 'i]?^ , ''TVi from T)J^, — expect ^'13?3; cf. '^%\>\ from 3^!|., in Deut. 15, 14 ; ''1^3, Ez. 9, 3 ; ''loy, Dan. 8, 17; and see Ges., § 93. Rem. i; Stade, § 345 b. In the plural the aspirate has no dagesh. 14. nnjr iyiS< ^^h VCir\ = 'he {Potiphar) hath brought us a Hebrew man;' or impersonally, 'one has brought,' i.e. 384 GENESIS, ' there has been brought.' ''"lay ^ii , i. e. one whom the Egyptians would regard with Httle favour; cf. 43, 32. 46, 34. On nnVi cf. on 14, 13; the name has been supposed to be found in the Egyptian inscriptions, in the form ^ apuriu;' see Ebers, p. 316, but the p for 3 is a diflSculty, and this opinion is now generally given up. 13i pn^r- Retrogression of the tone, by Ges., § 29. 3 b; cf on 4, 17. See also Ges., § 64. Rem. 2 ; Stade, § 88. 2 b; so in ver. 17. "i:3 pnV7, as in Pro v. i, 26 = ' /o wanton with us' different from nx pns, 26, 8. The LXX have iinrai^eiv; cf Ewald, § 217. f 2 S. 1311. Potiphar's wife wishes to imply that the other females of the household had been similarly treated by Joseph. 15. ''72^^. Sam. has '''T'3, but Del. points out that with this reading she would betray herself 18. «~ip«T . . . '^DnnD. So Lev. 16, i iriD"! . . . nnnipi; Josh. 8, 24 1^a''1 . . . ntba ; i Kings 18, 18 "^TW . . . D3ary3 ; see Driver, § 118 ; Ges., § 132. 3. Rem. 2, and cf the note on 1 8, 2 5. Render, ' When I lifted up my voice and cried! 20. f)D'l'' ''3"7t<. So 42, 30. 33. Pluralis excellentiae, see Ges., § 108. 2 b; M. R., § 135. 2. "inon J^^^ = perhaps ' the house of surrounding^, or ' shutting in' i. e. a prison surrounded by a wall, if "inD be related to nriD, "IJD; cf the Syriac ]!.'iylfie. Ebers, p. 317 f, compares the fortress at Memphis called ' White wall '{a. name found on many inscriptions), with which he identifies the "inon n''D of this chapter, and 40, 3. 5. The LXX have oxvpafia. The name for prison better known to the Hebrews was either "lUn ni3, Ex. 12, 29; NPa n'^, Is. 42, 7; or njDK, Is. 42, 7. ■^©N DlpD. The sentence commencing with nE'N is a CHAP. 39, VER. 15— CHAP. 40, VER. I. 285 genitive after the construct state DIpD; see Ges., § 116. 2; M. R., § 82 c; so 40, 3 niDN f\DV -\^H Dlpo; 2 Sam. 15, 21 DK' iTni ^^'^? Dip»3. "'"TlDW, Kri ''TP^, the Ktb. being the part. pass. Qal, the Kri the adj. of the form b''t?p^; cf. Ges., § 84. 5. □■^"TIDN. Dty is omitted after oniDN, as in 35, 13; con- trast 40, 3, and see Ewald, § 331 c. 3; cf. ver. 22, where the ordinary editions have Ktb. DniDNH, with the Kri dTiOXn, as here, while Baer and Del. have l3''T'DNn in their text. 21. Ijn "ITV], lit. 'g-ave his {Joseph's) favour in the eyes 0/,' i.e. and gave him favour in the eyes of, etc.; cf. Ex. 3, 21. II, 3. 12, 36 (all). inOn n''^ "^to. Cf. 40, 3, where the captain of the prison is Potiphar. Del. and Ebers, however, regard the person mentioned in this verse as the special governor of the prison for state prisoners. Potiphar was, as police minister, in control over all the prisons ; but not an actual prison governor. Otherwise we must suppose that these conflicting statements emanate from different sources. 22. ntoy nTr. Cf. the note on 4, 17. 23. Render, ' There was no governor of the prison over- looking (lit. seeing) anything that he did (lit. anything in his hand), in that Yahweh was with him, and that which he was doing Yahweh made to prosper' 40. I. I^tfln . . . ■'n"'1. So 14, I. 2 iffV . . . ''Dn NTI; Ex. 12, 41 b ISlii nrn OVn OVyn in^l; where instead oiths perfect in the second half of the clause, the imperfect with ivaw conversive might stand, and most frequently does stand ; see Driver, § 78. 286 ■ GENESIS, nDb 9- 47. 6; see Driver, § 138. i a; M. R., § 26. CHAP. 40, VERS. 12-21. 289 '7n«. cf. jobi2, 3. 14, 5. 15- "113.1 '^nb^ TOto "i^. • That they should have put me in prison;' cf. Ruth i, 12 imDX '•3 ' that I should have said;' I Sam. 17, 26 b Pl"in ''J ' //^«/ ^^ should have reproached ;' see Driver, § 39. 8. Obs. 16. "'in ''"'D. ^Baskets of white bread.' nn from nin ' to be white,' properly an adj. = ' what is white,' and then applied to what is baked ; so the Arab. LSj\y>- (Del.). Vulg. ' canistra /arinae,' LXX Kava xov8piTS>v; cf. vet. 17 njna ^3ND. The baker carried his wares on his head, an exceptional mode of carrying things among the Egyptians ; see Ebers, P- 331 f- 17. nVID ^3^^a ^na. '0/ all kinds of food for Pharaoh; cf. Dan. i, 5 -jljDn n ns; Gen. 49, 20 H^D 'JIVD. ?30, |D partitive ; cf. on 4, 3. 19. "I'^Syri . . . Nto''. 'Shall lift up thy head from off thee,' i. e. shall behead thee. There is a play on the words here, the phrase being the same as in ver. 13. Wright com- pares John 12, 32. The punishment of the chief baker was one of the heaviest that could befall an Egyptian. The exposure of the body was intended to make the sentence' more severe, and was especially repugnant to the superstitious' Egyptians, who regarded the life after death as dependent on the body remaining unmutilated ; see Ebers, p. 334. 20. nyiD ni^ rrO'n IDV. The construction is the same as in 4, 18 j see the note there. 01?!^ is inf. Hof. of ni''', for the ordinary form ^l^^'^; cf. Ez. 16, 4 JTlpin, and ^El1D, Is. 28, 16 (see Dav., § 3- 2 ; Stade, § 29), the 7 being doubled to compensate for the shortened vowel. 21. inpttJQ 72^ = 'to his butler ship' or ' cupbearership'. 290 GENESIS, 41. 1. D'^Ji''. Cf. on 29, 14. INTt. Always with 1 without the dagesh. "iN'n ^ the river ' par excellence, the Nile, is the Hebrew form of the Egyptian aur-da, i.e. ' ihe great stream,' Ebers, p. 338, which became in the mouth of the people iar-d, iaro. On the participle in this and the two following verses, cf. on 9, 18. 2. in«3. ins, LXX %«, 'Nile-grass,' is the Hebrew form of the Egyptian axu or axuu, ' reeds' or 'grass ' growing in marshy ground; see Ebers, p. 338; also notice Hieron. ad Jes. 19, 7, who describes it as 'omne quod in palude virens nascitur.' 2-4. The number of the cows, seven (cf. the same number in the next dream), was a sacred number among the Egyptians, as among other Oriental nations (Ebers, P- 337); cf 21, 28. 30. On the first dream Di. remarks, ' The Nile floods are what the fruitfulness of Egypt chiefly depends on. The ox was the symbol of the Nile (Diod. i. 51), and especially sacred to Osiris, the discoverer of agri- culture (Diod. i. 21). The cow was, in the Egyptian hiero- glyphic writing, the sign for the earth (Macrob., Sat., i. 19), agriculture, and food (Clem. Alex., Strom., v. p. 567). At the same time Isis was the goddess of the earth, that nourishes everything (Macrob., Sat., i. 20), and is rendered fruitful by the Nile (Plut, de Is., 38); the cow was especially sacred to her (Her. ii. 41 ; Aelian., L an., x. 27). She was also goddess of the moon (Diod. i. 11), and her picture serves in the hieroglyphics as a sign for the year (Horapollo, i. 3) ; there- fore the seven fat cows mean seven fruitful, and the seven CHAP. 41, VERS. 1-8. 291 lean cows seven unfruitful years; the seven lean cows coming closely upon the seven fat ones, points to the close succession of the unfruitful years to the fruitful years.' 6. Qi-ip riDTIiy. 'Blasted hy the east wind: The narrator here mentions the wind that was most destructive in Palestine; cf. Hos. 13, 15. Jon. 4, 8. Ez. 17, 10. The winds in Egypt that were most hurtful came usually from the N.W. or S. E. ; see Ebers, p. 340. Del. understands DHp here as the destructive Chamsin, which blew, in the spring months, from the S. E. quarter ; see Ebers, 1. c. 7. Knobel remarks on the dreams, 'The order in which they come is well chosen. First the Nile, which causes the fruitfulness, then the cows representing fruitfulness, and lastly the ears, as an evidence of fruitfiilness.' 8. rySSd Itt'iOin. LXX li-wiT&i. < The lettered men of Egypt! The ffiDDin are the Egyptian UpoypaixfioTcis, repre- sented on the inscriptions with writing materials in their hands, and a pen on their temples (Ebers, p. 345). They belonged to the Egyptian priesthood, and employed them- selves in the study of the hieroglyphic writing and astronomy, and were also noted as seers or foretellers of future events ; see Ebers, p. 344 f.; Di., p. 392. They also had a great reputation as magicians, as is clear from Ex. 7, 11. 22. 8, 3, etc. The word QDID is taken by Harkavy (Journ. Asiaiique, 1870, p. 168 f) as equivalent to the Egyptian ' Cher-tum,' 'Revealer 0/ secrets.' It may, however, be equally well derived from Oin ' to grave,' or ti^n ' a stylus,' with the formative ending Di, like DiiT from 11, DiTiy, Cii'^nQ; see Ewald, §i63g; Stade, §295. Tuch gives another derivation (Cd'OTW., p. 443 f.), according to which DDnn is a quadriliteral form from Din '/(? write with a stylus,' and mn 'to be sacred;' cf. u 2 392 GENESIS, i'J^^ from 'pin, and ^Ji; this, however, is doubtful; see Stade, §§ 149, 150, on the formation of quadriliterals. D"^Q3n = ' tte wise men,' identified by Ebers, p. 345, with the rexxat-u of the inscriptions, ' those who know things ' (die wissenden der Dinge), probably a wide term, embracing all the higher classes of priests, especially the apoaKorroi of Clement, who were astrologers, calendar makers, and inter- preters of signs or omens. □m^i . , . IOtTI. nnix, the plural sufBx, may be used with reference to the double nature of the dream, or the reading may be a scriptio defediva, VOiPE) for I'^vH,, which the Sam. gives; so Syr. and Saadiah. 9. 1"^DTD "^il"}, not ' I reme77iber,' A.V. — for liJtn means ' to cause another to remember ' — but ' f make mention of! 10. Tlt^. LXX and Sam. read, more correctly, dnx. 11. nQ7n3T. The first person imperf. with waw conv. and the n cohortative is rare; there are two other instances in Gen., viz. 32, 6 nn^ty'KI, and 43, 21 nnna:i; see other instances in Driver, § 69. Obs.; Ewald, § 232 g. 12. 'Srhxy'^ ty^^*. see on 9, 5. 14. 'in2^~l'^T. 'And they brought him quickly I lit. 'made him run;' cf. i Sam. 17, 17 ^nxij HJnan pm ; 2 Chron. 35, 13 Dvn '':3 b^ WTii. ■)T>7DiC ^Xy^ n73''1. No one was allowed to appear before the king of Egypt unless he was quite clean; see Ebers, p. 330. Del. and Tuch explain the verse from the Egyptian custom of regarding a prisoner as a mourner. He would then wear his beard and hair; see Ebers, p. 350. foot- note, against this view. 15- "Tlj'^tt) ^3b5T. ^ And I have heard about thee, saying CHAP. 41, VERS. 9-26. 295 thou canst understand a dream' or ' thou hear est a dream' i. e. hast only to hear it, and can interpret it. "yhv, as in I Kings 10, 6 "jnoan ^jji y\yy ijy. On the construction — oratio indirecta without 13 to intro- duce it — cf. 12, 13. 23. 21, 4; Ges., § 155. 4c; Ewald, § 338 a; see also M. R., § 162. 16. "'"11)^2. 'Not i; as in 14, 24. The LXX have &eu Tou eeoO ovK dnoKptdrjo-eTai, which means really the same as the Mass. text, and does not of necessity suppose a reading QTl^JN nj?b, and the addition of H^. The Sam.Ver. ha« a, similar rendering to the LXX. QwtlJ'ni^ n3i>'', lit. 'answer the welfare', i. e. give such an answer as will be most conducive to Pharaoh's welfare. 19. mpl, so vers. 20, 27, possibly a mistake for HIpT, which occurs in ver. 3. ^^1 n]n3 Tl'^NT t>57 = 'such as I have not seen in all the land of Egypt for badness^ lit. ' I have not seen like these' etc.; see ver. 38, and cf M. R., § 56. 21. n]21p. Cf the fuller forms in 21, 29 r\T\,':h\ 31, 6 njnx; the ^^, defective for ''^_, has arisen out of the diph- thong '-^; see Stade, § 352 b; cf § 99. 2 ; Ges., § 91. i. Rem. 2. in''t>?"1?2'1 . The form is singular, not plural, the ''-^ being the ending ''-^, i^^lP = ''NID j see Stade, § 353 a. i ^; cf. § 99. 2 ; Ges., § 93. 3. Rem. 3. 23. □n''"in^<. Masc. suffix for fem. ; cf on 26, 15; in ver. 27 we find the fem. suffix used. 25. Nin tn^ ns^-ic ai'^n. cf. on 34, 21. 26. T\':^T\ ms ymj. See the note on i, 21 E'S3 b iTTin. "IJI ms JJ3B' is a casus pendens, as in ver. 25 (see 40, 12). 294 GENESIS, 32. 'And with respect to the repetition of the dream unto Pharaoh twice, (it is) because the matter is resolved on by God, and God hastens to do it.' niitJ'n b)}\ ; cf. Ruth 4, 7 rhv^in bv miDnn PVI 'with respect to ransoming, and with respect to exchanging.' nutyn is the Nif. inf. cstr. of HJE'. The Nif al of this verb is not found elsewhere. 33. i^"!)!. So the ordinary editions; but Baer and Del. in the text have X^.\, and in the notes to their edition, p. 78, they refer to Ibn Ezra in favour of the reading with — . On Jn."! for N'T, cf. Zech. 9, 5 N^n (Baer and Del. Kin in text and notes, p. 83), and see Ewald, § 63 d; cf. Stade, § 489 b. i. On Nil, also an abnormal form, see Stade, I. c, and Ges., § 75- note 3 b. The jussive is used in making a suggestion, see Driver, § 50 b (cf Ex. 8, 25. i Kings I, 2), and M. R., § 8. 2. 34. TpD'^l nj^lD TWS^ = ' let P. set up and appoint' tXc; cf the use of MB'V in i Sam. 8, 16. i Kings 12, 31. Ges. in Thes., p. 1077, renders, 'facial i^oo) P. (sequatur consilium meum) et praeficiat ;' cf. Ges., § 121. 6. Rem. 2. tlJOn, a oTral 'Key6^.='let him exact the fifth part;' cf. ife^JJ = ' tQ take the tenth part of anything' 35. nyiD T nnn = ■ under Pharaoh's control.' T used as in 2 Kings 13, 5. Is. 3, 6. 39. "im Sd n« ^niw ■Q'^rhvi s^'^mn •'-inN. On the construction, see Ges., § 133. 3 ; M. R., § 116. 40. "'Dy h'2 ptyi yti hyi. I. Oesenius and Knobel render, 'And all my people shall kiss thy mouth;' cf. i Sam. 10, I. I Kings 19, 18. Hos. 13, 2. But the kiss of homage was not given on the mouth ; and that Joseph had to receive the kiss from all the people would be a very unnatural thought ; further, by pt^J is not used in the sense ' to kiss,' CHAP. 41, VERS. 32-43. 295 for which we find the ace. or b. II. The LXX, Sam. Ver., Vulg., and most moderns, e. g. Del., Tuch, Di., prefer taking TS by, as in 45, 21. Ex. 17, i. Num. 3, 16, etc. = ' according to thy mouth,' i.e. 'command' etc.. and render ptyj 'dispose themselves,' taking it intransitively. Cf. the Arabic (^— j ' ordinare et disponere rem' "^yO bli^ NDDn pi. ' Only with respect to the throne will I he greater than thou! XDSn, accus. of respect; see Ges., § 118. 3; M. R., § 44 ; Ewald, § 281 c. 41. Tini. See on i, 29. 42. ^nS^ltO. Cf. Esther 3, 10. 8, 2, where the Persian monarch gives his signet first to Haman, and then to Mordecai. t2Jty = '3yw«j,' 'fine white cotton;' here VS^ '<'\i:i = ' clothing made of byssus;' cf. Del, Comm., p. 557. The priests' clothing was of byssus; cf Her. ii. 37. For tyB*, at a later period of the language, p3 was used, e. g. in the books of Chronicles and Esther. 43. n^tyjin rQ31?D = *« carriage of the second rank;' cf. nJE'Dn inD ' a priest of the second rank'. 'h 'WA. Cf. on 40, 5. TyilN. Most probably the Hebrew form of an Egyptian word. De Rossi explains it as = ape-rek, ' how the head.' Harkavy (in the Berlin Aegyptological fournal, 1869, p. 132) as the Egyptian ap-rex-u, ' head of the wise! Benfey ( Ver- haltniss der Agypt. Sprache, p. 302 f.) takes it as equivalent to a, the sign of the imper., bor = ' projicere', and k the sign of the second person ; so ' cast thyself down! Jablonski {Opusc, i. p. 6) explains it as meaning ouberek, ' bow towards ' (Joseph); and Cook {Speaker's Comm., p. 482) renders it ' welcome,' or ' rejoice^ addressed to Joseph. The Versions 396 GENESIS, give various renderings. The LXX have /cal i. U^i^' e»^ "^^^ J^^^o J^/' 'Father and ruler over all the land of Egypt;' also the Vulgate, which has ' Vt omnes coram eo genu flecterent.' A possible explana- tion from the Hebrew is to take "pnn as inf. abs. Af el for Hif'il, instead of the imperative; cf ver. 51 iJE*:, Pa'el for Pi'el, and accordingly Jose b. Dormaskith, quoted by Del, Conim., 4th ed., p. 470, explains it by Dill??; cf. the Vulg. rendering, and Aquila's rendering cited by Hieron. [Quaest., ed. Lag., p. 60), ' et clamavit in conspectu ejus ad genicula- tionem.' Hieron. himself follows the Targ. Ps.-Jon., and renders, ^ tender father ;' cf. "p, 18, 7. 'jini'l. The inf abs. continuing the narrative instead of |W^1 ; cf. the inf. abs. again in Ex. 8, 11 U^ DX Hiam; Judg. 7, 19 D''n3n )'ia31 ; and see Ges., §131.4; M. R., § 106. 2 ; Ewald, § 351 c. Probably the inf abs. is used instead of the ordinary construction of the imperf with waw conv., to shew that the appointment of Joseph over the land of Egypt was contem- poraneous with the announcement of the herald, and the setting him in the second chariot; not subsequent (as it would be with waw conv. and the impf); we might therefore render pnJl ' thus setting him' To connect pnJl with Tax is against the accents, besides giving an improbable sense, as the people would not have the appointment of vizier in their hands ; cf the next verse. 45. n:)yD ri:iD2. LXX, ■^ovSoii^aviix — probably =/-jo/- om-ph-eneh — comes nearer the original name than the Hebrew CHAP. 41, VERS. 45-48. 297 form of the word preserved in the Mass. text. The name is explained by Hieron. as ' Salvator mundi,' i. e. p, the article, masculine, soi or sote^salus, ph m the sign of the gen., and eneh=aetas (Di.). Ges. in the Thes., p. 1181, considers the sont of the LXX for sot difficult, and renders it p-soni-m-ph- eneh = ' the preserver or supporter of the age! Di. renders slightly differently, ' the support', or concrete, ' the supporter of life ;' so Bunsen and Lepsius, taking njJID as equal to the Egypto-Kopt. ph-atieh, ' hfe! The word HiaV is apparently, in the Hebrew form, transposed for nJVQ; see Ewald, § 78 b. Brugsch, Gesch., p. 248, explains the word as equivalent to za-p-u-nt-p-aa-dnkh, i.e. ^guardian {Landpfleger) of the district of place of life.' Cook, Speaker's Comm., p. 481, renders it 'food of the living! The Jewish interpreters, Onq., Pesh., Saad., make it mean ' revealer of secrets,' taking |3;3 as equivalent to (pali/a> ! PDDt^ = ' she huho belongs to Neith' (Pallas). LXX, 'htrevie. Brugsch, Ges., p. 248, makes it = Snat or Sant, the name of a woman. ]i^. LXX, 'HXtouTToXir, situated on the north-east of Memphis, on the eastern bank of the Nile. In Coptic the name of JN is Un or On, meaning ' light' or ' sunQ);' cf. the Hebrew B'DB' n''3 'house of the sun! Hieroglyphically it was Anu or An, more closely Anu-mhit (^nigsch and Ebers, cited by Di., p. 395). HeliopoUs was the chief seat of the worship of the sun-god Ra; cf its name in Is. 19, 18 Dinn TJJ {^ city of destruction'), a play on the words for Difin TiJ? ; cf Jer. 43, 13, where it is called 'E'DtT nu in the land of Egypt! 48. D''Jty J73ty, as the text stands, quite indefinite, seems hardly correct. Del. reads D''3B'n y3E'. 01s. proposes to read 298 GENESIS, (cf. ver. 53) for CJE', V3B'n *JB'. The LXX and Sam. read for rn— d'ijb;, V2fr\ ,Tn -^m Dijf n. 51. ''JttJ3 ''D nCJDQ = ' Manasseh, for he hath made me forgets The form ''JE'3, for ''JB'J, is used on account of its similarity in sound with the name nt^JD ; cf. Ges., § 52. note I ; Stade, § 387 a. In Arabic and Aramaic the a sound is regular, e.g. Heb. ?t3i?, Arab. Jll, Aramaic ^^.^js, and 7l3i2; and that a was once the original sound in Hebrew is proved from the imperf. and partic. of the Pi'el ; cf. Wright, Arab. Gram., i. pp. 32, 33. The Pi'el with a double ace. may possibly, as Tuch and Di. suggest, have been chosen instead of the commoner Hifil on account of the name nt^JD. 52. □'^"IDt^, meaning perhaps ' double fruitfulness ;' cf. Hos. 13, 15. Other dual names are D.v?'^, Hos. 1,3; D^nW'l (in DTipai rril. Jar. 48, 22; called on the Moabite stone, 1. 30, inbn nu ; cf Gen. 37, 17 inna) ; also Dinni? and d^jnh (ibid., lines 10, 31 [ri'lp and piin); see Schlottmann's mono- graph, p. 48, and the proper names of places, as ^\T'^,, Q^^D!?, etc. 53. rrri is neuter, 'which there was' (Germ, die es gab) ; contrast ver. 48; or ^^^ may be referred to WbTl. 56. DrtS "^ffi^< 73 n^*. LXX, Trairas tovs (riToffo\S>vas, Syr. )*»o/'', Vulg. ' universa horrea,' Onq. linnn NJIV^K i)2 n;; Nni3''V = ' all the storehouses wherein was grain,' which point to a reading n3 nnsix. The true reading here seems to have been lost. "llty'i'l is probably to be emended to '^Wl\, cf. 42, 6, as "Oty, Qal, always means, when a denom. from "15^, ' to buy^ not ' to sell.' CHAP. 4T, VER. 51— CHAP. 43, VER. 7. 399 67. 1«n yii^rt 7DV The plural verb as y^an = 'the inhabitants of the land;' see Ges., § 146. i ; M. R., § 135. 2 ; so I Sam. 14, 25. 2 Sam. 15, 23. 42. I. 11®. In all the passages where "CiW occurs it means 'grain,' as an article of merchandise, hence its frequent use from this chapter onwards. It is usually derived from i?B' ' to break,' from the corn being crushed in the mill ; see the Lexica. INinn . ' Look at one another,' i. e. look helplessly, one to the other, expecting aid and advice. It is not found else- where in this sense. 4. pDN 13N1p'' ]0. 'Lest harm befall him.' xnp is here equivalent to T\'\'^, as in ver. 38. 49, i. Ex. i, 10. pDi^ is only found again in ver. 38. 44, 29. Ex. 21, 22. 23. 6. 12'^7C?n 5^in f]DT^1. f[W\ is a casus pendens; so 9, 18 ''IN Xin nni; 15, 3 ptyDI Nin ^nu pViho pi; see Driver, § 199- lO'^^tyn = bmn in 45, S. Di^B' is a word common in Aramaic, and occasionally found in late Hebrew, e. g. Eccl. 8, 8. 7, 19 (pi.). 10, 5 ; and in the fern. sing. riDi'B', Ez. 16, 30 (all). Di. suggests that it is a technical word here, that has come over with tradition, as it agrees remarkably with Salatis, or Silitis, the name of the first ruler of the Hyksos in Egypt, Jos., Contra Ap., i. 14; so Tuch and Del. in their commentaries ; cf. the Assyrian salat, ' viceroy' 7. tSWp DnS "QT^T. nitrp, the fem. pi., is here used as neuter; so HB'p, fem. sing, in Ps. 60, 5 HK'p ^Dy ITiNin, 300 GENESISj and I Kings 12, 13 HB'p oyn flN ^i'D^ IJCI; other instances of the pi. fern, as neuter are Ps. 12, 4 niPHJ ; Ps. 16, 11 nitt''5;3; Zech. 4, 10 nWDp; see Ewald, § 172 b; M. R., §63; Gas., § 80. 1. 8. cm is emphatic, /Ajj/, as opposed to Joseph ; see on 33, 3- 9. 0Tt7. ^ About them ;' see on 17, 20. Y"l^^n mii^ n«. '7%e ^arCT^^j of the land;' cf. a similar use of the Arabic sT^c, Qor. 33, 13. Knobel further compares yujaTOCo-^at (Homer, //z'atf, 12. 339) and nudari (Caesar, Gallic War, vii. 70), and points out that the Hyksos were in constant dread of attacks from the Assyrians, who were at that time very powerful, and therefore fortified the eastern portion of the land of Egypt (Jos., Contra Ap., i. 14). 10. 'J^^11>'^. 1 is here used after the negative, after which 13 usually stands; so 17, 5 ,Tni, for the more usual n''ni 13; see Ewald, § 354a; Ges., § 155. i b; cf. Deut. 11, 10 f. ; 2 Sam. 23, 7. 11. '\1V\1 for the longer form 13n:« is only found here, Ex. 16, 7. 8. Num. 32, 32. Lam. 3, 42; see Ges., § 32. Rem. 2; Stade, § 179b; Dav., § 12. Rem. a. IJnj is the pausal form. C3"'J3 in the sense of ' upright ^ 'honest' (masc), is only found in this chapter; p occurs, Num. 27, 7. Is. 16, 6. Prov. II, 19, and elsewhere, in the neuter sense ol' right' Vn is here a stative verb = ' thy servants have not been, nor are they now, spies;' so Is. 15, 6; see Driver, § 11. C^^IQ. 'Spies' Del. remarks that the term n''^jna (' those who go about with the object of spying ') was a more insulting term than Onn (' those who go about with the object q/" exploring'). CHAP. 42, VERS. 8-23. 301 12. nvi-^h Dn«i V'^^'^ ^"^"'^ ''^- '^^^ °^J- ^^ ''^■ tentionally emphasized by being placed first. 13. 1]n3^ seems superfluous; possibly, as Olshausen suggests, it is a gloss from ver. 32, and should be rejected. Del. renders, against the accents, ' Twelve are Ihy servants, brothers are we, the sons of etc. ^tflprr = ' the youngest ;' see on 9, 24, and cf. M. R., § 86 ; Dav., § 47. 2; Ges., § 119. 2. "I^Ji""?^, as in 5, 24. 14. t^in is here neuter, as in 20, 16. Job 13, 16. 15. nyiD Tl. The Mass. pointed ''D with a created object, but ''n with God; so Lev. 25, 36 ^m 'T'nN 'm. Cf. I Sam. 17, 55 (Saul). 2 Sam. 11, 11 (David). Di. remarks ' that this oath is very suitable here, as the Egyptians honoured their kings, in irpos oKrideiau ovras Beovs (Diod. i. 90).' D^*. On this use of DK, cf. on 14, 23. Render, 'As sure as P. lives t ye shall not go hence, except your youngest brother come hither! 16. '^3 (introducing the oath) = ' j«/-^^y' see Ewald, § 330 b, and cf. i Sam. 14, 44. i Sam. 20, 3. 2 Kings 3, 14. 17. flC^''V Cf. Josh. 2, 18. Is. 24, 22. 18. TTTI ItoJ^ ri^5T, lit. ' Do this and live', i. e. ' if ye do this ye shall live ; ' see Ges., § 130. 2 ; M. R., § 10 ; Driver, § 152 i, and cf. Amos 5, 4 I'-ni ''JIB'nT ; Prov. 3, 3 f. . . . D3nD NS01. 19. nn« CDS'^n^^. Cf. ver. 33 inxn Q3inx. On the absence of the art. here, see Ges., § in. 2 b; M. R., § 76. Rem. c; Ewald, § 290 f.; so in 43, 14 nnK D3inx. QD^ra pnyi nniy. cf. is. 30, 23 lyir -it:». 23. J^DttJ. Cf. on 9, 18. 302 GENESIS, Y'^T'Qn '^3, i. e. the interpreter that was usually present in such cases ; hence the article. □n2''3. Cf. liTlWa in 26, 28. 25. QIT'DDD here, and ver. 35, the plural is used, because the silver of more than one is intended, Ewald, § 176c; Ges., § 108. 4. Rem. i, explains the plural diiferently. The dag. in the a is unusual, though it is found in the sing, and dual, the aspiration is generally preserved in the pi.; so 'S^., 'il^, ''If'V, etc.; see Ges., § 93. Rem. i ; Stade, § 71. 2. Ipto hii ttj''^^, so ver. 35. Cf. the note on 9, 5. ^V^^ . The sing, is harsh ; after IN^Dil a plural would be natural. The Syr. and Vulg. read the pi., while the Sam. and Onq. have the sing. ; the LXX have ey^vTidt] alro'is ovras. If tj'j;''1 (sing.) is read it must be rendered impersonally, 'one did,' i.e. ' ti was done;' the implied subj. being iTK'j!n. 27. inj^n, i.e. the one who, as it were, made a begin- ning, and opened his bag (the others naturally opening theirs afterwards), 50=' the first;' cf. 2, 11. 4, 19. innriDJ^, * distinguished from p{j> as being more specially the sack which the ass carried,' Tuch. The word is only found in Gen., chaps. 42-44 (in J, see App. I). 28. l^l^lTirT'l. A pregnant construction; see Ges., § 141; Ewald, § 282 c; c£ 43, 33 "iji DiB>:Nn inori'i. 30. ynsrt ''21t<. See on 39, 20. D''7il"1p!) is Ben Asher's reading. Ben Naftah reads D'^noa (with the article), see Baer and Del., Gen., p. 86 [where, in note 3, Judg. 21, 29 should be Judg. 21, 19]. 35. C3"'p''"1D on Tl'^'l. 'And it came to pass, as they were emptying their sacks, that they found' etc. A circum- stantial clause; so 2 Kings 2, 11 rum , . , Qiabn HDH \T'1, see Driver, § 165 ; M. R., § 154. CHAP. 4a, VER. 25— CHAP. 43, VER. 9. 303 36. n372. See on 21, 29. njp3 occurs again, Prov. 31, 29- 37. Pt^'t^T\ = ' thou mayesi kill.' 38. Qmiirn . . . in^npl. Cf. the note on 33, 13. 43. 3. ^i'^ "y^n 'protested strongly;' the inf. abs., by Ges., §131. 3 a; M. R., § 37 a. D3''n« TiSn. Cf. Ex. 22, 19 m^ rmh ^nb (Del.), see Ewald, § 322 a; cf. also M. R., § 153. 4. nbaJO '^ty'' D«. Cf. the neg. in ver. 5 ^J'>N QNI npcyD, and the note on 24, 42 ; here an imperf. (voluntative) alone follows the participle with B''' DK, in 24, 42 a perf. with waw conv. 6. riD ?, here pointed with two qamefs and no dag., and the tone on the last syllable, as the next word begins with a guttural; see Ges., § 102. 2 d. 7. ' The man asked particularly about us, and our kindred, etc., so we told him according to these words; how were we to know that he would say?' etc. ''S hv, as in Ex. 34, 27. Lev. 27, 8, and often. V'li yTl^n. On the inf. abs. see above on ver. i, and for this (potential) use of the imperf., cf Driver, § 39/3; Ewald, § 136 d ; M. R., § 7. 2. Rem. c; Ges., § 127. 3 d; so ver. 25 ib^i DE' ''3 ; 2 Sam. 3, 33 n33N niDi bj niDDn, etc. 9. Ti^iom . . . vn«^nn \h d«. cf. 47, e dni nndm . . . nVT ; 2 Sam. 15, 33 n*ni . . . may ax; and see Driver, § 138 i. (a) ; M. R., § 3. i c. i? ^nsEim. Cf. 1 Kings i, 21 D''NDn noi'tj' im 'jn. 304 GENESIS, 10. 'For had we not tarried, surely now we had returned' etc. nny ''3, as in 31, 42 ; cf. the note on that passage. 11. Y'"!^5n rr^JStQ is usually rendered, '■from the song of the land,' i. e. of the products of the land of Canaan that are celebrated and praised in song; cf. Jer. 51, 41. But Kn. and Del. point out that such a highly poetical expression would be very strange in this passage, and further that "IDT and its derivatives are only used of songs in divine service. Del. derives nint here from not (cf. niDro) in the sense ' to cut off,' so niDT would mean '■produce ' or 'portion.' But, as Di. remarks, ' liot is only used of cutting off what is useless, or in the way.' Norris, Assyrian Diet., ii. 354, gives an Assyrian word zumri = 'fruit, produce', Di. Di. renders 'fruits! LXX, Kapiroi. laS, Db^D], '^'^1*, see on 37, 25. ©n, here probably not the honey of bees, but a syrup prepared by boiling from the juice of the grape, Arab, diis, which is at the present day brought to Egypt from the neighbourhood of Hebron. D"'iI51. ' Pistacia nuts' (see Ges. in the Thes., s.v.), the fruit of the Pistacia vera. □"'"Fpti)T. 'And almonds,' the fruit of the Amygdalus com- munis. Almonds are found in Egypt, but only very rarely. 12. n^tyjO f]DDT. rutyo is here an adverbial ace; cf. mt^D dn?, Ex. 16, 22. In verse 15, in 5)03 njE'O, f)D3 is the ace, 'double in silver;' cf. Deut. 15, 1 8 T'3B' nD'C njB'D i^; Jer. 17, 18 imtr nJB'DI. See Ges., § 118. 3; Ewald, § 286 d. 14. "in« DD'^n^ n^*. See the note on 42, 19. LXX and Heb.-Sam. read iriNn here. ^ri^Dffi ^rhbt ima 13X1. 'And I,tf ram bereaved. CHAP. 43, VERS. 10-36. 305 lam bereaved;' cf. Esther 4, 16 imiN TliaN nB'NDl; 2 Kings 7, 4 unci laiT'D'' DNI. In ''J?^5?' notice the -:;- in pause for -^, and cf. 49, 3 T^ for fV; 49, 27 fl"ip*. for ^'<^\; see Ewald, § 93. 3; Stade, § 459 c. i (who accounts for the use of the pausal form with -^ here, ' der Euphonie wegen,' for euphony). 16. nitD is imperative for the usual form n2!3, but only in this passage, possibly, as Bottcher suggests, on account of the following riDD, to produce a change in the sound of the final syllable of the first word (O^p). r8. ittjn, 'because how it came there was unknown to them and inconceivable,' Del. ^?yrSrv), lit. ' to roll oneself upon any one;' cf. Job 30, 14 lijJ^jnn nNB> nnn. hhinrh is inf. cstr. Hithpo'al from bhi. 20. ■'3, is a precative particle, always followed by ''3'nx,= "■prayP ''3 has probably arisen out of ''V?, as ?3 out of byS; cf. in Aramaic the precative particles W3:|i and o'^i. See Prof. William Wright's Book of Jonah in Four Semitic Versions, p. II. 23. 037 DlSty. Cf Judg. 6, 23. I Sam. 20, 21. 'Cil!':^ Xi'h in the O. T. is always a formula of encouragement or congratulation, never of greeting,' Del. 25. On^ 1^3^^"' Dtl) ■'3. 'That they were to eat bread there'. Imperf., as in ver. 7. 26. 1^5''2"'T. N with mappiq, perhaps to mark that it is a consonant; cf. Lev. 23, 17 1N"'nn ; Job 33, 21 1^'^ ('cum N dagessato teste Masora, vide Michlol, 63 b;' note in Baer and Del.'s ed. oi Job, p. 52); Ezra 8, 18 IX'^il ('n dagessa- tum auctore Masora;' note in Baer and Del.'s ed. of Daniel, Ezra, and Neh., p. 108). Di. points out that we now know X 306 GENESIS, (Ginsburg, Verhandl. des 5 intern. Orient. Congr., ii. i. 136 ff.) that the four examples of a mappiq in N mobile are only remains of a much wider system of pointing the X mobile with mappiq, which was once more consistently carried out in MSS. See further, Ewald, § 2ie; Ges., § 14; Stade, § 42 b ; Strack, Proleg. Critica, p. 19. 27. DD'^^t^ DITtUn. Oli'B' is here used as an adj.; cf. 1 Sam. 25, 6. 2 Sam. 20, 9. 28. T\^'^'\, impf Qal of lip; see Ges., § 67. N.B.; Dav., § 42. 6. foot-note 2. ^^p and mnriE'n occur together again in 24, 26. 48. 29. ^^n^ So again Is. 30, 19 for 'I^O! j cf Ges., § 67. Rem. 2 ; Ewald, § 251. 2d. 30. Vnm 1-\?233 ""D. Cf I Kings 3, 26. Hos. 11, 8 (with QiDHJ for Diom). 32. pbaV n't ^:3. Cf Num. 9,6. Deut. 22,19. 12. i7> of legal and moral incapability. Kn. remarks on this verse : ' The predilection of the Egyptians for their own people and land, and their exclusiveness towards strangers (Died. i. 67; Strabo, xvii. i. 6), is well known. The priests neither ate nor drank anything that came from a foreign land (Porph. iv. 7); the Egyptian would use no eating utensils belonging to a Greek (Her. ii. 41). In a similar way they conducted themselves towards the Hebrews, especially as they were a nomad people, "tenders of flocks and herds" (see 46, 34; and cf also 39, 6).' 33. lnQn''1. Cf on 42, 28. 34. t>5to''1 is impersonal, the implied subject being Ntrart; cf 42, 25 ; Deut. 22, 8 ^Sin ^fl'' *3; 2 Sam. 17, 9 vdB'H yDB*!. The LXX and Syr. have the plural here. mi"' t)XT[. Knobel calls attention to the frequency of CHAP. 43, VER. 37 — CHAP. 44, VER. 5. 307 the number five in matters relating to Egypt, e.g. 41, 34. 45, 22. 47, 2. 24. Is. 19, 18. For T in the sense oi^portion,' cf. 47, 24. 2 Sam. 19, 44. 2 Kings 11, 7. IIDUJ^I 'to be understood according to Hagg. i, 6,' Del. 44. 1. IZ^« fjDS. See Ges., § 124. Rem. i; M.R., § 94 b. 3. "^y\ CD''©3Km nlt^ Ipnn. ' The morning dawned, and the men were sent away.' The construction is the same as in 38, 25 nni'B' N''m riNVID Nin, see the note there; so in the next verse, nON flDVI . . . IKV DH. Cf. also M. R., § 154. "Ili^, intrans. perf. like Bha, 31D (all); see Ges., § 72. Rem. I ; Stade, § 385 f. 4. IpTIin ^7. ' Without having gone far ;' so Ex. 34, 28 nntJ' n!? CDI Ssn N^ hrh ' without eating bread, or drinking water;' Lev. 13, 23 nDb'S X? ' without having spread.' The perfect is here equivalent to our past part. act. ; see Driver, § 162. 5. The LXX (cf. the Syr. and Vulg.) insert at the end of ver. 4, Iva n eKKe-^ari /lov to k6v8v to dpyvpovv ; perhaps an ex- planatory gloss. ' Is not this that wherein my lord is wont to drink, and he (emphatic) would surely practise divination therewith ' etc. ? On "13, cf. Ges., § 154. 3a; and M.R., § 52. i. Rem. a, who compares itivnv ev xp^ca, liber e in ossibus, and boire dans un 'verre, with the plural used here. 3 nnC' occurs again in Amos 6, 6 p ''pltD3 dTlt^n. Tuch takes the sentence slightly differently, supplying DSnu after t^T\. But this seems unnecessary. 11 tynJ'' ttJTO. Cf. 30, 27. This species of divination X 2 3o8 GENESIS, with cups, called KvKiKOfiavrsia or iSpo/iavTela, was much prac- tised in Egypt; cf. Jamblich., Mysi., 3. 14, and Varro in Augustine's Ctv. dei, 7. 35, cited by Di., p. 407. Di., I.e., says : ' Water was poured into a glass or some other vessel, or pieces of gold, silver, or precious stones were thrown into the water, and the figures or rings that appeared were sup- posed to give information about the future, or what was obscure to the inquirer.' The LXX have here airbs fie olavt(riia olavi^eTm iv airm. So the Syr. and Vulg. Onq. has •^^5 P''"!!?? ^5'^? ^^'^] 'and he makes discoveries through it,' sc. the cup. Saadiah, quoted by Wright {Genesis, p. 109), has 5-> ISCls:^^ 1 lill LaT ' and he only proved you by it' ' Wishing to screen Joseph from such practices.' jyn3 = properly Vo whisper,' viz. magic formulae or oracles. 7. "l^T^ Hu?. ' After riD^ the imperfect, as more cour- teous and adapted to a tone of entreaty, is often preferred to the perfect,' Driver, § 397; so Ex. 2, 13 nan rxoh ; i Sam. 21, 15 iriN iNi^n rxh. mtoj.>D . . . rh'hn. cf. on is, 25. 9. nCl . . . «!*»"• ")ll?t^. The perf. with waw conv. to introduce the apodosis; contrast ver. lo, where the simple imperf. follows ; cf. ver. 1 7 (where ' the subject is reinforced by the personal pronoun' Nin); Judg. 8, 7. 9; and see Driver, § 1237. Obs.; M. R., § 26. 12. n^D ItOpn 7nn b'nJQ, clrc. clause; see on 21, 14. LXX, ap^aiievos ; SO 48, 14 VT" HX jj^B'. See also M. R., § 153. Render, 'Beginning with the eldest, and finish- ing with the youngest.' J?''3Jn is a cup shaped like the bell or calix of a flower ; cf. Ex. 25, 31, where the word is used of the cup of a flower used in the workmanship of the golden candlestick. CHAP. 44, VER. 7 — CHAP. 45, VER. I. 309 15. W DnyT' h?l7n. ^ Did ye not know that a man like me would be certain to practise divination' and so at once discover the thief? ''JD3 1{5'N B'''X, i.e. one of the wise men of Egypt; cf. Is. 19, n; Kn. 16. nj2T = HDll, as in Ps. 116, 12. 18. ny"lS3 '71Q3, Ht. 'like thee, like Pharaoh', i.e. -for thou art as P.;' cf. 18, 25. Is. 24, 2. Hos. 4, 9. Ps. 139, 12 ; and see M. R., § 56. i. Rem. a; Ges., § 154. 3 f. 21. V^y '^3''J^ nJ3''toNl, i.e. take him under my pro- tection; cf Jer. 39, 12. 40, 4. Ps. 33, 18. 34, 16. LXX, kgI €7nfie\ovfiai avTov. 2 2, DJ31 . . . 2tyT. See the note on 33, 13. HDI; cf the note on 3, 22. 29. Ornnlnl . . . impl. Cf. on ver. 22. 31. n'^m introduces the apodosis to ''N33 nnjJI in ver. 30; and nci is apodosis to iniNl3. 33. bi^'^ , . . '2tD'^. The jussive is here used in making a request, as in 9, 27. 31, 49, and often; see Driver, § 507; M. R., §8; Ges., §127. 3b. 45. I. yhv n''l!J:3n h!:h. 'Before all those that stood by him,' ht. 'with regard to all those' etc. ? as in 17, 20 i'NJ)DB'''i' ; cf the note on that passage. Virini. ' When he made himself known.' S)1inn, cf Num. 12, 6 (all), is the inf. Hithp*. of JIT, a verb i"D, really l"a; in the Nif., Hif., and Hof. the waw reappears, yiiJ = yi13, vni'T = S'.'^Il', nifl = V^Y^, ; but in Hithpa'el the '' usually remains, as y^, 3S^nn, yr\xh=T\>r\'a nrh, Ezra 9, 8 f.), to a great (numerous) deliverance^ i. e. that you may be preserved, and become a numerous body of people, the second h being the dat. of the product. n*nn everywhere else is con- strued with the ace, but, as Del. on Is. 53, 1 1 shews, verbs in Hif. are sometimes construed with a dative. Others (Schumann, Wright) take "3 "^ as in apposition to D3^, and render, Ho hep you alive, a great body of fugitives' LXX and Heb.-Sam. strike out the 7 before nD''l'S^. 8. ny-lsS n^^T. Cf r Mace 11, 32. A title bestowed on the first minister in the kingdom ; see Ges., Thes., p. 7. Di., referring to Brugsch, Gesch., 248, 252, 592, says ah en CHAP. 45) VERS. 4-1 1- 311 pirao was, in documents of the nineteenth dynasty, the official title of the first (domestic) minister, and that ^ adon of the whole land ' occurs in a similar sense in a document of the eighteenth dynasty. 10. ]ttja V"*^^' ^^^^ ™ ^ °°'^5J"i ps, 47> " (cf. Ex. 12, 3^. Num. 33, 5); the LXX also, in 46, 28, render \m by eis yx]v 'Va\i.«Tar\. \0l must, probably, be sought for on the eastern side of the Nile. From. Ex. 2, 3 f. Num. 11, 5 the Israelites seem to have dwelt near 'the Nile, and there is no reason to suppose that they ever crossed that river, as neither when they enter, nor when they leave Egypt is any mention made of their crossing the Nile. The LXX render jB'J here, and 46, 34 rfo-f/n 'Apa^ias, hence we may infer that \m must have been a portion of lower Egypt, on the right bank of the Nile. This portion of Egypt was regarded by the ancients as Arabia, so that to them Heliopolis and Heroo- polis, for example, were situated in Arabia (Her. ii. 15; Strabo, xvii. i. 21. 30), or iv liidopUs 'Apafiias (Ptol. iv. 5. 54); cf. also Ps. 78, 12. 43 {'Ms [Moses'] wonders in the field of Zoan' [Tanis]). Di., p. 411, after citing authorities, says, ' Goshen is the district on the east side of the Pelusian, or rather Tanitic arm of the Nile, north-east of Cairo.' This part of Egypt was considered one of the best portions of the country (47, 6. 11), and was a land well adapted for shepherds (46, 34); see further, Di., p. 411; Del., p. 493- The name \m ^a-s probably Semitic, as it is also found in Josh. 10, 41. 15, 51 as the name of a district and town in southern Canaan. 11. ^rh:h^^. The Pllpel of ha; see Ges., §55-4; Dav., § 26. 3. Rem. c. The pass. ^f>^\ occurs in i Kings 20, 27. 312 GENESIS, tUlIn \D. 'Lest thou be brought to poverty ^ Nif. of {y-|i= tyn ; so most of the Vss. Another rendering, which is less natural, is ' lest thou be taken possession of.' from E'T' posstdere, i. e. through poverty became the property of some one else ; cf. 47, 19 f. 12. ^2^D^ ''D ''i, lit. Uhat my mouth is the one speaking' etc., i. e. ' that it is I myself that speaketh! 17. 13J7IO 'load^, a ana^ Xeyo/i.; cf. 44, 13, where DOJf occurs. 18. '\n nt3. ' The best of the land of Egypt; i. e. its best products; cf. vers. 20. 23, also 24, 10. 2 Kings 8, g, etc. ; so LXX, Vulg., Tuch, Del., Di., Rashi, and others take aiD as= 'the best portion; i.e. Goshen; but this is 3t3*D, 47, 6. 11. 19. 1^1 rUT'l!? nilNT must mean, 'And thou (Joseph) art charged, do ye (the brethren) this; which is very harsh. Possibly the text is corrupt. The Syr. inserts after rTilS, l*?^"^? 1»S ; while the LXX, o-i hk %vru\m, and the Vulg., 'praecipe etiam ' etc., read the text Dnx n^X. 20. Compare the note in 34, 21 for the casus pendens, ""IJI 31D ''3, taken up by the pronoun Nin. 22. n^Dty T^^Cy7r\, '\.Q. 'changes of raiment; co^\!iyTo\it%, which would be worn on special occasions, cf 27, 15 ; see Judg. 14, 12 f. 19. 2 Kings 5, 5. 22 f. The brothers received a complete outfit, while Benjamin has five times as much, and three hundred shekels besides. 23. Pt^TD ' as follows; Usually pointed HNTS, and only here with no pretonic —p. ptO occurs only once again in the O.T., 2 Chron. 11, 23. The word is frequent in Aramaic. 24. lUin 7N, scarcely 'do not fear; for such a warning would be superfluous in the case of persons who had already CHAP. 45, VER. I a— CHAP. 46, VER. 8. 313 made the journey more than once, but rather 'do noi quarrel,' i. e. do not dispute about your conduct to me; of. 42, 22, also Prov. 29, 9. Is. 28, 21. 26. "131 = ' and thatl introducing the oratio obliqua. 11") 3D"'T. 'And his heart grew coW 27. lpl>'^ rrn ■'nni . . . '^C^'\,X\X.'andhesaw...and the spirit of J. revived;'' almost='w^«« he saw . . .' etc. (46, 29); cf. Driver, p. 216. nn 'nni; cf. Ps. 22, 27 032355 ''ni "^vb; 69, 33 nanai'inii. 28. 1"1. '// is enough;' so 2 Sam. 24, 16. Num. 16, 3. 7. 46. 3. n"nn. "11 for nnn, like ^T). for ^H, Ex. 2, 4; ni^ for nn^. Is. 37, 3; see Ges., § 69. Rem. i; Stade, § 619 h. 4. n'^y na ^^yi^ ''33«V On the inf Qal and imperf. Hif., see the note on 37, 33. The emphatic inf abs. usually precedes the finite verb; see Ges., § 131. 3. Rem. i; M. R., § 37 a; Ewald, § 312 b, who remarks that Qal after Hif. is very rare; cf Is. 31, 5. The inf abs. is here further empha- sized by DJ, as in 31, 15 ^lUK QJ h^X^. 6. DrT'ipd, sing, not plural; see the note on 41, 21. 8-27. A list of the family of Jacob who went down into Egypt with him. The names in this list are found again, with several variations, in Num. 26. i Chron. 2-8 (cf also Ex. 6, 14-16), the variations being most numerous in the case of the sons of Benjamin. Jacob's sons are classified according to his wives, the hst falling under four heads : Leah, Zilpah, Rachel, Bilhah. Under 314 GENESIS, the first head, Leah, come Reuben, with four sons ; Simeon, with six; Levi, with three ; Judah, with five ; Perez and Zerah being regarded as his sons, though they really were his grand- sons; Perez has two sons, and as Er and Onan died in Canaan, Judah's sons and grandsons amount to five ; Issachar has four sons; Zebulun, three; Leah's daughter Dinah is also mentioned : thus Leah's children and grandchildren amount to 26; and these 26 + Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah, issachar, and Zebulun = 32, and with Jacob himself, 33. Under the second head, Zilpah, come Gad, with seven sons ; Asher, with four sons, a daughter (Serah), and two grand- sons (7) : thus 7 + 74-2 (Gad and Asher)=i6. Under the third head, Rachel, come Joseph and Benjamin; Joseph has two sons, Ephraim and Manasseh ; and Benjamin, ten : thus 2-f-2-l-io=i4. Under the fourth head, Bilhah, come Dan, with one son ; and Naphtali, with four sons : in all, I -(-4 -I- 2 (Dan and Naphtali) =7. Thus all the family of Jacob, including himself, was (33 -J- 16 -f 144- 7) 70. The LXX here (ver. 27), cf. Acts 7, 14, make the total number 75, counting (ver. 20) three grandchildren and two great- grandchildren among Joseph's descendants; from 50, 23. Num. 26, 28 if. I Chron. 7, 14 f. The number 70 is men- tioned again in Ex. i, 5. Deut. 10, 22 (LXX in Ex. 75, but in Deut. 70). On the variations in the lists given in this chapter. Num., 1. c, and i Chron., 1. c, cf, the larger com- mentaries, i.e. Del., p. 487; Di., p. 417 f.; also on the diflB- culty that arises in the case of Perez, who, being born after the sale of Joseph into Egypt, and before Jacob came to Egypt, had, according to our list, two sons. Thus, as the time between Joseph's sale into Egypt and the coming of Jacob is only twenty-two years, the birth of Perez and his sons must have occurred within twenty-two years, which, of course. CHAP. 46, VERS. 15-34. 315 is not impossible, but not very probable. Another difficulty is also discussed by Di. and Del., viz. that Benjamin, the youth (43, 8. 44, 20, etc.), is represented here as the father of ten sons. 15. ri3''"T T)W. If the nx is not corrupt, we must render, ' and also Dinah ' (governed by m^^). 20. "^U/N refers to the object that is implied in flDV? IPVl, viz. Qijn. < 27. ni^3.n. See the note on 18, 21. 28. n"nn7. ^That he {Joseph) might give him instruc- tions,' or 'direct him,' i.e. that Joseph might instruct Judah, and give Jacob, with his flocks and herds, every facility to enter the land ; so Ges., Kn. Del. makes Judah the subj. to mini', i.e. Judah went before Jacob to shew him the way, which he (Jacob) could find as easily as Judah. The Sam. Ver., LXX, Pesh. apparently read TCmh, as inf Nif.=niN"in? (which is found in the Heb.-Sam.), or had this word in their text, which reading is accepted by Di., who considers it con- firmed by 1VX N"l^1 in ver. 29, and renders, 'That he (Joseph) should appear before him (i. e. come to meet hini) to Goshen'. VJCT", i.e. 'before his {Jacob's) arrival.' 29. 7VT, i. e. from the Nile land to Goshen, which lay on higher ground, Di. "^yj = 'again and again;' cf Ruth i, 14. 30. Dl'Dn, as in 2, 23. 18, 32. 29, 34. 31. n7J?^^, possibly used with reference to the ideal, or real high position of Pharaoh's royal residence, Di. ; cf. Ges., Thes., 1022. 33. D3"'iZ)'y?D, singular; c£ on 41, 21. 34. nj.*"! 75. Cf. on 4, 2. The Sam. has the pi. 'yn. 3i6 GENESIS, 47. 2 . I'^nN njJptDT . ' Out of the whole number of his brethren; ' so I Kings 12, 31 DJfn mvpD (not as A.V., ' 0/ the lowest of the people'); Ez. 33, 2 nniVpD inx B'''N; 19, 4 is different, cf. the note on that passage. 3. ]N2 nS^I. On the predicate in the sing., see Ges., §1470; M. R., §133. Di., however, considers that nj;i is miswritten for ''jjn, comparing 46, 32 ; Ewald, § 16 b. The Sam. and several codices (Wright) read the plural. 5 and 6. In the LXX text 6 b is continued with ri\6ov Se eh AiyvTTTOv TTpos l(c(rt] ^aaCkevs AiyvnTov, Koi eljre ^apao) npos 'laxTfjCJ) Xcyav, then 5 b and 6 a follow. 6. Nin y^'Lh Q''-\JJD Y1«. Casus pendens; see on 34, 21. h*r\ ""tiJi^ t32 ty^T nyT IDKI. 'And if thou knmoest that there are capable men among them,' lit. 'and if thou knowest, and there are ' etc. On this union of the subordinate clause by waw, see Driver, p. 235, and c£ Job 23, 3 {^knew so that I might find him'). ^T? "'tlj^t^. 'Able or worthy men;' cf. Ex. 18, 21. 25, and I Kings I, 52 (i3''n p). □ntDtol, the perf. with waw conv. used in making a suggestion; see on 24, 14. T\':ip'0 ■'lit). Cf. I Sam. 21, 8, where Doeg the Edomite is called hvA^ it^x Cjjin ni^N. 7. imnyV Cf. I^DSJn in P with J^xn in ver. 2. ']"ll'''l, as in 2 Kings 4, 29, used of greeting any one ; cf. 2 Sam. 16, 16. CHAP. 47, VERS. 2-l8. 317 II. DDDJ^I. Cf. on 4g, 10. DDDyi is here the name of the district, so called from the town of the same name men- tioned in Ex. I, II. 'The designation "land of Ramses" is only found in this passage,' Kn. 12. urh . . . viN TMi . , , h:hy*i. On bb with a double ace, see Ewald, § 283 b. PllOrr "^Dy, lit. ' according to the little children^ i. e. '•accord- ing to their number and wants,' ' little children being mentioned because they would require much food, and also because people would be less willing to see them in want,' Del. ''sh as in Lev. 25, 16. 27, 16. 13. nbm, ajrag Xeydfi. Imperf. apoc. Qal of nrh for ntib ; on the form of the imperf. apoc, see Ges., § 75. Rem. 3 b. 14. NJjQDrr. Cf. nx5JD:n, 19, 15. 15. DDt^ occurs only in this and the next verse in the Pent.; it is also found in Ps. 77, 9. Is. i6, 4. 29, 20 (all). 17. D7nD^T. 'And he sustained them! ?nj. is only used in this passage in the sense, ' sustain^ ' nourish! Elsewhere it means 'to lead' or 'guide;' so Is. 40, 11. Ps. 23, 2. 18. "i:n '^rX^r^ ITOJ «^. 'WewUlmt hide H/rom my lord, that if the money is spent, and the cattle we own be my lord's, there is nothing left' etc.; DN ''3 being taken separately, according to the accentuation. Del. prefers to render them together, 'hut', comparing 2 Sam. 15, 21. i Kings 20, 6. 2 Kings 5, 20 (where dN ''D is preceded by a protestation), which are not quite parallel to this passage. Others (Kn., Ges.) render ON '•3 ' but, since,' or ' but, because,' which render- ings assign to DN a meaning it can hardly bear. Di., following Kn., renders the words from dK ''3 down to ^TN' slightly differently, 'that if our money, and the cattle we own, are 3i8 GENESIS, entirely at an end, (and come) to my lord' comparing for the pregnant construction 14, 15. 42, 28. 43, 33, a rendering that seems somewhat harsh and unnatural. '':1X is used here, as in Num. 32, 25. 27. 36, 2, where more than one person is speaking. Del. compares the French 'Monsieur.' IJJT'IJI = ' our bodies,' i. e. ' ourselves^ rflJ being used of living beings, as in Dan. 10, 6. Ez. i, 11. 23. Neh. 9, 37; elsewhere it is only used of a corpse. 19. Notice that niD3 is zeugmatically connected with wnDiN ; of 4, 20 njpDi ^ns nt^'. 13nD-r« W 1]ra« □:!. DJ . . . DJ='<5oM . . . and; as in ver. 3, 43, 8. 44, 16. 46, 34. □ti,in, impf. Qal (intrans.) from nDB*; cf. Ges., § 67. Rem. 3; Stade, § 509. 2; see on 16, 4 (.^i?!!!!'). With this use of DDK', cf. Ez. 12, 19 nV-IN QK'n \V^b; 19, 7 HN^DI pN DB'ni. 21. "l:i1 inW "T^nyn Oyn n«\ usually rendered, 'a»(/ the people, he removed them into the towns;' but such a removal of all the people into the towns would be scarcely possible, and it is very doubtful whether Tiayn can mean this. It is better, if the text is left unchanged, to render, ' and the people he caused to pass over to the towns ' (Dyn DNI being a casus pendens ; cf. 13, 15. 21, 13 ; Driver, § 197. 6 ; M. R. § 132 a). The meaning being, the people were brought to the towns so that they might be fed from the stores of grain that were there; cf. 41, 48. Tuch interprets the Mass. text as mean- ing, ' he moved the people from one city into another, through- out the whole land ;' possibly to remove them from the districts in which the land they formerly owned lay. But this would require T-j;^ niJJD ; cf. 2 Chron. 30, 10. The LXX, KOI Tov Xaov KOTtbovKaia-aTO aira els naidas, SO the Sam. tanr^favz, . ?(5v . '^sv? . ?iav . Amx, and Vuig. CHAP. 47, VERS. 19-31. 319 ' StcbjecilquB earn {pmnem terrani) Pharaoni, et cundos populos ejus; which point to a reading Di'iayi' WN "lUJin DVn riNI (cf. Jer. 17, 4) = ' the people he made serve him {the king) as slaves! Di. adopts this reading, following Knobel. Onq. has ''li?^ •'-i.po ^''n^ layx NGV n;:], and the Pesh. K<\5 IT"^ )Io ^ .qL»(' uOjb, both='(2«rf the people, he removed them from town to town,' a meaning which (see above) the Heb. text cannot bear. Di. remarks, in favour of the ren- dering of the text adopted by him, that the purchase of the people, corresponding to the purchase of the land, is demanded by the emphatic position of Dyn riNI; cf. 19 and 23. 22. pn ^2. pn as in Prov. 30, 8. 31, 15; Ez. r6, 27. 23. Kn = njn occurs only once again in Heb., Ez. 16, 43. It corresponds with the Arab. Li, Syr. jot. □nr^n. Cf on 24, 14. 24. 037 nTT' niTI ynSV ' And /our portions ye shall have.' m\T ya^K1 must be regarded as object after nNT D3^, which is nearly equivalent to 'ye have.' Cf. Ex. iz, 49 rrwinb ■T'lT nnx min; Num. 9, 14 h^b n\T nnx npn; see Ewald, § 295 d; Ges., § 147. Rem. 2. Di. accounts for the sing, here on the ground that the numeral is regarded in much the same way as 73. riTn. See 43, 34. 26. 'Oyarh nyic'?. 'For p. with regard to the fifth part.' It would be less harsh' if the text were read tWDn nyisij, with the Syriac, as an explanation of nnx. The LXX have Tw ^apaZ aTTOTrefiiTTovv, as though the text were E'Sn? "a?. 27. 1TnS''T. See on 34, 10. 29. '^3")'^ nnn "jT" «3 O'^to. See the note of 24, 2. 31. niDDn ©N"l hy ^^-Ito"" inrHlJ-'V 'And Israel 320 GENESIS, bowed down towards the head of the bed ; ' so Di., Del. The aged patriarch sat upright while speaking with Joseph, and as he was too weak to rise, turned and inclined himself towards the upper end of the bed, and offered up thanks to God that his request was granted ; of the Vulg., ' adoravit Israel Deum, conversus ad lectuli caput,' and i Kings i, 47. Tuch renders, ' leant back upon the head of the bed.' The LXX, Syr., and Itala read naBil as "f^n, the LXX being quoted thus in Heb. 11, 21 (eVl to axpov ttjs pa^hov airov), Jacob being represented as bowing over the top of his staif, or, as others suppose, over the staff of Joseph (which he carried as a token of his authority) as a mark of homage to him; cf 37, 7. But this reading is not so natural as '"'^S'l!, and a suflBx would be required (''I'l^Ci), which the Vss. express. 48 I. PIDV") 1J2b<''T. 'And one told Joseph' {sc.-^piin). The third pers. sing, being here used like the impersonal, ' man sagte,' 'on dtt,' Ewald, § 294 b; Ges., § 137. 3 ; M. R., § 123. 2. In 22, 20 we find ijil used; but here the active is employed by the narrator, as "IDN''1 is not used in this sense ; so in ver. 2 in, and again "idn''1. 4. '7n"'l"im "fISn ■'^Sn. The perf. with waw conv. after a word pointing to the future, as in 7, 4 in''n»l , . , iiDOD; Is. 7, 14 n^npl . . . mn no^vn; see Driver, § 113. i; M. R., § 24. 2 a; Ges., § 126. 6a. flDD. On the part, asfuturum instans, see on 6, 17. 5. an^h , . . yn i^ty nnyi. On the casus pendens, see on 34, 21. CHAP. 48, VERS. I-II. 321 6. "jmblQI. 'And thy offspring;' mi'lD, as in Lev, 18, 9. n. 151 DtlTlb^ Qty bj^. 'According to the name of their brethren shall they he called in their inheritance^ i. e. their descendants shall dwell among the posterity of Ephraim and Manasseh, and be reckoned as belonging to them, and not as separate tribes, 7. ITD^D. Everywhere else P calls Mesopotamia D"ix pa; of. on 25, 20. Possibly the omission of Q"iX is due to a copyist's mistake. The Sam. has DHK pS. ''bj^ nnQ . 'Died, to my sorrow! For this use of h'S, cf. Eccl. 2, 17 nb'VDn ''I'y SJT '•D. See also 33, 13 and the note on that passage. y"1« mi!). Cf. the note on 35, 16. 9. ntl 'here;' so 38, 21. S^3 Dnp. Ewald, § 253 a, and Stade, § 631 e, compare DHi^ here with D5)V3 (Amos 9, i), the suffix being attached to the word ending in a guttural, the tone being placed on the penult, onp, however, here has no accent at all, as it is con- nected with W by Maqqef, and so deprived of its accent; and the — of D^:- is consequently shortened into D^ : and < in Amos 1. c. the tone on D3?V? is drawn back on to the penult, to avoid two tone-syllables coming together, the next word being K'NI?. Dpllb^l. For the pausal seghol, cf. 21, 9 pnSD and the note there; also the frequent W D^iS?^- In Num. 6, 27 we find D?")??? in pause, also in ordinary editions in this passage. II. n«"l for nisn, like VB'K for nVcj? in 31, 28 (see the note on that passage), and nrg for niB'S?, 50, 20. ■'flT'TD. According to Ben Asher in the Dikduke Hafa- 323 GENESIS, mim, ed. Baer and Strack, Leipzig, 1879, § 49, the -^ in the first person perf. Pi'el is always preserved in pause, except in this word; ''na^n, Ps. 38, 7; ^n^n;, Ps. 119, 43, etc.; ''i?-;^:, Ps. 119, 128. 12. VDi^?, as in Num. 22, 31. In 19, i. 42, 6 we find D'SN alone used after iriDB'^l and linntJ"''! respectively. 14. VT' n^^ 73to. ' Crossing his hands;' the construc- tion is the same as in 44, 12 ; cf. the note on that passage. This rendering is the same as that of the LXX, Syr., Vulg., and most moderns, and is suitable to the context ; cf. ver. 13. Cf. the Arab. jJCi ^plexuit', ' ligavit! Onq. and Saadiah render, ' he made his hands wise,' i. e. ' he placed them so intentionally,' which assigns a doubtful meaning to ^?'?' ( = ■'''?"'?''?); moreover with this rendering V1''3 would be more natural, as Di. points out. With this verse cf. Matt. 19, 13 f. Mark 10, 16, where Christ in blessing lays His hands on those whom He blessed. 15. mn DVn -\V myo. This phrase is only found once again in the O. T., viz. Num. 22, 30 nrn DVn TJJ Til^D. 16. "iJ^ty Om K"lp"'T. Cf. 21, 12 and the note there. 'In them let my nam£ he named' i. e. ' be made famous through their offspring.' Del. renders, ' On them let my name be called'. Dn2=Dn^pj;, i.e. 'let them be regarded as my children, and sharers of the promises made to me and mine.' I^n^. nn is only found in this passage in the O.T. 17. Jn"'tD''. Notice the tense, ^ was placing ;' Jacob had not actually placed his hands on the heads of Ephraim and Manasseh, but was in the act of placing them ; cf. Driver, § 39 /3. The imperfects with waw conv. give details of Jacob's blessing which have been omitted, though the actual blessing CHAP. 48, VERS, ia-33. 333 is given in the preceding verses; cf. 27, 24. 37, 6. 42, 21 ff. 45, 21-24; Driver, § 75 0. 19. Q'^^T\ i^b'Q (cf. Is. 31, 4)=DilJ IIDn in 17, 5. 22. "^^n^ Vy -rn« &3tt) '7*7 •'nni "^j^i. 'And i give thee ofte mountain slope above thy brethren! Q3B' = 'shoulder,' then applied to the slope of a mountain, like fjna, Num. 34, II. Josh. 15, 18. Is. II, 14 ; see Ges., Thes., 1407. Tnx is status absolutus with the vocalisation of the status con- structus, the shorter pronunciation being sometimes chosen in the flow of speech ; see Ewald, §2675; Ges., § 1 1 6. 6 ; and cf. Zech. II, 7 ''nx-ii? nnx^^i , . . •'nx-ii? inx^; is. 27, 12 inx) inx. xi'W is taken by Onq. and Pesh. in the sense 'pgrtion,' a translation that is too indefinite, 'nnp!' and Tinj are per- haps best taken with Tuch and Del. as prophetic perfects (see, however, Di., p. 431). The meaning of the promise seems to be that the descendants of Joseph should have a mountain tract, in addition to their other territory. Possibly the word QD{^ is chosen with reference to the well-known place of that name in the territory of Ephraim ; cf. the LXX rendering, Sixt/^a e^alperov, and John 4, 5. Tuch and others consider that tnn d3B' means that two portions of territory should be assigned to Ephraim and Manasseh (cf. ver. 5), as contrasted with the one portion that the other tribes were to receive. But inx Q3{^ can hardly mean * one portion,' unless the rendering of Onq. and the Pesh. be adopted, which, as was remarked above, does not adequately represent the Hebrew words. A portion of land would embrace more than one ' mountain slope.' TltDpn ""Qini are curiously rendered in some texts, cf. Onq. '•niWll ''fll7V3 ' with my prayer and entreaty ' (Berliner's text follows the Mass. text, see the notes in his edition, Y 2 324 GENESIS, part ii, p. 17). Another curious paraphrase is proposed by Hieron. {Quaesf., ed. Lagarde, p. 66), ' dabo tibi Siclmam, quam emi in fortitudine mea, hoc est in pecunia quam multo labore et sudore quaesivi.' In his translation, however, he follows the Heb. text. 49. In this chapter is contained the so-called ' Blessing of Jacob,' a name which owes its origin to ver. 28, which how- ever probably belongs, not to the ' Blessing,' but the following narrative, and was derived from a different document. This designation cannot be regarded as a suitable one, as in point of fact only two of the tribes are really blessed, viz. Judah and Joseph, the utterances of the patriarch in the case of Reuben, Simeon, and Levi being full of reproach, and a future predicted for them the reverse of prosperous. It would be better designated by the title Del. gives it, ' The prophetic sayings of Jacob concerning the Twelve.' The six sons of Leah are first mentioned, then Bilhah's eldest son, Zilpah's two sons (the eldest first), Bilhah's second son, and Rachel's two sons, Joseph the eldest first. The order in which they occur is partly that in which they were born, and partly that in which the territories represented by them geographically stand, starting from the south of Canaan and going north- wards (Ewald, -^zj/.', ii. p. 435 ; Eng. trans., ii. p. 308). Thus the four elder sons come first, Reuben, Simeon, Levi, Judah ; but then the order of birth is abandoned, and Leah's other two sons, Zebulon (Jacob's tenth son) and Issachar (Jacob's ninth son), are inserted, Zebulon being placed before Issachar, as the future that Jacob predicts for him is more prosperous and honourable than that of Issachar (Di.). Cf. Deut. 33, 18, CHAP. 49. 325 where Zebulon and Issachar come together, but Zebulon first, as here. The four last sons are cited according to their geographical position; Benjamin, Joseph, Naphtali, Asher (from south to north), Joseph and Benjamin also being in the proper order of their birth. Dan is probably placed after Issachar, as being the first son of Jacob by his wives' hand- maidens (in order of birth he follows Judah, but as the order of birth is abandoned to enumerate Leah's six sons, Dan, the fifth, is mentioned first, after the six sons of Leah). Gad would then be placed after Dan, and before Naphtali, who was born before him, so as not to disturb the geographical arrange- ment — Benjamin, Joseph, Naphtali, Asher — and possibly to keep Zilpah's two sons together. In Deut. 33, the ' Blessing of Moses,' — which has many points of contact with this chapter, both in the figures it employs and the language used, — the order is varied ; viz. Reuben, Judah, Levi (whose blessing contrasts strangely with Jacob's words in ver. 5), Benjamin, Joseph (Ephraim and Manasseh are mentioned by name), Zebulon, Issachar, Gad, Dan, Naphtali, Asher, while Simeon in the text as we now have it is not mentioned at all. The language of this chapter should be noticed. In its elevated tone, in vigour and force, and in the numerous figurative expressions employed, it surpasses the other poeti- cal passages in Genesis (9, 25 ff. 14, 19 ff. 24, 66. 25, 23. 27, 27 fif. 39 f ). Many of the expressions employed are rare, and unusual in the later stages of the language, e. g. tnsi (an-ag Xey.) and TTlin, ver. 4; m3D, ver. 5 (a ava^ Xey. of uncertain meaning); ppHD, ver. 10 (occurring again (in the poetical fragment) Num. 21, 18. Deut. 33, 21. Judg. g, 14. Ps. 60, 9); niD, ver. II {aira^ \ey.); l^'^^n, ver. 12 {ana^ Xey.); Q'TlSJE'D, ver. 14 (only found once again, Judg. 5, 16); )S''a{J', ver. 17 (ana^ \ey.) ; li'li'E', ver. 21 (only used thus in this passage); 336 GENESIS, niS, ver. 2 2 (observe the archaic fem. ending), only in this passage for nib; ni, ver. 23 {22") is perhaps found again in Ps. 18, 15 m t:''p^3, see the note on this verse); intJ'p . . . 3^1, ver. 24, etc.; also the archaic ending V (the old binding vowel) in pj^ nON, IJDN "Jn; the suffix n for i, in HT-y and rifflD, and possibly in rip''B' (cf the note on this word); the poetical vlj for 75? ; nna, poetical for tf'aJ, with which it is here parallel, ver. 6; ''nox, ver. 21, poetical for ''■131; the poetical VT" "iJJIT, ver. 24, etc. Probably this chapter is the oldest portion of the book of Genesis, being incorporated into one of the original documents, out of which the present book grew, from a still older source. On the special litera- ture of this chapter, see Tuch, p. 479 f., and Di., p. 435 f. 1. D3n^^ i'^1p\ Nip = mp, as in 42, 4; cf the note on that passage. C^tS'^n iT'in^^n . ' In days to come' lit. ' in the end of days! ITiinx is used here as in Num. 24, 14. Deut. 4, 30. Jer. 23, 20, etc., denoting the end of the period which the prophet sees, or which he has in view. The LXX have tV ((Txarav t£>v rnKpav; cf. Heb. I, I and I Pet. I, 20 (eff iaxarav tS>v xpo'""""); Syr. Jl^iT? ]^J^; Onq. N^'Oi'' «liD3; Vulg. ' in diebus novissimis! The formula is also common in pro- phecy in a somewhat different sense, e. g. Hos. 3, 5. Mic. 4, i. Ez. 38, 16. 2. ' Gather yourselves and hear, sons of Jacob ; And hearken unto Israel your father . 3. Reuben — my firstborn art thou, my strength and the firstfruits of my vigour. Excelling in dignity and excelling in might. Boiling over like water, excel not thou ; For thou didst go up to thy father's bed: There thou didst pollute it; he went up to my couch !' CHAP. 49, VERS. 1-4. 327 Reuben, Jacob's firstborn, excels his brethren in dignity and power, but loses his privileges through his sin. In the post-Mosaic time the tribe of Reuben sinks into obscurity. With the exception of one successful campaign against the Hagarenes (i Chron. 5, 8-10), nothing more is known of the doings of this tribe. njli^ "'"iDi might be rendered, ' my firstborn, thou' re- garding nns as a vocative; the rendering given above is, however, better. TIS = ' my manly strength! iJINI, )1X, as in Deut. 21, 17. Ps. 78, 51. 105, 36, of genital power. LXX, o-u lax^s ^ov Koi apxf] T€Kva>v fiov • Vulg. ' et principium dolor is mei' (as though tif* were t?.?), following (as often) Aq. KfcpaXaiov Xv-rr-qs liov, and Symm. apxfj oSuvi/s ij.ov. 1)} "in^l nb^to liT^, nt. 'excellence of dignity and excel- lence of power ^ "irT" both times being abstract for concrete. riNE' as in Ps. 62, 5. Job 13, 11. 31, 23. Hab. i, 7. TJ? not an adj. but pausal form of TV, see on 43, 14; so K^\ in ver. 27 in pause for ^'^\. The LXX render a-fX-qpos (f>e'peili33 fpi'in nrhn aD''»^ '/or thee it was T;— t; * T :''-T tt; - • , j provided to receive three portions, the right of firstborn, priest- hood, and the kingdom', in accordance with the Jewish tradi- tion, which assigned these three privileges to Reuben as the firstborn. 4. D^?25 tnO, lit. 'a bubbling over like water.' The root rna in Arabic {y^ I,V) = 'to boast;' in Aramaic the subs. JLolus' occurs in the Pesh. Vers., 2 Cor. 12, 21. Eph. 4, 19 = ao-eOiyem. The root properly = ' /o exceed bounds, be inordinate;' LXX well, i^i^puras. Only the comparison gives the idea of boiling or bubbling. tnS), Uke "iH^ in the preceding 3a8 GENESIS, verse, is abstract for concrete; of. Ewald, § 296b; Driver, § 189. Obs. The words may be taken as vocative, or (with Del.) as a descriptive apposition to the subject piKT. The Heb.-Sam. has JJitns, and the other Vss. render as though J^fna stood instead of fn§ ; but it is not necessary to suppose that the text they translated from actually had the second pers. of the verb, their renderings are probably chosen to express tHQ with greater clearness. ^IHS, part, of tnsi, occurs twice in the O. T., Judg. 9, 4. Zeph. 3, 4; in the sense of ' wanton' in Judg. 1. c, and ' boasting ' in Zeph. I. c, of false prophets. "inin 7t^, i.e. with reference to the in'' mentioned in ver. 3. Render, ' Do not thou excel' (the jussive, with a nega- tive, expressing a desire or wish, Driver, § 50 y), i. e. ' mayest thou lose the privileges that belong to thee as firstborn,' viz. those mentioned in ver. 3. LXX, /xi) cKfeo-iyr (cf. Lagarde's Genesis Graece, p. 202, notes), which Geiger, Urschrift, p. 373, regards, not as indicating a different reading, but as a paraphrase on the part of the LXX, who refer iniD back to tns, the paraphrase being due to a desire to mitigate the effects of Reuben's sin. The Syriac has jtc^l JU, reading the text as iriiJii. "f^l« ^n5ti)D Ts'hv ^5. n^v is here construed with the ace, as in Num. 13, 17 nnn nx QlT'J'ri. ''3iE'D, Di. ex- plains the plural as meaning a double bed ; Del. explains it by Ges., § 108. 2 (nouns denoting extension of space or time, used in the plural). With the plural here, V3N ij)isi gf I Chron. 5, I may be compared, Reuben also being referred to. nbj^ ''J^l!?'^. These words are addressed, in astonishment at Reuben's sin, by Jacob to his other sons ; therefore the third pers.; cf. Is. 42, 20. 51, 18. 52, 14. The LXX, Pesh., CHAP. 49, VER. 5. 339 Onq. render as though the text had n^y, possibly an attempt to amend the Heb. text, which is not necessary, while the Vulg. leaves rhv untranslated, and makes ''J)!^'' the obj. of r)7?n. Geiger, Urschrift, p. 374, supposes that these words were not the real text, but that ^''^'^ ''^yi\ was written originally, which Afterwards was changed into ni^jj ''V1V'', as being too clear. He objects to our present text because everywhere else V1V* is used in the plural, and only in this passage in the singular. Di. describes his emendation, which is very needless, as 'the purest prose.' Ewald, History^, i- V- 635: Eng. trans., i. p. 373, foot-note, renders, 'my couch of highness' 'my lofty couch,' pointing >wV as np'y^'a step,' a rendering that can scarcely be justified. In i Chron. 1. c. the right of firstborn, which Reuben lost, is given to Joseph, while Judah received his (Reuben's) privilege of royalty. In Deut. 33, 6 Reuben's blessing is as follows : 7NI pINT Ti'' "IBDO ITID ST^ no'' 'Let R. live and not die, yet let his men be few! 5-7. ' Simeon and Levi are brethren; Weapons of violence are their shepherds' staves. Into their council, let not my soul come; With their assembly, let not my honour be united; For in their anger they slew men, And in their wantonness houghed oxen. Cursed be their anger, for it was fierce; And their wrath, for it was cruel: I will divide them in facob, And scatter them in Israel.' 5. QTli^, either predicate or in apposition to ''lijl jlSJOt^. Simeon and Levi are brothers, not only as sons of the same parents, but as being alike in their dispositions. Drrrn^D. The meaning of this word, which only 330 GENESIS, occurs in this passage, is very uncertain, (i) It is commonly rendered ' sword', a meaning which was first hinted at by the Jews, who compared m3D fancifully with the Greek [laxaipa ; see Bereshith Rabba, c. 99 '•Jl'' pE'^ pni'' ''3T ION .onTinaD ininiiaD onciN tj'^i jn''3D nmni' imp "'a p-fao sin OTinhDI TniinD nDN nXT noa n.TnPUD ' RahM Johman says the word ni"i30 w a Greek word, as they (the Greeks) call sivords |1^0D {y-axaipai). Others think that nnOO = nilUD, comparing Ez. 16, 3.' Del. also assigns the meaning ^ sword' to nn3D, deriving it from 1^3, or rather T]3=n>,3 (after the analogy of nnXD, nnjD, n-jpD), which has the meaning "■ to dig' or ^pierce! Hieron. and Rashi also render ^ sword;' see Ges., Thes., p. 672. (2) Tuch assigns to the word the meaning '■plot ' or ' contrivance,' lit. ' windings,' from TiD = ' to wind,' but, as Del. points out, "n3 does not mean ' to wind,' but ' to he round; ' while L. de Dieu and Maurer also render ^plots' but get this meaning from n3D = makara in Ethiopic and ^^ in Arabic, ' to plan,' ' contrive.' We must then, however, point the form dn''rii:pD, not Dn''niDp; see Ewald, § 260 a. (3) Kn., Boettcher, § 791 (though he adheres to the Mass. pointing), and others render, ' marriage contracts,' as though n3D = the Syriac tlas ' desponsavit ;' "XSa, however, means ' to sell' and if "13D can = ;^n" (which in Heb. would usually be rendered by ino), as ;^^« is always used of ' the wooer ' or ' suitor ' (Del), (see, however, Payne Smith, Thesaurus Syriacus, col. 2107), the reference to Dinah's brethren would be hardly suitable — though the next verse certainly refers to the incident narrated in chap. 34 — and 'marriage contracts' could scarcely be called D^^3. Knobel alters the reading into Dnin^iO. (4) Di. derives the word from lia '■to be round,' and says it means a ^ round curved instrument,' perhaps a 'curved knife' or 'sickle.' CHAP. 49, VER. 6. 331 Ewald, Hist?, ii. p. 493, Eng. trans., ii. p. 349, and Wellhausen, History 0/ Israel, Eng. trans., p. 144, render (also from TiD), ' shepherds' staves,' or as we should say in English, ' shepherds' crooks' which perhaps is the most suitable rendering. The LXX have iTvvire\e(Tav aSiKiav i^ alpicreuts avraiv, as though the text were D^''^l^^2p Don ipa ' they ended the violence of their nature;' so Geiger translates, Urschri/t, p. 374 f., regarding this translation of the LXX as intended to tone down the violence of Simeon and Levi's conduct. The Syriac has yooix^a »:« )jt^»? Jj)>io '' instruments of violence from their nature;' possibly they connected i^"33p with nn>i3D '■ hirth' 'descent! Onq. renders «1123 ^nay pnri^ianin Tm I'"!?"'? T"!?? ' mighty men, in the land they dwelt in they did a mighty deed,' as though DnTl'iao = Dn''-il3tp ; so Kimchi and the A.V., who supply ' in,' which is wanting in the Heb. text. Onq.'s rendering seems an endeavour to transform Simeon and Levi's cruel deed into a noble one. The Vulg. gives ' vasa iniquitatis hellantia' 6. The first portion of this verse is rendered as follows in the A.V. and A.V. R. : ' my soul, come not thou into their secret {kN. R. " council" marg. "secret"); unto their assembly, mine honour (A.V. R. " my glory "), be not thou united,' taking N3n and nnn as second pers. sing. masc. (though tJ'S3 is more commonly fem.), and ''B'aJ and "133 as vocatives. The rendering given above is that adopted by Di. and Del. nnn is imperf. Qal of IDJ. The Heb.-Sam. reads in'' bv(. "'lis, ' my honour' or 'glory,' is rhythmically interchanged with {^s: here. In Ps. 7, 6 n33 is parallel to ''tS'SJ, and in Ps. 16, 9. 108, 2 to >:b; cf. also Ps. 30, 13. 57, 9, where it is used in the sense of E'SJ. n33 is here fem. by Ewald, SSa GENESIS, § 174b (names of invisible active powers are fern.; so E'SJ is usually fem., and ''133 being parallel to it, is also regarded as fern.). The LXX render naj inn ba with /xr, ipia-ai to ijTiaTa fiov, as though the text were ''1?? "in)"P« ; see Geiger, Urschrift, p. 319, who regards the rendering of the LXX as intentional, to avoid the possibility of confounding the human 133 (Doxa) with the divine, the word 133, when equivalent to tyaa, having ' both the idea of divine majesty and the idea of the higher human nature.' ^l5''^^ may be either collective — cf. the rendering given above — or the sing, may be used poetically for the plural. DJJJin. 'In their wanton wraths JIXI, here parallel to fix, means 'unrestrained passion;' cf. Esther 9, 5 I'WI Cl31!i13 niTNJto. Tl© Tlpi^. ' They houghed oxen,' i. e. severed the sinews of the thigh and so rendered the animals useless ; so LXX, fvevpoKOTTTja-av ravpov; cf. Josh. II, 6. 9. 2 Sam. 8, 4. Onq., Pesh., Aq., Symm., Hieron., Vulg., and A.V. (but not A.V. R.) take -\W as TiB*, and render, 'a wait' (this reading, according to Wright, being found in -three MSS.), point- ing r\pV, lipy (cf. Zeph. 2, 4), and taking "i?y in the sense, 'they destroyed,' a meaning of the root which is common in Aramaic. Kn. points out that in 34, 28 f. Jacob's sons carried off the cattle as spoil, and Di., p. 439, suggests that the rendering ' wail' may have been adopted to avoid a discrepancy in the narrative here and in chap. 34. Schumann and others consider that -|'iB> refers to 031^, the son of ilDn, comparing Ps. 68, 31. Deut. 33, 17, also Ps. 22, 13. Is. 14, 9, but this reference to n3B' is very doubtful, and seems hardly justified by the passages cited in its defence. CHAP. 49, VERS. 7, 8. 35^ 7. ty is the pausal form of tJ?; so ''H pausal form of ''H, 25, 7, and P"^ pausal form of PI, Ex. 32, 20. nntyp ''^ . . . tj^ "^3. Cf. a similar change in Song of Songs 8, 6 m:p b)ii^2 riB'p ninx niD3 ntsj la. The Heb.-Sam. text has T-'nx for int<, and Ciri-)3ni^ for Dri"i3j)1, probably an intentional change, so that Jacob should not be represented as cursing them. The Sam. Version renders in the same way as the Heb.-Sam. text; cf Targ. Ps.-Jon. In Deut. 33, 8 f Levi's blessing is entirely different in its tone from the severe language used by Jacob in this chapter ; vi^hile Simeon is not mentioned in Deut. 33, at least in our present text. The Simeonites received as their portion several cities in the 2J3, i. e. the southern portion of Palestine, in the midst of the territory of Judah (cf. Josh. 15, 26-32. 42 with Josh. 19, 1-9. I Chron. 4, 28-32); while Levi, according to Num. 35. Josh. 21, receives no special portion of territory, but has forty-eight cities assigned to him to dwell in by the other tribes. 8-12. 'Judah, thou, may thy brethren praise thee : May thy hand he on the neck of thy foes ; May thy father's sons bow down to thee. A lion's whelp is Judah; From the prey, my son, art thou gone up: He couched, he lay down like a lion. And like a lioness; who can rouse him ? The marshaWs staff shall not depart from Judah, Nor the leader's staff from between his feet. Until he come to Shiloh; And may the obedience of the peoples be his. Binding to the vine his foal. 334 GENESIS, And to the Sorek vine his ass's colt : He washes in wine his garments; And in the Mood of grapes his raiment: Dark are his eyes with wine. And white his teeth with milk^ 8. The name here suggests the form of the blessing; cf. 29, 35, as though it were, 'Praise . . . thy brethren shall praise thee! nnt^ prefixed as a nom. abs., like ''3JX in 24^ 27 ; cf. the note on that passage, also Ewald, § 309 b ; Ges., § 145. 2. "lai ?1"13^1 ']T. Cf. Job 16, 12 ijssvs'i •'D-iyn rnsi. '7"'nS "^Dl. Not Tns or ipf. '-n, but T^X 'n ; for all Jacob's sons — not only those Leah bore him — shall praise Judah. 9. rmrr^ iT'"1t^ IIJI. The comparison with a lion is not uncommon; see Deut. 33, 20 (where Gad is compared with a lioness), and 22 (where Dan is spoken of as a lion's whelp); cf also Num. 23, 24. 24, 9 (which bears a striking resemblance to this passage, WDipi ''D N''ni'Dl nN:D 33B' J)13), Mic. g, 7. J^"'7y "^32 f|1!0O. 'From the prey, my son, art thou gone up', i. e. Judah is like a lion reascending to the mountain (cf. Song of Songs 4, 8) after having devoured his prey. LXX render n*7V with dyc/Si)?, and 5)100 with Ik ^\aaTov, taking it as in Ez. 17, 9 i^n^V ''a"iD"P3 'all its fresh springing leaves! n?JJ Hif. is found in Ez. 19, 3, meaning 'to bring up (of a lion) ; ' but as npy is generally only used of vegetation in the sense to 'grow up' the rendering, 'From the prey, my son, art thou gone up' is preferable. If Judah were compared to a lion growing up, the addition of Nni^ai nns'D would be hardly necessary. CHAP. 49, VERS. 8-IO. 335 i^''i73 . The lioness, defending her young, is fiercer than the lion (Herod, iii. 108). 10. ff^DJ^ . . . "^1D^ is7. The rendering given above is that adopted by Di. and Del. ; but as will be shewn below it cannot be regarded as satisfactory. First of all let us examine the rendering of the A.V. and A.V. R., ' uniil Shiloh corned i"'??' ^ is here taken as a personal name, possibly mean- ing ^ peaceful! or ' peace-bringer.' But, as is generally ad- mitted (see Professor Driver, in the Cambridge Journal of Philology, xiv. 2, and in The Expositor, July, 1885), there are serious philological difiiculties in the way of this view. As pointed in our present texts, the ending Vi must either stand for the suffix of the third pers. masc. sing., or mark I the word as a pr. n. ; cf. 1"ln^ nj?, nn, riDPE', etc. From these examples the word might, as far as its form goes, be a personal pr. n. If it be a pr. n., it must ob- viously, in a passage like the present, have some special significance. n'?''E' apparently must be connected with xh^, which denotes '■to be at ease' or 'quiet.' The only exact parallel is '"i??, the name of a place. But neither npj nor xh'^ can be derived from n?J and n?E' respectively, after the analogy of "iitJ'''3, "ito'ip; for — as Tuch argues, and Del. allows — they would, if derived from T\"h verbs, following analogy, be ''i^''? and "''h^. But the Gentile names ''Jii'''? and ''Jii'''E' (2 Sam. 15, 12. I Kings 11, 29) shew that n'^iB' and n?''!! are really apocopated from p?''^ and ti?''?, and have to be regarded as coming from the roots *7W or ?iB', and ' The word ri"!* is pointed riS'^, ri'jti, and iSw. The first punctua- tion with the scriptio plena, being of a later date than ri';il5, ibii), is only found a few times. It is worthy of notice that the scriptio plena is not found on the Moabite stone, nor do the Versions have it in n'jffl. 33<5 GENESIS, *b)i or b' = 'an interpreter,' 'announcer' The Pesh. in Deut. 33, 21. Judg. 5, 14. Is. 33, 22 uses the same word again for p\>no. Possibly this is a free translation on the part of the Syriac Vers. ; in the two passages in the Psalms (60, 9, 108, 9) where ppno occurs, the Pesh. gives wco^jc ' my king.' The ppHD in both the Psalms is Judah. -oi o«^f; ^ji>, the Syriac renders rh^, like the LXX, = ri-)B'. In the present text the Pesh. has nothing to explain the fem. 4.M- Possibly the original form of the text has been pre- served by Aphraates (330-350 a. d.), who gives )l'c£iXi,= ' kingdom,' after wot . This version also connects nnp'' with "Ji?, '■'Ji?'? in its rendering ^ciusaj. Onq. has Tap '^V'; N^ xn''E'D '-ffn ny nd^v ny \nij3 ^jap n-jbdi nn>in^ n''3'=i» ]d^ib> N^ODy t^'J'Ipnf ! ^'b] ^ pjb "'"IDt^. nON, the construct state with the binding vowel ''— , so ''JH; cf. 31, 39 and the note on that passage. On the cstr. state before a prep., see Ges., § 116. i; M. R., § 73. Rem. a ; so (with the archaic connecting vowel V) Is. 22, 16 y^B? N'Pt'h; Obad. 3 V^D-il|ini i:^^; Mic. 7, 14 TlD^ ''J3B'; Ps. 123, I D'lOB'a W'sH. iT1"'y. On the archaic orthography ri (for i), see the note on 9, 21. nn^y is for nn'j; (the abs. state is I^S?) ; cf n^a iD"'?^ \ih, and W; so n^B' in Is. 10, 17 makes irT'B', not in''a>; see Stade, § 100; Ewald, § 255 b, who also cites iB'*'1, Deut. 25, 4, as though from ^^;\; but iK'^'H may be inf. cstr. of ti''l.. Onq. and the Sam. Vers, and Heb.-Sam. take ITj; as='^zf city!' rtplto. 'The soreh vine,' so called from the red colour (iJXi) of the grapes. Both the grapes and the wine were of a specially choice kind. In the territory of Judah the vine flourished; cf Joel i, 7 ff. 4, 18. 2 Chron. 26, 10, and Num. 13) 23 f, where the vineyards near Hebron, and Song of Songs I, 14, where those of En-gedi, are mentioned. CHAP. 49, VERS. II, 13. 343 DUD. Cf. the use of )*m in Job 29, 6. Di. considers this a continuation of the part. "ilDN ; cf. Ges., § 134. 2. Rem. 2; Driver, § 117. In this construction the second verb is usually connected with the part, by waw conv., or simple waw and the perfect, the perfect being separated from the waw by some word or words ; cf. ver. 1 7 ?sil , , , IB'jn. It seems more natural to disconnect 0^3 and nox, following the accents, and to render as above. nn'ID. This word only occurs in this passage; on the suffix ri, see on n'TiJ?. The Heb.-Sam. reads iniD3, which is possibly the correct reading. But as there seems to be no authority for the elision of the 3 (1^1 for ffJ is not parallel), it will be better to derive the word from a root niD ' to envelop! ' wrap up,' niD being contracted for nilp ; cf. the noun niDD, which comes from the same verb HID. HID may=the Arab. (jf^J (the D in Heb. corresponding exceptionally to an Arabic j) ■z^abdidit celavit, conj.VII, ahdidit se. 12. □"'J'^y ''S"'v3n. The '' is not the binding vowel, as in nON, ''OD, but 'hh'^n is an adj. from ^J^n (see Ewald, § 164 a), with a repetition of the last two letters of the root (see Stade, § 149). (Del. compares ''11"'i?,^, but this word does not actually occur, though the fem. form n![?li|^, Hos. 6, 10, is found in the Ktb., and might presuppose a masc. 'I'l"']!,?'.) The adjec- tival ending '-^ is common, e. g. 'hf\, ^pa, ^33 , 'Y>^. The root ^DPl (which, however, is not found) corresponds (appar- ently) with J5^ ' to be obscure and doubtful.' Del. on Ps. 10, 8 compares also the Arab, di:- ' to be jet black! U^TV 'h'h^Vi. Cf. Prov. 23, 29 DTV niWan ''oi'. The construction is the same as in IND nss 29, 17; see on 12, 11. D"'2ty"]l'?1 . "I?^ cstr. state of I?^, from an abs. state t?^ ; so 3^0 cstr. state of ^T}, from an abs. state 3?n, which 344 GENESIS, with Maqqef would be 2^n; so "^'J^f, Ps. 35, 14, from 73K; see Stade, § 202 a; Ges., § 93. 2. Rem. i. With this verse, cf. Joel 4, 18. Amos 9, 13. The pasture lands of Judah were celebrated; see i Sam. 25, 2. Amos i, i. 2 Chron. 26, lO. 13. 'Zebulon — on the shore of the sea shall he dwell: And he himself shall be on a shore of ships, With his harder ly Sidon.' There is possibly an allusion here to the meaning of the name Zebulon {'dweller') given in 30, 20. pttJi C^Qi fjinS. In Judg. 5, 17 Asher is spoken of thus, Cl''B!: I^np T^\^ and in Deut. 33,. 19 Zebulon and Issachar ' suck the abundance of the seas ' (ipji* QiC yaK*). Zebulon's territory did not in reality lie on the seashore, so perhaps we ought to render "v b)i with Del. ' towards Sidon,' i.e. his border lay in the direction of Sidon, but was not actually on the seashore, only towards the coast district. The Sam.Ver., Heb.-Sam., LXX, Syr., Vulg., and apparently Onq. i^V. ''Pp) read •])!=' up to S.; which would express the meaning 'in the direction of more clearly than ^y. Accord- ing to Jos. {Ant., V. I. 22 ; Bel.fud., iii. 3. i) Zebulon inhabited the district from the lake of Gennesareth to Mount Carmel on the Mediterranean, and in support of this Tuch compares Josh. 19, II with Matt. 4, 13. n"']^^ Plinb Nim. On the rendering 'he himself, see Ewald, § 314 b (sini added in a new proposition, with special force, as the subject). Cf 2 Sam. 17, 10, where further emphasis is produced by the addition of DJ. 14, 15. 'Issachar is a strong ass. Lying down between the sheep folds : And he saw a resting-place, that it was good. CHAP. 49, VERS. 13-15. 345 And the land, that it was pleasant; So he bowed his back to bear, And became a servant in bondage.' 14. Q'13 "^Dn, lit. 'an ass 0/ bone,' i.e. a strongly built, powerful ass; so Aq. ovos o(rTa)Sr]s,Yxi]g.' asinusybrtis.' The Sam. Vers, has 'UtTt^/'f'KA, reading D^"}?. {' sojourners'), ^hich Geiger defends as the correct reading (Urschrift, p. 360), Issachar being ^ an ass of strangers', i.e. bearing the burdens of strangers, and subject to them. But Del. points out that this rendering destroys the force of the figurative expression IDn, and some other word, such as d'lf or d''lDJ, would be expected rather than Q*"!?. The Heb.-Sam. has Cinj, which Tuch punctuates D''"12,= the Arab. Ij^ 'bony.' The LXX have TO KoKov i7T€6viJ.rja-ev, which presupposes some such read- ing as Dna ncn (Geiger); see Ps. 119, 20, LXX. □"'nOtlJJDn. This word is only found once again, Judg. 5, 16, though we find D^PISE' in Ps. 68, 14 = ' sheep-folds.' nTiaB'D is probably from r\S)^=' to fx.' Ewald, § 186 a, explains the word as = ' double pen,' with reference to the cattle being usually separated into two portions in the pen ; while Stade, § 340 b, classes the word with those that denote ' instruments or other things consisting of two parts belong- ing to one another, or standing in pairs, one opposite to the other; so DTlion;' see also Ges., Thes., 1471 f. The word in this verse, and Judg. 5, 16, is used as a proverbial expression for the easy life of the agriculturist. Onq. renders X^JOinn p3 ' between the boundaries' so Vulg. ' inter ierminos,' while the LXX have ava /leaov Toiv KKrjpcou (but in Judg. dva jtieVoi' 7-ijs Siyofiias), and the Syr. ULah, 1^J!=> ' between the paths! 15. nn37^, either 'rest' or 'a resting-place', as the word occurs with both meanings. 346 GENESIS, mtS must be taken as a neuter subs.= ' a good thing! The Heb.-Sam. has nnitD (fern, adj.), which perhaps suits the parallelism better (i^^W). "I3S^ DQ/ ^r\'^*\, \\t.' and was {reduced) lo the forced service of a labourer! The phrase 13J) DiDij n*n recurs Josh. i6, lo; cf. I Kings 9, 21, and DDi? nVT (without 13y) is found in Judg. I, 30. 33. Is. 31, 8, both expressions always meaning the compulsory service rendered by slaves, prisoners, or con- quered nations. Del. points out that Issachar is not a '<3, i. e. 'a wild ass ' wandering about at will, but a "liOH, i. e. 'a beast of burden' and sees in the last clause of the verse an allusion to the meaning of the name nactfi {—"dV N2''' or "yyo B"; cf. 30, 16. 18). Issachar, though strong and active, prefers a life of ease and indolence, sinking even into the condition of bond-slave. Cf Judg. 5, 16, where Reuben is reproached in similar language for his inactivity and aversion from active exertion. The LXX render the words DDi) Tfl "13y Kin dy(v!j6ri avrjp yeapyos, an attempt to do away with the reproach contained in the verse, and Onq. completely changes the meaning of the last clause of the verse in his paraphrase, ' He will subdue the provinces of the peoples, destroy their inhabitants, and those who are left among them shall be ser- vants unto him, and bringers of tribute;' cf Geiger, I.e., p. 360. 16, 17. ' Dan shall judge his people. As one of the tribes of Israel. Let Dan be a serpent in the way, A horned adder in the path : That biteth the horse s heels, So that his rider falleth backwards! 16. Dan, though a tribe by no means powerful, and pos- sessing only a small territory, will maintain the cause of CHAP. 49, VERS. l6, 17, 347 Israel, in its conflicts with the heathen nations, as valiantly as the other tribes ; cf. Judg. 13-16. pT' yi. Notice the play upon the name p in the choice of the verb pIV I'^T' = ' will judge' i. e. plead the cause of, render help to ; V\ always has this meaning, cf. 30, 6. Deut. 32, 36. Jer. 22, 16, and not the meaning 'rule' or 'govern.' ")Qy = the people of Israel, as in Deut. 33, 1. Others (Vatablus, Rosenmiiller, etc.) understand loy as the people belonging to the tribe of Dan, and explain the verse as meaning the small tribe of Dan will have its own administra- tion and its own jurisdiction ; or Dan, though a small tribe, will maintain its own independence (Tuch, Wellh.). But both these views take p'T'='z«z7/ rule' or 'govern,' a meaning which, as above remarked, p does not have. 17. 'TTT "^hv, so mx ''^y, "bv, being the poetical form for ?y ; cf. vN, poetical for ?^ (but only in the book of Job); ''7.J|, poetical for HJ?. iQ'^Dty, a aira^ Xfyo/i. ; perhaps the ending |1- is diminutive in this word (see Stade, § 296 c), the word being probably from the root f\tt^=' to crawl.' IDiDB' is the horned adder, a small and very dangerous species of snake, of a bluish yellow or sand colour. Hieronymus renders it by ' regulus ' in his Quaest., ed. Lagarde, p. 69; the Syriac )SJoiL='a basilisk,' the Vulg. ' cerastes,' Onq. NJn''a=' an adder.' The LXX, not understanding the word ja''at^, render it, in harmony with the context, iyKa6r]fi.evos. In Arabic »_a.». = ' a serpent with black and white spots' In Deut. 33, 22 Dan is compared with ' a lion's whelp that springeth out of Bashan.' ''ipy, dag. dirimens, see on nnpS ver. 10. ^Cl . . . ']©3n. Cf. the note on 27, 33. 348 GENESIS, The meaning of the verse is, Dan, like the serpent lurking in the path, attacks his foes, not in open fight, but with stratagem; cf Judg. i8, 27, and the history of Samson. 1 8. * For thy help 1 wait, Yahweh'. This verse breaks the connection of the poem, hence it is regarded by some (Maurer, Olshausen, etc.) as an interpo- lation ; but if this is the case it must have been added at a later date by the redactor of the book, as a protest against Dan's idolatrous devices. It is found in all the Vss. Tuch explains it as ' an exclamation from the patriarch Jacob, who is exhausted and nerving himself for another effort before his death.' Kn., whom Di. follows, says, ' The patriarch here speaks in prayer, in the nanje of his descendants, who must, in the wars with the nations, e. g. the Philistines, put their trust in Yahweh, and look for His assistance.' So the Targg. Ps.-Jon. and Jer., Wright, Del., and Driver. 19. ' Gad — a troop shall press upon him, Fet he shall press upon their heel.' Gad, though exposed to the attacks of his foes (cf. Josh. 13, 25. Judg. II, 15), and probably often engaged in border warfare with marauding bands (cf 2 Kings 5, 2. 6, 23), suc- cessfully defends himself and puts his enemies to flight (cf. Judg. 10 f 12. I Chron. 5, 18 ff. 12, 8f.); cf Deut. 33, 20. 21. The name IJ is here connected by the writer with nij 'to assail' and Ti*iJ = 'a marauding band' (see 2 Kings, I.e.), in the sense 'assailer' or 'attacker.' In 30, 11 another explanation of the name is suggested. 13-113"' nn:! -t:i. Cf Hab. 3, 16 wiir au^ m^y^. 3pJ), the rendering given above, follows the reading D3pl?, which is adopted by Bleek, Knobel, 01s., Wright, and others, the D of lE'XD being taken away and appended to apy. The LXX, Syriac, Vulg., and Saad. in a measure support this CHAP. 49, VERS. 18-30. 349 reading, as ihey do not translate the commencement of the next verse "ityxD, but ntJ'N. npy by itself, as Di. remarks, is sufficient, but, as Del. points out, with the rendering ' their heel' (A.V. R. margin), 19^ and 20=^ alike gain in clearness. All the other 'blessings,' except Joseph's in ver. 22, begin with the name of the person blessed, without any preceding word. The rendering 'heel' is more forcible than 'rearguard.' Gad is depicted as pressing hotly on his foes, almost on the heels of the retreating enemy. 3py cannot = liriN ' back- wards ' (Vulg. ' relrorsum '), nor ' at the last,' A.V. The A.V. R. renders correctly, ' upon their heel'. 20. ' Asher^fat is his bread, And he shall yield kingly dainties'. This rendering follows the reading IK'S, the pr. name being a casus pendens, like 13 in ver. 19; cf. Deut. 32, 4. Ps. II, 4, etc. If the reading "itTND be adopted (so the Sam. Ver.), the rendering will be either, 'From Asher [comes) fat — his bread', so Tuch; cf. D^JOtr, Is. 25, 6 ; or, 'For Asher — his bread is too fat; Ewald. With the first rendering, nE'SD = "N pN», which is perhaps not quite suitable to the context, and nJDt:' fern, is not found as a noun ; with the second, IDn? must be taken as feminine; see Bott., § 657, who distinguishes be- tween DD^ = ' bread', masc, and On? = ' abundance of bread' (Brotfiille), fem. The Sam. Vers,, according to one reading, has )po masc. 'T^D ■'JiyQ. ' Dainties fit for kings! Cf. Dnux DH^, Ps. 78, 25. It is not necessary to think of a king of Israel in the term ^i'D. The fertility and productiveness of Asher are again alluded 350 GENESIS, to in Deut. 33, 24 f. Di. suggests that as the Phoenicians procured all sorts of country produce from the Hebrews (Ez. 27, 17. Acts 12, 20; Jos., Antiq., xiv. 10. 6), Asher, from his geographical position, would participate largely in this traffic. 21. ' Naphtali is a hind at large. He that utters goodly words'. rrh^D rh^VH = •« hind Ut loose; so a. v. and A.V. R.; Aq. f'kacpos aTTfaTaKjiivos, Vulg. ' cervus emissus.' The Syriac paraphrases, but with the same meaning, JU^ It^J^^ 'a swift messenger;' cf. Job 39, 5 "iJi ''B'sn Nna rb^ 'D. Del., Tuch, and others take nrh^ in the sense ' stretched out,' so 'graceful; but there seems to be no authority for this rendering in the case of living beings. Knobel, comparing Is. 16,2 (n?K>D IP), renders, ' a scared hind; but this thought is very unsuitable, and quite out of harmony with the context. The allusion in this part of the verse is probably to the swiftness of the heroes and men of the tribe of Naphtali (cf. for the expression, Ps. 18, 34. Hab. 3, 19. Is. 35, 6; also 2 Sam. 2, 18. Song of Songs 2, 9). The Syriac seems to interpret the first half of the verse as meaning that Naphtali is specially adapted for the duties of a messenger, while Chris- tian writers see an allusion in nWB' to the apostles (Syriac ID© ■'IQ^ \T\T\. The allusion here is to the poets of the tribe, Barak, however, being the only one of whom we hear anything (Judg. 5, i). \T\in naturally refers to '•^nSJ, and not to np'N, which is fem. The reading of the LXX, Nt^^aXl a-riKcxos avcifiivov imhi- hovs iv TM yivvTjixaTi KciKXos, seems to rest on some such reading as ■iaK''-n''lpK [nSn nn^E' n^^N ijjpiaj, i.e. ni5iK = CHAP. 49, VERS. 31, 33. 351 'terebinth; for nW, and ''"}.''1?N (cf. Is. 17, 6. ^)=' topmost branches,' for the poetical ''ipN . Di., Ewald, 01s., and others follow this reading, comparing for the epithet nn?B', Jer. 1 7, 8. Ez. 17, 6. Ps. 80, 12, and the noun npB' 'shoot; 'blossom; Song of Songs 4, 1 3, and for the figure, ver. 2 2 ; the i"i'i»N are then the leaders produced by the tribe of Naphtali ; cf. Judg. 4, 6. 5, 18. 6, 35. 7, 23. If this reading be adopted, the rendering would be 'Naphtali is a slender terebinth, that puts forth beautiful branches: Onq. has 'Oin^ N5CI T\^:i >%^l 'Naphtali, in a goodly land shall his lot be cast, and his possession shall be yielding fruits, they shall praise and bless over them; which apparently supports this reading. 22-26. ' A son of a fruit tree is foseph, A son of a fruit tree by a fountain; His branches run over the wall. The archers harassed him, And shot at him, and lay in wait for him; But his bow remained firm. And the hands of his arms were strong : From the hands of the mighty One of Jacob, From thence, {from) the shepherd, the stone of Israel : From the God of thy fathers — so may he keep thee. And with the Almighty — so may he bless thee. With blessings of heaven above. Blessings of the deep, that lieth beneath, Blessings of the breasts and womb. The blessings of thy father have prevailed over the blessings of the ancient mountains. The desire of the eternal hills : May they be upon the head of Joseph, On the crown of the prince among his brethren.' 35^ GENESIS, 22. fjD'l"' mD "p.. 'Son of a fruit tree is f.,' i.e. 'a young fruit tree;' cf. p, Ps. 80, 16. I? — though elsewhere pointed "13 or "|3, with Maqqef — must be taken as construct state, cf. DK', cstr. state, 12, 8, and "DK', 16, ig, or we must read la with Di. The Massoretes may, as Del. suggests, have taken |3 as sing. abs. fern., pi. VfOI, with the meaning '■branch' and ms as an adj. qualifying it =■' a fruitful branch.' JT^D with the archaic ending T\^ (see Ges., § 80. Rem. 2 b; Ewald, § i'73d), = the later 'Tib^ means ' a fruit tree;' cf. n*"!9, Is. 17, 6 (of the olive tree); probably a vine, cf. JSJ n''"ia in Is. 32, 12. Ez. 19, 10. Ps. 128, 3; so Onq., Tuch, Ewald, Di. The nW3 are the branches of the vine that grow over the wall. Possibly there is an allusion here to the name D^iax (perhaps ' double fruitfulness'), 41, 52. py "17^. The moisture would promote the growth of the vine; cf. Ps. i, 3. Jer. 17, 8. niy^ rTiia. On the construction of the plural, where inanimate objects are spoken of, with the sing. fem. express- ing (as in Arabic) the collective, see Ges., § 146. 3; Ewald, § 317 a; cf. Joel I, 20 ji-ivn mb' ninnn m; Zech. 6, 14 D?np n^^n niDVni, and the construction, common in Greek, of the neuter pi. with a sing, verb, as ra Q^pia dva^Xfirei. Ewald reads the text here iTip ni33 ■ daughters of ascent,' but this alteration is unnecessary. Wright takes the verse quite differently, nna = ' a heifer', ' a hind,' as antelopes are called by the Arabs iji^JJl loj 'wild oxen;' the ni31 are then the hinds that accompany the stag, and ~\W = ' an ambuscade' (see Ges. in Thes. s. v.) made by the huntsmen near the pool where the deer come to drink. But even if ms ca.n = ' hind,' and nits' 'ambuscade' (Ps. 92, 12 is not CHAP. 49, VERS. 22-24. S53 conclusive, as "Vi^ = rather ' Iter in wait' than 'an ambuscade', and "i^!J> in every other passage means ' wall '), as Naphtali has already been compared to a hind, ver. 21, we should hardly expect the same comparison in this verse in the case of Joseph. The Vss. appear to have entirely misunderstood the verse. 23. irmQ^I = ' they embittered or irritated him.' 'IS'TI with pretonic qame9, as in in31 inn, i, 2 ; see the note there. 531 is from 331, with the intransitive punctua- tion (see Stade, § 385 b. 2 ; Ges., § 67. Rem. i), meaning 'to shoot;' so Ps. 18, 15 n?3n''1 an Qip-ai; related to nn and nan ; cf. I'^n, job 16, 13. Jer. 50, 29. The LXX, Sam., Onq., and Vulg. seem to have read unil, but CXn 'hv'i does not suit this. tD''2Jn 'hv':!. Cf. nioijnn bui, 37, 19 ; "'i^ ^^5^3, 14, 13, and the note on that passage. Compare with this verse the narrative in Judg. 6 if. i Chron. 5, 18 f., of the hostility shewn to Ephraim and Manasseh by the neighbouring Arab tribes ; and Josh. 17, 16 f., where the children of Joseph are com- manded to drive out the Canaanites from the territory Joshua assigns them. 24. intyp '\r\'''VO. ntyJTI. 'Fet Ms bow remained in firmness.' On the adversative force of the waw conv., see Driver, § 74^; Ewald, § 231 b; so in 19, 9. 32, 31. ]n''«n. Del. explains llTiX as a subst.= !n''K DiplD3; Ewald, § 299 b (cf. § 172 b), considers that the adj. here must be taken as neuter, ' in or with firmness ; and the 3 con- ceived as forming the predicate, comparing Ex. 32, 22 Nin V13. The form [n^N, cf. 3DN, nt3N, in Hebrew cor- responds to the Arabic formation for adjectives Jill, with A a 354 GENESIS, the signification of our comparative and superlative, and so called 'the noun of pre-eminence' or ' elaiive.' In Hebrew the forms have lost their original significance and are used as simple adjectives; see Wright, Arab. Gram., i. p. 159; Ewald, § 162 b. The LXX have /cai ovvfTpiffii ixera Kparovs ra To^a aiirmv, reading "'ilB'Jjil, and the Syriac ot&^l>^ U«>cLb^ is^oi 'his bow turned in strength,' reading ^^^l; so apparently Onqelos. TtD''1. rta means "to be nimble,' 'pliant;' cf. the Arabic J3 ' to be nimble' The root only occurs once again in the Pi'el in 2 Sam. 6, 16 n3"l3D1 TBD 'skipping and dancing' (cf. Ges. in Thes. s. v.). The LXX have km i^Mdrj, Syr. oijlal./, Vulg. ' dissoluta sunt \yincula\' reading perhaps ''^SJl, from pa. ^py^ T'li^ '^T'D, i.e. Joseph's strength comes from the hands of the mighty One of Jacob, which support him. npV Ti^K, cf. Is. I, 24 l^^-W^ T13N). 49, 26. Ps. 132, 2. 5, where the phrase is borrowed from this passage. 151 ni^T DffiD. In the rendering given above, which seems relatively the best in this difficult clause, nv"i is taken as explaining Df'!?, which probably means 'from heaven,' cf. Eccl. 3, 17 (?), and "fc'i pN is a second name for God, in apposition to njn. For the term nyn applied to God, cf. 48, 15. Ps. 23, I. 80, 2. pN must be taken as equivalent to the common title of God niv (Ps. 18, 32. i Sam. 2, 2. Deut. 32, 4. Is. 30, 29); pN, however, never has this meaning anywhere else. Another rendering which is possible is that adopted by Tuch (cf. Ewald, § 332 d), 'whence is the Shepherd the Stone of Israel :' Dfl2z='inde ubi;' cf. TND = '«.»; quo tempore; Ps. 76, 8 ; cf. the Vulgate, ' inde pastor egressus est CHAP. 49, VER. 35. S5S lapy etc. Ewald renders similarly, but reads ^^1P\ 15^ nVT {^Shepherd of the Stone 0/ Israel'), the allusion being to 28, i8f. 22, a reading Di. approves of, as njJI without the art. or bvr\^ following is awkward, and God is never elsewhere called pX. RosenmuUer renders, 'From that time he {Joseph) was the shepherd and stone 0/ Israel;' cf. ^^ in Hos. 2, 17 (Heb.); A.V. R. renders, 'From thence is the Shepherd, the Stone' etc., which may be explained as meaning, 'From thence,' i. e. from God, Joseph became a guardian and defence of his people, viz. in Egypt. The Pesh. and Onq. (apparently) read Dfo, instead of Dfl?; cf Ps. 20, 2, but this, though removing the awkward expression Qfl?, does not stand very appropriately in parallelism with ''T'D . In all probability the text, as it stands at present, is corrupt. 25. 'T"'1^^ yN?2. The )D continues the thought con- tained in ver. 24, connecting ver. 25 with the preceding verse; but in this verse two blessings are inserted. 'The same God, who has hitherto helped him, will also give him the following blessings,' Di. y^Vi. bviO, cf. 31, 5. 42. 48, 15. Ex. 15, 2. 18, 4. 'n'^tJ^'^T = liilfyi"!, the suflSx being strengthened by the demonstrative nun. Render, 'So may He help thee;' cf. Ex. 12, 3. 15, 2. Ps. 59, 13. The weak waw with the imperf (volun- tative) takes the place of the perf with waw conv., after words standing alone, in language of an excited and impassioned character; see Ewald, § 347 a; Driver, § 125; so pinn in the next clause. ■"ICJ nt^l. 'And with the Almighty; i.e. with the help of the Almighty. The Syr., Sam. Ver., and Heb.- Sam., and a few MSS. read ^K1, a reading which is perhaps supported A a 2 ^^6 GENESIS, by the LXX^, Vulg., Saadiah. Bleek, Hitzig, Tuch, Ewald, and Di. adopt this reading, as being more suitable, the shorter title ilty being first used without ?N at a later period of the language (it is very common in the book of Job). If this reading be preferred, the force of [D in yin 7ND extends to nE' ba; so Judg. 5, 9. Is. 15, 8. Hab. 3, 15; see Ewald, § 351a. "lil a"'0ttj Jnill. nana is the ace. after lannM = 'mqy he Mess the blessings 0/,' i. e. with the blessings of hvo. Cf 27, 39 ^51)0 wmr\ hn)y\. The a'-Dtr nana are the dew, rain, sunshine; cf 27, 28. 39. The Dinn n3^3 are the springs, rivers, brooks, which are regarded as spring- ing from the subterranean Dinn. The Omi C'lB' TQ'\1 are every kind of animal fruitfulness [contrast Hos. 9, 14 (Tuch)]. Compare Joseph's blessing in Deut. 33, 13 flf. with this verse, where the similarity in thought and language is most striking. 26. The translation given above follows the reading HJ? ''I'ln, or perhaps better 13? '"i")?, as lin only occurs as a proper name, and gives to nixn its ordinary meaning ' desire.' This rendering suits the parallelism (D^'IV nj?33), and is supported by Deut. 33, 15 (Qiri.l'^)- Hab. 3, 6 (ir'"?.!"), and the rendering of the LXX, opiav iioviiJ.av, and is adopted by Ges., Ewald, Tuch, Wright, Di., and A.V. R. (margin). The Mas- soretic text is supported by the Syr., Onq., Vulg., Saadiah, the Jewish commentators, A.V., and A.V. R. (text). The rendering then must be, ' ITie blessings of thy father have prevailed over the blessings of my parents, up to the boundary ' The LXX render o ®eis 6 fn6s, which corresponds with their render- ing of 'TIB ■)» in 17, I 6 0c3X, D^Dta Pnx; but this rendering 'meadow of Egypt' being hardly suited to the context, the narrator explains from ' mourning.' The LXX have here TievBos klyinTov, and the Vulg. ' Plandus Egypti' and it is not improbable that the author pronounced ^k, ^5« ; while the punctuators took it as ?5^', either ' meadow,' or as a verb 3rd pers. perf sing. The position of onSD ^Jax is not known. It has been identified by some (Knobel, Ritter, etc.) with nijjn n^3, on the southern boundary of Benjamin, the modern Ain Eagla, a little north of the Dead Sea, following Hieron.,who in the Onom. identifies Area Atad with nij^n nn. But this identification is pre- carious, as Hieron.'s account is not trustworthy ; and further. CHAP. 50, VERS. 4-ai. 361 npjn n''3 is on the western, and not the eastern side of Jordan; see further, Di., p. 455 ; Del., p. 524. 13. mtorr n«. 'WM the field;' cf. 49, 30. 15. ?1DV liDtaty 'h. 'I/ Joseph were to hate us!' cf Ez. 14, 15. Ex.4, I '^ W'ON'' N^ pi 'andif they will not believe met' LXX here, fi^Ttme iivr]CTLKaRr](Tri r]fw> ^laxrr)'^. The imperf. in the protasis, where no apodosis follows, denoting either a wish or (as here) z.fear ; see Driver, § 142 ; Ewald, § 358 a, who com- pares a similar aposiopesis in Ps. 27, 13; see also M.R., § 165. 16. IliJ'^V ^ And they sent a message'. LXX koi napayevo- jicvoL, Pesh. a=>Iiso, possibly a free translation, the translators not understanding IIVV V 17. i^3^ is only found once again in the Pent., viz. Ex. 32, 31 NJX. Ewald, § 262 a, remarks that the Massora regards NJN always as consisting of two words (' hence the double accents here and in Ex. 1. c. The tone is on the penult. jr©D^ «3 Mto. . . J?©0 «3 «to. m::=' to forgive' (d. 18, 24) is here construed, for the sake of variety, with the ace. and dat. ; see Ewald, § 282 d. 19. "i^N a'TlVt^ nnnn "'!:. 'For ami in Gods place?' so in 30, 2 ; see the note there. Del. proposes a slightly different meaning here as an alternative, ' Am I authorised to interfere in what God does, am I not obliged to submit myself to it ? ' Aq. on fXT) Geos iyi> ; Symm. fit] yap dvTi Oeov iya> eljii ; Onq. renders XJ« V-"^ ^^0^ ''"'.^ 'for a fearer of Y. am I,' possibly reading "^X nFin (from nnn), or more probably rendering freely; so Saadiah, tUI i_pli.\ 'Ifear God. 20. ntoS^. See on 48, 11. 21. Dl*? ^V "QT'l. See on 34, 3. 36a GENESIS, CHAP. 50, VERS. 23-26. 23. D1"IDnS ?1D11 x-)«ii. The b as in 44, 20 Nin iniil Ctybty ^31 = • sons of the third degree,' i. e. not great- grandchildren, but great-great-grandchildren, Xl''^^ (cf. Ex. 20, 5- 34, 7- Num. 14, 18. Deut. 5, 9) being the children of the third generation, the first ancestor not being counted. Elsewhere they are called D''J'3"! ; so Di. and Ewald {Antiq?, p. 225, Eng. trans., p. 169). LXX, Vulg., Pesh., Targ., Tuch, and Del. understand 'great-grandchildren ;' but then either D''33 must be read (so Sam.), or the cstr. >J1 be taken accord- ing to Ewald, § 287 e (the cstr. state used where there is really only an appositional relation between the two words, and = ' consisting of). fjDIi ''3-)2 hv. Cf. 30, 3. 26. Dto^"''!. See on 24, 33. Render, 'they brought,' 3rd pers. sing, imper. p1i^l=here 'in the coffin! The article, by Ewald, § 277 a; Ges., § 109. 3 c. 'The Egyptians used to place the embalmed body in a wooden coffin, and carefully preserve it in the vault (Her. ii. 86),' Kn. in Di., p. 457. With these verses, cf. Ex. 13, 19. Josh. 24, 32. APPENDIX I. The book of Genesis, like the other books of the Hexateuch (for it is now generally admitted that the book of Joshua must be attached to the Pentateuch, and the whole regarded as one work), was not the production of one author. A definite plan may be traced in the book, but the structure of the work forbids us to consider it as the work of one writer. This is clear, not only from the (apparently needless) repetitions that occur (e.g. 21, la andl b ; 4, 25 f., and 5, 1-6 ; 47, 29 ff., and 49, 29 ff.), but also from the different accounts of one and the same event which we meet with, not merely such as may be explained on the supposition that the author is really describing different events, or reproducing different traditions (e.g. the narratives contained in I2, loff.; 20, iff.; and 26, 7 ff. ; in 1 6, 1 ff., and 2 1 , 1 2 ff. ; the double covenant with Abram, chaps. 1 5 and 17; the double blessing of Jacob by Isaac, 27, i ff., and 28, i ff. ; the double promise of a son to Sarah, 17, 17 ; and 18, 10 ff.; the three expla- nations of the name Isaac, 17, 17 ; 18, 12 ; 21, 6 ; the two explanations of the names, Edom in 25, 25. 30 ; of Issachar, Zebulon, and Joseph, in 30, 16-18. 20. 23 f. ; of Mahanaim, in 32, 3. 8), but such as mutually ex- clude one another, because the event narrated can only have happened once (e. g. the two accounts of the creation, in chaps, i and 2 ; the number of the animals that went into the ark at the time the flood was on the earth, in chap. 6 f. ; the dispersion of the nations, in chaps. 10 and 11, i ff., cf. 10, 25 ; the varying explanations of the names Beersheba, in 21,31; 26, 33; Israel, in 32, 29; 35, 10; Bethel, 28, i8f.; 35, 14^-; the different accounts of the relations between Jacob and the Shechemites, in chaps. 34 and 48, 22 ; and the variations in the narrative in 37, 19-36,— the sale of Joseph by his brethren). Many other notices in Genesis also militate against the unity of authorship (e. g. that Abraham begat many sons after the death of Sarah, 25, i ff. against 18, 11 f. 17, 17 ; that Esau had already settled in Seir when Jacob returned from Mesopotamia, 32, 4ff. against 36, 6 ; that all Jacob's sons were bom in Paddan Aram, 35, 26 against ver. 16 ff.; the different names of Esau's wives, 26, 34. 28, 9 against 36, 2 f , etc. ; the differences in chronology, e. g. in tile age of Sarah, in 17, 17, cf. 12, 4, and in 12, 11. 20, 2 ff.; as to Isaac's approaching death, in 27, i f. 7. 10. 41 and in 35, 28 and 26, 34; in the account of Rachel's death in 35, 19, while in 37, 10 she is represented as still 364 APPENDIX I. living, etc.) ; even narratives are found in which some parts do not agree with the remainder of the narrative (e.g. 31, 48-50 and the rest of the chapter, and 24, 62-67 ^°<^ '^^ beginning of the chapter). These discrepancies and difficulties in the book of Genesis, and similar ones in the other books of the Pentateuch, had been perceived as far back as the eleventh century ', bnt it was not until the middle of the eighteenth century that a serious attempt was made to examine systematically the structure of the Pentateuch. This was first undertaken by Astruc '', a Paris physician, who, following the opinion already expressed by Vitringa, that Moses had made use of older sources in composing the Pentateuch, arrived at the conclusion that the book of Genesis was composed from these older sources, which Moses had embodied in the work without any essential alterations ; and that two main documents were clearly discern- ible, which are distinguished by the peculiar use of the names of God, Elohim occurring exclusively in the one, and Jehovah in the other; and several (nine) minor documents which were less frequently em- ployed, and which are recognisable by certain individual peculiarities. Astruc's work may be regarded as the beginning of the criticism of the Pentateuch. His views were adopted, or arrived at by independent investigation, by several scholars subsequently, and many additional points were discovered. The gradual growth of the criticism of the Pentateuch cannot be fully entered into here, but some of the more im- portant discoveries may be noticed, and the reader referred to the Introductions to the Old Testament etc.^ for further details. Eichhom not only arrived independently at the same conclusion as Astruc with regard to the two documents, but made the further observation that the usage of language in these two documents differed greatly. De Wette was the first to draw attention to the fact that the book of Deuteronomy was essentially different from the preceding books, and really formed a separate document, a, view that is now generally accepted ; while to Bleek belongs the merit of having discovered that the book of Joshua reveals traces of the same hands as the Pentateuch, and must be taken as forming the real conclusion of the work. Further advances were made by Ewald and Hupfeld; Ewald drawing attention to the fact that 1 See Zoeckler, Handbuch der Theolog. Wissenschaften, i. p. 133 f. ; Bleek's Einleitung (ed. WeUhausen), p. 16, Eng. trans, (ed. Venables), P- 193- ^ In his Conjectures sur les mlmoires originaux dont il faroit que Moyst s' est servi pour composer le livre de la Genese, Brussels, 1753. ^ See Bleek, Einleitung (ed.Well.), p. 57f., and Eng. trans., p. 257^'; also the Introductions in Kuenen's Hexateuch, and Wellhausen's History of Israel, Eng. trans. APPENDIX I. 365 the two main documents do not only extend to Exodns 6, 2 (as had been previously supposed), but are clearly discernible in the remaining books of the Pentateuch, and also in Joshua ; while Hup- feld demonstrated that the Elohim document was not the work of one and the same writer, but was really two documents '. Hupfeld considered that Genesis was founded on three continuous historical writings, which were quite independent of one another, two Elohistic and one Jehovistic", and this view, with certain modifications, may be regarded as the one generally accepted at the present time. As the results of the investiga- tions of these and other scholars, the following points were regarded as fixed, that, firstly, the Hexatench was mainly composed of four docu- ments, the so-called ' Grundschrift ' or ' main stock ',' called by Dillmann A, but usually cited as P (the Priests' Code) ; the second Elohist, Dill- mann's B, usually quoted as E ; the Jehovist, Dillmann's C, usually re- ferred to as J ; and the Deuteronomist or D ; secondly, that several portions of the Pentateuch are really much older than the documents themselves in which they have been preserved (e. g. the Decalogue, Ex. 20, 22-23, 19, the Song in Ex. 15, and other passages containing laws and poetical fragments) ; thirdly, that the Elohistic documents were older than the Jehovistic document ; and, fourthly, that these three docu- ments were worked up into a whole before the Deuteronomist. Opinions differed as to the plan adopted in working up these documents into one work, but most scholars considered that P, E, and J were united by a. redactor, and that D was added subsequently ; some scholars even being of the opinion that D himself was the redactor. This view of the origin of the Pentateuch was, however, combated by Graf*, who, follow- ing the opinion that had already been put forth by Reuss, George, and Vatke', independently of each other, propounded the view that the so-called ' Grundschrift ' was not the oldest of the three documents, but the youngest. This was not, however, the original form of Grafs hypothesis. He first divided the 'Grundschrift' into two parts, and then endeavoured to shew that the priestly or ritual laws usually re- garded as belonging to the 'Grundschrift' were post-deuteronomic, while the remainder of the ' Grundschrift ' was prae-deuteronomic, and 1 This had already been pointed out by Ilgen (died 1834). Hupfeld's views wiU be found in full in his Que lien der Genesis und die Art ihrer Z-usammensetzung, Berlin, 1853. 2 See below, however, p. 366. 3 This is the term used by Wellhausen's translator for the German word. * \-a. Die geschichtlichen BUcher des Alien Test. (1866). 5 See Wellhausen, Hist, of Israel, Eng. trans., p. 5, and Kuenen, Hexa- teuch. Introduction, p. xxxiv ; Zoeckler, 1. 0., p. 136. ^66 APPENDIX I. antecedent to the Jehovist. When, however, Riehm ^ and Nbldeke ^ had shewn that this division of the ' Grundschrift ' was, on philological grounds, impossible, Graf modified his view, and assigned the whole of the 'Grundschrift' to the post-exilic period'. This view is also held by Kuenen*, and has been brought into greater prominence by Well- hausen "^j and since adopted by various scholars. The reasons alleged by Graf and his followers in support of this view are that the history contained in the books of Judges, Samuel, and to some extent in the books of Kings, is in contradiction to the laws usually regarded as Mosaic, and that these laws themselves were quite unknown at the period to which they are supposed to belong ; further, that the prophets of the eighth and ninth centuries are unacquainted with the Mosaic code. Those who maintain Grafs view regard the Jehovistic laws (Ex. chaps. 20-23. 13, 1-16. 34, 10-27) ^""i tlis Jehovistic narratives as prae-deuteronomic, and consider that Ezekiel is older than the redaction of the Ritual code and the laws contained in P. Thus the question of the age of P is the chief point that is at present undetermined, though the real date of the other documents cannot be regarded as definitely fixed. Other questions that are still matters of controversy are whether the Jehovist (J) utilised the Elohist (E) in composing his own work, whether the redactor who combined P and J had E before him, and also whether P is a composite production, the result of a long period of priestly activity, or the work of a single author. These points cannot be discussed here, but must be studied in full in the works of Nbldeke, Delitzsch, Schultz, Wellhausen, Kuenen, and others". The existence of various documents may be considered to have been proved, also that the number of these documents in Genesis is three, viz. P, J, and E ; that J and E are not only closely akin to one another in matter and in the way things are viewed by their authors, but also have come down to us so closely interwoven one with the other, as to form almost one document ; and, lastly, that these three documents were combined into one whole by a redactor or redactors. These three documents, P, J, and E, are distinguished one from the ^ Studien und Krit., 1868, pp. 350-379. 2 Untersuchungen zur Kritik des A. Test., Kiel, 1869. ' In Merx, Archiv fiir Wissensch. Erforschung des A. T., i. 466-477. * In his Onderzoek, ist ed., chap, i, § 18, and Hexateuch. ' In his History of Israel, and Composition des Hexateuchs, printed at first in the Jahrbiicher fiir Deutsche Theologie, xxi, 1876, pp. 392-450, 531-602 ; xxii, 1877, pp. 407-479, and since issued separately as part ii of his Skizeen und Vorarbeiten, 1885; see also his article 'Pentateuch' in the Bncycl. Britannica, 9th ed. " The reader will find the opinions of these and other scholars briefly sketched and discussed in Zoeckler, 1. 1., p. 139 fol. APPENDIX I. 367 other, not only by a difference, more or less distinctly marked, in their contents, but also by a peculiar usage of language. P, which has been largely employed in the composition of Genesis, can be more clearly separated from J and E, than these from one another, the points of demarcation between them being less clearly defined than in the case of P. P chiefly contains legislation, setting before us the various precepts and ordinances that were to be observed by Israel, and explaining their origin. The history contained in it is merely the framework in which to arrange the legislative matter. The thread of the narrative is very thin, and often only serves to carry on the chronology. Important events, however, are treated more in detail (e. g. the story of the creation, the deluge, the covenants with Noah and Abraham, the journey of the patriarchs into Egypt), especially such events as are narrated to explain the origin of various laws (e.g. 17, 23), in which case the narrative is generally full and detailed. Other events of less importance are only briefly described, partly in the form of genealogies (e.g. chap. 5. II, 10 ff. 35, 22 ff.), and partly in the form of short summaries (e.g. chap. 10. 25, 12 ff. chap. 36). In its method of representation P is de- tailed and circumstantial, everywhere aiming at strict accuracy, especially in all legal points, and exhibiting a marked fondness for recurrent formulae. Its language is formal and precise, technical words and phrases and certain turns of expression not found elsewhere frequently recur. The manner in which the author handles his materials gives evidence of research and reflexion, and a capacity for justly weighing and estimating the sources of information at his disposal (e. g. chaps, i . 5. 10 f. 36. 46), while in describmg the events of the past, and in the accounts of foreign peoples, remarkable accuracy is displayed (e.g. 25, 16. 36, 15). Some of the peculiarities of the language of P have been pointed out in the notes. The portions of Genesis that are usually assigned to this document are the following : 1, i-2, 4 a. 5, 1-28. 30-32. 6, 9-22. 7, 6. II. 13-16 a. 18-21. 8, 1-2 a. 3-5. 13 a. 14-19- 9. i-i?- 28-29. 10, 1-7. 20. 22-23. 31-32. 11, 10-27. 31-32. 12, 4b-5. 13, 6. Iib-I2a.(chap.l4?). 16, la. 3. 15-16. 17. 19,29. 21,ib-5. 23. 25, 7-iia. 12-17. 19-20. 26b. 26, 34-35- 27, 46-28, 9. 29,24. 29. 31, iSb. 33,18. 34,1-2. 4-10. 13-18. 20-25 (partly). 27-29. 35, 5. 9-15. 23-29. 36 (in the main). 37, 1-2 a. 41, 46. 46, 6-27. 47, 5-6 a. 7-11 (as in LXX [=5b from ^KSoy di to 11]). 27C-28. 49, 28b-33. 50, 12-13. The remaining documents differ widely from P. In Genesis the legislative element is almost entirely absent, the object of the narrators being to present in a brief and attractive form the chief historical events of the past, with a view to instruction and 368 APPENDIX I. edification. One of these documents, E, is called by Dillmann the Traditional History of Israel. It probably is based on older written sources, but in the main draws its information from tradition, and preserves unchanged in its narratives both the colouring and tone of tradition as current among the people. To this document we are indebted for many important details which are not given in P or J (e. g. Eliezer, Deborah, Rachel's nurse, and Potiphar are known to us only from E), and for many peculiar notices and brief statements, which, bearing the impress of the highest antiquity (e.g. 21, 27 fl. 15, 2. 20, 16. 48, 22), are unfortunately only preserved in a. fragmentary form. In E many traditions attaching themselves to certain localities (e. g. 31, 51 ff. 33, ig. 35, 8. 20) are to be found, and the origin of several of the sacred places in central and eastern Palestine is frequently referred to (21, 31. 28, 17 f. 32, 3. 31. 33, 20. 35, 4. 7. 46, if.). It contains a full account of the honour gained by Joseph, and brings into prominence the consideration in which Reuben was formerly held (37, 2 if. 29 f. 42, 22. 37). E contains no account of the flood, but makes frequent mention of the many sanctuaries of the Israelites (28, 22. 33, 20), though it condemns the Teraphim-cultus and other idolatrous practices (35, 2fr.). Angels and visions in dreams are frequently spoken of, Abraham bears the title of Prophet (20, 7), and attention is directed to the gradual accomplishment of God's promises as revealed to Abraham and his descendants. It has been already remarked that E has been incorporated with J into one work, and it frequently happens that the parts of the two documents can be severed one from the other with not more than approximate certainty. The third document, J (for a long time called the supplemental document, as though it were composed to supplement P ; a view that is now generally abandoned), may be designated, as distinguished from P, the Prophetic Narrative. In the account of the family of Noah, the deluge, and in the table of nations, it is in substance closely akin to P, also in the portion of Genesis containing the history of Abraham it has several narratives in common with P (e. g. the separation of Lot and Abraham; the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrha; the story of Dinah; also cf. 47, i-n. 29 ff. and 49, 29 ff.), but elsewhere in the history of the patriarchs, and in that of Joseph and Jacob, it is more closely connected with E, so much so, that from chap. 2 7 onwards, most of the narratives in J have their complete parallels in E, the passages in E being rich in material details, while J is distinguished by a fondness for picturesque description, by breadth and variety of ideas, and by the polish and artistic finish of its narratives. Many passages of J, which we possess in their full form, are masterpieces of narrative art, with APPENDIX I. 369 which only a few out of E can be compared (e. g. chap. 22). Of all three documents J betrays the profoundest appreciation of the existence, origin, and growth of sin in man, and of God's counteracting influence, of the plan of man's salvation (3, 15 f. 5, 29. 8, 2 if. 9, 26 f I2,2f. 18, 19), of the call of the divinely chosen instruments, and their training in faith, obedience, and a virtuous life, and of the divine purpose of making Israel a source of blessing to the nations. In the usage of language, as well as in its style, J is more closely allied to E than to P, and although subtle differences between J and E are discernible, the criteria for definitely distinguishing one from the other are often not clearly marked. How these documents were worked up into one whole cannot be determined without fixing the date of P. If P is the oldest portion of the work, then the vieW that this is the framework, into which the other documents were fitted, is tenable. If P, on the other hand, is the latest of the three sources, then it is probably best to suppose that J and E were first united into one whole, and that D was added to this, the last redactor of the Hexateuch combining P with the whole thus formed J, E, D. The following remarks may perhaps give a general idea of how Genesis arose out of the three documents P, J, E. It has been already remarked that a definite plan can be traced throughout the whole book. To put it as briefly as possible, the object of the book is to give an account of the history of Israel from the earliest times until the death of Joseph, to shew how God created the world and mankind, preserved Noah from the deluge and made a covenant with him, chose Abram the descendant of Noah through Shem, and made a covenant with him, promising to him and his descendants the land of Canaan, and taking him under his especial protection, and imposing upon him the observ- ance of several precepts. The history is carried on in the person of Isaac, to whom the promises made to Abraham are renewed; some account is given of Ishmael, who then disappears from the narrative, which employs itself with the fortunes of Jacob and Esau, the latter being dismissed after a short account of the relations between him and Jacob, and the course of the narrative confined to Jacob. We are next told of the birth of Jacob's sons and the sale of Joseph into Egypt, Joseph now becoming the prominent figure in the narrative. After some account of the journeys of Joseph's brethren into Egypt, and their meeting with Joseph who was regarded as dead, the history tells us of Jacob's descent into Egypt, and finally relates Joseph's death, after he had removed his father's remains to Canaan and buried them in the Cave of Machpelah. In compiling this history from the materials at his disposal the compiler chose from his sources what was most suited to the plan 370 APPENDIX I. of his work. Sometimes he merely makes small extracts from one document (e.g. 4, 17-24. 6, 1-4. 30, 32-42, merely small portions of fuller accounts), or notices individual points (e.g. 11, 29, Jiska men- tioned; 20, 12, the relationship between Abram and Sarai, cf. 28, 22 (see 35, 7) ; 48, 22). At other times the portions taken from the , documents are quoted in full, and for the most part are verbally trans- ferred from the original (e.g. the narratives in P up to 11, 26), and sometimes again, whole passages from one document are omitted, possibly because they were at variance with the accounts given by the others (see in P the brief accounts in 11, 27-32; the omission of the introduction to the history of Abram, previous to chap. 1 1 ; of the divine manifestation to Isaac ; of the sojourn of Jacob in Paddan Aram ; of all the history of Joseph prior to Jacob's arrival in Egypt). When combin- ing his sources the compiler, as far as possible, or as far as he deemed necessary, appears to have taken the narrative verbally from each and inserted both in his work (cf chap. 2 f. side by side with chap, i, chap. 27 side by side with 26, 34 f and 28, 1-9 ; 48, 3-7 sideby side with 48, 9-22). Elsewhere, as for example, where the event need only be quoted from one document (e.g. the birth or death of any person), he selects his account from one source, even though the same event be recorded in more than one document. In other cases the compiler found two accounts in the documents before him, agreeing in the main but differing in details, he would then weave one account into the other, omitting from each what could not be reconciled, and choosing from both what best suited the plan of his work (cf. chaps. 7 f. 10. 16. 25. 27-37. 39-5°)- To the redactor also probably may be attributed the accommodation necessary to preserve consistency in the use of the names Abram and Sarai, in all passages previous to chap. 17, of the double name Yahweh Elohim in chaps. 2-3 ; also the change of Elohim into Yahweh in 17, i. 21,1. It is also probable that slight changes were made by him at the juncture between different narratives (e.g. 11, 1-9. 12, 10-20. 25, 5 f . lib. 25, 21 ff. 35, 16-20. 47, 12 ff.). In other passages the sources are loosely combined (e.g. 7, 7-9. 22. 15, 7f. 31, 45 ff. chap. 36. 46, 8-27), the compiler now and then making additions of his own to bring the documents into harmony (e.g. 21, 32. 34. 27,46. 35, 5. 46, 12-20). Sometimes possibly use was also made of materials taken from other sources than P, J, and E (e. g. perhaps in chap. 14) '. 1 For full details of the various works bearing on the criticism of the Pentateuch, see Dillmann's Genesis, 5th ed., p. xix ff., or Zoeckler, I.e., p. 14s ff., from whom most of the above particulars are derived. APPENDIX II. b^ and D*n^x, nin\ The first two names of God, ^« and Q'rt'jM, as may be seen from the Concordance, are of frequent occurrence in the Old Testament. The plural of ■;« and the sing, of D'ri'jN, on the contrary, are rare; the plural forms of ■)« occurring about five times, and the sing, of D'rt'jK about 57 times. ')« (sing.), on the other hand, occurs (including proper names of people and of places compounded with bti) over 300 times, and D'ri'jN over 2500 times'. It will be found, on a closer examination of the various passages, that '7ti, though of common occur- rence, is essentially a poetical word, being very common in the poetical part of Job (about a quarter of the passages where ^M is found are in Job). It is also found in the Psalms (but not so frequently as D'ii'JW) and in other poetical passages, and is used by the prophets from Hosea to Deutero-Isaiah and his contemporaries. b« is found in the Pentateuch in certain special phrases, such as 'liiJ-iN, N3i7-';«, but otherwise the less poetical parts of the Pentateuch and Prophets avoid it. Sn apparently formed no part of the ordinary spoken language, as it is never used in Judges, Samuel, or Kings, and even in Chronicles only occurs in poetical passages. In proper names of persons and of places it is found from the earliest times. Thus firom the O. T. it may be inferred that •)« was a very old name of God, which, however, at a tolerably early date ceased to be used, and was only preserved in poetry, elevated prose, and in a few special phrases. D'n';N was the common name of God, the word being used for the sing, and plural. The singular FJ'jN is most common in the book of Job, and it is found else- where in only a few poetical passages. In pure prose it occurs only in two very late passages (2 Chron. 32, 15 and Dan. II, 37-39); and even in the prose parts of Job is replaced by □'iibN. tn^N may thus be regarded as an artificial sing, of D'ribw^. So in Hebrew the ordinary I Cf. Nestle, Tkeologische Studien aus Wiirttemterg, 1882, p. 243 f. ' Noldeke, Sitzungsberichte der Berliner Akad., 1882, p. 1177 ; cf. Nestle, I.e., p. 249. B b 2 37a APPENDIX II. word for God was D'ri'jM, without a real singular, ^« and rj'>« being nearly entirely confined to poetry. In the other Semitic dialects ';n is common, being found in Assyrian, Phoenician, and Himyaritic, but whether it is found in Northern Arabic and Aramaic is a disputed point'. Fi'jM is found, on the contrary, only in Aramaic and Arabic, the word both in Aramaic and Arabic being probably indigenous and not borrowed from the Hebrew^. In Sabean h^i and ^b^ occur, both words being used in much the same way as in Hebrew ^- Various explanations of these names hi) and D'ri'^N have been offered by different scholars, but no certain derivation for either appears yet to have been obtained. Fleischer", whom Delitzsch and others" follow, takes D'ri^M as the plural of ri';« (a noun of the form VilOp = Jluj), deriving ri'jH from an unused root nSN = the Arabic sjl {^j)> which has the notion of ' wandering about ^ 'going hither and thither'' in perplexity or fear, and followed by Jl ' to betake oneself to a person, by reason of fright or fear, seeking protection". FJ'^N would thus, it is argued, = 'T^ar,' and then 'the object of fear' (cf. akBaofia in Greek, and the Heb. «lia, inB, see Gen. 31, 42. 53), and so 'God' This derivation would appear, however, to be questionable. For in the verb the idea of 'fear' is altogether subordinate, and though in a particular case it may express the idea of seeking protection with a person, in fear (of course) of other things, it is difficult to understand how a substantive derived from it could be used to denote God as the direct object of fear. It might, con- ceivably, denote Him as a refiige, but hardly as fear, or the object of fear. ■;« is regarded by these scholars as belonging to a root ViN, with the primary meaning ' strength '.' 1 Lagarde, Orientalia, ii. p. 3 f. (cf. Nestle, 1. c, p. 251), denies the existence of ';« as a real Aramaic and Arabic word : Noldeke disputes this, and appears to have shewn that Lagarde is in error. See Monatsherichte der Berliner Akad., 1880, p. 768 f., and Sitzungsberichie of the same Akad., 1882, p. 1182. ^ See Noldeke, Sitzungsberichte, 1882, p. 1189; but cf. Nestle, I.e., p. 252. ' See ijber ''N und n'i« im Sabdischen, by Prof. D. H. Miiller, Leyden, 1884. 1 Del., Comm^, p. 57. » Oehler, Schultz, Miihlau, Volck. » See Lane, Arabic Lex., p. 82. ' Cf. Ges., Thes., pp. 42, 48. APPENDIX II. 373 Ewald' connects h^ and tj'jN, regarding ■)« as abbreviated from pi^«, and holding nba ' (o ie strong'' to be the root of both. Lagarde^ has proposed an entirely different derivation for bs (the origin of bSm he does not discuss). He regards '■!« (rt';«) as the root of ■;«, and compares the form Sn with n (from mj), Is. 50, 6, D'Bp = D'Tpto (from niDto), and D'bs (but cstr. state '^3). ''is (n'j«) he conjectures had the meaning Ho stretch out to,' and God he considers called ')N, as ^ one whom men strive after.' The vovfel in ^« Lagarde regards as originally short, evadmg the analogy of words like 13, 11, no, by the remark that such a word as ^«, ' God,' can hardly be, what its vowel -rr would indicate that it is, a neuter passive participle (see more fully Mitteilungen (1884), p. 103 f). Noldeke^ holds that ■;« is a noun with a long vowel like JS, t]?, Ttf, etc., almost all of which belong to verbs l"s and »"», and refers it to a root ')1M = ^ be in front, so Sm = the leader. Lord. He expresses no decided opinion as to the connection between ';« and D'ii^N, but thinks a connection may be possible *- Dillmaim 'regards ^N and a^« as inseparable, considering the latter to imply an extended form of the former, like n^nn« from nD«, and ) o«.V>* from pA., !.o»i(''from Mi( , in Aramaic, and slli from %JlL in Arabic : ^Vk (with an original short i), however, being from n'>«, and having the meaning ' might' Nestle ", lastly, has proposed another explanation of the relationship between ^» and D'ri'jM. He infers from the usage of language that n'ri';« is the real plural oihvt, and that PJ'jN is a secondary derivation from D'ri'jN. D'ri^M he thinks has arisen out of ')«, just as ninos out of rTD«. The above is a brief account of the various views that are held as to the origin of h'A and □'ri'^H, but none appears to be entirely free from objection. That a')« comes from a root Pib«, as Fleischer and Delitzsch main- tain, is, as has been already shewn, doubtful. In favour of Ewald's 1 Jahrhuch, x. 11, and Lehrluch, § 178 b. ^ Orientalia, ii. p. 3 ff. 2 Monatsberichte der Konig. Preuss. Akad., 1880, pp. 760-776. * Noldeke's view, as far as the derivation of ■;« from ')1« is concerned, is the same as Gesenius' referred to in note 7, p. 372, differing only as to the meaning borne by "JTW. 5 Commentar Uber die Genesis, i, i. ' In his article in the Theologische Studien aus Wiirttemberg, 1882, Heft iv. B b 3 374 APPENDIX II. view may be urged the fact that it connects both h>> and D'rt''«, by deriving them from a root nbij, and the existence of proper names compounded with ^« exhibiting traces of \ e.g. sirrSM, ^)d'')M, and others', though it is only fair to admit that the evidence from proper names ought not to be pressed, as the ' may be the suffix of the first person and not the third radical. But it does not account for the presence of the n in D'rt^M, and if ';« is abridged from tJ'ri'jM, it is not clear why Vs is found chiefly in poetical passages where we should naturally expect antique forms. Lagarde, in so far as he derives ')M from a root n^«, agrees with Ewald, though he assigns to this root a different meaning, viz. 'to stretch out to.' Apart from the fact that the meaning thus assigned to n')N is conjectural, he can hardly be said to have proved against Noldelce that the e of ';« is short, and that it does not belong to a root Vs. The evidence Noldelce adduces from the occurrence of Semitic proper names in Greek inscriptions, in favour of a long e inb«^, does not seem to have been met by Lagarde, and in failing to observe the Aramaic use of ')«', he has exposed himself to Noldeke's objection, supported by the Syriac, that formations like )3, t]3, etc. point to 3>"s 'or l"y stems*- Noldeke's own view of Hvi (which is in the main the same as Gesenius held °) does not appear adequately to account for the shortening of the e in ^s in the proper names nji^Sw, nwVn, etc.", nor for the ' in the latter name, which would seem to imply a root Wh '- It also does not take into account the Assyrian ilu, which has always a short i, and which never appears as ^lu or ilu '. Nestle's view has been examined by Nbldeke ', who points out that the usage of language is against it, that the explanation of t3'ri'>« as an extended form of fJM is precarious, for only one clear case of this occurs in Hebrew (viz. ninD« from nD«), and the cases that are found in the * This also applies to Dillmann's view. * See Monatsherichte der Konig. Preuss. Akad., 1880, p. 760 f. ^ ?>ee Monaisberichie, etc., p. 772. * See Monatsberickte, etc., p. 773. 5 Cf. note 4 on p. 373. ' Noldeke accounts for this on the ground that an unusual shortening of vowels is often found in proper names. ' Though, as has been just said, this might be the pronom. aJBx. " Del., Par., pp. 163-165. Brown in The Presbyterian Review (New York), 1882, p. 407. ' In the Sitzungsberichie der Berliner Akad. der Wissenschaften , 1882, pp. 117S-1192. APPENDIX II. 375 other Semitic dialects always have, in the expanded form, the plural feminine ending, whether the word itself be masc. or fem. ' Noldeke also remarks that long o for long a is difficult (the long a in nino« goes back to short a^), and that if the e of hi} is long, the -rr in D'iibs is difficult to explain. The following points seem to require a satisfactory explanation before the derivation of bi} and D'ti^N can be definitely fixed, (i) Are the two words really connected one with the other, and derived from the same root? (ii) Does b^ really come from bin, or from a root n'jN (i. e. 'bs)? (iii) How is the n of D'ri^N to be accounted for? (iv) Can the evidence which Noldeke brings forward to prove that the -r- in ^M is long be accepted as conclusive in the face of the fact that the vowel in the cor- responding word in Assyrian (ilu) is short ? (v) If the -zr is really long, is Nbldeke's explanation of the shortening of -^ in nji^SM, «in'bN, and other similar proper names adequate ' ? The above is a brief sketch of the views held by scholars as to the derivation of btf and D'ri'^M. Both bi} and D'rt'jM fabs) are old words in Semitic, and, prima facie, would appear to be distinct : their original derivation, however, is at present obscure. It is well known that the vowels with which the Tetragrammaton is pimctuated in the ordinary editions of the Massoretic text do not really belong to it, but have been supplied from the word <:iN, with the composite shewa changed into a simple shewa, imless this word precedes nin', when the points of □'rt';« are used, e. g. Is. 28, 16. 30, 15. 49, 22. Ez. 2, 4. 7, 2. Amos 5, 3, etc. This is clear from the following con- siderations : (i) With the prefixes a, 'j, o, 1 we find Ti'm^'^ (e. g. Ps. 11, I. 32, 10. II. 64, 11); n;rT^^ (e.g. Ps. 7, 1. 16, 2. 24, i); nin;p (e.g. Ps. 33, 8. 37, 39. Is. 40, 27) ; n;nn (Gen. 13, 14. i Sam. 12, 12. Is. 53, 10), i.e. '}iN,a, '3i«5, ':i«o, and '3i«l (cf. Ges., § 23. 2). (2) If the word that follows nin'' begins with one of the letters 2, 3, i, 3, D, n, the dagesh lene is inserted, e.g. Gen. 13, 10. Ex. 15, 6. Num. 11, 25. 1 Cf. Sitzungsierichte, p. iiSof. The masc. forms that occur in Syriac are, as Noldeke points out, late. Noldeke's remarks on this point also apply to Dillmann's explanation. ^ Noldeke, Sitzungsierichte, p. 1181. 2 See note 6, p. 374. 376 APPENDIX II. Judg. 21, 15. I Sam. 28, 19. 2 Sam. 23, i. (3) Ewald in hh Lehrbuch, § 228 b, draws attention to tlie fact that in Num. 10, 35, cf. ver. 36, an^p is accented on the last syllable, though the n is n cohortative, because the next following word ni n' begins withaguttural, e.g. M,n^n.> = '3'TM, cf. Ps. 3, 8 noip; 6, 5 nii»; 7, 7. 10, 12, etc. (4) The abbreviations ^^^) ^^) iii' cannot come from Ti)p\. The objection to using the real punctuation of ni n ' arises from an old misconception of the two passages, Ex. 20, 7 (Mills') Tn')« nirr Dizi nn Nton m'j). Lev. 24, 16 (dsj ap:i nov nin nirr), which were interpreted as meaning that the divine name was to be treated as a nomen ineffabile. This Interpretation of these two verses is mentioned by Philo, De vita Mosis, iii. pp. 519, 529; Josephus, Archaeol., ii. 12, § 4 ; Talmud, Sanhedrin, chap, i, fol. 90 ; Maimonides, Yadh Chasaka, chap. 14, § 10; Theodoret, Quaes/. 13 in Exod. ; Eusebius, Praep. Evang., ii. p. 305 ; the passages (excepting that from Eusebius) being quoted by Gesenius, Thes., p. 575 i. The LXX render the Tetragrammaton always by t Kipios (their ordinary translation of ':in), and the Samaritans used «n'\ij ('name') for nin', when they had to pronounce the word. There is every reason to assume that the punctuation adopted by modem scholars for mrr is correct, viz. nin^, the form being an im- perfect Qal (according to another view Hif'il) of mn, which is an archaic and North Palestinian form of the verb rrn (cf. the note on 27, 29) ; compare the other proper names formed after the analogy of the imperf of the verb, e.g. 2J7jp|l, tn^, pr;'^\, etc. That this assumption is correct is proved by the fact that the abbreviations ^rr (out of in^), ^rT; and V (out of in; = in:;), and Fi< (niri2 = irr: = !T) can easily be derived from mn', and by the statement of Theodoret that the pro- nunciation of the Samaritans was lABE, while Epiphanius, Adv. Haer. 20 (40) cites I ABE as one of the names of God, explaining it (from Ex. 3, 14) as 8s ^v Koi tart Koi del wv, see Ges., 1. 1;. If this punctuation be conceded it will next be necessary to explain the meaning of the name. The class of words to which mrt' belongs is not very wide in Heb., and is practically limited to a few proper names (see Stade, Lehrbuch, § 259). The form nw, as far as the punctuation is concerned, may be the imperf. Qal or Hif il of nin ; and the meaning we must assign to the word will obviously depend on which of these two conjugations we consider the form to come from. If it be imperf. Qal, it may mean, 'he that is;' if it be imperf. Hif il, 'he that causes to be' If the former view be adopted, the word being taken as imperf. Qal, we must, in interpreting the meaning of the name, be guided by the passage in Exodus, viz. 3, 14 ; APPENDIX II. 377 for though the name m rr may have been known to the Hebrews prior to the time of Moses — cf the name of Moses' mother, Ex. 6, 20 1331', and the formula ' God of thy father^ Ex. 3, 6 ^ — it was through him that it received its first explanation. The name has been considered by various modern scholars ''■, reviving the view held by Le Clerc, and thrown out as a suggestion by Gesenius, as a Hif'il derivative, although the interpreta- tions differ ; e. g. Kuenen interprets the name as 'the giver of existence ;^ Schrader and Schultz, as 'the giver of life and deliverance ;'' Lagarde and Nestle, who follow Le Clerc, as 'he who brings to pass,' i.e. ' the performer of his promises ;' Land, as 'life-giver^ so Ges. in Thes. The objection to the derivation of the word from the Hif'il stem is that though rrn is used of the fulfilment of a promise or prediction (e.g. in i Kings 13, 33), it requires the object of the promise to be at least indicated in the context, and farther, that scarcely any Semitic language uses the causative form of n'H^- If this derivation be regarded as too uncertain, the alter- native one, in which the word mn' is treated as a neuter (Qal), must be adopted. In the passage in Exodus (3, 14) God, in His answer to Moses, says n^rrx l«3« ri.'-nij, then calls Himself n;.n«, and finally nirr. It is clear from this that mn (see above) is presupposed to be equivalent to n'n, and that n;.ri«, the shorter expression, must be explained by ifflS fi'7? rrnw. Then n'n«TW« rrns must not be taken as a refusal to answer Moses' question '/ am just who I am,' i. e. it is a matter of indifference to you who I am, and you should not seek to know (Le Clerc, Lagarde) ; as the following rrnx cannot bear this sense, and r\^r^)A ^1C« rTn« more naturally gives an explanation of the name. An explanation of the name is certainly found in the rendering adopted by Wellhausen, follow- ing Ibn Ezra, 'I am, since I am,' rrns being regarded as the name, and n'nNTlB« as its explanation; but 1»« for <3 in this context is hardly probable, and Moses did not ask ' What is thy name?' but ' What shall I tell them?' Therefore "a ^tt)« n'n« must be taken as a simple sentence, which has been variously rendered. The LXX and Knobel translate, 'lam he who exists,' i. e. 'he who is;' but it is doubtful whether n'nx iffiK can = (5 &v. Rashi renders, 'I will be with them what I will be with the,n in the subjection of their fttture captivities;' while Ewald explains, ' I will be it,' viz. the performer of his promises; both sup- 1 See Nestle, Eigennamen, p. 80 ff. s Comp. Prof. Driver, in Stadia Biilica, i. Oxford, 1883. 3 Comp. Prof. Driver, 1. 1., p. 14. foot-note. ^yS APPENDIX II. porting their renderings by ver. 12 'qas n,;nsi. Robertson Smith renders similarly, 'I will be what I will be^ i. e. yonr God and Helper (cf. Driver, 1. c, p. 16). The objection to this view is that what Jehovah will prove Himself to be is not expressed, but must be understood (see Di. on Ex. 3, 14). But it may be (as Del.^ and Oehler^ suggest) that r\^r\ is to be understood in a pregnant sense, 'give evidence of being.' The most probable view is that the passage means, 'I am that I am' not that which fate or caprice may determine, but what my own character deter- mines, n'ti has the idea not of fixity, but of change ; not a capricious change, but a conscious one. The verb means properly not 'to be,' but 'to come into being' (cf. Del., Comm., pp. 26, 60); so nirr is a living active God, a God of the past, but also of the future, who cannot be named or defined, but whose divine nature is ever expressing itself, and manifesting itself under fresh aspects ; a God who enters into personal relations with His worshippers, who is consistent with Himself, true to His promises, and unchangeable in His purposes (comp. Del., 1. 1. ; Oehler, 1. c. ; Driver, 1. u., p. 17 ; Di. on Ex. 3, 14) '. 1 Comm,, pp. 26, 60. ^ Theology of the Old Testament, § 39. " On the various views held by scholars concerning the origin of the Tetragrammaton, the reader may be referred" for further particulars to the paper by Prof. Driver, and to Konig's Hauptjirobleme der altisrael. Religionsgeschichte, 1884, pp. 29-33 (translated in Hebraica, April, 1885, pp. 255-257). CORRIGENDA. Page 7, line 7 from bottom, for prefix : read prefix < " "^i) )i 4 » „ „ defined ■•: as. On „ defined. 'jia ■ on " 25, „ 4 „ ,, J, J-^l >' 27, „ II from top, „ nioi .. 34> )) 4 fro™ bottom, „ rrn „ 36, „ 16 from top, „ it rejects it ). 4I) >. 4 from bottom, „ jk,o»j „ 41, last line on page, „ riTlS-i „ 50, line 1 6 from bottom, „ «3 68, „ 13 from bottom, „ pJ'N'i " 7°. i> 1 „ » 72, „ 5 from top, tf "7j j) 7 )j j7 » 87, „ 8 „ „ » 87, „ 8 „ „ ., 94, ,, 10 „ „ 94, „ II from bottom, ., 125, „ 5 from top, „ 135, last line on page, „ 142, line 7 from top, jj '■4-Dy Ji 3 J, J, „ 155. ), 13 from bottom, „ 166, „ 15 from top, >t -^75) )> 2 „ ,, „ 178, „ 3 from bottom, „ J^ „ ' arcanV „ i3-)«ai TH „ nn'an „ Targ. „ Sir. „ 'exJterienced.^'L'X.'X. „ ' experienced, 'ISKX. „ Jerome „ Hieron. „ sees „ saw „ rrh „ ri'n ,, Araba „ Arabah they reject it ntos ' arcam ' Targg. n"! ^?? Ecclus. J^ ' These passages are corrected from Smend and Socin's edition of the Moabite Stone (Freiburg I. B., 1886), p. 12. 38o CORRIGENDA. i8i, line 9 from top, /or nn^i-] read Bnsbi 194, „ 12 from bottom, „ jnin „ jnan 204, „ I from top, „ M3^»1 „ «i^5 2°5> )) 2 ,. ;, ,) "'' tf^e left „ or to the left 218, „ 6 „ „ „ nfe»3i • ^, ntoysi 272, „ 5 from top, after with insert etc. 288, „ 2 from \io\XoTa,for n'llisi ?-«a(/ n'tosi 305, „ 14 from top, „ nxto „ nxsj 329, „ 4 from bottom, „ Jisnto „ Jiyo© 339, „ 6 from top, „ 1>»1 ' ^, iiji 341, ,, 3 from bottom, „ v;bp „ V»73l 342, „ II from top, „ Tanchuma „ Tanchuma 346, ,,15 „ „ „ of bond-slave „ of a bond-slave THE END. SELECT LIST OK PRINTED AT The Clarendon Press, Oxford. THE HOLY SCEIPTUEES, ETC. FATHERS OP THE CHURCH, ETC. ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, ETC. . ENGLISH THEOLOGY LITURGIOLOGY . page I 1. THE HOLY SCRIPTURES, ETC HBBBEW, etc. Ifotes on the Hebrew Text of the Book of Genesis. By G. J. Spurrell, M.A. Crown 8vo. los. 6d. Notes on the Hebrew ByS. E. Text of the Books of Samuel. Driver, D.D. 8vo. 14s. Treatise on the use of the Tenses in Hebrew. By S. R. Driver, D.D. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. The Psalms in Hebrew without points. Stiff covers, 2s. A Commentary on the Book of Proverbs. Attributed to Abra- ham Ibn Ezra. Edited from a MS. in the Bodleian Library by S. K. Driver, D.D. Crown 8vo. paper covers, 3s. 6d. The Book of Tobit. A Chaldee Text, from a unique MS. in the Bodleian Library ; with other Rabbinical Texts, English Transla- tions, and the Itala. Edited by Ad. Neubauer, M.A. Crown 8vo. 6s. Gesenius' Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament, with an Appendix containing the Biblical Aramaic. Translated and edited by E. Robinson, Francis Brown, S. R. Driver, and C. A. Briggs. Part I. Small 4to. 2s. 6d. Part II, immediately. HEBREW, etc. — Hebrew Ac- centuation of Psalms, Proverbs, and Job. By William Wickes, D.D. 8vo. 5s. Hebrew Prose Accentu- ation. By the same Author, 8vo, I OS. 6d. Horae Hebraicae et Tal- mudicae, a J. Lightfoot. A new edi- by R. Gandell, M.A. 4 vols. ll. IS. The Booh of Hebretv Roots, by Abu l-Waltd Marw^n ibn Janah, otherwise called Rabbi Yonah. Now first edited, with an appendix, by Ad. Neubauer. 4to. 2l. 7s. 6d. GREEK. Old Testament. Veius Testamentum ex Versione Septua- ginta Interpreium secundum exemplar Vaticanum Romae editum. Accedit potior varietas Codicis Alexandrini. Tomi III. iSlno. i8s. tion 8vo. Oxford: Clarendon Press. London: Henry Frowde, Anion Corner, E.G. HOLY SCRIPTURES. GREEK. A Concordance to the Sefptuagini and the other Greek Ver- sions of the Old Testament, including the Apocryphal Books. By the late Edwin Hatch, M.A., and H. A. Eedpath, M.A. Part I. 4to. 21s. Part II, In the Press. Essays in Biblical Greek. By Edwin Hatch, M.A., D.D. 8vo. los. 6d. Origenis Hexaflorum quae supersunt ; sive, Veterum Interpre- turn Graecorum in totum Vetus Testa- mentum Fragmenta. Edidit Pridericus Field, A.M. 2 vols. 4to. si. 5s. New Testament. Wovum Tcstamentum Graece. Antiquissimo- rum Codicum Textus in ordine parallelo dispositi. Accedit coUatio Codicis Sinaitici. Edidit E. H. Han- sel!, S.T.B. Tomi III. 8to. 24s. ■ • Novum Testamentum Graece. Accedunt parallela S. Scrip- turae loca, etc. Edidit Carolus Lloyd, S.T.P.E. iSmo. 3s. On writing paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d. ■ Appendices ad Novum Testamentum Stephanieum, jam inde a Millii temporibus Oxoniensium manibus tritum ; curante Gulmo. Sanday, A.M., S.T.P., LL.D. I. Col- latiotextusWesteottio-Hortiani(jure permisso) cumtextu Stephanico anni MDL. II. Delectus lectionum notatu dignissimarum. III. Lectiones quaedam ex eodicibus versionum Memphiticae Armeniacae Aethio- picaefusiusillustratae. Extra fcap. 8to, cloth. 3«. 6d. Novum Testamentum Graece juxta Exemplar MiUianum. l8mo. 2s. 6d. On writing paper, with wide margin, 7s. 6d. GREEK. TheGreekTestament, with the Readings adopted by the Eeyisers of the Authorised Ver- sion : — (i) Pica type, with Marginal Re- ferences. Demy 8vo. los. 6d. (2) Long Primer type. Pcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. (3) The same, on writing paper, with wide margin, 1 5s. The Parallel New Testa- ment, Greek and English; being the Authorised Version, 161 1 ; the Re- vised Version, 1881 ; and the Greek Text followed in the Revised Ver- sion. 8vo. 12s. 6d. Outlines of Textual Criti- cism applied to the New Testament. By C. E. Hammond, M.A. Fifth Edition.. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d. A Greek Testament Pri- mer. An Easy Grammar and Read- ing Book for the use of Students beginning Greek. By E. Miller, M.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. LATIN. Lihri Psalnfioruvth Versio antiqua Latina, cum Paraphrasi Anglo-Saxonica. Edidit B. Thorpe, F.A.S. 8vo. los. 6d. Old-Latin Biblical Texts : No. I. The Gospel according to St. Matthew, from the St. Ger- main MS. (g,). Edited with Intro- duction and Appendices by John Wordsworth, D.D. Small 4to. stiff covers, 6s. Old-Latin Biblical Texts : No. II. Portions of the Gospels according to St. Mark and St. Matthew, from the Bobbio MS. (k), etc. Edited by John Wordsworth, D.D., W. Sanday, M.A., D.D., and H. J. White, M.A. Small 4to, stiff covers, 21s. Oxford : Clarendon Press. HOLY SCRIPTURES. LATIN. Old-Latin Biblical Texts : No. III. The Four Gospels, from the Munich MS. (q) , now num- bered Lat. 6224in the Eoyal library at Munich. With a Fragment from St. John in the Hof-Bibliothek at Vienna (Cod. Lat. 502). Edited, " with the aid of Tisehendorf s tran- script (under the direction of the Bishop of Salisbury), by H. J.White, M.^. Small 4to. stiff covers, i as. 6d. Nouum Testamentum Domini ITostri lesu Christi Latine, se- cundum Editionem S. Hieronymi. Ad Codicum Manuscriptorum fidem recensuit lohannes Wordsworth, S.T.P., Episcopus Sarisburiensis. In operis societatem adsumto Henrico luliano White, A.M. 4to. Fasc. I. Euangelium secundum Mattheum. 12 s. 6d. Faso. II. Euangelium secundum Marcum. 'js. 6d. OLD-FRENCH. Libri Psal- morum Versio antiqua QaUica e Cod. ms. in Bibl. BodMana adseroato, una cum Versicme Metrica aliisque Monumentis pervetustis. Nunc primum descripsit et edidit Franciscus Michel, Phil. Doc. 8vo. los. 6d. ENGLISH. The Holy Bible in the Earliest English Versions, made from the Latin Vulgate by John Wycliffe and his followers : edited by Forshall and Madden. 4 vols. Royal 4to. zl. 3s. Also reprinted from the above, with Introduction and Glossary by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D. The Boohs of Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecdesiastes, and the Song of Solomon. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d. The Neio Testament. Extra fcap. 8vo. 6s. ENGLISH. The Holy Bible, Cheap Editions for School Use. Eevised Bible. Pearl i6mo, cloth boards, is. 6d. Revised New Testament. Non- pareil 32mo, 6d. ; Brevier i6mo, IS. ; Long Primer 8vo, is. 6d. * The Revised Version Is the Joint property of tha Universities of Oxford and Cambridge. The Oxford Bible for Teachers, containing supplementary Helps to the Study of the Bible, includ- ing summaries of the several Books, with copious explanatory notes ; and Tables illustrative of Scripture History and the characteristics of Bible Lands, with a complete Index of Subjects, a Concordance, a Dic- tionary of Proper Names, and a series of Maps. Prices in various sizes and bindings, from 3s. to 2I. 55. Helps to the Study of the Bible, taken from the Oxfcrrd Bible for Teachers. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d. The Psalter, or Psalms of David, and certain Canticles, with a Translation and Exposition in Eng- lish, by Richard RoUe of Hampole. Edited by H. R. Bramley, M.A. With an Introduction and Glos- sary. Demy 8vo. il. is. Studia Biblica et Eccle- siastica. Essays in Biblical and Patristic Criticism, and kindred subjects. By Members of the Uni- vei-sity of Oxford. Vol. I. 8vo. los. 6d. Vol. II. 8vo. I2S. (id. Vol. III. 8vo. i6s. London; Hekey Fbowde, Amen Comer, E.C. FATHERS OF THE CHURCH. ENGLISH. The Book of Wisdom : the Greek Text, the Latin Vulgate, andthe Authoriaed English Version ; with an Introduction, Critical Apparatus, and a Com- mentary. By W. J. Deane, M.A. 4to. I2S. 6d. GOTHIC. The Gospel of St. Mark in Gothic, according to the translation made by Wulfila in the Fourth Century. Edited, with a Grammatical Introduction and Glossarial Index, by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D. Extra foap. 8vo. 4s. 2. FATHERS OP THE CHURCH, ETC. St. Athanasius : Orations against the Arians. With an account of his Life by William Bright, D.D. Crown 8vo. gs. Historical Writings, ac- cording to the Benedictine Text. With an Introduction by W. Bright, D.D. Crown 8vo. los. 6d. St. Augustine : Select Anti- Pelagian Treatises, and the Acts of the Second Council of Orange. With an Introduction by William Bright, D.D. Crown 8vo. 9s. St. BasU: The Booh of St. Basil on the Holy Spirit. A Revised Text, with Notes and Introduction by C. F. H. Johnston, M.A. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Canons of the First Four General Councils of Nicaea, Constanti- nople, Ephesus, and Clialcedon. With Notes by W. Bright, D.D. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Catenae Graecorum Patrum in Novum Testamentum. Edidit J. A. Cramer, S.T.P. Tomi VIII. 8to. 2l. 4s. Clementis Alexandrini Opera, ex recensione Guil. Dindorjii. Tomi IV. 8vo. 3«. Cyrilli Archiepiscopi-Aleomn- drini in XII Praphetas. Edidit P. E. Pusey, A.M. Tomi II. 8vo. 2I. 2s. in D. Joannis Evan- gelium. Accedunt Pragmenta Varia necnon Tractatus ad Tiberium Dia- conum Duo. Edidit post Aubertum P. E. Pusey, A.M. Tomi III. 8to. 2l. Bs. Commentarii in Lucae Bvangelium quae supersunt Syriace. E mss. apud Mus. Britan. edidit R. Payne Smith, A.M. 4to. il. 2s. The same, translated by R. Payne Smith, M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. 14s. Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae Epi- scopi Edesseni, Balaei, aliorumque Opera Selecta. E Codd. Syriacis mss. in Museo Britannico et Bibliotheca Bodleiana asservatis primus edidit J. J. Overbeck. 8vo. il. is. Eusebii Pamphili Evangdicae Praeparationis Libri XY. Ad Codd. mss. recensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. Tomi IV. 8vo. \l. los. Evangelicae Demonstra- iionis Libri X. Recensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. TomilL 8vo. 15s. contra Hieroclem et Marcellum Libri. Recensuit T. Gais- ford, S.T.P. 8vo. 7s. Oxford : Clarendon Pi'cstj. ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY. Eusebius' Ecclesiastical His- tory, according to the text of Burton, with an Introduction by W. Bright, D.D. Crown 8to. 8s. 6d. Evagrii Historia Ecclesiastica, ex recensione H. Valesii. 8vo. 43. Irenaeus : The Third Book of St. Irenaeus, Bishop of Lyons, against Heresies. With short Notes and a Glossary by H.Deane,B.D. Crown 8vo. 5s. 6d. Origenis Philosophwmena ; sive omnium Haeresium Refutatio. E Codice Parisino nunc primum edi- dit Emmanuel Miller. 8vo los. Patrum Apostolicorum, S. de- mentis Eomani, S. Ignatii, S. Polycarpi, quae supersunt. Edidit Guil. Jacobson, S.T.P.R. Tomi II. Fourth Edition. 8vo. i;. IS. Reliquiae Saerae secundi ter- tiique saeeuli. Eecensuit M. J. Eouth, S.T.P. TomiV. Second Edition. 8vo. il. 5s. Scriptorum Ecclesiasticorum, Opu^cuJa. Eecensuit M. J. Routh, S.T.P. Tomi II. 8vo. los. Socrates' Ecclesiastical His- tory, according to the Text of Hussey, with an Introduction by William Bright, D.D. Crown 8vo. 7s. 6d. Sozomeni Historia Ecclesi- astica. Edidit R. Hussey, S.T.B. Tomi III. 8vo. 15s. Tertulliani Apologeticus ad- versus Gentespro Christianis. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by T. Herbert Bindley, M.A. Crown 8vo. 6s. Theodoreti EcclesiasticaeHis- toriae Libri V. Eecensuit T. Gaisford, S.T.P. 8vo. 7s. 6d. 3. ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, ETC. Baedae Historia Ecclesiastica. Edited, with English Notes, by G. H. Moberly, M.A. Crown 8vp. 10s. 6d. Bigg. The Christian Platonists of Alexandria; being the Bampton Lectures for 1886. By Charles Bigg, D.D. 8vo. 10s. 6d. Bingham's Antiquities of the Christian Church, and other Wm-ks. 10 vols. 8vo. $1. $s. Bright. Chapters of Early English Church History. By W. Bright, D.D. Second Edition. 8to. 12s. Burnet's History of the Refor- mation of the Church of England. A now Edition. Carefully revised, and the Records collated with the ori- ginals, by N. Poeock, M.A. 7 vols. 8vo. il. I OS. Cardwell's Documentary An- nals of the Reformed Church of England ; being a Collection of Injunctions, Declarations, Orders, Articles of Inquiry, etc. from 1546 to 1716. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 8s. Councils and Ecclesiastical Documents relating to Great Britain amd Ireland. Edited, after Spelman and Wilkins, by A. W. Haddan, B.D., and W. Stubbs, D.D. Vols. I and III. Medium 8vo, each il. is. Vol. II, Part I. Medium 8vo, I OS. 6d. Vol. II, Part II. Church of Ireland,- Memorials of St. Patrick. Stiff covers, 3s. 6d. London: Hekky Frowde, Amen Corner, E.G. ENGLISH THEOLOGY. Fuller's Church History of Britain. Edited by J. S. Brewer, M.A. 6 vols. 8vo. il. 19s. Gibson's Synodus Anglicana. Edited by E. Cardwell, D.D. 8to. 6s. Hamilton's (Archbishop John) Catechism, 1552. Edited, with In- troduction and Glossary, by Thomas Graves Law, Librarian of the Signet Library, Edinburgh. With a Pre- face by the Right Hon. W. E. Glad- stone. Demy 8vo. 1 2s. 6d. Hussey. Rise of the Papal Power, traced in three Lectures. By Robert Hussey, B.D. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 4s. 6d. John, Bishop of Ephesus. The Third Part of his Ecclesiastical IHstory. [In Syriac] Now first edited by William Cureton, M. A. 4to. il.i2s. The same, translated by R. Payne Smith, M.A. 8vo. los. Le Neve's Fasti Ecclesiae Anglicanae. Corrected and continued from 1715 to 1853 by T. Duffus Hardy. 3 vols. 8vo. li. is. Woelli (A.) Catechismus sive prima institutio disdplinaqiie Pietatis ChrisHanae Latine explicata. Editio novacuraGuil. Jacobson, A.M. 8vo. 5s. 6d. Becords of the Beformation. The IHvorce, 1527-1533. Mostly now for the first time printed from MSS. in the British Museum and other Libraries. Collected and arranged by N. Pocock, M.A. 2 vols. 8vo. 12. 1 6s. Beformatio Legum Ecclesias- ticarum. The Reformation of Eccle- siastical Laws, as attempted in the reigns of Henry VIII, Edward YI, and Elizabeth. Edited by E. Card- well, D.D. Svo. 6s. 6d. Shirley. Sor)ie A ccount of the Church in the Apostolic Age. By W. W. Shirley, D.D. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo. 3s. 6d, Stillingfleet's Origines Bri- tannicae, with Lloyd's Historical Account of Church Government. Edited by T. P. Pantin, M.A. 2 vols. Svo. 10s. Stubbs. Registrum Sacrum Anglicanum. An attempt to exhibit the course of Episcopal Succession in England. ByW. Stubbs, D.D, Small 4to. 8s. 6d. 4. ENGLISH THEOLOGY. Sradley. Lectures on the Book of Job. By George Granville Bradley, D.D., Dean of Westmin- ster. Crown Svo. ys. 6d. Lectures on Ecclesiastes. By G. G. Bradley, D.D., Dean of Westminster. Crown Svo. 4s. 6d. Bull's Works, with Nelson's Life. Edited by E. Burton, D.D, 8 vols. Svo. 2l. 9s. Burnet's Exposition of the XXXIX Articles. Svo. 7s. Butler's Works. 2 vols. 8vo. lis. Oxford ; Clarendon PresE. ENGLISH THEOLOGY. 1 Comber's Coinipanion to the Temple; or a Help to Devotion in the use of the Common Prayer. 7 vols. 8vo. iZ. IIS. 6d. Cranmer's Works. Collected and arranged by H. Jenkyns, M.A., Fellow of Oriel College. 4 vols. 8vo. il. I OS. Theologicum Unchiridion A nti-Romanum. Vol. I. Jeremy Taylor's Dissua- sive from Popery, and Treatise on the Heal Presence. 8vo. 8s. Vol. II. Barrow on the Suprem- acy of the Pope, with his Dis- course on the Unity of the Church. 8vo. ys. 6d. Vol. III. Tracts selected from Wake, Patrick, Stillingfleet, Clagett, and others. Svo. i is. Greswell's Harmonia Evan- gelica. Fifth Hdition, 8vo. gs. 6d. Hall's Works. Edited by P. Wynter, D.D. 10 vols. 8vo. il. 3s. Heurtley. Harmonia Sym- bolica : Creeds of the Western Church. By C. Heurtley, D.D. 8vo. 6s. 6d. Homilies appointed to be read in Churches. Edited by J. Griffiths, M.A. 8vo. 7s. 6d. Hooker's Works, with his Life by Walton, arranged by John Keble, M.A. Seventh Edition. Revised by E. W. Church, M.A., Dean of St. Paul's, and F. Paget, D.D. 3 vols. medium Svo. i!. i6s. the Text as arranged by J. Keble, M.A. 2 vols. Svo. lis. Jackson's (Dr. Thomas) TToi'Ais. 12 vols. Svo. 3?. 6s. Jewel's Works. Edited by K. W. Jelf, D.D. 8 vols. Svo. i?. los. Martineau. A Study of Re- ligion : Us Sources and Contents. By James Martineau, D.D. 2 vols. Crown Svo. 15s. Patrick's Theological Works. 9 vols. Svo, il. IS. Pearson's Exposition of the Creed, Eevised and corrected hy E. Burton, D.D. Sixth Edition. Svo. los. 6d. Minor Theological Works. Edited with a Memoir, by Edward Churton, M.A. 2 vols. Svo. los. Sanderson's Works. Edited by W. Jacobson, D.D. 6 vols. Svo. il. lOS. StilUngfleet's Origines Sacrae. 2 vols. Svo. 9s. Rational Account of the Ch'ounds of Protestant Religion ; being a vindication of Archbishop Laud's Relation of a Conference, etc, 2 vols. Svo. I OS. Wall's History of Infant Bap- tism. Edited by H. Cotton, D.C.L. 2 vols. Svo. il. IS. Waterland's Works, with Life, by Bp. Van Mildert. A new Edition, with copious Indexes, 6 vols, Svo. 2l. IIS. Review of the Doctrine of the Eucharist, with a Preface by the late Bishop of London. Crown Svo. 6s. 6d. London : Henry Fkowde, Amen Corner, E.C. LITURGIOLOGY. Wheatty's Illustration of the Book of Common Prayer. 8yo. 5s. Wyclif. A Catalogue of the Original Works of John Wydif. By W. W. Shirley, D.D. 8to. 3s. 6d. Wyclif. Select English Works. By T. Arnold, M.A. 3 vols. 8vo. ll. IS. Trialogus. With the Supplement now first edited. By Gotthard Lechler. 8vo. 7s. 5. LITURGIOLOGY. Cardwell's Two Books of Com- mon Prayer, set forth by authority in the Keign of King Edward VI, compared with each other. Third Edition. 8vo. 7s. • History of Conferences on the Book of Common Prayer from 1551 to 1690. Third Edition. 8vo. 7s. 6d. Hammond. Liturgies, Eastern and Western. Edited, with Intro- duction, Notes, and a Liturgical Glossary, by C. E. Hammond, M.A. Crown 8vo. 10s. 6d. An Appendix to the above, crown 8vo, paper covers, is. 6d. Helps to the Study of the Book of Common Prayer. Being a Companion to Church Worship. Crown 8vo. 3s. 6d, LeoMc Missal, The, as used in the Cathedral of Exeter during the Episcopate of its first Bishop, A.D. 1050-1072 ; together with some Account of the Eed Book of Derby, the Missal of Robert of Jumi^ges, and a few other early MS. Service Books of the s English Church. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by F.E.Warren, B.D., F.S.A. 4to, half-morocco, il. 15s. Maskell. Ancient Liturgy of the Church of England, according to the uses of Sarum, York, Hereford, and Bangor, and the Boman Liturgy arranged in parallel columns, with preface and notes. By W. Maskell, M.A. Third Edition. Svo. 15s. Monumenta Ritualia Ecclesiae Anglicanae. The occasional Offices of the Church of England according to the old use of Salisbury, the Prymer in English, and other prayers and forms, with disserta- tions and notes. Second! Edition. 3 vols. Svo. 2l. los. Warren. The Liturgy and Ritual of the Celtic Church. By F. E. Warren, B.D. 8vo. 14s. AT THE CLARENDON PRESS LONDON: HENRY FROWDE OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRF.SS WARKHOTTSF., 4Mg1sr CORNER, E.C.